Architectural Specs PDF

2B+G+1+30 Residential Building on Plot No.
61070244 Dafnah District, Doha, Qatar

Issue: FINAL, 24th July 2013
SECTION 05100 - ALUMINUM METAL WORKS
Table of contents
1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................. 2

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTATION .............................................................. 2
1.3 REFERENCES....................................................................................... 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................... 4
1.5 SUBMITTALS.......................................................................................... 5
1.6 WARRANTY............................................................................................ 6
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 6
1.8 PRICES INTEGRITY.............................................................................. 8
2.0 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................ 8
2.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................... 8

2.2 SURFACE TREATMENT ....................................................................... 10
3.0 EXECUTION ............................................................................................... 10
3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................... 10

3.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 10
3.3 METAL WORK INSTALLATION ............................................................. 12
3.4 POWDER COATING.............................................................................. 12
3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTION .................................................................... 13
3.6 USER’S MANUAL .................................................................................. 13
SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 1 of 14

2B+G+1+30 Residential Building on Plot No. 61070244 Dafnah District, Doha, Qatar
SECTION 05100 - ALUMINUM METAL WORKS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Provide fabricated metalwork, including anchorages, fixings, finishes, and trim,
including
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTATION:

1. Read this document in conjunction of :
a. DRAWINGS for locations and extent.
b. FIXTURES AND FITTINGS SCHEDULE for product selections.
c. Section 01000 “General Specifications”.
d. Section 05000 “Structural Steel Works”.
e. Section 07600 “Cladding”.
f. Section 08970 “Exterior Glazed Assemblies Windows And Entrances”.
g. Section 08980 “Glazing Particular Specification”.
h. Section 08815 “Internal Glazing”.
i. Specifications of other trade that require coordination with this trade.
1.3 REFERENCES
1. The standards referred herein, together with all appropriate references listed
within those Standards, shall be used within this Specification. The edition to be
used shall be that current at the date of this Specification, except that the latest
editions of standards may be used where no reduction in quality will result. Any
differences between their requirements and this Specification shall be submitted
to the Engineer for his ruling.
2. Where a Standard has been specified and equivalent internationally recognized
Standard, may be used subject to the Engineer’s approval.
3. British Standards (BS)
BS381C Colors for specific purposes
BS499 Welding terms and symbols, part 2: Specification for symbols
for welding
BS1133 Package Code Section 6 Temporary protection of metal
surfaces against corrosion (during transport and storage)
BS1470 Specification for wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys for
general engineering purposes: plate, sheet and strip
BS1474 Specification for wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys for
general engineering purposes: bars, extruded round tubes
and sections
BS1763 Thin PVC Sheeting ( calendared, flexible unsupported )
BS2569 Sprayed metal coatings
BS3643 ISO Metric screw threads, Part 1: Principles and basic data,
Part 2: Specification for selected limited of size
BS3712 Building and construction sealants. Methods of test for
seepage, staining, shrinkage, shelf life and paintability
BS4190 ISO Metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts

BS4229 Metric sizes of non-ferrous and ferrous bars, Part 2: ferrous

bars
BS4232 Metal washers for general engineering
BS4320 Metal washers for general Engineering purposes
BS4360 Wieldable structural steels
BS4395 High strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and
washers for structural Engineering, Part 1: General grade
BS4604 The use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural
steelwork, Part 1: General grade
BS4620 Rivets for general engineering purposes
BS4872 Approval testing of welders when welding procedure
approval is not required, Part 1: Fusion welding of steel
BS4921 Approval testing of welders when welding procedure
approval is not required, Part 1: Fusion welding of steel
BS4933 ISO Metric black cup and countersunk head bolts and screws
with hexagon nuts ( obsolete but remains current )
BS5135 Arc welding of carbon and manganese steel
BS5289 Visual inspection of fusion welded joints
BS5378 Specification for safety colour and safety signs
BS5400 Steel, concrete and composite bridge, Part 10: Code of
practice for fatigue
BS5950 Structural use of steelwork in buildings
BS6037 Permanently installed suspended access equipment
BS6072 Method for magnetic particles flaw detection
BS6375 Performance of windows and doors. Classification for
weathertightness and guidance on selection and
specification
BS6443 Method for penetrant flaw detection
BS6722 Recommendation for dimensions of metallic materials
BSEN278 Approval testing of welders for fusion welding
BSEN288 Approval of welding procedures for metallic materials
BSEN449 Welding consumables – covered electrodes for manual metal
arc welding of non alloy and fine grain steels – classification
BSEN1435 Non- destructive test examination of welds – Radiographic
examination of weld joints
BSEN1714 No-destructive examination of joints – Ultrasonic examination
of welded joints
BSEN10045 Charpy impact test on metallic materials
BSEN10204 Metallic products. Types of inspection documents
BSEN22553 Welded, brazed and soldered joints- symbolic representation
on drawings.
4. ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)
AA DAF-45 (1997) Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
5. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI A14.3 (1992) Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements ANSI MH28.1 (1982)
Design, Testing, Utilization, and Application of Industrial
Grade Steel Shelving
6. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM B 221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM B221M Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles, and Tubes (Metric)
ASTM B 26/B 26M Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings
ASTM B 429 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube
ASTM D 2047 Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces
as Measured by the James Machine
ASTM E 814 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
ASTM F 1267 Metal, Expanded, Steel
7. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)
ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
8. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS D1.1/D1.1M Structural Welding Code
9. Steel NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL
MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)
NAAMM MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual
NAAMM MBG 532 Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual
10. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 10 (1998; Errata 10-98-1) Portable Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 211 (2000) Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning
Appliances
11. National Structural Steelwork Specification for Building Construction
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
CID A-A-344 (Rev B) Lacquer, Clear Gloss, Exterior, Interior
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Give sufficient notice so the Engineer may inspect significant stages of work,
including:
a. Products delivered to site, before installation.
b. Substrates prepared and ready for installation.
c. Set-out of work, before installation.
d. Work to be covered over, before covering.
e. Surface preparation before coating / painting.
2. Samples: as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Include samples for:
a. Protective and decorative coatings.
b. Metal sections, profiles and extrusions.
c. Hardware and accessories.
d. Trims and sealants.
e. Anchorages, brackets and fixings.

3. First completed example: First completed examples shall include typical

fabrication types, junctions, screwed and bolted connections, concealed and
exposed fixings, welded connections, grinding and smoothing metal surfaces
after cutting and welding.
4. Inspection and Test Plan: as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
5. All sizes such as oversize, cutting sizes, glass sizes should be established on the
sole responsibility of the fabricator. In all cases involving abnormal stresses it is
necessary to document details, attachments etc. in the form of drawings and to
carry out structural calculations for stressed profiles and anchors and to have
these checked and approved by the Engineer.
6. Hold points:
a. Submission of Control Samples for approval.
b. Submission of shop drawings for approval.
c. Acceptance of substrate conditions.
d. First completed example of installed work on-site.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Information: Include Product Information for:
b. Metal sections, profiles and extrusions.
c. Hardware and accessories.
d. Trims and sealants.
2. Shop drawings : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
a. Submit shop drawings to demonstrate construction details, set-out, and
performance requirements, if directed. Indicate:
• Metal / alloy types.
• Hardware and accessories.
• Trims and sealants.
• Anchorages, brackets and fixings.
• Types and locations of applied coatings.
b. The drawings of aluminum work give general indications of the requirements
only and the Contractor may suggest arrangements best suited to his
available materials and methods of fabrication provided the requirements of
the following are adhered to.
c. The Contractor shall furnish all shop and erection drawings as required by
the Conditions of Contract. Required shop drawings shall include full scale
sections and details. No work shall be commenced until the pertinent
drawings have been approved by the Engineer.
3. Samples:
a. The Contractor shall submit sample sections 200mm long of all proposed
extruded sections.
b. Samples shall include corner joint and glazing jacket, where applicable.
c. No work shall be commenced until the Engineer’s approval of the sample is
obtained.
4. Computations:

a. Submit computations to demonstrate structural sufficiency, safety and

performance, if directed.
b. Include computations stating loads and sizes for:
• Framing, anchorages and fixings supported from base-structure.
• Verification that imposed loads do not exceed the capacity of the base-
structure.
1.6 WARRANTY
1. Provide an approved warranty from Practical Completion for a warranty period of
5-years.
2. Two copies of the manufacturer's test certificates verifying that the materials
comply with the Specification shall be given by the Contractor to the Engineer for
approval, for all structural, electrodes, bolt and rivet steel. In the case of structural
steel such certificates shall comply with BS 4360 Clause 1.34.1 or 1.34.2 and
shall include a chemical analysis.
3. Material shall be free from rust, scale and pitting and true to thickness and free
from twist.
4. All sections are to be within a rolling margin of 2.5% over to 2.5% under the
specified or calculated weight and thickness. Where the actual weight is less than
that specified or calculated the material shall be liable to rejection.
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. The installed work, including fixings and framing, shall accommodate all
permanent and temporary loads, individually and in combination, without failure,
deflection, damage to adjacent or applied work, or risk to human safety. Comply
with the relevant Standards.
2. Loads can include, but not limited, what is listed herein.
3. Wind Loads: The design wind load should be calculated by reference to C.P. 3:
Chapter V: Part-2. The maximum wind speed to be allowed for in calculations is
150 km/hr.
4. Live Loads: If with a window casement open, a transom can be subjected to load
by persons leaning out, the necessary additional vertical load should be taken
into account. In the case of infillings of room height, the vertical live loads due to
persons pressing against the transom or mullion from inside, should be taken into
account.
5. Special Loads: In the case of special loads, such as sunblind systems, scaffold
anchors, advertising equipment etc., these should be taken into account in
structural calculations.
6. Flexure: The flexure determined for transoms and mullions must be taken into
consideration. In the case of other requirements being applicable, particularly as
a result of the use of special double glazing panes, the specifications of the
corresponding double glazing manufacturers should be noted for determining
permissible flexure
7. All work when finished must be plumb and true and free from twists, bends,
indentations and open joints between component parts. Work shall be securely
anchored to the collateral construction.
8. All units shall be reinforced to receive ironmongery. All doors shall be reinforced
for door closures whether or not indicated or specified to be supplied.
9. The Contractor shall do all drilling, cutting and fitting as may be required for the
installation of the work.

10. All units shall be arranged for glazing with the types and thickness of glass
required.
11. Workmanship
a. All sections shall be properly fitted together with reinforced screwed joints.
Glazing beads shall be assembled in integral frames with mitered corners
finished smooth.
b. All frame and sash members to aluminum windows, doors, etc., shall be
assembled in a secure and workmanlike manner and shall be delivered to the
site ready for erection. Junctions of sills and jambs, stiles and rails shall be
made with permanently watertight joints.
c. Field fastenings shall be made with aluminum machine screws or aluminum
nuts and bolts. Where concealed fastenings are not possible, countersunk
“Philips” head exposed screws shall be used to match the color of the
aluminum. The anchoring screws shall be minimum of 100mm in length.
d. Door stiles and rails shall be securely joined and reinforced by means of die
cast structural corner assemblies. Door corners shall be able to withstand a
minimum of 2000 lb. Tension without noticeable deformation. Doors shall fit
frames accurately.
e. One meeting stile in each pair of doors shall incorporate a woven pile metal
backed weather-strip from top to bottom.
f. An adjustable blocking angle in each door shall be provided to allow minor
clearance after installation.
g. All cut-out operations for ironmongery preparation shall be accurately made
and reinforced as required.
h. Provide all necessary steel reinforcement and structural supports required for
the rigid support of the aluminum members
i. Ensure easy operation of all fittings without exerting undue force. Satisfactory
function of the safety devices and turntilt safety locks
j. Thermal Performance: The resultant effects of structural elements on the
indoor climate must be specially taken into account, particularly as regards
the type and arrangement of the air-conditioning, wall surfaces and the solar
radiation involved. The requirement of the Employer should be reconciled
with the economical and technical aspects of window construction.
k. Moisture and Air Penetration:
• If there is any risk of occurrence of water in the room interior, water
drainage should be provided. Drainage measures should be subject to
agreement. In the case of outside wall cladding, girders, posts, panels
etc., attention should be paid to the specified insulation and prevention of
thermal bridges.
• Opening light windows should be comply with B.S. 6375 Class IV. They
should give air flow rates of 6.5M3/hr per meter length of joint at a test
pressure of 600 Pa.
• The rate of air infiltration to the interior through the portions of fixed
curtain walls and associated closures should not exceed 1.2M3/hour at a
positive differential pressure of 300 Pa.
• Laboratory tests for air infiltration shall comply with ASTM, E 283 and
field test with ASTM E 83.
• Laboratory tests for water penetration shall comply with ASTM, E 331
and field tests with AAME 501.2.

• Equivalent tests as per B.S., DIN, or other international standards shall

be acceptable and shall be included in the scope of work of the
contractor.
12. Ensure easy operation of all fittings without exerting undue force. Satisfactory
function of the safety devices and turntilt safety locks.
1.8 PRICES INTEGRITY:

1. The Contractor shall include for all horizontal raking or vertical work, cutting
members to length, all shop and site welding, grinding, drilling counter sinking,
bolting riveting, assembling and erecting of defects, adjusting and fixing in
position etc. detailed shop drawings, samples, tests analysis certificates.
2. The Contractor shall, when pricing the works covered by the requirements of the
above section, take into account, carefully consider, allow and include for all
stipulations, conditions and provisions detailed in the “PRELIMINARIES” as well
as those also outlined in the preceding and the following sections of the
Specifications.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Aluminum windows and doors shall be manufactured of extruded sections of
aluminum alloy as indicated on the drawings flush welded.
2. Aluminum shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1470 for plate sheet and
strip and with B.S. 1474 for bars, extruded round tubes and sections, grade 6063
(HEQ TF). Stress induced in aluminum framing members and their fixings should
not exceed the values in C.P. 118. Different materials and shapes (profiles, sheet
and strip) should be matched to one another according to the appearance
required. Checking for dimensional accuracy, surface finish and distortion should
be carried out before cutting to size.
3. Samples shall be furnished to be representative of the materials and finish to be
supplied and the finished manufactured units shall be equal to the approved
samples.
4. Sections shall present clean, straight sharply defined lines and shall be free from
defects impairing strength, durability and appearance.
5. Provision shall be made in the design of the windows, doors, etc., to receive the
caulking specified which shall be applied around all external units around external
faces exposed to the weather and elsewhere as required, and for the passing of
the handle for gear control of sunbreakers where required.
6. Steel components where required for load bearing structural elements and
anchor structures will be covered by B.S.5950. All steel components which will no
longer be accessible after installation should zinc coated. Permissible processes
are hot zinc coating and flame spray zinc coating. The welds of zinc coated
structures should be treated afterwards with cold zinc. Damage to the corrosion
protection of steel components incurred during installation should be touched up
after basic assembly has been carried out. All structural steelwork shall comply
with the requirements of the National Structural Steelwork Specification for
Building Construction, publication No. 1/89 dated March 1989.
7. Glazing Gaskets:
a. The Contractor shall provide glazing gaskets for all panels to be glazed which
shall be a factory fabricated extruded neoprene closure of similar color to the

aluminum. Its thickness shall be greater than the designed space to ensure
pressure seal, and it shall come to within the sight line on the outside.
b. Gaskets sealing the joints between mullions and transoms should be sized so
as to resist, without failure, linear movement induced by thermal effects,
particularly in those systems where the bars are not mechanically fixed.
c. The gasket profiles used must be one with thermoplastic abrasion resistance
and their elastic properties, including resilience, must to a large extent be
retained in the temperature range occurring.
d. Gasket profiles must be resistant to normal atmospheric influences
8. Sealants: sealants must be plastic or permanently elastic according to the stress
involved. Their other properties must be in keeping with the application involved,
as per B.S. 3712 in respect of all requirements occurring in each individual case.
9. Insulation of Dissimilar Materials
a. To prevent contact, install a layer of asphalt saturated fabric or felt embedded
in an approved plastic roofing cement, between ferrous and non-ferrous
metals. Paint non-ferrous metal in contact with or buried in wood, masonry or
any insulating material, with one heavy coat of an approved bitumastic coat.
10. Fastening components such as screws, pins, rivets etc. must be adequately
corrosion proofed.
a. In combination with aluminium, they must consist of stainless steel.
b. In the case of components subjected to low stress, aluminium can also be
used.
c. For special climatic or other environmental conditions, special precautions
should be taken by the fabricator on his own responsibility
11. Fittings and associated components must be adequately dimensioned for the
loads anticipated. The fittings themselves must be selected by the fabricating
plant in keeping with the stress normally anticipated
12. Caulking: Joints to receive culling shall be free of all dust and other loose material
to a depth of 20mm. Caulking compound shall be a two part Polysulfide rubber
(Thiokol Base) of approved color. The preparation of the surfaces, including the
use of a primer, the mixing of the material and its application shall be done in
strict accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Depth of
caulking in a joint shall be not less than ½ the width of the joint but not less than
7mm.
13. Windows
a. Unless otherwise shown, all window opening lights shall be top hung opening
outwards and hung on solid aluminum hinges with stainless steel pins and
washers.
b. Continuous neoprene double weather stripping shall be supplied all round the
frame of windows and the opening lights.
c. Handles and friction stays shall be provided of polished aluminum and shall
be of strong design to ensure that the window can be tightly closed.
14. In case different materials come in contact, it is Contractors responsibility to
ensure that no corrosion or any other undesirable reaction can occur. It is
particularly important to ensure that changes due to thermal stresses do not
cause any undesirable noise or deteriorate the function of the structure

2.2 SURFACE TREATMENT

1. All components must be surface treated to provide protection against any
normally anticipated influences. The fabrication plant should determine which
surface treatment is suitable on its own responsibility.
2. The Sub-contractor must assume liability for profiles, fittings and accessories
anodized or color coated; this applies particularly to joining thermally broken
profiles.
3. Powder Coating:
a. All components shall be chemically procreated with a conversion coating; and
shall include a zinc chromate coat (Aluminum) or a Phosphate coat (Steel).
The conversion coating shall conform with ASTM D 1730-67, Method 7
(Amorphous Chromium Phosphate) or Method 5 (Amorphous Chromate).
b. The Polyester, or Epoxy, Powder coat will be factory applied, by Electrostatic
spraying to a dry film thickness of 60-80 microns. Oven curing shall be for a
minimum of 10 minutes at a metal temperature of 190 degree C.
c. Application of the coating shall conform with the guidelines laid down in
“AAMA 605.2 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings
on Architectural Extrusions and Panels”.
4. Composition: Polyester Powder Coatings shall consist essentially of a Polyester
resin, a curing agent and the appropriate light and heat-resisting pigments.
5. Processing: Electrostatic spraying of the powder accounts for the powder film on
a metallic substrate. Subjected to heat to melt the powder and form a continuous
film and a fully cured coatings.
6. Application: Due to outstanding weather resistance, the grades are especially
suited for outdoor use. It should also be suitable for indoors if the coated object is
exposed to ultraviolet light.
7. RANGE: The range comprises shades to the RAL colour card. Grades are
available in high gloss (G) with approximately 80-100% gloss and satin gloss (S)
with approximately 60-80% gloss.
8. over spraying: After toughening and possibly preheating, a second coat can be
applied. This ought to be done with due care, the intercoat adhesion being
sometimes less than optimal. A tow component polyurethane wet paint may be
used for touching up.
9. MATERIAL:
a. Supply form : fine powder, grain size less than 100 microns.
b. Solid content : 100%
c. Special weight : 1, 3-1. 6kg/litre
d. Shelf life : at least 6 months in dry air and at temperatures not
exceeding 250C.
e.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1. Do not commence installation unless conditions and substrates are suitable.
3.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

1. The designs supplied shall be in keeping with the state of the art.
2. Profiles: Supply only profile system with test certificates where necessary from
recognized testing institutes. Selection of the profile systems to be used should
be made by the fabricating plant; taking into account anticipated requirements,

such as: window size, type of opening, type fittings, window installation height,
reliability, safety of operation and cleaning, sound reduction properties, glass
thickness, glazing type etc. The profile dimensions of frame, casement, transom
and mullion should be determined in accordance with the structural analysis
tables for profiles and fittings. Cavity profiles should be used in all cases for inner
and outer frames.
3. Corner, T, butt and angle joints of components by welding, screw/bonding,
expanding pin/bonding and press bonding, should be affected in accordance with
the appropriate regulations. A cold setting two component adhesive should be
used for bonding purposes. The joints must possess adequate strength, rigidity
and impermeability over the entire profile cross section
4. Sealing: The casement gasket should be located outside the weathering zone
and lie in one plane all round. The gasket profiles must be inter-changeable and
impermeable at the corners.
5. Aluminum extrusions shall be in accordance with B.S. 8200 and B.S.C.P. 118
shapes and sizes shall be as required to fulfill the design requirements, but not
less than 3mm thick unless otherwise shown or directed by the Engineer.
Suitable alloy and proper temper for extruding and fabricating with adequate
structural characteristics and suitable for finishing as specified
6. In vicinity of structurally necessary joints provision should be made for noise free
movement and slip with additional polyfor brushes or neoprene gaskets. In the
case of profiles and components joined or screwed strips or interlays should be
provided to prevent leakage, expansion noise and contact corrosion
7. Thermal Stresses: The resultant effects of structural elements on the indoor
climate must be specially taken into account, particularly as regards the type and
arrangement of the air-conditioning, wall surfaces and the solar radiation
involved. The requirement of the Employer should be reconciled with the
economical and technical aspects of window construction
8. Moisture Insulation:
a. Drainage System should be provided in all cases. Drainage of any water
which has penetrated must also be ensured under the conditions specified in
related trade specification. All openings and gaps occurring (i.e. holes, corner
cleat, notches etc.) in the frame must be sealed particularly in the bottom
horizontal, even if the profile cavity is not intentionally being used for
controlled water drainage. Provision should be made to ensure water
permeability at mitres, butt joints and intersection points of the structure.
b. If there is any risk of occurrence of water in the room interior, water drainage
should be provided. Drainage measures should be subject to agreement. In
the case of outside wall cladding, girders, posts, panels etc., attention should
be paid to the specified insulation and prevention of thermal bridges.
c. Laboratory tests for water penetration shall comply with ASTM, E 331 and
field tests with AAME 501.2.
d. Equivalent tests as per B.S., ASTM or other international standards shall be
acceptable and shall be included in the scope of work of the contractor.
9. Air Infiltration:
a. Opening light windows should be comply with B.S. 6375 Class IV. They
should give air flow rates of 6.5M3/hr per meter length of joint at a test
pressure of 600 Pa.
b. The rate of air infiltration to the interior through the portions of fixed curtain
walls and associated closures should not exceed 1.2M3/hour at a positive
differential pressure of 300 Pa.
c. Laboratory tests for air infiltration shall comply with ASTM, E 283 and field
test with ASTM E 83.

3.3 METAL WORK INSTALLATION

1. Install metalwork plumb, level and true to line within required tolerances, and
suitably anchored to the base-structure.
2. Install proprietary metalwork in accordance with the Product Information and the
approved shop drawings.
3. Set out the work in accordance with approved (set out) shop drawings, or if
directed, make a trial set-out for each area and obtain approval before
commencing installation. Bearing surfaces in permanent contact shall be cleaned
before installation.
4. Site modification: Obtain approval for site modifications and correction of
fabrication errors before commencing. Unless otherwise approved, work shall be
dismantled and approved modifications shall be carried out at the factory, then re-
installed. Do not use gas-cutting equipment on site without written approval.
3.4 POWDER COATING

1. PRELIMINARY INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENTS
The Main Contractor shall:
1. Be responsible for the fabrication/coating of the powder coated objects

and related components/accessories shown on the drawings, in order to
meet the requirements of the performance specification.
2. Be responsible for the final selection of the powder material, the coating
thickness and type in accordance with the specified standards detailed
herein.
3. Ensure that the coating meets the standards specified herein and has
been independently inspected and certified.
4. Ensure that all materials, components, systems, methods of installation,
etc. meet the performance criteria specified herein.
5. Ensure that the powder coating is applied by a specialized and approved
Applicator and that the application method is carried out in compliance
with the Manufacturer Recommended Process and Process Control
Requirements.
6. Provide required documents as specified herein.
2. THE POWDER COATING

The powder coating to be used is heat reflective, Super Durable, polyester TGIC
or TGIC-free manufactured by Approved Manufacturer. The raw materials used
in the manufacturing of the powder coating should provide uniform flow and
finish, excellent weathering and corrosion resistance in line with AAMA 2604
standard.
The powder coating colour should have a Total Solar Reflectance TSR ≥ 0.25 as
per ASTM C 1549.
3. PRODUCT WARRANTY
The Contractor shall provide a 25-year back-to-back warranty from the Applicator
and the Manufacturer.
4. APPEARANCE

All visible coated surfaces shall be free from blisters, craters, pinholes or
scratches when observed by normal or corrected vision from a distance of 1
meter.
The quality of the powder coating must provide weathering properties, in line with
AAMA 2604. The quality of the powder coating must be Qualicoat Class 2
approved.
1. Coating Thickness
The powder coating shall provide a continuous film thickness on all
specified surfaces by:
a. Minimum 60 micron on Aluminum
b. Maximum coating thickness should not exceed 120 micron
2. Application procedure
The application of the powder material shall be in conformity with all
relevant requirements, restrictions and recommendations of the
Manufacturer Recommended Process and Process Control
Requirements.
3. Laboratory test data

The Contractor should submit the test data relevant to the following:
a. Sample off-cuts of the coated object (aluminum extrusion or

sheet)
Description Norm Requirements
Colour assessment Visual Match to colour standard panel.
Gloss EN ISO 2813 (60°) As per specification in the

relevant Product Data Sheet.
Film thickness EN ISO 2360 Minimum 60 micron.
Adhesion EN ISO 2409 (2 mm) Passes cross-cut rating Gt0

(100 % adhesion).
Film hardness EN ISO 2815 Passes indentation resistance

according to Buchholtz: >80.
MEK cure test N/A Minor attack on the coating after

30 double rubs with an ear
swab soaked in Methyl Ethyl
Kethon (MEK).
Salt spray resistance ASTM B 117 No blistering. Maximum 1 mm

corrosion creep from scratch
after 3000 hours.
Resistance to humid DIN 50017 No blistering. Maximum 1 mm

atmospheres corrosion creep from scratch
after 3000 hours.
b. Sample panels 0.8 mm (AA 5005 H24 or H14) coated at the

same time as the coated object and in the same oven:

Description Norm Requirements
Colour assessment Visual Match to colour standard panel
Gloss EN ISO 2813 (60°) As per specifications in the

relevant Product Data Sheet.
Film thickness EN ISO 2360 60 to 80 micron.
Impact resistance ASTM D 2794 (5/8” Passes 2.5 Nm without

ball) detachment after tape pull test
according to the Qualicoat
Class 2 test requirements.
Cupping test (relevant EN ISO 1520 Passes 5 mm cylindrical

for test panels only Mandrel bend test without
with a film thickness of detachment after tape pull test
60 to 80 micron) according to the Qualicoat
Class 2 test requirements.
Film hardness EN ISO 2815 Passes indentation resistance

according to Buchholtz: >80.
5. Actual weathering Test

The Applicator shall provide a document stating that the Super Durable
powder coating meets the requirements of Florida test for 3-year at 5
degrees angle and 5-year at 45 degrees angle, in compliance with
Qualicoat Class 2.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

1. Maintaining the works clean thought out the installation is Contractor
responsibility
2. The ENGINEER may direct installation areas to be cleaned at any time
3. Hand over the works sound and clean to the acceptance of the ENGINEER
4. Protect installed work to prevent damage during subsequent building work and or
weather conditions
5. Protect adjacent work during installation.
6. Use protective coverings where required.
3.6 USER’S MANUAL

1. Submit a User’s Manual for the work of this trade with records and details of
materials used and sources of supply, cleaning and repair procedures. Include a
detailed and accurate record of all coating products, including primers and
undercoats, and details of color formulations, gloss levels, retail outlets, and
wholesale price lists, for long-term maintenance and color matching.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................... 4
DIVISION 05 – METALS
SECTION 05521 Pipe And Tube Railings Page 1 of 4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel pipe railings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL AND IRON

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel
products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less
than 25 percent.
B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: Provide the following:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 2
C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior
and exterior applications.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
D. Form changes in direction by bending.
E. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces.
F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.
H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and
levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after
fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further
cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of
steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
B. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular space.
D. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction.
E. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 06 40 00 – ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ...................................................................................................... 2
1.2 REFERENCES................................................................................................................. 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................. 2
1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE ............................................................................ 3
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 4
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ........................................................................................................ 4
2.2 MATERIALS ..................................................................................................................... 4
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................... 7
3.1 EXAMINATION ................................................................................................................ 7
3.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................................ 7
3.3 KITCHEN CABINETS ...................................................................................................... 8
3.4 UNDER VANITY CABINETS ........................................................................................... 9
3.5 WARDROBES................................................................................................................ 10
DIVISION 06 – Wood, Plastic & Composites

SECTION 06 04 00 – Architectural Woodwork Page 1 of 11
SECTION 06 40 00 – ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section includes specifications for fabricate, supply, install, and commission
the joinery works intended for use in the Works in accordance with drawings.
The architectural woodwork include but not limited to wardrobes, kitchen
cabinets and under vanity counters addition to all necessary hardware,
accessories and fittings as directed by the Engineer and as detailed on the
drawings
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI A135.4 (1995) - Basic

Hardboard, ANSI A208.1 (1993) Wood Particleboard
B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): BHMA A156.9 (1994) -

Cabinet Hardware (BHMA 201)
C. Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (HPVA): HPVA HP-1 (1994) -

Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
D. Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (KCMA): KCMA A161.1 (1995)

Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA LD 3 (1995)

High-Pressure Decorative Laminates, NEMA LD 3.1 (1995) - Application,
Fabrication, and Installation of High-Pressure Decorative Laminates
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications for materials, fabrication and

installation instructions. Include certified test reports showing compliance with
project requirements where test methods are indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show complete fabrication and installation details on shop

drawings scaled 1:50/25/10 as required. Include:
1. Elevations and sections.
2. Materials and thicknesses of carcasses, doors, divisions, shelves and
benches.
3. Relationship to adjacent work.
4. Plumbing fixtures and fittings, pipe-work and taps, incorporated in the
work. Coordinate with the relevant contractor.
5. Equipment and white-goods, incorporated in the work.
6. Electrical fixtures, fittings, incorporated in the work. Coordinate with the
relevant contractor.
A. Inspection:
1. Inspection shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer; however, the
Contractor must give sufficient notice for inspection at the following stages
of work:
a. Fabricated assemblies at the factory, before delivery.
b. Products delivered to site, before installation.
c. Substrates prepared and ready for installation.
d. Set-out of work, before installation.
e. Work to be covered over, before covering.

B. Samples:
1. Submit samples products, finishes and fabrication, as directed by the
Engineer. Samples may include for:
b. Timber sections and surfaces visible in the completed work.
c. Typical fabrication details, edge trims, junctions & fixing.
d. Hardware and accessories.
f. Complete sample including all finishes & fabrication works.
2. No work shall be commenced until the Engineer’s approval of the samples
is obtained
1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE
A. Protect the product during delivery, handling and storage from weather, damage
or staining with suitable packing or wrapping.
B. Store clear of ground, concrete or damp surfaces on suitable packers spaced to

prevent distortion.
C. Properly identify the products on packing and wrapping.
D. Stabilize moisture content of absorptive materials before installation where

practicable.
A. Loads:
permanent and temporary loads, individually and in combination, without
failure, deflection, damage to adjacent or applied work, or risk to human
safety.
B. Movements:
short and long-term movements and deflections in the base-structure,
substrates to which the work is fixed, and within the work, including
thermal movements, without failure or the transfer of loads from the base-
structure to the work of this trade.
C. Fixing to Concrete:
1. Fixing into concrete shall be to the required depth without clash with in-
situ concrete reinforcement. Where drilling clashes with reinforcement,
repair empty holes with suitable cementitious grout and rectify to match
adjacent work.
D. Dimensional Stability:
1. The installed work shall have adequate dimensional stability for the
ambient installed conditions, and shall not expand, shrink, warp or
change shape in a manner which will detract from appearance,
performance and durability of the work, or damage adjacent or applied
work, and shall not change in dimensions exceeding the provision for
movement in control joints.
E. Single Lengths:
1. Where practicable, timber members and boards shall be in the longest
lengths commercially available from the supplier, without joins or short
lengths.

F. Services Networks:
1. Build-in, cover and conceal reticulated services passing through the
work: coordinate with relevant services trades, and construct suitable
openings and passages for the unrestricted installation of services by the
relevant services trade. Ensure suitable access for later maintenance or
replacement.
2. Services and access-hatches in fire-rated or acoustic-rated elements
shall be constructed and sealed to maintain the integrity of the elements.
G. Secondary Framing and Bracing:

1. Provide sufficient additional framing and bracing to ensure the work is
rigid and safe under all loading conditions, including later applied work by
other trades, and at openings, terminations and junctions. Additional
framing and bracing shall be integrated with the work and concealed.
2. Coordinate with related trades as required, and verify types and loads of
applied work. Coordinate with MEP services and obtain relevant
templates and Product Information for framing and openings for plumbing
fixtures and tap-ware. Internal applied work may include plumbing
fixtures and fittings, shelving, lighting, equipment and signage.
3. Additional framing may include double studs, nogging, backing, blocking
and trimming.
H. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Fabrication tolerances shall be as per the relevant standards.
I. Installation Tolerances:
1. Fabrication tolerances shall be as per the relevant standards. Installation
tolerances shall not be cumulative and shall not include the base-
structure or fabrication tolerance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: To be specified
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Timber:
1. Generally:
a. Timber shall be of the best practicable quality, in accordance with the
relevant Standards. Timber shall be of an approved variety and
quality suitable for the purpose for which it is to be used and equal to
samples approved by the Engineer. Submit Product Information and
Control Samples, including certificates of origin, and test reports for
grading and moisture content.
b. Timber shall be straight grained, well seasoned, planed square,
sound and free from defects which may affect load carrying capacity,
durability or appearance where finished work is visible. Defects may
include:
c. Insect damage or infestation.
• Sap or gum veins, shakes, soft pith.
• Knots of any description in surfaces for staining or polishing.
• Knots of any description in glazing bars.
• Knots exceeding one half the width of the surface.
• Knots exceeding 20mm mean in diameter.
• Decayed or dead knots unless cut out and plugged.

• Loose knots or knotholes unless cut out and plugged.

• Warp, twist, decay, pith, holes, splits, fractures, sapwood or
bruises.
• Checks exceeding (300 mm in length, or 6 mm in width or one
quarter of the timber thickness in depth
d. In jointed panels each piece shall be of the same species. Joinery for
staining or polishing shall have all surfaces of the same species and
same character of grain running in the same direction.
e. All plugs inserted after cutting out defects shall be the full depth of
the hole and the grain of the plug shall run in the same direction as
the grain of the piece.
f. Timber connectors where used shall be two single-sided toothed
plates (round or square) for demountable joints or one double sided
toothed plate (round or square) for permanent joints to conform with
B.S. 1579 latest edition.
g. Timber shall be sawn square to the required sizes in longest
practicable lengths. Timber for joinery, trim and moldings shall be
selected kiln dried hardwood (KDHW) unless otherwise indicated
2. Moisture content:
a. The equilibrium moisture content (EMC) of seasoned timber shall be
12% nominal +/- 3% unless otherwise indicated, or unless otherwise
required for the species and installation conditions, in accordance
with the relevant Standards. There shall be not more than 3%
difference between any two items in any one batch delivered to site.
b. Where practicable and where the ambient humidity of the installation
area has been achieved, unwrap and store timber in the installation
area to condition timber to the ambient humidity before installation.
c. Make adjustments to installation procedures to minimize shrinking or
expansion of timber due to changes between moisture content of
timber at time of installation and due to anticipated in-service
humidity of installation area.
3. Appearance:
a. Visible timber surfaces and edges in the installed location shall be
clean and free of blemishes, marks and pressure indentations from
handling equipment, conveyors, fork lifts and slings.
b. Visible timber surfaces and edges shall be selected, machined and
coated to reveal the natural appearance of the grain.
4. Durability
a. Select timber species with natural durability appropriate to the
conditions, or use suitable approved preservative treatment in
accordance with the relevant Standards. Submit manufacturer’s
certificate for preservative treated timber to verify that treatment has
been carried out to the appropriate class for its intended service
condition. Preservative treated timber shall be marked with the class
of treatment.
B. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF):

MDF shall comply with the relevant standards.
Apply moisture-resistant sealer to visible surfaces and cut edges.
MDF in wet area locations or subject to wetting or humidity shall be

moisture-resistant grade.
Use moisture resistant grade where there is any risk of water or moisture
damage.

C. Plywood:
1. Plywood shall consist of an odd number of plies arranged so that the
grain of each layer is at right angles to the grain of the adjacent layer or
layers. The plies shall be hot pressed during adhesion and shall have a
finished thickness as shown on the Drawings, or shall be pre-finished
plywood obtained from an approved supplier.
2. In the case of plywood having 3 plies the core shall be not more than 60
percent of the total thickness. In plywood having more than 3 plies the
faces and all plies with the grain running in the same direction as the
faces shall have a combined thickness of between 40 percent and 65
percent of the total thickness of the plywood.
3. The plywood shall be free from end joints (including scarf-joints in

veneers), overlaps in core veneers, dead knots, patches and plugs, open
defects, depressions due to defects in core, insect attack (except isolated
pinworm holes through face veneers only), fungal attack and from
discoloration differing from that normally associated with species.
4. The Contractor will not be allowed to make up thickness by gluing or

otherwise fixing together sheets of thinner previously formed plywood.
5. All plywood shall be of Exterior Grade and shall conform to the applicable
requirements of BS 6566: Part 1-8, "Plywood" latest edition.
D. Veneer:
1. Timber for face veneer shall generally be first grade hardwood obtained
from an approved supplier.
2. Unless otherwise indicated or required, minimum thickness of timber face

veneers shall be 0.6 mm thick and 0.8 mm for doors.
3. The face veneers shall be hard, durable, and capable of being finished
easily to a smooth surface. They shall be free from knots, worm and
beetle holes, splits, dots, glue stains, filling and inlay of any kind or other
defects.
4. The face veneers shall be applied to one or both sides of wood panels as
shown on the Drawings.
5. Where veneers are shown to be applied to one face only, the other side
shall have a balancing veneer applied to prevent warping. Apply back
veneers to open shelves and doors, where the reverse side can be seen.
Apply equivalent balancing veneer of similar materials to rear and
concealed surfaces. Balancing veneer shall be coated or sealed to
provide equivalent moisture transmission. Surface finish quality of
concealed balancing veneer and coating may be of a lesser grade. Apply
edge veneers where edges are visible or indicated on the Drawings, or
provide solid timber edge trims, machined as required, and finished to
match adjacent veneer
6. Unless otherwise indicated, veneer shall be book matched.
7. Unless otherwise indicated, veneer to vertical surfaces shall be installed

with the grain direction vertical, and veneer to horizontal surfaces shall be
installed parallel to the longer dimension.
8. Adhesives and bonding procedure for veneer shall be suitable durable

types, suitable for the location and the intended function, in accordance

with the Product Information.
E. Plastic Laminate:
1. Th Plastic laminate shall be of approved types and shall be installed in
accordance with the Product Information and relevant standards. Color
and pattern shall conform to the sample approved by the Engineer.
2. Use full sheets to avoid visible joints. Only high pressure plastic laminate
(HDL) shall be used. Don’t use low pressure laminate (LPL) factory
fabricated boards (melamine) unless approved.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, plastic laminate thickness shall not be less

than:
a. Visible flat horizontal and vertical surfaces: 0.8 mm HPL.
b. Post formed laminate surfaces: 0.8 mm HPL
4. Plastic laminate sheets shall be applied with a water proof, heat- resistant
adhesive of a type recommended by the plastic laminate manufacturer
and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
F. Composite Woods:
1. All composite woods to be used internally such as wooden skirting and

door cores are required to be free of urea-formaldehyde resins (not
applicable to fit-out and furniture).
G. Sealants:
1. Generally : Sealant shall be suitable elastomeric sealant suitable for the
location and the intended function. Sealant shall comply with the following
standards: ASTM C920 Specifications for Elastomeric Joint Sealant &
ASTM C962 Standard Guide for Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
2. Locations: Provide continuous sealant filled joints and beads to the
following junctions and perimeters:
Bench tops with walls and other vertical surfaces.
Up-stands at back and ends of bench-tops.
Carcasses to adjacent surfaces.
Junctions between similar units.
Elements which penetrate bench tops.
Sealants to internal wet areas shall be suitable mould and fungal
resistant types.
3. Sealants to stone: Sealants in contact with stone shall be suitable
polysulphide or polyurethane types. Do not use silicone sealants in
contact with stone unless tested and certified by the sealant
manufacturer, and approved before installation. Indicate sealant details
on shop drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and areas upon which the work of this section depends.
B. Verify site dimensions.
C. Report unsatisfactory site conditions that would cause defective installation of

products or cause latent defects in workmanship.
D. Start of work will constitute acceptance of site conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All fabrications shall be made based on site measurements with a provision for

scribing to meet the site conditions as required. The contractor shall be fully
responsible for accuracy of such measurements.
B. Install all work true, level, tightly fitted and flush with adjacent surfaces as
required.
3.3 KITCHEN CABINETS
A. General:
1. Kitchen cabinets shall be supplied and installed with all necessary

accessories in accordance with the Drawings, approved working
drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Carcass (Base Units and Wall Units):
1. The carcass shall be fabricated out of 18 mm thick MDF with high

pressure white plastic laminate and PVC lipping to exposed edges.
2. The back panel shall be 4 mm thick white coated hardboard.
3. Exposed surfaces of the carcass shall be finished same as in (C)

Shutters.
C. Shutters:
1. The Shutters (doors) shall be fabricated out of 18 mm thick MDF board,

post forming high pressure laminate HPL. (woodgrain to Engineer’s
approval).
D. Other Elements:
1. Legs: Base units shall be mounted on adjustable PVC legs.
2. Skirting: Skirting shall be 100 mm high laminated MDF (same finish as

doors in C above. Skirting shall be removable.
3. Shelves: Shelves shall be 18 mm thick MDF finished with high pressure

white plastic laminate and PVC lipping to exposed edges. Shelves must
be adjustable supported by proper stainless steel brackets. Consider one
shelf in Base Units (except the tall unit, at least 2 shelves must be
provided) and 2 shelves in Wall Units.
4. Drawers: Drawers fronts shall have the same finish as the cabinets’
doors. Drawers must be provided with metal slider system with heavy
duty rollers.
E. Hardware:
o
1. Hinges: Hinges must be stailess steel, concealed type, 110 opening
(minimum). Hinges must be self closing.
2. Handles: Handles shall be polished stainless steel to Engineer’s

approval.
F. Appliances & Accessories:
1. Cookerhood: European make, finish and color to Engineer’s approval.

Size to mach cooker space indicated on the drawings.
2. Sink: Supply and install complete Stainless steel sink (Blanco or

equivalent), single bowl or dowble bowl, shape and size as indicated on

the drawings. Supply and Installtion shall include all the necessary
accessories, fittings and fixtures as mixer, bottle trap, chain, plug, angle
valves, flexible hoses etc.
3. Mixer: Chrome plated single lever, (Grohe Eurodisk or equivalent).
G. Countertop:
1. Countertop shall be 2 cm thick Granite. Consider a PC Rate of Dhs.

275.00 per linear meter. PC rate shall include supply, installation, making
openings and holes, rounding & backsplash.
2. Backsplash must be granite (material same as countertop) and 10 cm

high.
3.4 UNDER VANITY CABINETS
A. General:
1. Undervanity cabinets shall be supplied and installed with all necessary

accessories in accordance with the Drawings, approved working
drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Carcass:


Shutters.
C. Shutters:

approval).
D. Other Elements:
1. Legs: Base units shall be mounted on adjustable PVC legs.


be adjustable supported by proper stainless steel brackets.
4. Drawers: Drawers fronts shall have the same finish as the cabinets’
doors. Drawers must be provided with metal slider system with heavy
duty rollers.
E. Hardware:
o
(minimum). Hinges must be self closing

approval.
F. Countertop:

1. Countertop shall be 2 cm thick Granite. Consider a PC Rate of Dhs.

250.00 per linear meter. PC rate shall include supply, installation, making
openings and holes, rounding & backsplash.
2. Backsplash must be granite (material same as countertop) and 10 cm

high.
3.5 WARDROBES
A. General:
1. Wardrobes shall be supplied and installed with all necessary accessories

in accordance with the Drawings, approved working drawings and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Carcass:


Shutters.
C. Shutters:

approval).
D. Other Elements:


be adjustable supported by proper stainless steel brackets.
3. Drawers: External drawers’ (if any) fronts shall have the same finish as
the cabinets’ doors. Drawers must be provided with metal slider system
with heavy duty rollers.
E. Hardware:
o
Hinges must be self closing

approval.
3. Locks and Keys: As per the Engineer’s approval
F. Accessories:
1. Hnager Rod: 20 mm diameter stainless steel with heavy duty brackets to

Engineer’s approval.
2. Tie Rod: As per the Engineer’s approval.

End of Section

SECTION 06201 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 3
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................... 4

SECTION 06201 Exterior Finish Carpentry Page 1 of 4
SECTION 06201 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior and Interior standing and running trim.
2. Exterior and Interior Tongue and Groove ceilings/soffits.
3. Protective finish.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: For each type of trim and ceiling/soffit material indicated.

A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from
wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with
FSC STD- 01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":
1. Exterior and Interior standing and running trim.
2. Exterior and Interior cedar tongue and groove ceilings and soffits.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber,
plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be pplied
without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM

A. Lumber Trim for Clear Finish:
1. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Grade A clear; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
3. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).

A. Fasteners for Exterior and Interior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient
length to penetrate not less than 1-1/4 inches into wood substrate.
1. Material: No. 304 stainless-steel.
2. Type: Splitless Siding Nails.
B. Soffit Vents: Aluminum continuous soffit vent, 2 inch wide by 8 foot long with 9 square inch
of free vent area per lineal foot.
C. Protective Finish
1. Water repellant, fungus and mildew resistant penetrating stain that is resistant to Ultra
Violet (UV) light.

PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet,
moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
B. Install exterior and interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent
materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work.
3.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where
necessary.
1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members.
B. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face
fastening is unavoidable.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Replace exterior and interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with
requirements. Exterior and interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work
complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for
uniform appearance.
3.5 FINISH
A. Apply protective finish to coating manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 06202 INTERIORFINISH CARPENTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 2
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................... 2

SECTION 06202 Interior Finish Carpentry Page 1 of 2
SECTION 06202 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Shelving.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications.
2. Division 6 Section "Exterior Finish Carpentry" for Tongue and Groove wood not specified in
this Section for interior wood ceilings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE)
B. Stainless steel shapes and bars type 304
C. Fasteners stainless steel, as required
2.2 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS

A. Shelving: Made from high-density polyethylene (HDPE), 1 inch thick.
B. Shelf supports: fabricated from type 304 stainless steel as indicated on the drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb.
3.2 SHELVING
A. Install shelf support framing by fastening to masonry walls. Space fasteners not more than
16 inches o.c.
B. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed
and reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.
End of Section

SECTION 06202 Interior Finish Carpentry Page 2 of 2
SECTION 07 10 00 - WATERPROOFING
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................. 2
1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................ 2

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTATION ............................................................. 2
1.3 REFERENCES ...................................................................................... 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................ 3
1.5 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................ 4
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE ............................................ 4
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS ...................................................................... 4
1.8 WARRANTY .......................................................................................... 5
1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 6
1.10 TESTING ............................................................................................... 6
2.0 PRODUCTS................................................................................................. 7
2.1 MEMBRANE SYSTEMS........................................................................ 7

2.2 JUNCTION AND SERVICES PENETRATIONS ................................... 7
2.3 FOLLOWING WORK ............................................................................. 8
2.4 LIQUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE ............................................................ 8
2.5 BITUMINOUS TORCH-ON MEMBRANE .............................................. 8
2.6 FLASHINGS AND BARRIERS .............................................................. 9
2.7 SEALANTS ............................................................................................ 9
2.8 FLOOR LEVELING ................................................................................ 9
2.9 CEMENT AND SAND ............................................................................ 9
2.10 SCREED AND WEARING SLABS ........................................................ 10
2.11 POLYSTYRENE BOARD ...................................................................... 10
3.0 EXECUTION ................................................................................................ 10
3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .............................................. 10

3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION ............................................................... 10
3.3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION ............................................................... 10
3.4 BATHROOM, KITCHEN FLOOR AND WALLS..................................... 11
3.5 WATERPROOFING THE UNDERSIDES OF GRANITE & MARBLE ... 11
3.6 EXTERNAL TILES ................................................................................. 11
3.7 BALCONY AND PLANTERS WATERPROOFING ............................... 11
3.8 SUBSTRUCTURE CONCRETE ............................................................ 11
3.9 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND RECTIFICATION ............................. 12
3.10 COMPLETION DOCUMENTS............................................................... 12
PROJECT PARTICULARS ...................................................................................... 12

4.1 DEFAULT REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ 12
DIVISION 07 – Thermal & Moisture Protection

SECTION 07 10 00 – Dampproofing & Waterproofing Page 1 of 12
SECTION 07 10 00 - WATERPROOFING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Provide bituminous and liquid-applied waterproof membranes, including base
preparation, edge detailing and joints, and flashings.
2. Specifications hereunder are solely to establish the minimum acceptable quality of
specifications for the same. Other products with equivalent or superior specifications
shall be acceptable subject to the approval of the ENGINEER.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTATION

1. Read this Trade Section in conjunction with the :
a. Contract documents and client special requirements, if applicable
b. DRAWINGS for locations and extent.
c. ACOUSTIC REPORT, if applicable.
d. Where there is a discrepancy between related documents, if any, the ACOUSTIC
REPORT shall prevail
1.3 REFERENCE
1. The standards referred herein, together with all appropriate references listed within
those Standards, shall be used within this Specification. The edition to be used shall be
that current at the date of this Specification, except that the latest editions of standards
may be used where no reduction in quality will result. Any differences between their
requirements and this Specification shall be submitted to the Engineer for his ruling.


ASTM D 41 Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp proofing, and
Waterproofing
ASTM D1187 Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal
ASTM D1227 Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing
ASTM D 4479 Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos Free
ASTM C 33 Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 578 Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 836 High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric
Waterproofing Membrane for Use With Separate Wearing Course
ASTM D 1056 Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber
ASTM D 1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous
Types)
ASTM D 1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

1. Inspections:
a. Give sufficient notice so the ENGINEER may inspect significant stages of work,
including:
• Substrates, prepared and ready for the installation, before commencing.
• First completed example before proceeding with balance of work.
• Commencement and completion of testing on site.
• Work to be covered over, before covering.
b. Manufacturer’s inspections:
• The manufacturer shall carry out random on-site inspections of products used
and application procedures and submit a copy of site visit records direct to the
ENGINEER.
• The manufacturer shall verify that correct products are being used, substrate
preparation is carried out correctly, and products are applied correctly.
• The manufacturer’s site visit records shall indicate the date, weather
conditions, name of site supervisor, and the products and locations inspected.
• The manufacturer shall coordinate with the ENGINEER and the Contractor and
shall arrange for joint inspections with the ENGINEER and the Contractor, if
directed.
• The manufacturer shall complete and execute the relevant parts of the
CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CERTIFICATION.
• The manufacturer shall conduct not less than One random site inspection per
week during the installation period.
2. Samples:
a. Submit representative samples of products, finishes and fabrications, if directed.
b. Include samples for:
• Membrane sheet.
• Slip sheet / separation layer, if required.
• Protective board, if required.
• Accessories, flashing and details.
c. First completed example: Submit the first completed example of each type of
installed work and finish to establish the required standard before proceeding with
the remainder of work (not less than 10 m2).
3. Inspection and Test Plan: Submit and implement Inspection and Test Plans (ITP’s) for
quality assurance in accordance with the relevant Standards (ISO 9002).
4. Hold points shall include:
a. Submission of shop drawings for approval.
b. Commencement of testing.
c. First completed example of installed work on-site.
5. Contractor’s Certification:
a. Submit written Contractor’s Certification for:
• Compliance of completed work with Contract Documents.
• Manufacturer's verification of correct product selection and installation
procedures.
• Refer attached Contractor’s Certification forms.
6. Recent similar projects:
a. Submit evidence of satisfactory performance of products in recent similar projects,
with contact details for the owner or building manager, and the original consultant,
if directed.
b. Submit details regarding differences between proposed and existing products, if
any. Arrange an inspection of the project, if directed.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. The work of this trade shall be carried out by experienced, specialist subcontractors.
a. Submit details of subcontractors, including capability, resources and experience
with similar work.
b. Include details for suppliers of materials and specialist procedures if directed.
Where a product manufacturer requires the subcontractor to be approved, licensed
or franchised to the manufacturer, submit evidence of compliance.
2. Product Information:
a. Submit Product Information for proposed systems and products, including
selection, preparation and installation instructions, and test results. Include test
results for the following properties and associated Standards:
• Membrane materials.
• Accessories, adhesives and primers
• Protection materials.
3. Shop drawings:
a. Submit manufacturer's standard construction details indicating relevant product
selections.
b. If the actual conditions are not indicated in the standard details, submit additional
shop drawings for the actual conditions.
c. Include shop drawings (membranes) for:
• Edge details, joints, side and end lapping, turn-ups, turn-downs.
• Membrane profiles, inside and outside corners, acceptable bending radius.
• Substrate profiles, conditions, moisture content.
• Control and movement joints.
• Penetrations.
• Flashings.
• Drainage connections.
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

1. Protect products during delivery, handling and storage from weather, damage or
staining with suitable packing and wrapping.
2. Store clear of ground, concrete or damp surfaces on suitable packers spaced to
prevent distortion. Properly identify products on packing and wrapping.
3. Packaged products: Deliver and store proprietary packaged products in manufacturer’s
original unopened packing and containers with labels intact and legible.
4. Storage of liquids: Store liquids in designated ventilated safe storage areas in
accordance with the Product Information and occupational health and safety
requirements.
5. Keep storage areas secure from unauthorised access. Keep other combustible
products out of liquid storage area. Keep suitable fire extinguishers in accessible
adjacent locations.

1. Prompt installation of following work: Ensure that screeds or wearing screeds are
placed over the membrane as soon as practicable. Coordinate and cooperate with
relevant trades before and during the placement of screeds or wearing slabs over
installed membrane to prevent any damage.

1.8 WARRANTIES
1. Provide an approved warranty against any failure to the material, application and
workmanship
2. The warranty becomes operative from the date of issue of the handing over report of
the building and shall be valid for a period of ten (10) calendar years.
3. The warranty must be signed by the approved membrane manufacturer as well as the
Contractor
4. Warranty conditions for membranes:
a. The warranty shall clearly clarify the following:
• All materials in waterproofing and roofing system shall be free from
manufacturing defects and comply with manufacturer’s published technical
specifications.
• All workmanship in waterproofing and roofing system shall be free any defects
and comply with all respect to the manufacturer’s technical instructions and
control.
b. The warranty shall clearly clarify the following:
• All materials in the system shall be free from manufacturing defects and
comply with manufacturer’s published technical specifications.
• All workmanship shall be free from any defects and comply with all respect to
the manufacturer’s technical instructions and control.
c. The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the following:
• Failure of the membrane to withstand dislodgement due to wind.
• Failure of the membrane to exclude moisture or water.
• Damage to adjacent work due to penetration of moisture or water.
• De-lamination or separation of the membrane from substrates.
• Failure of the membrane to accommodate design loads.
• Failure of the membrane to accommodate movements in the base-structure.
• Damage, deterioration or perforation due to contact or close proximity with
chemical products in the substrates, adjacent materials or the environment
generally.
d. Within this warranty the Contractor is liable for the cost of:
• Repair of defected materials or installation of a replacement of materials or
system.
• Damages to the building and/or the building contents due to such existing
materials.
• Financial loss and/or physical injury due to such existing materials.
• The text of the warranty shall be to the Engineer approval.
e. Membranes shall be a complete system in which all components act together
without failure of any part. Failure that may be attributed to the failure of one or
more particular components shall not limit responsibility for the complete system.
5. Warrantee should be backed-up with an insurance policy issued by reputed insurance
company to the approval of the ENGINEER.


1. Flooring / Paving loads:
a. The installed flooring / paving shall accommodate applicable traffic loads due to
pedestrians, maintenance and delivery vehicles.
b. Submit computations and test reports to verify that the flooring / paving thickness
will accommodate the applicable traffic loads, If directed, Surfaces subject to heavy
vehicular loads shall be sufficiently hard to resist wearing damage and abrasion
due to turning tyres.
c. Movements: The installed work shall accommodate movements and deflections in
the base-structure and substrates, without failure or loss of adhesion, performance
or durability.
2. Slip resistance:
a. Installed pedestrian surfaces shall be stable, safe and minimize risk of slipping or
tripping due to slippery surfaces or misalignment of joints.
b. Slip-resistance shall comply with the relevant Standards.
3. Corrosion:
a. Products and materials, including fixings and concealed components, shall be
corrosion-resistant or protective coated to prevent corrosion.
b. The cut edges of factory-coated products shall be coated or otherwise treated to
ensure continuity of corrosion protection.
4. Ambient physical conditions:
a. The installed work shall be suitable for and resistant to ambient physical conditions,
including normal cleaning and maintenance procedures applicable to the installed
work.
5. Compatibility:
a. Adjacent products and materials shall be chemically and electrolytically compatible
with each other, substrates, and adjacent work, or shall be separated by suitable
products and procedures.
b. Adjacent products and materials, including adhesives and sealants, shall not stain
or contaminate, and shall not cause visual or structural defects in adjacent
materials.
6. Membrane barrier:
a. The membrane system shall provide a permanent barrier to moisture and water,
and shall be waterproof and resistant to vapour pressure, condensation, and
corrosion, and shall remain intact and properly fixed to the substrate under all
conditions.
b. Roof / terrace membranes shall properly dispose of all precipitation due to rain, hail
or snow.
c. Tanking membranes in contact with the ground shall be resistant to any chemical
action or contamination of the ground.
7. Thermal properties: Externally, the installed work shall include continuous thermal
insulation to minimize heat gain or loss from outside in accordance with the relevant
Standards.
1.10 TESTING
1. The Owner reserves the right of conduct laboratory test in any of the Independent
Laboratory in U.A.E. or anywhere in the world on the samples which taken from the site
for not less than four no. tests out of product leaflet specification at the Contractor
expense.
2. In case of failure of any of the test the product be removed and a new product shall be
fixed. In this case the Contractor has no right under any condition for an extension of
time and any financial claims due to action taken.

3. Flood testing: Carry out flood testing of installed membrane installation in accordance
with all the relevant Standards
• ASTM D5385 Test method for hydrostatic pressure resistance of waterproofing
membranes.
• Flood test membrane 48 hours minimum following completion of membrane
installation.
• Restrict water run-off from membrane area plugging drains and creating dams
or dikes, flood restricted area to depth of 10 cm maintain at his depth for 48
hours.
• Repair any leaks which develop and retest.
• At completion of flood test, drain plugs will be removed.
• Similar test shall be repeated after completion of roofing work.
4. Verify proposed procedures before commencing. As a guide, procedures shall include:
a. Verify that base-structure has adequate strength to withstand water load.
b. Notify ENGINEER at least two days before testing.
c. Plug drains, and install temporary bunds where required.
d. Flood test area to a minimum depth of 25 mm and leave for 48 hours.
e. Mark locations of leaks.
f. When membrane is dry, rectify in accordance with Product Information.
g. Repeat procedure until no leaks occur.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MEMBRANE SYSTEMS

1. Membranes shall be complete approved proprietary waterproof systems, suitable for
the location and the intended function, in accordance with the Product Information and
relevant Standards.
2. Submit Product Information and test results. Include details of each layer of complete
system. Include details of compatibility with substrates, and base-structure movement
and low temperature performance.
3. Membrane systems shall include the following accessories and edge detailing as
appropriate:
a. Substrate preparation.
b. Adhesive and primer, if required.
c. Protection / insulation board, if required.
d. Separation sheet or vent sheet, if required.
e. Finished surfacing, where applicable.
f. Flashings, fixings and pressure seals.
g. Reinforcement of sheet.
h. Edge details, turn-ups and turndowns.
i. Movement joint cover details.
2.2 JUNCTIONS AND SERVICES PENETRATIONS

1. Construct floor-to-wall junctions or internal corners with a continuous cove in mortar or
other suitable fillet material to neat, straight lines.
2. Radius of internal and external corners of substrates shall be nominal 50mm, unless
otherwise indicated.

3. Where substrate materials change at internal corners, provide suitable separation

barrier to accommodate differential movement without damage to the membrane.
4. Turn-up membrane at walls and all in-floor services penetrations nominal 150 mm
unless otherwise indicated.
5. Turn down membrane into floor grate assemblies and fix firmly in place with threaded
clamping collars, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 FOLLOWING WORK:

1. There shall be no through-fixing of following work to substrates through the membrane,
except by approved construction details.
2. Submit shop drawings of proposed fixing procedures for later applied work. Obtain
approval before commencing.
3. There shall be no direct contact between following work and the membrane. Provide
suitable protection and separation barriers as required.
4. Seal edges, laps and through fixings.
5. Where planters are constructed over primary membranes, the primary membrane shall
be continuous under the planter and undamaged by the planter construction, and the
planter membrane shall be independent from the primary membrane.
6. Where the membrane is covered with back-filling for basement and planter tanking
locations, cover all vertical and horizontal surfaces with suitable durable protective
sheeting.
7. Where the membrane is covered with concrete wearing slabs or screed, cover
membrane with a suitable polyethylene slip sheet not less than 200 microns thick,
lapped not less than 200 mm and taped. Bar stools for concrete reinforcement shall be
fitted with pads to prevent penetration or damage of the membrane.
2.4 LIQUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE

1. Liquid applied membranes shall be approved systems, suitable for the location and the
intended function, in accordance with the Product Information and relevant Standards.
2. Submit Product Information for liquid-applied membranes including:
a. Proprietary description, manufacturer's reference.
b. Generic type.
c. Dry film thickness.
d. Colour.
e. Modulus at 300% elongation (MPa).
3. Adjust tile bedding thickness to ensure that membrane edge transition is not visible.
2.5 BITUMINOUS TORCH-ON MEMBRANE

1. Bituminous torch-on membranes shall be approved systems, suitable for the location
and the intended function, in accordance with the Product Information.
2. Submit details of bituminous membranes including:
a. Proprietary description, manufacturer's reference.
b. Base (reinforcement) type (polyester, glass fibre, none).
c. Base (reinforcement) weight (grams per square metre).
d. Covering (bitumen) type: (APP, SBS, oxidized).
e. Tensile strength (Newton per 50 mm).
f. Elongation at break (%).
g. Thickness (mm).
h. Other details as requested
3. Number of layers:
a. Bituminous membrane systems shall have two layers, unless otherwise indicated.
b. No layer shall be less than 3 mm thick in a two layer system.

c. Membranes to planters may be one-layer of no less than 4mm thick where there is
no occupied area below, or where there is another membrane between the planter
and the occupied area.
2.6 FLASHINGS AND BARRIERS

1. Provide corrosion-resistant flashings to edges of membranes where required. Turn
flashings into reglets or provide suitable ‘K’ profile flashings.
2. Submit details of proposed membrane flashings before commencing.
2.7 SEALANTS
1. Sealants shall be suitable elastomeric sealants, suitable for the location and the
intended function, in accordance with all the latest Product Information and relevant
Standards e.g.
• ASTM C920 Specification for elastomeric joint sealants.
• ASTM C962 Standard guide for use of elastomeric joint sealants. Submit
details including generic type, durability, adhesion, compatibility, movement
capability and fire-resistance as appropriate.
2. Verify types, locations and colours before commencing.
3. Visible sealants shall be resistant to ultra-violet light and effects of exposure.
4. Locations: Provide continuous fire-rated sealant filled joints to the following junctions
and perimeters:
a. Around services penetrations and flashings.
b. At junctions with collar flanges.
c. Elsewhere indicated or required.
2.8 FLOOR LEVELING

1. COMPOUNDS: Provide cementitious floor levelling compounds to ensure suitable
substrate finish, levels and tolerances required for the required finish, levels and
tolerances of applied flooring, suitable for the location and the intended function, in
accordance with Product Information.
2. Cementitious floor levelling compounds shall be durable, compatible with substrates
and applied flooring / paving, resistant to cracking and de-laminating, and shall be self
levelling. Include primers and bonding agents as required.
2.9 CEMENT AND SAND

1. Cement and sand for mortar, grout and render shall be suitable for the location and the
intended function in compliance with all the latest relevant Standards.
2. Unless otherwise indicated:
a. Cement shall be general purpose Portland cement.
b. Sand shall be clean sharp fine sand, washed and graded.
c. Water shall be free from chlorides or any substances which may be harmful to the
work, including reinforcement and embedments.
d. Submit details of proposed mix proportions. Do not change proportions after
commencing.
2.10 SCREEDS AND WEARING SLABS

1. Refer to CONCRETE FINISHES Section for technical requirements for cementitious
screeds and wearing slabs.

2.11 POLYSTYRENE BOARD

1. Polystyrene board shall be suitable for the location and the intended function, in
accordance with the latest Product Information and relevant Standards to include:
• ASTM C578 Standard specification for rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal
insulation
• ASTM C1050 Standard specification for rigid cellular polystyrene-cellulosic
fibre composite roof insulation
• ASTM D4549 Standard specification for polystyrene moulding and extrusion
materials (PS)
• ASTM D5676 Standard specification for recycled polystyrene moulding and
extrusion materials
2. Polystyrene shall be a proprietary extruded (XPS) type, unless otherwise approved.
3. Polystyrene may be moulded expanded (EPS) board for permanently dry internal
locations only.
4. Wire cut boards shall not be used. Verify proposed types and locations before
commencing.
5. Submit Product Information, including details of required U-value, thickness and density
before commencing.
6. Submit separate values for U-value of the polystyrene and the complete system.
7. Membrane protection:
a. Polystyrene board for protection of horizontal membranes shall have moulded
drainage grooves.
b. Polystyrene board shall be of suitable thickness to protect the membrane from
long-term impact damage or abrasion.
3.0 EXECUTION

3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

1. Prepare substrates to ensure the correct adhesion, finish and durability of the applied
work in accordance with accepted industry practice, Product Information and relevant
Standards, as applicable, without damage to the substrate or adjacent work.
2. Rectify non-complying substrates by suitable procedures.
3. Verify that cementitious substrates are properly cured and have reached the required
moisture content before installation.
4. Carry out moisture testing where required.
5. Scabble cementitious substrates if required to ensure suitable mechanical key.
3.3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

1. Install membrane, including required primers and accessories, and temporary breaks,
in accordance with the Product Information.
2. Verify correct substrate moisture before commencing. Do not install membranes in wet
or inclement weather.
3. Do not recommence installation after rain until the substrate is thoroughly dry.
4. Verify locations of proposed through-fixings and proposed construction details before
commencing.
5. Coordinate with relevant services trades.
6. Ensure membranes are properly terminated to drainage grates with collar flanges
lapped and screwed down firmly.

7. Immediately before covering the membrane, carry out a careful inspection, and repair
any accidental damage, holes, tears, misaligned or wrinkled areas, and other defects.
8. As a guide, lap sheet membranes not less than 150 mm to sides and ends, stagger
laps to adjacent sheets, and make site repairs with double patches lapped 150 mm on
all sides.
3.4 BATHROOM, KITCHEN FLOORS AND WALLS:

1. All horizontal surfaces and vertical up to 15cm from S.S.L. are to receive one layer SBS
membrane.
3.5 WATERPROOFING THE UNDERSIDES OF GRANITE AND MARBLE

1. The undersides of all granite and marble shall be waterproofed by applying a 2mm
thick coating of Masterseal 550 (polymer modified cementitious coating) or similar
approved.
3.6 EXTERNAL TILES

1. All external tiles shall be grouted using Febtile Rainbow Grout or similar approved.
3.7 PLANTERS WATERPROOFING
1. All balcony and planters are to be waterproofed using 2 coats of liquid applied Chevron
membrane of minimum thickness of 1.2mm.
3.8 SUBSTRUCTURE CONCRETE

1. Sub-structure waterproofing shall be complete tanking system by means of two layer
of 4 mm thick SBS torched applied waterproofing membrane comply with the
specification as listed in the general requirements.
2. The membrane shall be protected by 6mm thick bitumen impregnated protection board
for vertical surface.
3.9 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND RECTIFICATION

1. Cleaning:
a. The finished work shall be complete, clean and undamaged, with smooth, even
finishes.
b. Keep installation areas clean and tidy during installation.
c. The ENGINEER may direct installation areas to be cleaned at any time.
2. Protection: Protect installed work to prevent damage during subsequent building work
and or weather conditions. Ensure work is properly cured and hardened before
subsequent use.
3. Adjacent work:
a. Protect adjacent work during installation.
b. Use protective coverings where required.
c. Rectify any damage to adjacent work. Remove spots, marks and stains from
adjacent surfaces.
4. Completion:
a. Rectify or replace any faulty or damaged work before Practical Completion,
including damage, staining or corrosion caused by subsequent construction
activities. If the work cannot be rectified properly, replace or re-apply the whole
area affected, as directed.

3.10 COMPLETION DOCUMENTS

1. User’s Manual: Submit a User’s Manual for the work of this trade with records and
details of materials used and sources of supply, cleaning and repair procedures.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 16 00 - GRP LINING
Table of contents
1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................ 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................... 3
1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE ............................................. 3
1.5 WARRANTY ........................................................................................... 4
2.0 PRODUCTS……………………………………………………………………... 4
2.1 MATERIALS .......................................................................................... 4
3.0 EXECUTION ……………………………………………………………………. 5
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION................................................................... 5

3.2 HEALTH AND SAFETY ......................................................................... 5
3.3 APPLICATION ....................................................................................... 5
DIVISION 07 – Damprpoofing & Waterproofing

SECTION 07 16 00 – GRP Lining Page 1 of 6
SECTION 07 16 00 - GRP LINING
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. This section covers GRP lining for concrete surfaces
2. GRP linings shall be approved systems, suitable for the location and the intended
function, in accordance with the Product Information

1. Give sufficient notice so the Engineer may inspect significant stages of work,
including:
a. Surface preparation before commencing the works.
b. Commencement and completion of works on site.
c. Work to be covered over, before covering.
2. Supplier/Manufacturer inspections:
a. The manufacturer shall verify that surface preparation is carried out correctly
before commencement of the works
b. The manufacturer shall verify correct products are being used, and products
are applied correctly.
c. The manufacturer shall carry out random on-site inspections of products used
Engineer.
d. The manufacturer’s site visit records shall indicate the date, weather
e. The manufacturer shall coordinate with the Engineer and the Contractor and
shall arrange for joint inspections with the Engineer and the Contractor, if
directed.
f. The manufacturer shall complete and execute the relevant parts of the
g. The manufacturer shall conduct not less than: One random site inspection per
a. Submit written Sub-contractor’s Certification for:
procedures.
a. Submit evidence of satisfactory performance of products in recent similar
projects, with contact details for the owner or building manager, and the
original consultant, if directed.
5. Samples: Submit representative samples of products, finishes and fabrications, if
directed.
6. Inspection and Test Plan: Submit and implement Inspection and Test Plans (ITP’s)
for quality assurance in accordance with the relevant Standards (ISO 9002).


b. Commencement of works.
c. Completion of works
d. Commencement of testing
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. The work of this trade shall be carried out by experienced, specialist
Subcontractor.
a. Submit details of the Subcontractor, including capability, resources and
experience with similar work.
Where a product manufacturer requires the subcontractor to be approved,
licensed or franchised to the manufacturer, submit evidence of compliance.
a. Submit Product Information for proposed GRP lining system and products,
including selection, preparation and installation instructions, and test results.
Include test results for the following properties and associated Standards:
• Proprietary description, manufacturer's reference.
• Base (i.e. reinforcement) type (i.e. polyester, glass fibre etc).
• Density (i.e. grams per cubic centimeter).
• Covering (i.e. Orthoptalic Resin).
• Tensile strength (i.e. Newton per 50 mm).
• Elongation at break (%).
• Thickness (mm).
• Other details as requested
3. Shop drawings:
selections.
b. If the actual conditions are not indicated in the standard details, submit
additional shop drawings for the actual conditions.
• Reinforcement profiles, inside and outside corners, acceptable bending
radius.
• Control and movement joints, if applicable
• Penetrations.
• Connections through the system, if applicable


3. Packaged products: Deliver and store proprietary packaged products in

manufacturer’s original unopened packing and containers with labels intact and
legible.
requirements.
a. Keep storage areas secure from unauthorized access. Keep other combustible
products out of liquid storage area. Keep suitable fire extinguishers in
accessible adjacent locations.
1.5 WARRANTY
workmanship
2. The warranty becomes operative from the date of issue of the handing over report
of the building and shall be valid for a period of ten (10) calendar years.
3. The warranty must be signed by the approved lining manufacturer as well as the
Contractor
4. Warranty conditions for GRP lining system:
• All materials in the GRP lining system shall be free from manufacturing
defects and comply with manufacturer’s published technical specifications.
• All workmanship in GRP lining system shall be free from any defects and
comply with all respect to the manufacturer’s technical instructions and
control.
b. The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the
following:
• Failure of the GRP lining system to exclude moisture or water.
• De-lamination or separation of the GRP lining system from substrates.
• Failure of the GRP lining system to accommodate design stresses.
• Failure of the GRP lining system to accommodate movements in the base-
structure.
generally.
c. Within this warranty the Contractor is liable for the cost of:
system.
materials.
• The text of the warranty shall be to the Engineer approval.
d. GRP lining system shall be a complete system in which all components act
together without failure of any part. Failure that may be attributed to the failure
of one or more particular components shall not limit responsibility for the
complete system.
5. Warrantee should be backed-up with an insurance policy issued by reputed
insurance company to the approval of the Engineer.

2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
6. The lining shall consist of two layers of chopped strand mat hardened with
Polyester Resin followed by a thick layer of Gelcoat giving a thickness of
approximate 5mm
7. Properties of General Lining :
a. Density = 1.4 gram/cm3
b. Tensile Strength = 140 MPa
c. Flexural Strength = 250 MPa
d. Compressive Strength = 170 MPa
e. Thermal Conductivity = 0.2 W/m x D. Centigrade
f. Shrinkage = 0.2%
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION:

1. Concrete surface has to be minimum 30 days age before receive GRP lining
system
2. The concrete surface of the water tanks walls should be slightly sand blasted by
the Contractor until the surface is free from oily spots, flaky concrete and is
uniformly roughened. Residue and by-products from sand blasting are to be
removed by vacuum cleaner
3. The Contractor shall make sure the surface is defect-free that to include:
a. Stains/marks
b. Uneven of surface
c. Back flow of channel
d. Laitance
3.2 HEALTH AND SAFETY

1. Safety measures shall consider all cautions descried in technical and safety data
sheets. In addition, applicable safety regulations shall be applied to ensure safe
operation of the process without causing damages to the workmanship involved in
the process or adjacent works.
2. The Safety Officer has to inspect and approve all precautions prior
commencement of the job
3.3 APPLICATION
1. Application of the GRP lining shall be proposed and guaranteed by a professional
Subcontractor, to the approval of the Engineer, through the Contractor
2. Complete lining thickness should be min. 5mm nd not more than 6mm
3. Below a possible sequence for applying the GRP lining system:
a. Apply Orthophtalic Resin used as primer, wait till it hardens. Which shall be 30
minutes according to ambient temperature and amount of catalyst added.

b. Apply a Resin paste 3% Acrosil mix to fill the voids in concrete before GRP
Lining
c. Apply 1 layer of Chopped Strand Mat-300g/m2 type ‘E’ Glass impregnated with
Orthophtalic Resin, of approximate proportions of 35% CSM to 65%
Orthophtalic Resin till to achieve a thickness of 1.0mm.
d. Apply 3 layers of 450g/m2 ‘E’ Glass impregnated with Orthophtalic Resin of
proportions of 35% CSM to 65% Orthophtalic Resin, followed by one layer of
‘C’ glass veil till to achieve a thickness of 2.5mm.
e. Allow curing.
f. 0.5mm thick of Orthophtalic Resin flow coat with 5% Paraffin wax solution.

1. Cleaning:
a. The finished work shall be complete, clean and undamaged, with, even
finishes.
b. Keep installation areas clean, tidy, and ventilated during installation.
2. Protection: Protect installed work to prevent damage during subsequent building
work and or weather conditions. Ensure work is properly cured and hardened
before subsequent use.
3. Adjacent work:
adjacent surfaces.
4. Completion:
End of Section

SECTION 07 20 00 - ROOFING SYSTEMS
Table of Contents
1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................. 2

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTATION .............................................................. 2
1.3 REFERENCES....................................................................................... 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................... 4
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE ............................................ 5
1.7 WARRANTY ........................................................................................... 5
1.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 6
1.9 TESTING ................................................................................................ 6
2.0 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................ 7
2.1 MEMBRANE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................... 7

2.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................... 7
3.0 EXECUTION ............................................................................................... 8

3.2 INSTALLATION...................................................................................... 8
3.3 INSTALLATION OF THE INVERTED ROOFING SYSTEM .................. 10
3.4 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND RECTIFICATION .............................. 10
3.5 COMPLETION DOCUMENTS ............................................................... 11

SECTION 07 20 00 – Roofing Page 1 of 13
SECTION 07 20 00 - ROOFING SYSTEMS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. These specifications cover Roofing System intended to be used on roof slabs.
2. Waterproofing is a necessary protective system to keep water out of the building and
from passing from area to area within the building.
3. Section Includes: Fabrication, supply, installation and testing of all roof system which
includes but not limited to the following system:
a. R. S. 01 Inverted Roofing System
b. R.S.01.A With tiles finish.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTATION

4. Read this Trade Section in conjunction with the :
a. Contract documents and client special requirements, if applicable
b. DRAWINGS for locations and extent.
c. ACOUSTIC REPORT, if applicable.
d. Where there is a discrepancy between related documents, if any, the
ACOUSTIC REPORT shall prevail
e. Section 07150 Waterproofing
1.3 REFERENCES
those Standards, shall be used within this Specification. The edition to be used shall
be that current at the date of this Specification, except that the latest editions of
standards may be used where no reduction in quality will result. Any differences
between their requirements and this Specification shall be submitted to the Engineer
for his ruling.
ASTM D 41 Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp proofing, and
Waterproofing
ASTM D 1187 Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal
ASTM D 1227 Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing
ASTM D 4479 Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos Free
ASTM C 33 Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 578 Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 836 High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric
Waterproofing Membrane for Use With Separate Wearing
Course
ASTM D 1056 Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber
ASTM D 1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous
Types)
ASTM D 1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction

1. Inspections:

a. Give sufficient notice so the ENGINEER may inspect significant stages of work,
including:
• Substrates, prepared and ready for the installation, before commencing.
• Commencement and completion of testing on site.
• Work to be covered over, before covering.
b. Manufacturer’s inspections:
• The manufacturer shall carry out random on-site inspections of products
used and application procedures and submit a copy of site visit records direct
to the ENGINEER.
• The manufacturer shall verify that correct products are being used, substrate
• The manufacturer’s site visit records shall indicate the date, weather
conditions, name of site supervisor, and the products and locations
inspected.
• The manufacturer shall coordinate with the ENGINEER and the Contractor
and shall arrange for joint inspections with the ENGINEER and the
Contractor, if directed.
• The manufacturer shall conduct not less than One random site inspection per
c. The Contractor is required to:
• Submit manufacturer’s certification standing materials ordered and supplied
are compatible with each other, suited for locations and purpose timely
installation.
• Submit manufacturer’s approval of applicator.
• Submit a certificate signed by the manufacturer of the materials specified
which states materials installed on the project manufacturer’s published
performance standards and the requirements.
2. Samples:
a. Submit representative samples of products, finishes and fabrications, if directed.
• Membrane sheet: Three 300mm x 300mm samples
• Flashing membrane: Three 300mm x 300mm samples
• Insulation : Three 300mm x 300mm samples
• Separation layer : Three 300mm x 300mm samples
• Protective board, if required.
• Metal flashing : Three 300mm x 300mm in the required color
• Primer : 1 liter
• Cold adhesive : 1 liter
c. First completed example: Submit the first completed example of each type of
installed work and finish to establish the required standard before proceeding
with the remainder of work (not less than 10 m2).
3. Inspection and Test Plan: Submit and implement Inspection and Test Plans (ITP’s)
for quality assurance in accordance with the relevant Standards (ISO 9002).
b. Commencement of testing.
a. Submit written Contractor’s Certification for:
procedures.

a.
Submit evidence of satisfactory performance of products in recent similar
projects, with contact details for the owner or building manager, and the original
consultant, if directed.
7. Manufacturer
a. All the products proposed for roofing shall be from the same manufacturer.
b. The manufacturer shall have an in house quality control set up complying with
ISO standards and/or with related Qatar to directive manufacturer quality control
manual shall be available for the Consultant and/or Department checking.
c. The manufacturer in house quality control shall be periodically audited by an
independent technical control office for compliance with the Q.C. manual and
standard recommendations. Certificates from the technical control office shall be
available for Consultant and/or Department request.
d. Manufacturer liability in case of product defect or wrong design shall be covered
by an insurance policy. Certificate shall be available for Consultant or
Department request.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. The work of this trade shall be carried out by experienced, specialist subcontractor of
at least 5 years successful experience in installation of roofing system similar to
those required for his project and shall be approved by the membrane Manufacturer
a. Submit details of subcontractor, including capability, resources and experience
with similar work.
Where a product manufacturer requires the subcontractor to be approved,
licensed or franchised to the manufacturer, submit evidence of compliance.
a. Submit Product Information for proposed systems and products, including
selection, preparation and installation instructions, and test results. Include test
results for the following properties and associated Standards:
• Membrane materials.
• Protection materials.
3. Shop drawings:
selections.
b. If the actual conditions are not indicated in the standard details, submit additional
shop drawings for the actual conditions.
• Membrane profiles, inside and outside corners, acceptable bending radius.
• Control and movement joints.
• Penetrations.
• Flashings.
• Drainage connections.


3. Packaged products: Deliver and store proprietary packaged products in

manufacturer’s original unopened packing and containers with labels intact and
legible.
requirements.
5. Keep storage areas secure from unauthorised access. Keep other combustible
products out of liquid storage area. Keep suitable fire extinguishers in accessible
adjacent locations.
1.7 WARRANTIES
workmanship
2. The warranty becomes operative from the date of issue of the handing over report of
the building and shall be valid for a period of ten (10) calendar years.
3. The warranty must be signed by the approved membrane manufacturer as well as
the Contractor
4. Warranty conditions for membranes:
• All materials in waterproofing and roofing system shall be free from
manufacturing defects and comply with manufacturer’s published technical
specifications.
• All workmanship in waterproofing and roofing system shall be free any
defects and comply with all respect to the manufacturer’s technical
instructions and control.
b. The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the
following:
• Failure of the membrane to withstand dislodgement due to wind.
• Failure of the membrane to exclude moisture or water.
• De-lamination or separation of the membrane from substrates.
• Failure of the membrane to accommodate design loads.
• Failure of the membrane to accommodate movements in the base-structure.
generally.
c. Within this warranty the Contractor is liable for the cost of:
system.
materials.
d. Membranes shall be a complete system in which all components act together
without failure of any part. Failure that may be attributed to the failure of one or
more particular components shall not limit responsibility for the complete system.
e. The text of the warranty shall be to the Consultant approval.
5. Warrantee should be backed-up with an insurance policy issued by reputed
insurance company to the approval of the ENGINEER.


1. Flooring / Paving loads:
a. The installed flooring / paving shall accommodate applicable traffic loads due to
pedestrians, maintenance and delivery vehicles.
b. Submit computations and test reports to verify that the flooring / paving thickness
will accommodate the applicable traffic loads, If directed, Surfaces subject to
heavy vehicular loads shall be sufficiently hard to resist wearing damage and
abrasion due to turning tyres.
c. Movements: The installed work shall accommodate movements and deflections
in the base-structure and substrates, without failure or loss of adhesion,
performance or durability.
2. Slip resistance:
a. Installed pedestrian surfaces shall be stable, safe and minimize risk of slipping or
tripping due to slippery surfaces or misalignment of joints.
b. Slip-resistance shall comply with the relevant Standards.
3. Corrosion:
a. Products and materials, including fixings and concealed components, shall be
corrosion-resistant or protective coated to prevent corrosion.
b. The cut edges of factory-coated products shall be coated or otherwise treated to
ensure continuity of corrosion protection.
4. Ambient physical conditions:
a. The installed work shall be suitable for and resistant to ambient physical
conditions, including normal cleaning and maintenance procedures applicable to
the installed work.
5. Compatibility:
a. Adjacent products and materials shall be chemically and electrolytically
compatible with each other, substrates, and adjacent work, or shall be separated
by suitable products and procedures.
b. Adjacent products and materials, including adhesives and sealants, shall not
stain or contaminate, and shall not cause visual or structural defects in adjacent
materials.
6. Membrane barrier:
a. The membrane system shall provide a permanent barrier to moisture and water,
and shall be waterproof and resistant to vapour pressure, condensation, and
corrosion, and shall remain intact and properly fixed to the substrate under all
conditions.
b. Roof / terrace membranes shall properly dispose of all precipitation due to rain,
hail or snow.
c. Tanking membranes in contact with the ground shall be resistant to any chemical
action or contamination of the ground.
7. Thermal properties: Externally, the installed work shall include continuous thermal
insulation to minimize heat gain or loss from outside in accordance with the relevant
Standards.
1.9 TESTING
1. The Owner reserves the right of conduct laboratory test in any of the Independent
Laboratory in U.A.E. or anywhere in the world on the samples which taken from the
site for not less than Nos. (4) tests out of product leaflet specification at the
Contractor expense.
2. In case of failure of any of the test the product be removed and a new product shall
be fixed. In this case the Contractor has no right under any condition for an extension
of time and any financial claims due to action taken.
3. Flood testing: Carry out flood testing of installed membrane installation in accordance
with all the relevant Standards
• ASTM D5385 Test method for hydrostatic pressure resistance of
waterproofing membranes.

• Flood test membrane 48 hours minimum following completion of membrane

installation.
• Restrict water run-off from membrane area plugging drains and creating
dams or dikes, flood restricted area to depth of 10 cm maintain at his depth
for 48 hours.
• Repair any leaks which develop and retest.
• At completion of flood test, drain plugs will be removed.
• Similar test shall be repeated after completion of roofing work.
4. Verify proposed procedures before commencing. As a guide, procedures shall

include:
a. Verify that base-structure has adequate strength to withstand water load.
b. Notify ENGINEER at least two days before testing.
c. Plug drains, and install temporary bunds where required.
d. Flood test area to a minimum depth of 25 mm and leave for 48 hours.
e. Mark locations of leaks.
f. When membrane is dry, rectify in accordance with Product Information.
g. Repeat procedure until no leaks occur.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

1. This specification covers the selection of material to be used for roofing. Prior to
delivery of any material, the approval requirements detailed below shall be strictly
following up and related submittals shall be handed over in due time.
2.2 MATERIALS
1. Roofing Membranes: The membrane to be used shall comply with the specifications
as detailed in enclosed charts. Test reports shall be made available to the
Consultant/or Department upon request.
2. Insulation Boards: The insulation boards to be used shall comply with the
specifications as detailed in the enclosed charts.
3. Miscellaneous Materials
a. Primer: The primer to be used shall comply with all respect to ASTM D 41 and
shall be applied at a minimum rate of 250-300 g/Sq.m per coat.
b. Cold Adhesive:
• The cold applied roofing adhesive to be used shall comply with ASTM D
3019 type III and shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer for this specific
field of application.
• It shall be applied at a minimum rate of 500 g/sq.m i.e. 5 spots/sq.m.
4. Separation Layer: Non woven synthetic geotextile of 100 or 140 g/Sq.m (with 10%
tolerance).
5. Metal Flashing: 1.5mm minimum thick aluminum sheet, color at the consultant
request.
6. Mastic Sealant: Polysulphide, silicone or polyurethane rubber sealant to the approval
of the ENGINEER
7. Nails: Shall be stainless steel, complying with all respect to BS 1202-1:2002.

8. Storage of Materials
a. All materials shall be stored in dry area out of direct sunlight.
b. It is not permitted to store material on the building in such
concentrations as to impose excessive stress and strain on deck or structural
members.
c. In the event that any materials for use in this section deteriorate and become
unusable due to inadequate and poor storage they shall be removed from site as
instructed by the Consultant/Department and replaced at the Contractor’s
expenses.
3.0 EXECUTION

1. The Contractor is required to ensure the following:
a. All surface to be roofed and waterproofed shall be properly prepared by brushing,
cleaning and leaving the surfaces free from dirt, dust, grease, loose or projecting
particles of mortar or concrete.
b. All traces of salt shall be thoroughly sprayed with water and allowed to dry and
disappear from the surfaces before the application of the waterproofing system.
2. The roofing system shall be laid drain water freely into the rain water outlets.
3. All items to be installed on the roof which require penetrations through the roof
membrane and placed prior to the application of the membrane.
4. Fill voids and cracks in substrate, including walls as recommended by the membrane
and placed prior to the application of the membrane.
3.2 INSTALLATION
1. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instruction. Manufacturer’s
technical representative shall be present as necessary to ensure proper installation.
2. Membrane and Flashing
a. Membrane: Install membrane in strict compliance with manufacturer’s
instructions. One of the following laying methods are used world wide to install a
waterproofing membrane over its substrate.
• Fully bonded system: The membrane is 100% adhered.
• Partially bonded system: Adhesion by “spots” usually 15% of surface.
• Loose laid system: Membrane is not adhered at all.
• Using of any these systems shall be according to the type of waterproofing
system being used as demonstrated in the chart below.
b. Installation of the Insulation: The Contractor is required to:
• Place 50mm thick insulation where required in the waterproofing system,
tightly bull boards and staggering joints.
• Cutting the insulation to shape maintain 15mm clearance from projection in
inverted roof system.
• Bonding the insulation to deck with cold adhesive in conventional system.

c. Installation of the Flashing Membrane: Installation of a flashing membrane will be

in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instruction. The roofs shall receive a
flashing membrane consisting of the following built up:
• One coat of bitumen primer to ASTM D 41
• Laying of the flat area roofing system
• 20 cm reinforcing strip, fully torched on the angle, 10 cm horizontally + 10 cm
vertically.
• Flashing membrane full torched 20 cm horizontally + vertically to the required
height.
• Flash membrane into drain and items such as pipes and other items passing
through membrane.
• All joints must be sealed water and air tight, free of fish mouths and other
defects.
d. Installation of Expansion Joints
• The waterproofing system shall be laid strict conformity with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
• All surfaces to be waterproofed shall be properly prepared by brushing,
cleaning and leaving the surfaces free from dirt, dust, grease, loose or
projecting particles of mortar of concrete. All traces of salt shall be thoroughly
sprayed with water and allowed to dry and disappear from the surfaces
before the application of the priming coat.
• The width of the joint to be waterproofed shall be minimum 2 cm and a 3 x 3
cm chamfer is to be foreseen in the concrete edges.
• Then the concrete deck is primed 15-20 cm on each side of the joint,
chamfered edges of the joint shall not be primed.
• A 15-20 cm wide base strip 4mm glass reinforced bituminous membrane is
torched on each side of the joint.
• A 5mm thick unreinforced SBS membrane is torched 10-12mm on one edge
of the joint, formed in a U shape into the chamfered edge (A shovel stick is
the ideal tool) and then torched 10-12cm on the other edge, being kept
loosely laid onto the chamfered edges.
• To prevent water stagnation and dirt the place must be filled with a self
extinguishing expanded butyl foam backing rod.
• At the final stage the expansion joint must be protected by 4mm reinforced
membrane with granules or metal faced as required.
e. Installation of Roof Outlets:
• All drain outlets shall be located at the lowest part of the roofs.
• All drain outlets to be connected to a roofing system shall be fitted with a
built-in horizontal flange allowing for at least 100mm overlap with the
membrane in all directions.
• All flanges shall be located at R.C.C. slab level.
• Whenever PVC drain outlet is specified, the membrane must not be torched
over the PVC flange. A metal sheet, ductile, non corroding, at least 0.6mm
thick, shall be laid over the PVC (self adhesive metal sheet or glued with
compatible approved adhesive) then shall be primed to receive the
membrane.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF THE INVERTED ROOFING SYSTEM R.S.01

1. The roofs shall receive a roofing system consisting of the following built up:
a. 50mm minimum thick of foam concrete with a minimum density of 600 Kg/m³ with
a screed topping of falls.
b. A slip sheet, 100 g/Sq.m non woven geotextile, loose laid over the screed/or
foam concrete.
c. A 4 mm thick modified bitumen membrane, reinforced, finished on both sides
with a macro-perforated torch off film, loose laid over the slip- sheet with 80mm
side-laps and 150mm end-lap fully torched and seamed.
d. A separation layer, 100 g/Sq.m non woven geotextile.
e. As specified thermal insulation board.
f. A separation layer, 140 g/Sq m non woven geotextile.
2. Tiles Finish for R.S.01
a. A polyethylene foil 100 micron thick.
b. And as specified roof tiles laid over a 4 cm thick mortar bed.
c. Through tiles and mortar, provision for a 2 cm wide expansion joint to be filled
with mastic shall be made at roof perimeter and every 3 meters in both
directions. Mastic shall be 20 x 20mm laid onto approved backer rod.
3. Flashing:
a. Skirting, flashing and roof details shall receive one coat of primer, a 200mm
wide corner reinforcement strip and a 4mm thick modified bitumen flashing
membrane, granule finish or metal foil finish.
b. Membrane termination shall be protected by a counter flashing system (metal
flashing, groove)
4. Approved Insulation Boards:
a. Extruded polystyrene
b. Injected molded polystyrene

1. Cleaning:
finishes.
b. Keep installation areas clean and tidy during installation.
2. Protection: Protect installed work to prevent damage during subsequent building work
and or weather conditions. Ensure work is properly cured and hardened before
subsequent use.
3. Adjacent work:
adjacent surfaces.
4. Completion:


details of materials used and sources of supply, cleaning and repair procedures.
ROOFING MEMBRANES SPECIFICATIONS CHART

TECHNICAL MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS Test
CHARACTERISTICS Metho
d
RS:01 RS:02.A RS:02.B RS:03.A RS:03.B
1. NOMINAL DIMENSIONS AND SURFACES
Roll Length 10 M 8M 10 M 8M 10 M UEAtc
Roll Width 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M UEAtc
Thickness 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm UEAtc
Surfacing torch-off film
granules or metal foil torch-off film granules or metal foil torch-off film UEAtc
Under Facing sand or perforated sand or perforated
torch-off film torch-off film torch-off film UEAtc
film film
2. MODIFIED BITUMEN BINDER CHARACTERISTICS
Softening point >130 deg.C > 130 deg.C > 130 deg.C > 130 deg.C > 130 deg.C ASTM
D36
Penetration 25 0C 20-40 20-40 20-40 20-40 20-40 ASTM
D5
Cold Flexibility < -10 deg.C < -10 deg.C < -10 deg.C < -10 deg.C < -10 deg.C UEAtc
after ageing 6 months at 70 deg. C
Softening point >100 deg.C >100 deg.C >100 deg.C >100 deg.C >100 deg.C ASTM
D36
Cold flexibility < 0 deg.C < 0 deg.C < 0 deg.C < 0 deg.C < 0 deg.C UEAtc
3. FINISHED MEMBRANE CHARACTERISTICS
Cold flexibility < -5 deg.C < -5 deg.C < -5 deg.C < -5 deg.C < -5 deg.C UEAtc
Tear resistance >210 N >270 N >210 N >270 N >210 N UEAtc
Tensile strength >700 N/5cm >700 N/5cm > 700 N/5cm >700 N/5cm >700 N/5cm UEAtc
Elongation >40 % > 40 % > 40 % > 40% > 40 % UEAtc
Dimens.stability at 80
< 0.3 % < 0.2 % < 0.2 % < 0.2 % < 0.3 % UEAtc
deg C for 6 hours
Static Puncture
> 25 Kg > 25 Kg > 25 Kg > 25 Kg > 25 Kg UEAtc
Resistance
Dynamic Puncture
14 14 14 14 14 UEAtc
Resistance
Fatigue Resistance 2mm opening 2 mm opening 2 mm opening 2 mm opening 2 mm opening
500 cycles at 0 0C Pass when new Pass when new Pass when new Pass when new Pass when new UEAtc
200 cycles at 0 0C Pass after ageing Pass after ageing Pass after ageing Pass after ageing Pass after ageing UEAtc
Temperature Resist movement<2mm movement <2mm movement <2mm movement <2mm movement <2mm
UEAtc
2 hours vertical 60 deg. C 90 deg.C 80 deg.C 90 deg. C 80 deg. C
Creeping resistance at
no flow no flow no flow no flow no flow UNI
70 C on a substrate
for 192 hours for 192 hours for 192 hours for 192 hours for 192 hours 8202
inclined at 45 degrees
Resistance to brushing 30% loss after dry 30% loss after dry
of incorporated Mineral No Mineral scratch test No Mineral scratch test No Mineral
UEAtc
protection protection 50% loss after damp protection 50% loss after damp protection
scratch test scratch test
Water pressure 60 Kpa no leakage DIN
no leakage no leakage no leakage no leakage
pressure for 24 hours 16935
for 24 hours for 24 hours for 24 hours for 24 hours
UEAtc
Water resistance
Reinforcement Reinforcement Reinforcement Reinforcement Reinforcement
28 days in water at
not separated not separated not separated not separated not separated UEAtc
30 degree C then
from coating from coating from coating from coating from coating
drying

Chemical resistance H2S, NaC1, S02 H2S, NaC1, S02 H2S, NaC1, S02 H2S, NaC1, S02 H2S, NaC1, S02 UEAtc
Aging under UV for No cracks No cracks No cracks No cracks No cracks
UEAtc
2008 hours (Xenotest) at 0 deg.C at 0 deg.C at 0 deg.C at 0 deg.C at 0 deg.C
after aging 6 months at 70 degree C
Cold flexibility < 0 deg. C < 0 deg. C < 0 deg. C < 0 deg. C < 0 deg. C UEAtc
Heat resistance > 90 deg.C > 100 deg.C > 100 deg.C > 100 deg.C > 90 deg.C UEAtc
Test methods and tolerances: UEAtc, MOAT 27, 30 & 31 unless otherwise stated.

THERMAL INSULATION PERFORMANCES CHART
Characteristics Density Thermal Conductivity Compressive Water Vapour Water Linear coeff. Of
(Average) minimum Strength at 10% Permeability Absorption by expans. & contrac.
deflection submersion
Test Method DIN 53420 DIN 52612 DIN 53421 DIN 52615 DIN 53428
ASTM D1622 ASTM C177 C158 (76) ASTM D 1621-73 ASTM C 355-64 ASTM D 2342 ASTM D 696
Units Kg/m³ lb/ft³ W/mK BTU. in/Ft².h PSI Kpa Perm-Inch % by volume
mean temp. W/mk BTU
0
Extruded fresh 0.016 0.110 DIN 0.2% 70.10-6 C-1
Polystyrene 35.0 2.2 4.4D/40F 0.27 0.190 43.0 300.0 0.4 - 0.6 ASTM 1% 39.10-6 0F-1
10oC 50oF 0.032 0.220
5 years 24 C
75 F
Injected molded 0.017 DIN
Polystyrene 32.0 2.0 10 0C 50 0F 43.0 300.0 0.5 DIN 0.1 % 0
70.10-6 C-1
0.028 ASTM ASTM <1% 39.10-6 0F-1
0.021 DIN
Expanded 32.0 2.0 10 0C 50 0F 36.0 251.0 1.0 or less 2.0 or less 70.10-6 0C-1
Polystyrene 0.030 ASTM 39.10-6 0F-1
at 24 0C mean test temperature

24 Hours 0.020 0.139 *2.2 ng/Pa.s.m 70 0C. 7 days
Polyurethane 35.0 2.2 30.0 210.0 1.5
6 Months 0.023 0.160 *1.5 perm-inch 0.3% linear change
Rigid boards
5 Years 0.025 0.173
7 days, 2“head UNI/CT/242/74
*2.5 perm-inch 0.08 lb/sq.ft At 100oC +0.6 to
Polyurethane Aged
35.0 2.2 0.023 0.160 30.0 210.0 *3.65x10- 4x10-4 g/mm² 1%
sprayed foam 50 0F/10 0C
30gm/Ns At -20oC 0.6 to -
0.8%

SECTION 07600 - CLADDING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................ 2

1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................... 2
1.2 REFERENCES ......................................................................................... 3
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................... 4
1.4 SUBMISSIONS ......................................................................................... 6
1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE ................................................ 7
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ......................................................................... 8
1.7 WARRANTIES ......................................................................................... 8
1.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS........................................................ 9
1.9 TESTING ................................................................................................ 18
2.0 PRODUCTS............................................................................................ 18
2.1 CLADDING SYSTEMS ........................................................................... 18
2.2 FIXED LOUVERS .................................................................................. 19
2.3 COMPRESSED FIBRE-CEMENT CLADDING ...................................... 21
2.4 METAL PANEL CLADDING ................................................................... 22
2.5 METALWORK FABRICATION .............................................................. 23
2.6 FIBRE-CEMENT SHEET ........................................................................ 24
2.7 ALUMINIUM............................................................................................ 24
2.8 STAINLESS STEEL ............................................................................... 25
2.9 FIXINGS ................................................................................................. 26
2.10 FLASHINGS AND BARRIERS ............................................................... 27
2.11 SEALANTS ............................................................................................. 28
2.12 FIRE-SAFING ......................................................................................... 29
2.13 SECONDARY STEEL FRAMING ........................................................... 29
2.14 POWDER COATING .............................................................................. 29
2.15 INSULATION TO CLADDING / EXTERNAL WALLS ............................. 30
2.16 BULK INSULATION ................................................................................ 30
3.0 EXECUTION ........................................................................................... 31
3.2 CLADDING INSTALLATION .................................................................. 31
3.3 SEALANT INSTALLATION..................................................................... 32
3.5 COMPLETION DOCUMENTS................................................................ 34
Section 07600 Cladding Page 1 of 34

SECTION 07600 - CLADDING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Generally:
a. Provide a complete proprietary and custom pre-finished sheet cladding
system, including fixings, trims, flashings, sealants, and finishes.
b. The work of this trade is performance-based.
c. For performance-based work, develop and document construction details
in accordance with the product selections, design intent and performance
requirements indicated in the Drawings and Specifications.
d. Make comprehensive submissions including Control Samples, Product
Information, shop drawings, computations, and prototypes as applicable
to verify compliance.
2. Read this Trade Section in conjunction with the EMPLOYER’S
REQUIREMENTS Section
3. Related works and documentation:
a. DRAWINGS for locations and extent of work.
b. Section 01000 “General Specifications”.
c. Section 05000 “Structural Steel Works”
d. Section 05100 “Aluminum Metal Works”.
e. Section 08815 “Internal Glazing”.
f. Section 08970 “Exterior Glazed Assemblies Windows And Entrances”.
g. Section 08980 “Glazing Particular Specification”.
h. Specifications of other trade that require coordination with this trade.
i. FINISHES SCHEDULE for system descriptions and finishes.
j. BUILDING MOVEMENTS REPORT, if applicable.
k. WIND REPORT, if applicable. The WIND REPORT shall prevail over
Standards.
l. ACOUSTIC REPORT, if applicable. Where there is a discrepancy
between related documents, if any, the ACOUSTIC REPORT shall
prevail.
m. Coordinate the work of this trade with the base-structure, services and
adjacent work.

1.2 REFERENCES
1. Comply with the current edition of all relevant Standards to include:
a. ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)
AA ADM (2000) Aluminum Design Manual:
Specification & Guidelines for
Aluminum Structures
b. AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)
AISI SG-973 (1996) Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual
c. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 463/A 463M (2000) Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated,
by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 653/A 653M (2000) Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
Coated (Galvannealed) by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 792/A 792M (1999) Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-
Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-
Dip Process
ASTM B 209 (2000) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate
ASTM B 209M (2000) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate (Metric)
ASTM C 518 (1998) Steady-State Heat Flux
Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter
Apparatus
ASTM D 522 (1993a) Mandrel Bend Test of Attached
Organic Coatings
ASTM D 610 (1995) Evaluating Degree of Rusting
on Painted Steel Surfaces
ASTM D 714 (1987; R 1994el) Evaluating Degree of Blistering of
Paints
ASTM D 968 (1993) Abrasion Resistance of Organic
Coatings by Falling Abrasive
ASTM D 1654 (1992) Evaluation of Painted or
Coated Specimens Subjected to
Corrosive Environments
ASTM D 2244 (1995) Calculation of Color Differences
from Instrumentally Measured
Color Coordinates
ASTM D 2247 (1999) Testing Water Resistance of
Coatings in 100% Relative
Humidity
ASTM D 2794 (1993; R 1999el) Resistance of Organic Coatings to
the Effects of Rapid
Deformation (Impact)

ASTM D 3359 (1997) Measuring Adhesion by Tape

Test
ASTM D 4214 (1998) Evaluating Degree of Chalking
of Exterior Paint Films
ASTM D 4397 (1996) Polyethylene Sheeting for
Construction, Industrial, and
Agricultural Applications
ASTM D 5894 (1996) Standard Practice for Cyclic
Salt Fog/UV Exposure of
Painted Metal, (Alternating
Exposures in a Fog/Dry Cabinet
and a UV/Condensation
Cabinet)
ASTM E 84 (2000a) Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials
ASTM E 96 (2000) Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials
ASTM G 154 (2000ael) Standard Practice for Operating
Fluorescent Light Apparatus for
UV Exposure of Nonmetallic
Materials
d. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)
ASCE 7 (1998) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures
2. Authorities and permits:
a. Any proposed substitutions for external materials shall be subject to
approval (or re-approval) by the relevant authority. All applications for
such approval shall be made through the superintendent. There shall be
no direct application to the authority except through the Superintendent.
Pay for all costs associated with such approval including the costs of the
Principal and the Superintendent, and their respective consultants

1. Inspections:
a. Give sufficient notice so the Engineer may inspect significant stages of
work, including:
• Products delivered to site, before installation.
• Set-out of work, before installation.
• Embedded items in place, before building-in.
• Substrates, including framing, prepared and ready for installation,
before commencing.
• Work to be covered over and concealed spaces, before covering
over.

b. Inspection shall take place under lighting conditions equivalent to actual

installed lighting, bright sunshine or low angle sunshine conditions, as
appropriate.
c. Where installed finishes are subject to oblique viewing angles, inspection
shall include oblique viewing angles.
d. The Principal may engage a specialist third party inspector to inspect
significant stages of the work in the factory. Coordinate and cooperate
with the inspector and give sufficient notice of significant stages of the
work, including:
• Preparation of substrates before application of first coat.
• Preparation and condition of intermediate coats before applying next
coat.
e. The Engineer may require inspection of cladding panels at the factory
progressively before delivery to site.
f. The minimum number of panels for each inspection shall be arranged
with the Engineer, but generally shall be in complete stages or logical
groupings of finished work.
g. Panels shall be placed so that primary faces, returns and edges can be
inspected and compared with Control Samples with adequate lighting for
both close and comparative inspection.
h. Ensure that primary faces can be viewed from not less than three metres
in daylight.
2. Samples:
a. Submit representative samples of products, finishes and fabrications.
• Control Samples for surface finishes and applied coatings (not less
than 600 x 600 mm).
• Preliminary samples for surface finishes, not less than three, to
demonstrate range.
• Control Samples for edges and arrises, including site cutting and
finishing.
• Typical fabrications and assemblies, including junctions and fixings.
• Joint system components, sections, gaskets and sealants.
• Miscellaneous and concealed materials including insulation and
backing sheets

• Louvre systems
• Brackets and fixings.
3. First completed example:
a. Submit the first completed example of each type of installed work and
finish to establish the required standard before proceeding with the
remainder of work (not less than four panels meeting at a corner).
4. Inspection and Test Plan:
a. Submit and implement Inspection and Test Plans (ITPs) for quality
assurance in accordance with the relevant Standards (ISO 9002).
b. Hold points shall include:
• Shop drawings.
• Control Samples.
• First completed example of installed work on-site.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
a. Submit Product Information for proprietary products, including selection
guidelines, preparation and installation instructions, and test results.
b. Include Product Information for:
• Metal sheet, sections and extrusions, including alloy composition and
properties.
• Panel construction, including backing sheets, framing and stiffening.
• Anchorages, fixings and brackets.
• Flashings and trim.
• Sealants, gaskets, membranes, vapor barriers.
• Insulation
• Protective and decorative coatings, including preparation and pre-
treatment.
2. Shop drawings:
a. Submit manufacturer's standard construction details (loads and spans)
indicating relevant selections. If the actual conditions are not indicated in
standard details, submit additional shop drawings for the relevant
conditions.
b. Submit shop drawings to verify construction details, set-out, and
performance requirements of custom cladding systems.
Include details for:

• Set-out:
• Fabrication:
• Assembly, installation and connection details:
• Hardware, fittings, trim and accessories:
• Finishes and coatings:
• Maintenance access and replacement:
• Cores, chases, and built-in fixings:
• Numbering system:
3. Computations:
a. Submit manufacturer's standard computation tables (loads and spans)
and test data indicating relevant selections. If the actual conditions are
not included in the standard tables, submit additional computations or
test data for the actual conditions.
b. Submit computations to verify the structural performance including wind
loads, movements, and deflections.
c. Submit computations to verify that the thermal performance of the
system complies with the required heat loads, U-values and shading
coefficients.
4. Engineer's Certification:
a. Engage and pay for an experienced independent engineer to certify all
computations.
b. Submit certification progressively. Submit a schedule which records all
items which require certification and the ongoing status of such
certification.
c. The certifying engineer shall not be the engineer that prepared the
computations being certified.

1. Generally:
a. Protect products during delivery, handling and storage from weather,
damage or staining with suitable packing and wrapping. Store clear of
ground, concrete or damp surfaces on suitable packers spaced to


1. Interface with adjacent cladding work:
a. Construct suitable interface work between the cladding work of this trade
and preceding adjacent cladding work by other trades.
b. Interface work shall include trims, finishes, flashings, sealants as
required to complete the work in accordance with the design intent and
the performance requirements of the balance of the work.
c. Submit shop drawings for all interface work and conditions.
d. Coordinate and cooperate with trades for adjacent cladding work.
1.7 WARRANTIES
1. Generally:
a. Provide an approved warranty from Practical Completion for a warranty
period of 10-years.
b. Cladding shall be a complete system in which all components act
together without failure of any part. Failure that may be attributed to the
failure of one or more particular components shall not limit responsibility
for the complete system.
c. Defects shall not be visible when viewed from more than 1500 mm in
daylight.
2. Warranty conditions for envelope / cladding:
a. The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the
following:
• Failure of system to exclude water and weather from inside the
building.
• Failure of system to deliver water to drainage system.
• Structural integrity, including dislodgement due to wind.
• Failure of finished surfaces including discoloration, delamination,
cracking or pitting.
• Damage, deterioration, perforation or staining due to contact or close
proximity with dissimilar metals, substrates, adjacent materials or the
environment generally.
3. Warranty conditions for sealants:
following:
• Cohesion and adhesion.
• Staining or contaminating adjacent surfaces.

• Change in hardness greater than ± 5 points on the Shore A

durometer scale.
4. Warranty conditions for applied coatings / finishes:
following:
• Failure of protective coating to prevent corrosion or staining due to
corrosion.
• Suitability of coating system for substrate types, exposure and use.
• Ultra-violet light, atmospheric pollution or weathering.
• Correct preparation of substrates.
• Primer, sealer and base-coats.
• Delamination, loss of bond, peeling, flaking, loose or drummy work.
• Cracking, cupping, buckling, erosion, chipping, crazing, blistering,
perforations.
• Staining and discoloration.
b. Chalking (greater than 8 points for non-metallic colours, or 6 points for
non-metallic whites, measured in accordance with ASTM D4214).
c. Fading or colour change greater than 5 Hunter Colour Difference Units
measured in accordance with ASTM D2244, or colour variation in
adjacent sections greater than the variation of the approved control
sample range.
• ASTM D2244 Method for calculation of colour differences
from instrumentally measured colour coordinates.
• ASTM D4214 Method for evaluating degree of chalking of
exterior paint films.

1. Loads:
a. The installed work, including fixings and framing, shall accommodate all
safety. Comply with the relevant Standards.
2. Dead loads:
a. The installed work shall accommodate all dead loads due to self-weight
and applied work without causing over-stress or permanent deflection of
any component in accordance with the relevant Standards.
b. Refer DEFAULT REQUIREMENTS Clause.

3. Maintenance loads:
a. The installed work shall accommodate loads and deflections due to
maintenance personnel, procedures and equipment. Comply with the
relevant Standards.
b. Accessible horizontal or near horizontal surfaces including parapets,
sun-shades and box gutters shall be considered to be trafficable and
capable of supporting such loads without damage or distortion, failure of
fixings, or loss of water tightness.
c. Provide signage indicating maximum live loading to trafficable surfaces.
d. Coordinate with BMU Section and obtain details of proposed equipment,
procedures and loads.
e. Provide required fixings, guides and accessories, and required
tolerances for the operation of maintenance equipment.
f. Coordinate with FIXTURES AND FITTINGS Section and obtain details of
proposed equipment, procedures and loads.
g. Provide suitable connection points, fixings, guides and accessories, and
required tolerances for the operation of a life-line maintenance
equipment.
4. Wind loads:
a. The installed work shall accommodate the wind loads applicable to the
site in accordance with the relevant Standards.
b. Submit details and computations of any additional bracing and framing, if
required.
c. Refer to the WIND REPORT, if applicable.
5. Impact-resistant construction:
a. Cladding panels shall have sufficient thickness, reinforcement and
backing in appropriate combinations, to resist impact damage, including
damage due to hail and human, and buckling due to thermal expansion.
6. Movements:
thermal movements, without failure or the transfer of loads from the
base-structure to the work of this trade.
b. Refer to the BUILDING MOVEMENTS REPORT, if applicable.
7. Control joints:

a. Construct control joints where indicated or required to accommodate

movements in the substrates or base-structure and in the installed work
where required, in accordance with the Product Information and relevant
Standards .
b. Control joints shall have sufficient movement capability to accommodate
all movements in the substrate or base-structure, and within finished
work.
c. Include required control joint fillers and inserts.
d. Verify width, spacing and location of control joints before commencing.
Do not relocate or eliminate joints indicated on the Drawings, or make
joints not indicated, without approval.
e. Control joint spacing shall not exceed the lesser requirements of the
Product Information, the structural grid dimensions, the spacing indicated
on the Drawings, or the relevant Standards.
f. Control joints in finished work shall extend full depth to substrate or
base-structure, and shall coincide with joints in substrates and base-
structure.
g. Refer DEFAULT REQUIREMENTS Clause.
8. Wind-load deflections:
a. Deflection between any two points of any member due to wind loads
shall not exceed:
• Framing for stone cladding: Span/360, but not more than 5 mm.
b. Deflection between any two points of any member due to wind loads
shall not exceed:
• Framing generally: Span/180, but not more than 10 mm.
• Sheeting: Span/90, but not more than 10 mm.
c. Vertical deflection due to dead loads of horizontal framing members shall
not exceed the lesser of span/480 or 3 mm.
9. Thermal movements:
a. The installed work shall accommodate all thermal movements due to
ambient temperature variations by suitable joints and brackets with
movement capacity. Submit verification.
b. The installed work shall enable thermal movement to take place freely in
the plane of the system without causing buckling, failure of joint seals,
undue stress on fixings or other harmful effects.
c. Refer DEFAULT REQUIREMENTS Clause.

10. Connections:
a. The installed work shall be connected to the base-structure or substrates
in a neat, substantial manner by correctly selected and located
connections which transfer the loads from the work without
displacement, distortion, or damage to the fixings, substrates or the
adjacent work.
b. Connections shall accommodate movement requirements. Make
provision where required for connections for subsequent applied or
adjacent work
c. Connections shall include anchorages, brackets and fixings, and
associated flanges, sleeves, holes, mating surfaces, welds and
adhesives where appropriate.
d. Connections shall accommodate the worst base-structure tolerances and
uneven load sharing conditions.
e. Indicate and differentiate between dead load and restraint connections
on shop drawings, where applicable.
f. There shall be no direct fixing or close contact between any part of the
cladding system and the base-structure, except through suitable
approved connections.
g. Connections shall have sufficient adjustment to ensure the correct
location, alignment and tolerances of the installed work, and enable rigid
fixing after the work is finally positioned.
11. Fixing to concrete:
a. Fixing into concrete shall be to required depth without clash with in-situ
concrete reinforcement.
b. Where drilling clashes with reinforcement, repair empty holes with
suitable cementitious grout and rectify to match adjacent work. Submit
details of materials and procedures, if directed.
c. Coordinate with CONCRETE Section to locate reinforcement positions.
d. Avoid clash where practicable by inspecting concrete reinforcement shop
drawings, and by on-site inspection of concrete profiles and fixing
locations.
e. Indicate relationship between proposed fixings and concrete
reinforcement on shop drawings for the work of this trade, if directed.
f. Make provision for out-of-position concrete at 2x the tolerances indicated
in the concrete reinforcement shop drawings or Contract Documents.

g. Give consideration to contingency procedures for site conditions

including :
• Conflict with reinforcement
• Excessive out-of-tolerance concrete
• Honeycombing or other concrete defects
• Conflict with concrete joints, and other structural details
• Mislocated, missed and incorrect embedments
h. Provide sufficient adjustment in fixings and brackets to accommodate

concurrent worst-case base-structure tolerances, fixing positions, load
eccentricity and packing location. Excessive shimming will not be
approved.
12. Smoke isolation:
a. The installed work shall ensure smoke isolation between adjacent
compartments and floors where indicated or required.
b. Indicate details of smoke isolation on shop drawings.
c. Provide durable seals, baffles and fire-safing as required.
13. Corrosion:
a. Products and materials, including fixings and concealed components,
shall be corrosion-resistant or protective coated to prevent corrosion.
b. The cut ends and edges of factory coated products shall be protective
coated after fabrication to ensure continuity of corrosion protection.
c. Secondary framing steel in dry cavities shall be protective coated.
Secondary framing steel in wet cavities and outside of air seals shall be
hot dip galvanized.
14. Compatibility:
compatible with each other, substrates, and adjacent work, or shall be
separated by suitable products and procedures. Adjacent products and
materials, including adhesives and sealants, shall not stain or
contaminate, and shall not cause visual or structural defects in adjacent
materials.
15. Weather protection:
a. The installed work shall be water-tight and weather-tight, and shall
exclude water or moisture from entering the inside of the building in all
weather conditions.

b. The installed work shall discharge all water and moisture, including
leakage and condensation, into the drainage system or outside the
building.
c. Water shall be not trapped or retained within the work.
d. Joint sealants, gaskets and flashings, including concealed and
inaccessible items, shall not corrode or dislodge, and shall remain
effective for the service life of the work.
16. Thermal properties: (External)
a. The installed work shall provide continuous thermal insulation to
minimize heat gain or loss from outside in accordance with the relevant
Standards.
b. Refer DEFAULT REQUIREMENTS Clause.
17. Air leakage / infiltration: (External)
a. The cladding system shall minimize air infiltration from outside the
building.
b. Indicate methods for reducing air infiltration on shop drawings, including
seals and baffles within the work and at junctions with adjacent work.
Coordinate with relevant trades for adjacent work.
c. ASTM E783 Test method for field measurement of air leakage through
installed exterior windows and doors.
18. Maintenance and service life:
a. The installed work shall retain good long-term durability, performance
and appearance, taking into consideration normal wear and tear, ageing
and weathering, without failure or breakdown of individual materials and
components, and as a result of normal routine operating, cleaning and
maintenance procedures.
19. Cleaning:
a. Submit details of suitable generic and proprietary cleaning products and
procedures. Indicate any cleaning products and procedures which should
NOT be used.
b. To the greatest extent practicable, external surfaces shall not attract or
absorb air-borne dirt and pollution, and shall be self-cleaning.
20. Maintenance equipment:
a. Coordinate cladding system with building maintenance equipment, and
accommodate required maintenance loads and deflections.
b. Refer to FIXTURES AND FITTINGS Section for maintenance equipment.

c. Receive and build-in components supplied by the FIXTURES AND

FITTINGS Section in accordance with the required tolerances for the
correct operation of maintenance equipment.
d. Indicate details on shop drawings.

e. Coordinate cladding system with BMU Section for correct operation of
proposed maintenance system.
f. Receive and build-in components supplied by the BMU Section in
accordance with the required tolerances for the correct operation of
maintenance equipment.
g. Indicate details on shop drawings, including tolerances and effects of
long-term wear.
21. Acoustics:
a. External cladding and glazing shall be installed to prevent the transfer of
external noise levels to the inside of the building.
b. Submit details including manufacturers product information and test
results
c. Include shop drawings for acoustic construction indicating suitable
components and installation procedures to reduce sound transmission to
the inside of the building
d. Unless otherwise indicated, glass shall be laminated or IGU types.
e. Verify glass types before commencing.
22. Self generated and structure-borne noise:
a. The installed work shall:
• Not transmit or amplify structure-borne sound.
• Not generate audible noise due to flutter, vibration, whistling,
creaking or rattling.
b. Function noiselessly under all conditions including substrate movements,
temperature changes, wind, and maintenance and cleaning operations.
c. Provide suitable means of dampening contact vibration from the base-
structure and dampening panel drumming.
23. Services reticulation:
a. Build-in, cover and conceal reticulated services passing through the
work.
b. Coordinate with relevant SERVICES trades, and construct suitable
relevant SERVICES trade.

c. Ensure suitable access for later maintenance or replacement.

24. Secondary framing and bracing:
a. Provide sufficient additional framing and bracing to ensure the work is
other trades, and at openings, terminations and junctions.
b. Additional framing and bracing shall be integrated with the work and
concealed.
c. Coordinate with related trades as required, and verify types and loads of
applied work.
d. External applied work may include canopies, banners, flagpoles, lighting
and signage.
25. Lightning protection:
a. The installed work shall ensure continuous electrical conductivity within
the framing for connection to the lightning protection system, in
accordance with the relevant Standards.
b. Include connections and earthing straps for connection by the
ELECTRICAL SERVICES trade.
26. Fabrication tolerances:
a. Fabrication tolerances of components and assemblies generally shall not
exceed:
• Length and width: ± 2 mm.
• Diagonals: ± 3 mm.
• Flatness: ± 2 mm per meter length (maximum 5 mm).
• Edge straightness: ± 2 mm per meter length (maximum 5 mm).
• Maximum corner radius (cut edges): 1 mm.
• Maximum corner radius (folded edges): 3 mm.
• Misalignment of mating surfaces at junctions: 0 mm.
• Joint widths (other than hairline joints): ± 10% of design width.
27. Installation tolerances (Cladding):
a. Installation tolerances shall not exceed:
• Position on plan, or vertical surface: ± 3 mm.
• Deviation in level (horizontal): Not more than 1 in 1000 (maximum 3
mm).
• Deviation in plumb (vertical): Not more than 1 in 1000 (maximum 3
mm).

• Misalignment of adjacent surfaces at joints: ± 1 mm.

b. Installation tolerances shall not be cumulative and shall not include base-
structure or fabrication tolerances.
c. Cladding panel edges shall align from one panel to another to ensure
continuous and even joints of uniform width along each joint alignment
and plane of finished work.
d. Tolerances of joints and at junction details shall take precedence over
tolerances of panels and major components.
e. Joints widths and alignment at open joints which exceed 5 mm difference
may be grounds for rejection of the adjacent panels.
28. Vermin
a. The complete installation shall be vermin-proof. Provide approved
corrosion resistant flashings and baffles, and construct work to prevent
access and concealed breeding places for vermin.
29. Staining:
a. Parapets, cappings and related horizontal surfaces shall not shed
surface water or moisture onto adjacent visible cladding surfaces in such
a way which may cause staining due to the concentration of atmospheric
pollutants and dust, or the products of corrosion.
b. Such surfaces shall be sloped to drain surface water or moisture away
from visible cladding surfaces and into the roof drainage system.
c. Include additional vertical upstands, gutters or other drainage details
where there is a risk of over-flow due to surface ponding, wind effects, or
over-run from adjacent steeper surfaces.
30. Manufacture and grade of coatings:
a. Coating products for each coating system shall be from one
manufacturer. Do not combine products from different manufacturers. All
materials used in each installation area and finish type shall be from the
same production batch.
31. Birds :
a. Construct external cladding and related parapets, capping and sills, in
such a way to deter or prevent birds perching and roosting.
32. Mould and Fungus
a. The installed work shall not enable the growth of algae or fungus due to
trapped or ponded water, and shall not contribute to staining on visible
surfaces due to algae or fungus.

1.9 TESTING
1. Adhesion testing (Coatings):
After installation:
a. Arrange and pay for on-site adhesion testing of applied coatings by a
registered testing laboratory in accordance with the relevant Standards.
b. The frequency or rate of testing shall be not less than:
• Ten random locations per floor.
2. Dry film thickness testing (Coatings):
After installation:
a. Arrange and pay for on-site dry film thickness (DFT) testing of applied
coatings by a registered testing laboratory in accordance with the
relevant Standards.
b. The frequency or rate of testing shall be not less than:
• Ten random locations per floor.
3. Performance-test prototype
a. Arrange and pay for testing by a registered testing laboratory of a full
scale performance-test prototype to demonstrate compliance with the
‘acceptable performance criteria' in accordance with the relevant
Standards.
b. Refer to Section 08910 - CURTAIN WALL TEST SPECIFICATION for
detailed requirements.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 CLADDING SYSTEMS

1. Generally:
a. Cladding systems shall be designed and installed all in accordance with
established design principles and the relevant Standards.
b. Cladding systems shall include anchorages, brackets, fixings, framing
and furring, stiffening, cappings, flashings, sills, trim, sealants, back-up
drains, back-up walls, weep holes, and accessories, as appropriate and
required.
c. Where the copyright, license or intellectual property of a system or any of
its components, including aluminum extrusions, is owned by a third party,
obtain the necessary rights or licenses and comply with any conditions.
Submit evidence of approval and compliance.
d. Fixings shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated.

2. Face-sealed joints:
a. Provide face-sealed sealant joints at the following locations:
• At external joints between cladding panels where indicated or
required.
• At external and internal joints between cladding panels and adjacent
work and windows.
• Elsewhere indicated.
3. Carry out sealing to inside joints progressively at the time of cladding
installation using the same or compatible sealant materials.
4. Face-sealed joints shall be fire-rated joints where indicated or required.
5. Face-sealed joints shall be acoustic-rated where indicated or required.
2.2 FIXED LOUVERS

1. Generally :
a. Fixed external louvers shall be complete approved systems
manufactured from proprietary or custom sections and components, to
match Control Samples, installed in accordance with the Product
Information and relevant Standards.
b. Submit details including Product Information, computations and shop
drawings.
c. Submit manufacturer’s air-flow test results and verification of correct
selection and coordination where required for mechanical air-flow
requirements.
d. Fixed external louvers shall be complete with frames, flashings, fixings,
trims and accessories.
e. Install louvers with concealed fixings and by methods which resist
unauthorized removal.
f. Unless otherwise approved, louver blades shall be of two-stage
(stepped) profile.
g. Unless otherwise indicated, louvers shall be fabricated from aluminum
extrusions, finished to match adjacent cladding.
2. Loads :
a. Louver assemblies shall withstand the design wind loads without failure
or permanent distortion, and without audible blade flutter.
b. Louvers shall not deflect more than span/120 at the design wind loads.
3. Air flow requirements :

a. Louver assemblies shall be appropriate for the required free air flow for
natural and mechanical ventilation systems in accordance with the
relevant Standards.
b. Coordinate with MECHANICAL SERVICES Section for airflow
requirements and connection interface with ductwork. Where not
required for air flow, provide rigid baffles (back-pans).
c. Connection will be carried out by MECHANICAL SERVICES Section.
d. Louver assemblies shall be compatible with ductwork and operable
dampers by MECHANICAL SERVICES Section, if required, and shall not
exceed required air infiltration limits.
4. Environmental protection and drainage :
a. Louver assemblies shall restrict the entry of wind and rain to the inside of
the building.
b. Louver assemblies shall be self draining with internal drainage drip trays,
channels and outlets.
c. Internal drainage components shall be Grade 316 stainless steel unless
otherwise approved.
5. Baffles and Mesh :
a. Louver assemblies shall prevent the entry of birds and vermin to the
inside of the building.
b. Provide stainless steel bird mesh in tamper proof removable screens to
the inside of louvers. Mesh size shall be nominal 12mm.
6. Back-pans for louver construction :
a. Back-pans for louver shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent excessive
deflection under ambient wind loads.
b. Back-pans shall prevent air leakage and shall be sealed at all edges.
c. Back-pan coatings shall be durable under conditions of high humidity
and temperature shall be non-gassing.
d. Back-pans shall be powder coated where required for visual consistency
e. Colour shall be black or dark grey unless otherwise indicated
f. Unless otherwise indicated, back-pans for louver construction shall be
fabricated out of :
• Aluminum sheet not less than 1.2mm thickness, anodized or powder
coated.
2.3 COMPRESSED FIBRE-CEMENT (CFC) CLADDING

1. Generally:

a. Compressed fiber-cement sheet (CFC) cladding shall be complete

proprietary systems, to match Control Samples, factory manufactured
complete with fixing points and stiffening, suitable for the location and the
intended function, in accordance with the Product Information and
relevant Standards.
b. Submit details. Verify compliance with shop drawings and computations.
Include details of junctions and compatibility with other cladding
components and adjacent work.
c. Compressed fiber-cement sheet for cladding shall be finished with an
approved durable coating.
2. Sheet:
a. Compressed fiber-cement sheet for external cladding shall be 9 mm thick
unless otherwise indicated or approved.
b. Compressed fiber-cement sheet shall be resistant to water penetration.
3. Jointing:
a. Jointing systems shall be weather-proof and self-draining, and shall
accommodate base-structure thermal and wind movements and
deflections.
b. Ensure joints drain to the exterior of the building, and provide continuity
of drainage at panel intersections.
c. Fixings shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated or approved.
d. Fixings shall accommodate thermal, base-structure and other
movements. Holes for fixings shall be over-sized to accommodate
movements.
e. Support framing, fixings and concealed surfaces shall have an approved
corrosion-resistant treatment.
f. Include compressible gaskets and elastomeric sealants as required.
g. Site fixings shall be recessed below finished surfaces, filled, sanded
flush and finished to match adjacent surfaces. Provide backing and
reinforcement as required.
h. Ensure filling has cured properly before sanding and finishing.
4. Site-applied finishes to CFC:
a. Provide standard un-finished compressed fiber-cement sheet prepared
for site finishing where indicated.
b. Site-applied finishes may include standard proprietary paints and
textured coatings.

c. Refer PAINTING Section for site-applied finishes to compressed fiber-

cement.
d. Verify whether surface fixings are finished flush or raised head types
before commencing.
e. Flush surface fixings shall be recessed below adjacent finished surfaces,
filled, sanded flush and finished to match adjacent surfaces.
5. Factory-applied finishes to CFC:
a. Provide factory-finished, compressed fiber-cement sheet where
indicated.
b. Factory-applied finishes shall be durable two pack polyurethane
coatings.
c. Pre-finished sheet cladding systems shall be concealed-fixed unless
otherwise approved. Where indicated as visible fixing, submit for
approval colour matched or contrasting caps as annotated.
2.4 METAL PANEL CLADDING

1. Generally:
a. Proprietary metal panel cladding shall be an approved established
proprietary system to match Control Samples, selected, detailed and
installed in accordance with the Product Information.
b. Custom metal panel cladding shall be a complete approved system to
match Control Samples, design developed, detailed and installed in
accordance with the approved shop drawings.
c. Submit details. Include shop drawings and computations. Include details
of junctions and compatibility with other cladding components and
adjacent work.
d. Cladding panels shall be factory manufactured complete with fixing
points and stiffening. Support framing, fixings and concealed surfaces
shall have an approved corrosion-resistant treatment.
2. Panel flatness / alignment (metal cladding):
a. Ensure a high standard of surface flatness, joint and edge straightness,
and alignment of mating surfaces to prevent undulations, 'oil-canning'
distortion or warping.
b. Selection of materials, reinforcement, fabrication and installation
procedures shall ensure a high standard of surface flatness, joint and
edge straightness, and alignment of mating surfaces.

c. Fabricate work using suitable procedures for cutting and cut edge
treatment, stiffening and the tightening of fixings, support framing,
backing sheets, ribs and suitable material thickness.
d. For sheet materials stored in coils, carry out 'stretcher leveling to
remove undulations and wrinkles.
3. Edges and corners:
a. Cladding panel edges shall be folded and dressed down, or cut square
and reinforced with extruded sections fixed with welded studs.
b. Cladding panel corners and joints shall be welded or brought to tight
hairline and sealed.
4. Joints:
a. Joints shall be face-sealed with a suitable durable sealant.
b. Verify sealant colour before commencing.
5. Panel backing:
a. Where required to be insulated, cladding panels shall be fully enclosed
with a polystyrene core and sheet backing, sealed at edges and corners
to prevent moisture entry. Polystyrene shall be a suitable fire and smoke
retardant type.
b. Surface sheet shall be fully bonded to durable marine grade plywood
backing, not less than 12 mm thickness, or other suitable backing sheet
to ensure sound deadening and stiffening.
c. Backing shall accommodate thermal expansion without buckling or
delamination
2.5 METALWORK FABRICATION

1. Generally:
a. Fabricate metalwork to match Control Samples in accordance with
approved shop drawings and relevant Standards.
b. Cut edges, drilled holes, joints and surfaces shall be clean, neat, free
from burrs and indentations. Remove sharp edges without excessive or
uneven radiusing.
2. Joints:
a. Visible joints shall be accurately scribed and fitted to fine hairline contact
without edge projection or misalignment. Ensure continuity of surface
finish, colour and texture without variation.
3. Holes:

a. Make holes and connections for site assembly and to accommodate the
work of other trades as required. Holes shall be drilled, or punched and
reamed perpendicular to the surface.
b. Do not make or enlarge holes by flame cutting. Such work may be
grounds for rejection.
4. Marking:
a. Identify and mark components to enable correct setting out, assembly,
and selection of fixings. Locate marking on concealed surfaces where
practicable. Marking shall be removable with water or solvents after
assembly. Do not mark by notching unless approved.
5. Sheeting:
a. Face sheeting shall be continuous with no joins or overlaps, and no
visible fixings.
2.6 FIBRE-CEMENT SHEET

1. Fiber-cement (FC) and compressed fiber-cement (CFC) sheeting shall be a
complete proprietary system finished to match Control Samples, installed in
accordance with the Product Information and relevant Standards.
2. Fibre-cement sheeting shall not contain asbestos.
3. Compressed fiber-cement sheeting shall be resistant to water penetration.
2.7 ALUMINIUM
1. Generally:
a. Aluminum shall be suitable alloys and grades for the structural
application, applied finishes and conditions, and finished to match
Control Samples, in accordance with the relevant Standards.
b. Submit details of proposed alloys on shop drawings. Submit reasons for
selection, if directed.
2. Extruded sections:
a. Unless otherwise indicated or required, extruded aluminum alloy shall be
Grade 6063, Temper T5 or T6. Temper T4 may be used where bending
is required, subject to approval. Grade 6061, Temper T6 shall be used
for structural applications.
b. Extrusion shapes and thicknesses shall accommodate required loads
and connections, and shall be rigid and straight, with sharply defined
profiles, and without draw marks.

c. Extrusion walls and screw flutes shall be of sufficient thickness for fixings
including flush countersinking where required.
3. Sheet:
a. Unless otherwise indicated or required, sheet aluminum shall be Grade
5005, Temper H34 or Grade 6061, Temper T1.
b. Where sheet thickness is 3 mm or more, notch and fold corners with
external radius of 1.6 mm.
c. Where sheet thickness is less than 1.6 mm, the bending radius shall not
exceed t x 1.0 where t is the thickness of sheet.
d. Unless otherwise indicated, sheet aluminum for external cladding shall
not be less than 4 mm.
4. Identification:
a. Submit manufacturer's mill certificate or independent test report cross
referenced to each batch or structural member, and traceable quality
assurance documentation.
b. Identify and cross reference each batch or structural member with the
certificate or report. Otherwise Engineer may require testing by a
registered testing laboratory to verify alloy and grade.
2.8 STAINLESS STEEL

1. Generally :
a. Stainless Steel shall be approved grades, finished to match Control
Samples, suitable for the location and the intended function, in
accordance with relevant Standards.
b. ASTM A480M Specification for general requirements for flat-rolled
stainless and heat resisting steel plate, sheet and strip.
c. Submit details including country of origin, relevant Standards, mill
certificates, and test results.
d. Properly identify each batch of stainless steel and cross reference to mill
certificates
e. Ensure that stainless steel is not contaminated by mild steel particles
during fabrication
2. Grain and finish
a. Unless otherwise indicated grain shall be vertical on vertical surfaces or
parallel to the longer axis.
b. Flat surfaces shall not exhibit visible oil-canning or roller ripples
c. Flat stainless steel surfaces shall be not less than ‘stretcher level’ grade

2.9 FIXINGS
1. Generally:
a. Fixings shall be of suitable type, load capacity, durability, size and
spacing to assemble and fix the work to the substrates or base-structure,
and accommodate all imposed loads, and shall be selected for the
purpose and location in accordance with the Product Information and
relevant Standards.
b. Submit Product Information including manufacturer's standard load
tables for all proposed fixings including corrosion protection grade and
relevant Standards.
c. Indicate type, location, depth, spacing and edge distances on shop
drawings.
d. Deliver fixings to site in durable packages, labeled to indicate type and
intended use, and store in clean, dry locations. Do not use fixings which
are damaged or corroded. Fixings damaged during installation shall be
removed and replaced.
e. Use shimming and packing to ensure correct position and alignment of
finished work.
f. Tighten fixings at completion and before covering over.
g. Where visible fixings are indicated or required, use selected finish quality
fixings, neatly and evenly aligned and spaced.
h. Where required to be finished flush with adjacent surfaces, visible fixings
shall be countersunk.
2. Corrosion protection:
a. Fixings shall be corrosion resistant for the location and equivalent to or
exceeding the members to be fixed or assembled. Fixings shall not
cause staining or electrolytic corrosion to adjacent work.
b. Provide corrosion resistant coatings in accordance with the relevant
Standards.
3. External work:
a. Fixings for external work and concrete, or where exposed to moisture for
internal or concealed work, shall be hot-dip galvanized or not less than
Grade 316 stainless steel.
b. Fixings with electro-plated coatings shall be not used for external work.
4. Structural work:

a. Provide lock nuts for structural bolts, moving parts, where subject to
vibration, for vertical bolts in tension, and where there is any risk of
loosening. Suitable nut locking compounds may be used.

1. Generally:
a. Flashings shall be made out of corrosion-resistant materials or protective
coated, and shall be compatible with and non-staining to adjacent work,
and fixed to ensure separation of dissimilar materials in accordance with
the relevant Standards.
b. Include required corrosion resistant fixings, gaskets, pressure seals and
sealants. Seal around visible fixing heads and penetrations.
c. Spacing of fixings shall not exceed 450 mm unless otherwise indicated.
d. Flashings shall be fabricated to required profiles in longest practicable
lengths. Lap and seal flashings at junctions and corners min150mm
unless otherwise indicated.
e. Flashings shall have adequate stiffness to retain shape and remain
effective, and resist wind uplift, substrate movements and differential
movement between adjacent materials.
f. Make neat junctions with adjacent work. Scribe or dress down to match
adjacent profiles.
g. Where required, construct grooves, rebates or reglets in substrates.
Coordinate with trades for adjacent work as required.
2. Materials:
a. Flashing materials shall comply with the relevant Standards.
b. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, flashing materials shall be:
• Stainless steel, not less than 0.8 mm, Grade 316: Where indicated or
in concealed locations.
3. Cladding flashings:
a. Provide cladding flashings where indicated or required to prevent or
divert the entry of water, weather and vermin to the inside of the building.
b. Submit details of proposed cladding flashings before commencing.
4. Smoke flashings and seals:
a. Provide smoke flashings and seals where indicated or required to
prevent or divert the passage of smoke through the work between
adjacent floors or between adjacent rooms on the same floor.
b. Submit details of proposed smoke flashings before commencing.

2.11 SEALANTS
1. Generally:
a. Sealants shall be suitable elastomeric sealants, suitable for the location
and the intended function, all in accordance with the latest Product
Information and relevant Standards to include:
• ASTM C962 Standard guide for use of elastomeric joint sealants.
b. Submit details including generic type, durability, adhesion, compatibility,
movement capability and fire-resistance as appropriate.
c. Sealants shall be compatible with and non-staining to substrates and
adjacent work, and shall be capable of cleaning.
d. Movement capability of sealants shall accommodate the expected
maximum movement and deflection of the application.
e. Visible sealants shall be resistant to ultra-violet light and effects of
exposure.
f. Include joint preparation and priming, bond breaker tapes and backer
rods if required.
g. Unless otherwise indicated, sealant colour shall match adjacent work.
2. Locations:
a. Provide continuous sealant filled joints generally in the following
locations:
• At control joints.
• Around services penetrations.
• At junctions with adjacent work.
3. Sealant accessories for cladding and glazing:
a. Carry out joint and substrate preparation and install correct sealant
accessories to ensure the proper performance of sealants.
b. Use primer to achieve suitable bonding of sealant into substrate. Primer
shall be compatible with and non-staining to adjacent surfaces. Prevent
spillage or migration onto adjacent surfaces.
c. Backing rod shall be compressible, flexible, durable, non-gassing, non-
absorptive material of appropriate size and shape, compressed between
25% and 50% when installed. Backing rod shall be closed cell
polyethylene foam, unless otherwise required.

d. Bond breaker tape shall be self-adhesive polyethylene tape applied to

substrate surfaces where required to prevent sealant bonding for correct
joint construction.
2.12 FIRE-SAFING
4. Fire-safing and fire-rated sealants shall be suitable approved types, suitable
for the location and the intended function, in accordance with the Product
5. Submit details including test results and manufacturer's certification verifying
fire-rating and compliance with statutory requirements.
6. Verify locations of fire-rated joints before commencing.
2.13 SECONDARY STEEL FRAMING

1. Provide secondary steel framing fixed to base-structure with suitable
anchorages where required for support and stability of the work of this trade
and to support applied work by other trades.
2. Refer to STRUCTURAL STEEL Section for technical requirements.
3. Refer to STEEL FINISHES Section for protective coating requirements.
4. Framing shall be concealed. Coordinate with trades for adjacent work.
2.14 POWDER COATING

1. Powder coating shall be approved polyester resin systems by experienced
applicators, to match Control Samples, applied in accordance with the
Product Information and relevant Standards.
2. Select an appropriate system for the substrate, required finish and prevailing
conditions.
3. Submit details, including substrate preparation, pre-treatment, application
and compatible on-site repair.
4. Powder coating systems shall be approved before commencing application.
5. Powder coating shall be carried out in the factory where practicable.
6. Unless otherwise indicated, dry film thickness (DFT) shall be 60 - 80 microns.
7. For powder coating to external cladding, the powder coating shall be a “super
durable” type to comply with AAMA 2604. Systems do not comply with AAMA
2604 shall not be not used.
AAMA 2604 Voluntary specification, performance requirements
and test procedures for high performance organic
coatings on aluminum extrusions and panels.

8. Include samples of accelerated ageing by ultra-violet exposure for 500, 1000,

and 1,500 hours exposure. Include samples and details of on-site and return-
to-factory repair.
2.15 INSULATION TO CLADDING / EXTERNAL WALLS

1. Generally:
a. Insulation to cladding panel systems shall be approved products integral
with the cladding panels.
b. Verify types and location, R-value, density, thickness, and location of
vapor barriers, before commencing.
c. Cladding / external wall insulation may be in batts or blankets,
manufactured out of:
• Polyester.
• Fiber-glass.
• Mineral-fiber shall not be used.
d. Coordinate work so that insulation will be covered from weather as soon
as practicable. Insulation which becomes wet shall be removed
immediately and discarded. Replace with new, undamaged insulation.
e. Install insulation tight against adjacent work and framing.
f. Use suitable fixing methods to prevent long-term collapse or
dislodgement. Suitable methods may include staples, mesh, or wires
stretched tight at nominal 200 mm spacing both directions.
2. Sarking:
a. Locate insulation in relation to vapor barrier to minimize condensation.
b. Vapor barrier shall be an approved 'breather type' (vapor permeable) and
fire retardant.
3. Extent:
a. Provide insulation to the entire area of wall cladding.
b. Do not place insulation over cavities and penetrations required for air
flow and ventilation.
c. Where applicable, insulation to cladding and adjacent roofing shall
provide a continuous thermal barrier. Coordinate with CLADDING
Section as required.
2.16 BULK INSULATION

1. Generally:

a. Bulk insulation shall be suitable types, selected for the conditions and
performance requirements and installed in accordance with the Product
b. Submit Product Information, test reports and construction details.
c. Comply with relevant statutory health and safety requirements, and
current accepted industry practice with respect to airborne fibers.
d. The thermal resistance of the insulation material shall average not less
than the nominal value stated by the manufacturer on the product label.
2. Fibrous insulation:
a. Fibrous insulation may include polyester fiber or fiber-glass insulation
batts or blankets.
b. Do not use rock-wool or mineral-wool, or loose-fill insulation.
3.0 EXECUTION

3.2 CLADDING INSTALLATION

1. Generally:
a. Install the cladding / glazing in accordance with the relevant Standards
and approved shop drawings to comply with the performance
requirements.
b. Install the cladding / glazing plumb, level and true to line within required
tolerances, properly anchored to the base-structure. Do not bend or
distort work during installation.
c. Coordinate with trades for adjacent work for rectification of base-
structure and substrates, if required.
2. Pre-installation checking:
a. Base-structure for cladding:
b. Before commencing cladding installation, inspect the base-structure and
substrates for correct dimensions and tolerances, surface and edge
damage, and suitability, including:
• Concrete edge profiles, embedments, and openings.
c. Steel framing and brackets:

d. Adjacent cladding panels including joints, flashings, seals and ancillary

items to enable the correct sequence of installation.
e. Where drilling into concrete is required, inspect concrete reinforcement
records and adjust locations to avoid damage to concrete reinforcement.
f. Unless otherwise approved, edge distance for concrete substrates shall
be not less than 80 mm.
g. Cladding panels:
• Before commencing installation, inspect and verify each cladding
panel for correct dimensions and tolerances, surface and edge
damage, and that each panel is complete with all fixings and
accessories, and is correctly numbered where required.
• Reject cladding panels which do not comply and promptly remove
from site.
3. Installation:
a. Install the cladding so that no base-structure loads are transferred to the
cladding / glazing, including loads resulting from short or long-term
structural deflection or shortening of base-structure.
b. Verify that base-structure concrete has cured and reached sufficient
strength to support cladding loads.
c. Bearing surfaces in permanent contact shall be cleaned before
installation.
d. Ensure that drainage paths and weep holes are continuous,
unobstructed and free of debris.
e. Ensure that weep-holes and drainage paths are located to prevent
staining of lower surfaces.
f. Where the bottom edge of cladding terminates above other finished
cladding surfaces, make provision to drain or deflect water to prevent
cumulative staining of lower surfaces.
g. Seal all penetrations and through-fixings. Do not fix through horizontal
surfaces of visible flashings and cappings.
3.3 SEALANT INSTALLATION

1. Prepare joints and install sealants in accordance with the Product
Information, approved shop drawings and relevant Codes.
2. Unless otherwise stated in the Product Information, the depth of elastomeric
sealant shall not be greater than the joint width, nor less than half the joint

width or 6 mm, whichever is the greater. Verify joint widths and depths before
commencing.
3. Use sealants within manufacturer's indicated shelf life.
4. Install sealants during temperature and humidity conditions within the limits
of the manufacturers recommendations both at the time of application and
during the curing period. Prepare and seal joints on the same working day.
5. Clean joints to ensure correct adhesion and complete filling of joint with
sealant. Protect adjacent surfaces where there is a possibility of
contamination by cleaning or sealant installation.
6. Install sealant to the correct depths in continuous ribbons without gaps or air
pockets, with complete 'wetting' of joint surfaces on both sides.
7. Remove excess sealant and leave adjacent surfaces neat, smooth and
clean, without smears.
8. Cure sealants in accordance with Product Information, and protect from
damage during curing period.
9. Provide weep holes where indicated or required.
10. Finished work shall be left in a neat clean condition.

1. Cleaning:
a. The finished work shall be complete, clean and undamaged, with
smooth, even finishes.
b. Keep installation areas clean and tidy during installation. The Engineer
may direct installation areas to be cleaned at any time.
c. Remove spots, marks and stains progressively.
2. Protection:
a. Protect installed work to prevent damage during subsequent building
work and or weather conditions.
b. Use suitable temporary protective wrapping to prevent damage to
applied finishes. Remove at Practical Completion or when directed.
Wrapping shall not damage substrates or leave residue.
3. Adjacent work:
a. Protect adjacent work during installation. Use protective coverings where
required.
b. Rectify any damage to adjacent work.
c. Remove spots, marks and stains from adjacent surfaces.

d. Do not cause damage to adjacent work by welding, grinding or similar

activities.
4. Completion:
a. Rectify or replace any faulty or damaged work before Practical
Completion, including damage, staining or corrosion caused by
subsequent construction activities.
b. If the work cannot be rectified properly, replace or re-apply the whole
c. Rectified work shall match Control Samples and adjacent installed work.
5. Roofing:
a. Regularly inspect and keep the adjacent roofing and roof plumbing clean
at all times during the installation period.
b. At the end of work each day, and immediately before rain, inspect
adjacent roof and roof plumbing, and remove all debris and materials
which may cause corrosion or blockages, including loose fixings and off-
cuts.
6. Cladding:
a. Regularly inspect and keep clean the installed external cladding,
including adjacent cladding by other trades, including glass, coatings and
drainage channels, at all times during the installation period.
b. Rectify or replace any damage, including staining and corrosion resulting
from construction activities after installation of the cladding.

1. User's Manual:
a. Submit a User's Manual for the work of this trade with records and details
of materials used and sources of supply, cleaning and repair procedures.
b. Coordinate with BUILDING MAINTENANCE UNIT Section.
2. Log-book:
a. Maintain a log-book and marked up installation drawings recording the
dates and locations of on-site installation progress, and cross reference
to delivery dockets.
b. The log-book and marked up installation drawings shall be kept on site
and updated daily, and shall be available for inspection at any time
during installation. Submit complete log-book and marked up installation
drawings at the completion of installation.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL .................................................................................................2

2.0 PRODUCTS...............................................................................................3
3.0 EXECUTION ..............................................................................................5
Section 07920 Joint Sealants Page 1 of 6

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Perimeter joints between frames of doors windows and louvers.
b. Other joints as indicated on drawings.
2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and
windows.
c. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
d. Other joints as indicated.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers
and gaskets.

A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and
waterresistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for
installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by
jointsealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
1. Exterior Sealants: Custom color to match masonry and window openings.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be
nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
D. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
2. Class: 25.
3. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
4. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum
coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, and ceramic tile.
E. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
2. Class: 25.
3. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).
4. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a
high performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, ceramic tile, and wood.
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.
2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),
O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as
approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote
optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
jointsealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint
substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous
joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Structural Glazed facing Tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of
joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per
Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants
are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection,
damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants
immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 12 00 – METAL DOORS & FRAMES
Table of contents
1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................ 2
2.0 PRODUCTS……………………………………………………………………... 2
2.1 STEEL DOOR FRAMES ....................................................................... 2

2.2 STEEL DOORS ..................................................................................... 2
3.0 EXECUTION ……………………………………………………………………. 3
3.1 WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................... 3
4.0 PROJECT PARTICULARS…………………………………………………. ... 3
DIVISION 08 – Openings
SECTION 08 12 00 – Metal Doors & Frames Page 1 of 3
SECTION 08 12 00 – METAL DOORS & FRAMES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. This section covers the hollow metal doors works.
2. Specifications related Quality Assurance, Submittals, Delivery and Storage,
hardware and Performance requirements shall be as per 08 14 00 Wood Doors.
3. Terms and provisions of other related section like 01 00 00 General Requirements
and 05 10 00 Metal Works apply.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL DOOR FRAMES

Steel door frames shall be obtained from a specialist manufacturer in
accordance with the ASTM E152 or BS 1245: 1986 and to the approval of
the Engineer. Frames for fire rated doors shall be to fire ratings indicated on
the drawings and in accordance with NFPA 80 or BS 476: Part 20: 1987,
Part 22: 1987, Part 23: 1987 and Part 31.
Frames shall be 16 gauge zinc-coated steel units with single, double or no

rabbet as detailed on the drawings. The rabbet shall be designed to suit the
size of the shutter thickness as detailed on drawings.
Frames shall be finished in self etch stoved primer compatible to the paint
system specified for the doors and frames, ready to receive further coats and
shall be reinforced and prepared for hinges, lock strike plates, etc. Frames
shall be supplied with steel wall anchors for building into jambs and of the
"Prefix type".
It shall be the contractors responsibility to ensure that the appropriate primer

compatible to the final paint system is applied as the place of manufacture of
the door frames.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings along with detailed catalogues
for the approval of the Engineer before placing orders or commencing any
work.
2.2 STEEL DOOR

Steel doors shutters shall be obtained from a specialist manufacturer with a
proven record of at least 6 years and to the approval of the Engineer. Door
shall comply with ASTM E152 or BS 6510: 1984 and shall be fire rated to
resistance ratings as detailed on drawings in accordance with NFPA 80 or
BS 476: Part 20: 1987, Part 22: 1987, Part 23: 1987 and part 31.
Shutters shall be a reinforced double skin hollow shell construction of 18

gauge (1.22 mm) zinc coated steel sheets infilled with a non combustible
honeycomb, polystyrene or polyurethane core insulation for non-fire rated
doors, and mineral wool or fiberglass core insulation for fire rated doors with
internal reinforcing members fitted to incorporate and protect hardware
items. Doors should not have visible seam on edges, and must have
continuous reinforcing channel to full perimeter of doors inside. Doors shall
be specially constructed with internal reinforcing members fitted to
incorporate and protect hardware items. The doors shall be supplied self
etch primed compatible to the paint system specified for the doors and
frames, ready for installation and receiving further costs of paint.
It shall be the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the appropriate primer

compatible to the final paint system is applied at the place of manufacture of
the doors.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings along with detailed catalogues
for the approval of the Engineer before placing orders or commencing any
work.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP:
All steel parts shall be accurately set out, cut, framed, assembled and
executed using proper bolts or welding electrodes. All cut parts shall be saw
cut, no oxygen burning shall be permitted except for pipe supports. All
welding shall be electrical welding, clean and of proper workmanship. All cut
parts and welded sections shall be ground even and filed smooth with
rounded edges.
Frames for doors shall be provided with not less than (3) adjustable type
anchors on each jamb, maximum distance between anchors shall be eight
hundred (800) mm.
4.0 PROJECT PARTICULARS

All hollow metal steel doors shall be supplied as per the details provided on
drawings and to full compliance with the performance specifications given in
the trade specifications.
Co-ordination of hardware for master key and access control system is

included in the tender.
Provision of samples and mock-up installation for review and workmanship is

included in the tender.
Hardware and accessories required for the full operation shall be scheduled
and submitted in shop drawings and samples.
Fire rated doors and frames shall comply with the regulations for the local
civil defense authority. Testing and/or providing test certificates for
Engineer/Owner/Authority is included in the scope of work of this tender.
All works shall be executed in requirements shown on drawings and

specifications detailed in the Trade Specifications.
All works shall be executed in accordance with control samples as approved

by the Engineer.
All works shall be executed by an approved specialized Contractor.
End of Section
SECTION 08 14 00 – WOOD DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 2

1.2 REFERENCES................................................................................................................. 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................. 3
1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE ............................................................................ 4
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 MATERIALS ..................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 FLUSH DOORS ............................................................................................................... 7
2.3 FIRE DOOR SETS ........................................................................................................... 8
2.4 TIMBER DOOR-FRAMES ............................................................................................... 8
2.5 HARDWARE AND FURNITURE...................................................................................... 8
2.6 CLOSERS AND CONTROLLERS ................................................................................... 9
2.7 LOCKS AND LATCHES................................................................................................. 10
2.8 KEYING AND CYLINDERS ........................................................................................... 11
2.9 CONSTRUCTION KEYING ........................................................................................... 12
2.10 HINGES ....................................................................................................................... 12
2.11 ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................................... 14
2.12 DOOR SEALS .............................................................................................................. 14
2.13 DOOR STOPS ............................................................................................................. 14
2.14 FLASHINGS AND BARRIERS..................................................................................... 14
2.15 AIR-TIGHT CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 15
2.16 APPLIED FACING TO DOORS ................................................................................... 15
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 15
3.1 EXAMINATION .............................................................................................................. 16
3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL ........................................................................................... 16
3.3 DOOR-FRAME INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 16
3.4 DOOR INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 17
3.5 HARDWARE INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 17
3.6 HAND-OVER OF KEYS ................................................................................................. 18
SECTION 08 14 00 – Wood Doors Page 1 of 18
SECTION 08 14 00 – WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This section includes specifications for fabricate, supply, install, and commission
the wood doors works intended for use in the Works in accordance with
drawings. The wood doors include all types of wood doors, sub-frames, wood
frames to openings in addition to all necessary hardware, accessories and
fittings as directed by the Engineer and as detailed on the drawings
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A208.1 - Standard for

Particleboard.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM D 1761 - Screw
Withdrawal Test Method.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM D 5456 - Standard
Specification for Evaluation of Structural Composite Lumber Products.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM E 90 - Standard Test
Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions.
E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM E413 - Classification
for Rating Sound Insulation.
F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM E 1332 - Standard
Classification for Determination of Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class.
G. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM E 2235 - Standard
Test Method for Determination of Decay Rates for Use in Sound Insulation Test
Methods.
H. Architectural Woodwork Institute: AWI/AWMAC- Quality Standards or The

Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) & The Architectural Woodwork
Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC).
I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire

Doors, Fire Windows.
J. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 252- Standard Method of

Fire Test for Door Assemblies.
K. International Standards Organization (ISO): ISO 9001-2000/
L. Warnock Hersey Intertek Testing Services (ITS-WH): ITS Certification Listings

for Fire Doors.
M. Uniform Building Code (UBC): UBC 7-2-1994 UBC Fire Test (Neutral Pressure).
N. Uniform Building Code (UBC): UBC 7-2-1997 UBC Fire Test (Positive
Pressure).
O. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): UL 10B - Standard for Fire Test of Door

Assemblies ;
P. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL 10C- Standard for Positive Pressure Fire

Test of Door Assemblies.
Q. Underwriters Laboratories Canada (ULC): CAN 4-S104 - Fire Tests of Door

Assemblies.
R. Window and Door Manufacturer's Association (WDMA): WDMA 1.S.1A-04.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications for materials, fabrication and

installation instructions. Include certified test reports showing compliance with
project requirements where test methods are indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Elevations indicating location, size and kind of each door, construction,
swing, label, undercut, and hardware location and machining
requirements. Include location and extent of hardware blocking, fire
ratings, requirement for factory finishing, glass and other pertinent data.
2. Elevations indicating veneer requirements. Include veneer grade, cut,
specie, piece match, face match, appearance of pairs, sets and transoms
and aesthetic grade. For HPDL face requirement include manufacturer,
thickness, pattern, color and finish.
A. Inspection:
1. Inspection shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer; however, the
Contractor must give sufficient notice for inspection at the following stages
of work:
a. Sub-frames installed.
b. Door frames in place before installation.
c. Door frames installed before fixing architeraves.
B. Samples:
1. Submit two sets of 200 by 250 mm selected veneer samples with the
standard finish colors representing manufacturer's full range of available
colors and finishes. Samples shall represent the color selected on veneer
typical of grain patterns and coloration for the specified specie and cut
selected.
2. Corner Sample: 200 by 300 mm corner sample cut away to show stile,
rails, cross-banding, core and face veneer with description and date.
3. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, submit two
complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of
available colors and patterns.
4. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples,
minimum 150 mm square, representing actual product, color, and
patterns.
5. No work shall be commenced until the Engineer’s approval of the samples
is obtained
C. Testing:
1. The Engineer may direct destructive testing of samples of each door type
to verify internal construction.
2. Doors for testing may be selected by the Engineer at random from doors
delivered to site.
3. If more than 2 doors fail, or more than one third the doors tested fail, then
all the doors of the that type may be rejected.
4. The frequency or rate of testing shall be
5.one per 200 doors supplied but not less than one.
6. All costs and expenses related to testing shall be born by the contractor.
1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE
A. Protect the product during delivery, handling and storage from weather, damage
or staining with suitable packing or wrapping.
B. Store clear of ground, concrete or damp surfaces on suitable packers spaced to

prevent distortion.
C. Properly identify the products on packing and wrapping.
D. Stabilize moisture content of absorptive materials before installation where

practicable.
A. Loads:
safety.
B. Movements:
thermal movements, without failure or the transfer of loads from the base-
structure to the work of this trade.
C. Fixing to Concrete:
1. Fixing into concrete shall be to the required depth without clash with in-
situ concrete reinforcement. Where drilling clashes with reinforcement,
repair empty holes with suitable cementitious grout and rectify to match
adjacent work.
D. Dimensional Stability:
1. The installed work shall have adequate dimensional stability for the
ambient installed conditions, and shall not expand, shrink, warp or
change shape in a manner which will detract from appearance,
performance and durability of the work, or damage adjacent or applied
work, and shall not change in dimensions exceeding the provision for
movement in control joints.
E. Single Lengths:
1. Where practicable, timber members and boards shall be in the longest
lengths commercially available from the supplier, without joins or short
lengths.
F. Services Networks:
1. Build-in, cover and conceal reticulated services passing through the
work: coordinate with relevant services trades, and construct suitable
relevant services trade. Ensure suitable access for later maintenance or

replacement.
2. Services and access-hatches in fire-rated or acoustic-rated elements
shall be constructed and sealed to maintain the integrity of the elements.
G. Secondary Framing and Bracing:

1. Provide sufficient additional framing and bracing to ensure the work is
other trades, and at openings, terminations and junctions. Additional
framing and bracing shall be integrated with the work and concealed.
2. Coordinate with related trades as required, and verify types and loads of
applied work. Coordinate with MEP services and obtain relevant
templates and Product Information for framing and openings for plumbing
fixtures and tap-ware. Internal applied work may include plumbing
fixtures and fittings, shelving, lighting, equipment and signage.
3. Additional framing may include double studs, nogging, backing, blocking
and trimming.
H. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Fabrication tolerances shall be as per the relevant standards.
I. Installation Tolerances:
1. Fabrication tolerances shall be as per the relevant standards. Installation
tolerances shall not be cumulative and shall not include the base-
structure or fabrication tolerance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Timber:
1. Generally:
a. Timber shall be of the best practicable quality, in accordance with the
relevant Standards. Timber shall be of an approved variety and
quality suitable for the purpose for which it is to be used and equal to
samples approved by the Engineer. Submit Product Information and
Control Samples, including certificates of origin, and test reports for
grading and moisture content.
b. Timber shall be straight grained, well seasoned, planed square,
sound and free from defects which may affect load carrying capacity,
durability or appearance where finished work is visible. Defects may
include:
c. Insect damage or infestation.
• Sap or gum veins, shakes, soft pith.
• Knots of any description in surfaces for staining or polishing.
• Knots of any description in glazing bars.
• Knots exceeding one half the width of the surface.
• Knots exceeding 20mm mean in diameter.
• Decayed or dead knots unless cut out and plugged.
• Loose knots or knotholes unless cut out and plugged.
• Warp, twist, decay, pith, holes, splits, fractures, sapwood or
bruises.
• Checks exceeding (300 mm in length, or 6 mm in width or one
quarter of the timber thickness in depth
d. In jointed panels each piece shall be of the same species. Joinery for
staining or polishing shall have all surfaces of the same species and
same character of grain running in the same direction.
e. All plugs inserted after cutting out defects shall be the full depth of
the hole and the grain of the plug shall run in the same direction as
the grain of the piece.
f. Timber connectors where used shall be two single-sided toothed
plates (round or square) for demountable joints or one double sided
toothed plate (round or square) for permanent joints to conform with
B.S. 1579 latest edition.
g. Timber shall be sawn square to the required sizes in longest
practicable lengths. Timber for joinery, trim and moldings shall be
selected kiln dried hardwood (KDHW) unless otherwise indicated
2. Moisture content:
a. The equilibrium moisture content (EMC) of seasoned timber shall be
12% nominal +/- 3% unless otherwise indicated, or unless otherwise
required for the species and installation conditions, in accordance
with the relevant Standards. There shall be not more than 3%
difference between any two items in any one batch delivered to site.
b. Where practicable and where the ambient humidity of the installation
area has been achieved, unwrap and store timber in the installation
area to condition timber to the ambient humidity before installation.
c. Make adjustments to installation procedures to minimize shrinking or
expansion of timber due to changes between moisture content of
timber at time of installation and due to anticipated in-service
humidity of installation area.
3. Appearance:
a. Visible timber surfaces and edges in the installed location shall be
clean and free of blemishes, marks and pressure indentations from
handling equipment, conveyors, fork lifts and slings.
b. Visible timber surfaces and edges shall be selected, machined and
coated to reveal the natural appearance of the grain.
4. Durability
a. Select timber species with natural durability appropriate to the
conditions, or use suitable approved preservative treatment in
accordance with the relevant Standards. Submit manufacturer’s
certificate for preservative treated timber to verify that treatment has
been carried out to the appropriate class for its intended service
condition. Preservative treated timber shall be marked with the class
of treatment.
B. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF):

5. MDF shall comply with the relevant standards.
6. Apply moisture-resistant sealer to visible surfaces and cut edges.
7. MDF in wet area locations or subject to wetting or humidity shall be

moisture-resistant grade.
8. Use moisture resistant grade where there is any risk of water or moisture
damage.
C. Veneer:
1. Timber for face veneer shall generally be first grade hardwood obtained
from an approved supplier.
2. Unless otherwise indicated or required, minimum thickness of timber face

veneers 0.8 mm.
3. The face veneers shall be hard, durable, and capable of being finished
easily to a smooth surface. They shall be free from knots, worm and
beetle holes, splits, dots, glue stains, filling and inlay of any kind or other
defects.
4. The face veneers shall be applied to one or both sides of wood panels as
shown on the Drawings.
5. Where veneers are shown to be applied to one face only, the other side
shall have a balancing veneer applied to prevent warping. Apply back
veneers to open shelves and doors, where the reverse side can be seen.
Apply equivalent balancing veneer of similar materials to rear and
concealed surfaces. Balancing veneer shall be coated or sealed to
provide equivalent moisture transmission. Surface finish quality of
concealed balancing veneer and coating may be of a lesser grade. Apply
edge veneers where edges are visible or indicated on the Drawings, or
provide solid timber edge trims, machined as required, and finished to
match adjacent veneer
6. Unless otherwise indicated, veneer shall be book matched.
7. Unless otherwise indicated, veneer to vertical surfaces shall be installed

with the grain direction vertical, and veneer to horizontal surfaces shall be
installed parallel to the longer dimension.
8. Adhesives and bonding procedure for veneer shall be suitable durable

types, suitable for the location and the intended function, in accordance
with the Product Information.
9. Toilets cubical doors to be waterproofed laminated veneers finish.
2.2 FLUSH DOORS
A. General:
B. Edges:
1. Include hardwood edge-strips to all edges of external and wet area doors,
and to vertical edges (stiles) of internal doors. Include hardwood edge-
strips to all sides of openings in doors. Thickness of edge-strips shall be
not less than 9 mm generally and not less than 18 mm for rebated edge-
strips.
2. For sliding doors, include top edge-strips with additional depth for sliding
track rebates.
Include grooves and rebates for seals and accessories.
3. Where indicated or required, under-cut bottom edge of doors to enable

required air flow, or make openings for louvres, and receive and install
louvres from MECHANICAL SERVICES.
4. For double doors, chamfer edges to prevent binding. Match profile of

rebates to required rebated hardware.
C. Door Finish:
1. Factory sealing and priming shall be compatible with proposed site

painting systems. Coordinate with PAINTING Section for site applied
painting.
2. Site painted:
a. Doors to be site painted shall be sheeted in paint-grade primed

hardboard.
b. Doors to be site painted, shall be factory sealed and primed after

fabrication to all surfaces including top and bottom edges.
3. Clear finished:
a. Doors to be clear finished on site shall be sheeted in select grade
veneer plywood and fine belt sanded to all surfaces including top and
bottom edges.
b. For doors to be clear finished, shall be factory sealed after fabrication

to all surfaces including top and bottom edges.
4. Polyurethane finished:
a. Doors to be polyurethane finished on site shall be paint-grade
hardboard.
b. For doors to be polyurethane finished, provide two coats of

polyurethane at the factory after fabrication, and touch-up on-site
after installation.
2.3 FIRE DOOR SETS
A. As per Specifications and Local Authorities requirements.
2.4 TIMBER DOOR-FRAMES
A. General:
B. Provision for hardware:
1. Make provision during factory fabrication for later fixing of required

hardware and accessories, as appropriate. Comply with hardware
Product Information and set-out templates.
2. Include all required cut-outs, fixing connections, for the required

hardware.
3. Hinges shall be recessed into door-frames and screw fixed.
C. Timber door-frame finish:
1. All timber for timber door-frames shall be ‘select-grade’ to match Control

Samples.
2. Factory sealing and priming shall be compatible with proposed site

painting systems. Coordinate with PAINTING Section for site applied
painting.
3. Site painted: For door-frames to be site painted, apply first coat of

suitable primer at the factory after fabrication.
4. Clear finished: For door-frames to be clear finished, apply first coat of

suitable sealer at the factory after fabrication.
2.5 HARDWARE AND FURNITURE
A. General:
1. Door hardware and furniture shall be approved types, suitable for the
location and the intended function of the doors, in accordance with the
2. Submit Product Information, and Control Samples if directed.
3. Verify correct handing of items before commencing.
4. Include fixings, striker plates, shims and escutcheons for a complete

installation, whether indicated or not. Unless otherwise indicated, door
hardware shall enable escape from the inside of the room or area
contained by the door hardware.
B. Door furniture:
1. Door furniture shall be suitable for use with the lock or latch to which it is
installed.
2. Lever handles shall be as per the EUROLEVER lever handle ref.

SS35236 or similar approved complete with H.T. spindle.
3. Include key-ways, key-hole plates, snib, turn-buttons, cut-outs, roses,

plates and escutcheons required by the lock or latch type, for a complete
installation, whether indicated or not.
4. Roses shall be 50mm dia. 10mm thick with polished edges and should be
capable of being rigidly conceal-fixed to the door using screws
5. Unless the door furniture is indicated separately for each side of the door,
supply furniture as a paired set for both sides of the door.
6. Furniture fixings on the outside face of doors shall be concealed by fixing

through the door from inside or by other appropriate methods. Plastic
concealed fixings are not acceptable.
C. Materials
1. Unless otherwise indicated, door hardware shall be manufactured from

cast, forged or machined brass with electroplated finish or stainless steel,
including corrosion-resistant components, in accordance with the relevant
Standards.
D. Finishes:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, electro-plated coating thickness shall be in

2.6 CLOSERS AND CONTROLLERS
A. General:
1. Door closers and controllers shall be approved types, suitable for the
location and the intended function of the doors, including size and weight
of the door, door swings and wind pressure, in accordance with the
2. Unless otherwise indicated closers and controllers shall have plain

rectilinear bodies in satin stainless finish identical to the other door
ironmongery items. Grey coloured door closer covers are not acceptable.
Arms shall be suitably rustproofed and have a similar satin stainless steel
finish.
3. All closers are to meet EN1154a and be fire rated
4. Unless otherwise specified and approved closers shall be EUROLEVER

XX501
5. Unless otherwise approved door closers shall be concealed and fully

adjustable hydraulic check types incorporating:
a. Fully adjustable closing speed between 2 and 30 seconds. Where
delayed closing is specified the door, when opened to an angle of 90
degrees or more, shall stand motionless for a period adjustable up to
60 seconds before closing
b. Opening and closing from any angle up to 180 degrees with the
check adjustable to operate from any angle between 135 degrees
and closed
c. A ten year guarantee for use in local ambient conditions including

positions of extreme exposure
d. Closing speed, latching speed, and back-check shall be controlled by

separate concealed key operated valves.
6. Include fixings, templates, adjusting tools and accessories required for a

complete installation.
7. Include manual hold-open device to closers where indicated. Include

electromagnetic hold open devices to smoke doors and fire doors where
indicated or required.
8. Include floor or head spring pivot operators where indicated.
9. Inadequate spring strength or failure of closer to return door to the closed

position may be grounds for rejection.
B. Surface Mounting:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, closers for fire doors shall be surface

mounted.
2. Surface mounted closers shall have regular or parallel type arms as

indicated.
3. Where practicable, surface mounted closers shall be concealed from

view by mounting inside rooms, stair wells, cupboards and the like. Do
not fix closers to the visible side of public corridors, foyers or the like.
C. Floor Mounting:
1. Floor mounted closers shall be of one type suitable for both single and
double action and for both wood and metal doors with the use of
compatible fittings
2. Main boxes shall be reinforced and galvanised and allow mechanical

adjustment vertically, longitudinally, and transversely after installation.
3. Cover plates shall have concealed fixings and shall be finished to match
all other door ironmongery
2.7 LOCKS AND LATCHES
1. Locks and latches shall be approved types, suitable for the location and
the intended function in accordance with the relevant Standards.
2. All latch-sets and locksets shall be EUROLEVER SS1.6, SS2.6 and

SS4.6, unless otherwise indicated and approved.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, locksets and latch-sets shall be mortise type.
4. All locks to be supplied to DIN sizes and have a 60mm backset
5. Mortise locks and latches shall be certified as conforming to DIN class 3.

DIN class 1 and DIN class 2 locks are not acceptable
6. Locks and latches shall be contained in rigid, durable enclosures.

External components, enclosures and strikes shall be solid brass or
stainless steel.
7. Deadbolts shall incorporate anti-sawing 16 mm thick hardened steel

rollers
8. For use with lever handles latches will incorporate special springing to
overcome lever droop. Sprung levers will not be accepted due to potential
for damage and corrosion
9. Locks and latches shall be capable of full reversal of hand without

opening the case.
10. Suitable forends, strike plates and components are required for rebated
meeting stiles and shall be of non-corrosive materials to match the
handles. Forends are to be 24mm in width
11. Working parts shall be accurately fitted to close tolerances, free from
rattle or excessive slack, factory lubricated, and free from manufacturing
flaws and defects.
12. Locks shall be ‘balanced-hub’ construction.
13. Use only proprietary strike plates nominated for the required locks or
latches.
14. Springs and other moving parts not fabricated from brass shall be
corrosion-resistant steel alloy or stainless steel.
15. Provide ‘back-boxes’ to all lock strikes.
16. Flush bolts shall be provided at top and bottom of non-active leaves of
double doors and shall be 225mm long with a dovetailed return and a
minimum throw of 25mm
17. Bolts generally shall have minimum throw of:

Latch-bolts: 14 mm.
Dead-bolts: 19 mm.
18. Boat type bolt sockets or keeps shall be provided generally but at
external or dirty locations the keep shall be the spring loaded dirt
excluding type
2.8 KEYING AND CYLINDERS
A. Cylinders and keys:
1. Unless otherwise specified and approved cylinders shall be
EUROLEVER SC11M & SC10M
2. Cylinders shall be 6 pin, 71mm in length with practically infinite differs.
3. Cylinders shall be finished to match handles and trim and shall be easily
removable without removing the trim with the door open. With the door
closed the cylinders shall not be removable.
4. The cylinder shall have Para centric keyways and TG pins to prevent
picking and hardened steel drives, pins and body insert to overcome
drilling.
5. 3 Keys per cylinder are required and unless otherwise stated locks shall
be master keyed to the engineers requirement
B. Key numbering and tagging:
1. Cylinders and keys shall be code stamped with an identification number

in an approved location.
2. Verify identification numbers with the Principal before stamping.
3. Each key shall be attached to an approved plastic key tag by a metal split
ring, properly labelled with the final room name or number.
C. Key cabinet:
1. Provide an approved proprietary lockable key cabinet with adequate

compartments, pockets or hooks to accommodate all required keys.
2. Verify installed location of key cabinet before commencing.
2.9 CONSTRUCTION KEYING
1. Provide a temporary construction keying system with large suites of

keyed alike cylinders to secure particular areas before the installation of
permanent master-keyed cylinders.
2. Construction keying shall be removed before Date of Practical

Completion, or when directed.
3. When required, replace all construction cylinders with new cylinders

which comply with the Principal's master-key system, and which exclude
the construction keys.
2.10 HINGES
A. Generally:
1. Hinges and screws shall be suitable approved types and sizes.
2. Unless otherwise specified and approved hinges shall be EUROLEVER

SS5 to match other door ironmongery items
4. Coordinate with door-frame manufacturer for correct location of hinge

recesses and screw holes.
5. Unless otherwise indicated, hinges shall be:
a. Five-knuckle type, fixed pins unless otherwise indicated or required

as loose pins.
b. Full mortise hinges with a hole in the bottom tip for pin removal.
c. Ball-bearing type for doors with closers with flush bearings and
button tips.
d. Lift-off type where required by the relevant Standards for emergency

access.
6. Tips shall be button type with positive non-rising pins.
B. Hinge Provision:
1. Provide two hinges per door unless otherwise required by a fire test
report, or as follows:
e. Doors over 2040 mm high: 3 hinges per leaf.
f. Doors over 920 mm wide: 3 hinges per leaf.
g. External doors: 3 hinges per leaf.
h. Acoustic rated doors: Refer ACOUSTIC REPORT.
i. Fire-rated doors: 3 hinges per leaf.
C. Hinge sizes for timber doors:
1. Unless otherwise indicated or required, hinges for timber doors shall be

not less than:
Door width: Door thickness Door weight Hinge size
820 mm 30 mm 16 kg 70 x 40 x 1.6 mm
900 mm 35 mm 20 kg 85 x 60 x 1.6 mm
900 mm 40 mm 30 kg 100 x 75 x 1.6 mm
1000 mm 45 mm 50 kg 100 x 75 x 1.6 mm
1200 mm 45 mm 70 kg 100 x 75 x 3.2 mm
1300 mm 45 mm 80 kg 125 x 100 x 3.2 mm
2. Where brass hinges are used for door leafs exceeding 30 kg or door leafs
controlled by door closers, include bronze or stainless steel washers to
each knuckle joint.
D. Screws:
1. Unless otherwise required, screws for hanging timber doors shall be

countersunk head screws of gauge and size as required, and finished to
match hinges.
2. Provide metal threaded screws into metal frames.
E. Painting of hinges:
1. Steel hinges shall be site painted in the system applicable to the door.
Coordinate with PAINTING Section.
2. Stainless steel, brass and aluminium hinges shall be not painted.
F. Security:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all hinges shall be fixed pin types.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
1. Provide appropriate accessories including buffers, strike plates, mortar

guards, switch boxes, fixing ties or brackets, and cavity flashings for a
complete assembly.
2. Mortar guards shall accommodate the full extension of the lock bolt and
the correct operation of the locking mechanism.
3. Make grooves and rebates for seals and accessories.
4. Include rubber stops to door-frames on the closing side of single door-

frames and heads of double door-frames to reduce slamming impact.
5. Include mortar-proof universal block-out boxes with knock-out caps top

and bottom for switches and mortise strikes welded to door-frames.
6. Include temporary spreaders or spacer-bars to door-frames to prevent

distortion during building-in, screw fixed to each jamb for easy removal.
After removal, rectify frames and finishes to remove any visible damage.
2.12 DOOR SEALS
1. Door seals, including weather bars, smoke seals, acoustic seals and air
seals, shall be suitable for the location and the intended function in
accordance with the Product Information.
2. Include fixings, rebates, grooves, and clearances for correct installation

and operation of seals.
3. Coordinate with the door-frame manufacturer for required rebates to

door-frames.
2.13 DOOR STOPS
1. Unless otherwise specified or approved all doorstops shall be round in

shape and 37mm dia. all as per the EUROLEVER SS27R
2. Provide door stops to limit door swing where indicated or required to

prevent damage to adjacent work by uncontrolled door opening.
3. Verify floor or wall mounting locations before installation where not

indicated. Do not mount door stops to un-reinforced lightweight walls.
4. For non-fire-rated doors, stops are not required for doors with closers.
Where stops for non-fire-rated doors are not practicable, provide
overhead stays to control door swing.
1. Provide flashings to external doors where indicated or required to prevent

or divert the entry of water, weather and vermin to the inside of the
building.
2. Submit details of proposed door flashings before commencing.
3. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, flashing materials shall be:
4. Zincalume steel, powder coated: Not less than 0.8 mm. Where required
to match colour of adjacent work.
5. Stainless steel, Grade 316, not less than 0.8 mm. Where indicated or in
concealed locations.
6. Flashings shall be fabricated to required profiles in longest practicable

lengths. Lap and seal flashings at junctions and corners.
2.15 AIR-TIGHT CONSTRUCTION
1. Provide air-tight construction where indicated or required. Include seals to

door and other openings, around services penetrations, and at junctions
with adjacent work.
2. Air-tight construction may include baffles, sealants, compressible air

seals and tapes.
3. Verify air-tight construction details on shop drawings.
2.16 APPLIED FACING TO DOORS
A. Generally:
B. Kick-plates:
1. Provide applied kick-plates to doors where indicated, and as follows:
2. Internal doors in corridors and work areas: One or both sides as

indicated, 600 mm high, 1.2 mm thickness stainless steel sheeting,
Grade 316, without edge protection.
C. Full height facings:
1. Provide applied full height facings to doors where indicated, and as

follows:
2. External doors where break-in resistance and severe weather protection

is required: Fully faced both sides with 1.0 mm thickness Zincanneal
sheeting suitable for painting, without edge protection.
D. Edge details:
1. Provide edge details as follows:
2. Friction-fitted, removable edge caps:

a. Fabricate removable edge caps in same material as front surfaces.
Provide edge caps to all four edges.
Cap edge shall be nominal 25 mm width.
Leave 5 mm clear gap around perimeter of front surface facing to

enable site adjustment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1. Examine surfaces and areas upon which the work of this section
depends.
2. Verify site dimensions.
3. Report unsatisfactory site conditions that would cause defective

installation of products or cause latent defects in workmanship.
4. Start of work will constitute acceptance of site conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL
1. All fabrications shall be made based on site measurements with a

provision for scribing to meet the site conditions as required. The
contractor shall be fully responsible for accuracy of such measurements.
2. Install all work true, level, tightly fitted and flush with adjacent surfaces as
required.
3.3 DOOR-FRAME INSTALLATION
A. Generally
1. Install door-frames in correct locations, alignments and tolerances with

approved anchorage types and locations.
2. Use corrosion-resistant anchorages, and include bracing to maintain

door-frames in position until building-in or grouting is complete.
3. Re-check set-out dimensions immediately before final fixing.
4. Use methods so that base-structure loads and movements are not

transferred to the door-frame.
5. Set-out door-frames to existing openings in concrete and masonry walls

with nominal 10 mm clearance between door-frame and adjacent opening
reveals.
B. Condition of walls:
1. Install door-frames progressively when walls are stable and adequate to

support door-frame loads.
2. Coordinate with CONCRETE, MASONRY and DRY-WALL /

PLASTERBOARD as appropriate.
3. Coordinate with TILING / RESILIENT MATERIALS and CARPET

Sections as appropriate.
4. Do not remove spreaders until door-frames are securely anchored to

walls and masonry mortar has cured not less than seven days.
5. Do not install door-frames until wall framing has been adequately

supported and braced laterally and in the plane of the wall.
6. Drill holes for door-frame anchorages not less than two days after grout
has set. Do not damage door-frames. Grouting:
C. Grouting:
1. Grout door-frames to concrete and masonry openings as follows:
a. Fill cavities with grout progressively as work rises where

practicable.
b. Face of grout shall be 10 mm back from face of door-frame, unless

otherwise indicated.
c. Grout shall be as dry as practicable to enable complete filling of

voids behind door-frames.
d. Tool exposed grout surfaces square and smooth.
2. After stripping of grout stops, fill and repair voids, honeycombing and
rough areas. Clean any grout leakage, and repair damage to priming as
required.
3. Fit grout stops full height to both sides of each jamb, fitted tight to door-
frame and scribed to adjacent wall face to prevent grout leakage. Hold
stops securely in place during grouting and curing.
3.4 DOOR INSTALLATION
A. Generally:
1. Install doors in accordance with Product Information and relevant

Standards, and fire doors in accordance with fire test results.
2. Examine door-frames and verify correct position and installation before

hanging corresponding doors.
3. Discard doors not in compliance with relevant Standards and doors with
deflection or twisting exceeding +/- 2 mm over the door surface.
4. Condition doors to average humidity in installation areas before hanging.
B. Fitting and clearances:
1. Fit doors to door-frames with uniform clearance at each edge and

machine as required for hardware. Seal cut surfaces, including door tops
and bottoms, after machining and fitting. Edges of doors shall be lightly
chamfered to prevent contact with jambs.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, clearance after painting shall be 2 mm at

jambs and heads, 2 mm at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 5 mm
from bottom of door to top of floor finish or threshold.
3. Install flashings, weathering and sealing to external doors as required.
3.5 HARDWARE INSTALLATION
1. Install door hardware in accordance with Product Information and

relevant Standards, and the intended function of door.
2. Delay installation of hardware until completion of site painting where

practicable, otherwise remove exposed hardware, store and re-fix after
completion of site painting.
3. Install hardware with the correct fixings, selected for length, finish and
type of substrate.
4. Ensure finish of exposed fixings matches finish of hardware.
5. Unless otherwise indicated, install hardware and fixings, including butt

hinges, recessed and flush where practicable.
6. Locate exposed fixings to furniture on the inside faces of external doors

or doors of lockable rooms.
3.6 HAND-OVER OF KEYS
A. Generally:
1. Unless otherwise directed, arrange for direct handover of all keys, in

person, by an authorised representative of the key manufacturer to an
authorised representative of the Principal, by formal arrangement. Submit
details of respective personnel, date and place of handover. Arrange for
the lock manufacturer to submit direct to the Principal, a record of the
master-keying system indicating each lock type, type of key supplied, and
key number for re-ordering.
2. Arrange for hand over keys progressively on a floor-by-floor or area-by-

area basis.
B. Use of master-keys:
1. Do not use any key under the master-key system and immediately return
any such keys which come into the possession of the Contractor direct to
the Principal.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 44 00 – Curtain Walls & Glazing Assemblies
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................ 2
1.2 SUMMARY .............................................................................................................. 2
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS....................................................................... 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 4
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................... 5
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ........................................................................................ 6
1.7 WARRANTY ............................................................................................................ 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 7
2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS .............................................................................................. 7
2.2 GLAZING SYSTEMS .............................................................................................. 8
2.3 INSULATED SPANDREL PANELS ......................................................................... 8
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS .................................................................................... 8
2.5 FABRICATION ........................................................................................................ 8
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES ............................................................................................ 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................... 9
3.1 EXAMINATION........................................................................................................ 9
3.2 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 9
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................. 10
SECTION 08 44 00 – Curtain Wall & Glazing Assemblies Page 1 of 11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes conventionally glazed aluminum curtain walls
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for insulating-glass requirements.
A. General: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems, including anchorage,

capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following:
1. Structural loads.
2. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not
limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection
from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
3. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
4. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.

b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by
thermal and structural movements, to glazing.
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural
movements.
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other
components.
f. Sealant failure.
B. Structural Loads:
1. Seismic Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including

anchorage, capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions
calculated according to requirements of Uniform Building Code (UBC), 1997
Edition, Zone 2A.
2. Wind Loads: Uniform Building Code (UBC), 1997 Edition, Exposure D, Basic
Wind Speed 160 Km/hr.
3. Dead Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system members that do
not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of
design dimension when carrying full dead load. Provide a minimum 3.20 mm
clearance between members and top of fixed panels, glazing, or other fixed
part immediately below. Provide a minimum 1.60 mm clearance between
members and operable windows and doors.
4. Live Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including

anchorage that accommodates supporting structure's deflection from
uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of
materials or permanent deformation.
5. Periodic Maintenance-Equipment Loads: To be based on types of
maintenance equipment recommended by curtain wall manufacturers.
C. Structural-Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems,

including anchorage, capable of withstanding test pressure indicated without
material and deflection failures and permanent deformation of structural members
exceeding 0.2 percent of span when tested according to ASTM E 330.
1. Submit reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies.

2. Test Pressure: 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design
pressures.
3. Test Duration: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 60
seconds.
D. Deflection of Framing Members:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span or 19 mm,

whichever is smaller.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that
which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and
which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or
other fixed components to less than 3.2 mm.
a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1.6-mm clearance between framing

members and operable units.
3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point,

limited to 2 times the length of cantilevered member, divided by 175.
E. Sideway (Story Drift): Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that
accommodates building story drift when wind loads or seismic loads affect
maximum overturning moment. Calculate story drift according to requirements of
the Uniform Building Code (UBC), 1997 Edition.
1. Test Performance: No glass breakage, anchor failures, or structural damage

when tested according to AAMA 501.4.
F. Air Infiltration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems with maximum air
leakage as per AAMA requirement for fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 300 Pa.
G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum glazed curtain-wall

systems that do not evidence water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential static pressure of 20 percent of positive
design wind load, but not less than 479 Pa.
H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall

systems that do not evidence water leakage when tested according to AAMA 501.1
under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive design wind load, but not
less than 479 Pa.
I. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems with

maximum average U-factor as per M/s. Doha Municipality Regulations.
J. Sound Transmission: Provide exterior aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing

and framing areas having the following minimum OITC according to ASTM E 1332,
as determined by testing according to ASTM E 90:
1. OITC: 35dB.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.
B. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is

approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.
C. Installer Experience: Minimum 10years experience to carry out successfully

projects of a similar nature and product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
D. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional

engineer detailing fabrication and assembly of glazed aluminum curtain-wall
systems.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer/system supplier responsible for their preparation.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
F. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in

manufacturer's standard sizes.
G. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of systems, made

from 300-mm lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
H. Welding certificates.
I. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, for glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems.
K. Preconstruction Testing Program: Developed specifically for Project.
L. Preconstruction Test Reports: For glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems.
M. Field quality-control test reports.
N. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this

Section with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved,
authorized, or licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is
eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses,
names and addresses of Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for glazed aluminum curtain-

wall systems including the following:
a. Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of

manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated
for this Project.
b. Shop Drawings, preconstruction-testing program development, and
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to

ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes

requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics.
Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and
profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another,
and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria
subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing,
field testing, and in-service performance.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer,

except with Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit
comprehensive explanatory data to Engineer for review.
D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to

test glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems for compliance with specified
requirements for performance and test methods. Provide test specimens and
assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction. Testing not
required for a pre tested system.
1. Select sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate

capability of glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems to comply with
performance requirements and according to AAMA 501 recommendations.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when
assemblies will be constructed.
E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural

Welding Code-Aluminum."
F. Mockups: Prior to installing glazed aluminum curtain wall system, construct

mockups for form of construction indicated on Drawing and finish required to verify
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as
well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for Work. Include class, glazing
materials and spandrel panels.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated on Drawings.
2. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before start of Work.
5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed
conditions as a standard for judging the completed Work.
a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of

Substantial Completion as judged solely by the Engineer may become
part of the completed Work, otherwise dismantle mockup and install
permanent works.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review
methods and procedures related to glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review structural load limitations.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for glazed

aluminum curtain-wall systems by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems
that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section
within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering.
d. Water leakage.
e. Failure of operating components to function normally.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified
warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion for Super

Durable powder coated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Aluminum curtain wall system shall be from one of the following systems:
• Gutmann system
• Alu-k System
• Schuco system.
Or equally approved system
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated but not less alloy and temper 6063 T6.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M.

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221M.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to
recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable
SSPC standard.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 611.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 570/A 570M.
4. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS welding Code
according to type of alloy to be welded.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum

with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant (aluminum

or stainless steel), non-staining, fasteners and accessories compatible with
adjacent materials.
1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turn out from thermal and
structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads.
4. Finish exposed portions to match framing system.
5. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material
and type recommended by manufacturer.
E. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and

installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and
recommended by manufacturer.
F. Framing Gaskets: Vulcanized-rubber-based, UV-resistant where exposed,

elastomeric, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
G. Framing Sealants: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
2.3 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As indicated on Drawings and specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
C. Glazing Sealants: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
2.4 INSULATED SPANDREL PANELS
A. As specified in Division 8, Section “Glazing”.
2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems (Safing Insulation): Specified in Section

"Building Insulation."
B. Insulating Materials: Specified in Section "Building Insulation."
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 0.762-mm thickness
per coat.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints,
condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating
within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and
framing to prevent glazing-to-glazing contact and to maintain required glazing
edge clearances.
C. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum curtain wall with an integral,

concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials
and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct
metal-to-metal contact.
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than
three years and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal
conductance and condensation and to show adequate strength and security
of glass retention.
2. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the

allowable design shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505.
3. Provide hardware with low conductivity material for hardware bridging thermal
breaks at frame or vent sash.
D. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or

discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed
surfaces by descaling or grinding.
E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project

according to Shop Drawings.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
a. Super durable powder coated.
b. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full

range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or
discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.
7. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action
by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or
installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this

purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion
by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within

framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion.
Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper
operation.
F. Install glazing as specified Division 8 Section "Glazing."
G. Install sealants as specified in Section "Joint Sealants."
H. Install insulation materials included in spandrel panels as specified in Section

"Building Insulation."
I. Install perimeter fire-containment systems (safing insulation) as specified in Section

"Building Insulation".
J. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems to comply with

the following maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 3 mm in 3 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
2. Level: 3 mm in 6 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
3. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding

element up to 13 mm wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1.6 mm.
b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 13
to 25 mm wide, limit offset from true alignment to 3.2 mm.
c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 25
mm wide or greater, limit offset from true alignment to 6 mm.
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 3 mm in 3.7 m; 12.7 mm over total

length.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Testing is not required
for a pre tested system.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine

compliance of installed system with specified requirements shall take place as
follows and in successive stages as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with

installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show
compliance with requirements.
1. Water Spray Test: After the installation of one glazed aluminum curtain wall
type as selected by the Engineer before installation of interior finishes has
begun, a 2-bay area of system designated by Engineer shall be tested
according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
C. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not
comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
SECTION 08 5113 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS
Table of Contents
PART 1 - PART 1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 2

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................ 2
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK .......................................................................................................... 2
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS ........................................................................................................ 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................... 3
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................................. 4
1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 4
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ................................................................................... 5
1.8 WARRANTY ................................................................................................................................. 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS, GENERAL .......................................................................................... 5
2.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................. 6
2.3 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY ................................................................................................ 7
2.4 HARDWARE ................................................................................................................................ 8
2.5 SEALANT ................................................................................................................................... 10
2.6 PROTECTIVE COATING ........................................................................................................... 10
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 10
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES .............................................................................................................. 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 10
3.1 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................................. 10
3.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... 10
3.3 ADJUSTING ............................................................................................................................... 11
3.4 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................. 11
3.5 PROTECTION ............................................................................................................................ 12
END OF SECTION 08520 ........................................................ ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
SECTION 08 51 13 – Aluminium Windows Page 1 of 12
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Special
Conditions apply to work of this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section covers the work of aluminium windows, doors & louvers as required by
the Contract and includes the following:
1. Thermally broken fixed windows.

2. Concealed Openable vents.
3. Thermally broken Sliding doors.
4. Louvers, Balustrades & Railing
B. Extent of each type of aluminium windows/doors are indicated on Drawings and in

Aluminium Opening Schedule. Louvers, Balustrades and Railing are as indicated in
the drawings.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Aluminium windows & doors work shall be performed in strict accordance with the
stipulations of the latest edition of the British Standard Specifications (BS) and/or
provisions of the American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and the
specifications of the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM), as
referenced to throughout this section, or other equivalent International Standards and
Sound Practice.
BRITISH STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS BS NO.:
BS 1474 Wrought and Aluminium Alloy

BS 1615 Anodic Oxidation Coatings of Aluminium
BS 3987 Anodic Oxide Coatings on Wrought Aluminium
BS 4315 Part 1: Windows and Structural Gasket Glazing Testing Systems
BS 4842 Stoving Finishes on Aluminium Extrusions
BS 4873 AMD: Aluminium Alloy Windows (AWA)
CP 153 Cleaning, Durability, Sound Insulation, Fire Hazards
Part 2: Durability and Maintenance
Part 3: Sound Insulation
CP 3 Chapter V Part 2: Wind Loads
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION AAMA NO.:
101 Voluntary Specification for Aluminium Prime Windows and Sliding Glass
Doors
608.1 Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically
Deposited Colour Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminium.
701.2 Voluntary Specification for Pile Weather-stripping
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS ASTM NO.
A 123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel
Products
B 209 Specifications for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and Plate
B 221 Specifications for Aluminium-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes & Tubes
C 509 Specifications for Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gasket and Sealing
Material
E 283 Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls and Doors
E 330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls
and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
E 547 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls
and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential
E 699 Practice for Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality
Assurance, and Evaluating Building Components in Accordance with Test
Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E-6
E 783 Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage through Installed Exterior
Windows and Doors
E 987 Test Method for Deglazing Force of Fenestration Products
1.4 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following for the approval of the Engineer:
A. Product Data: Product data for each type of aluminium window and door unit
required. Include the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard construction details

2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components
3. Data on finishes, hardware and accessories
4. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces
B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawing for each type of aluminium window/door required.
Include information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard product data and the
following:
Layout and installation details including anchors
1. Typical unit elevations
2. Full-size details of typical composite members including reinforcement
3. Glazing details
4. Hardware and accessories
C. Samples for Initial Colour Selection: Samples of each specified finish on 300mm
long sections of frame members. Where finishes involve normal colour variations,
include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
D. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Engineer reserves the right to require
additional samples that show fabrication techniques and workmanship and design of
hardware and accessories.
E. Material Test Reports: Engage a recognized independent testing laboratory to
perform tests specified. Provide certified test results showing that each type, grade
and size of window/door unit complies with performance requirements indicated. Test
certificates are acceptable for pre-tested system.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage an experienced manufacturer who has

successfully manufactured aluminium window/door units similar in design and extent
to those required for this project.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has successfully

installed aluminium window/door units similar in design and extent to those required
for this project.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide aluminium windows/doors produced by a

single manufacturer who is capable of indicating prior successful production of units
similar to those required.
D. Field Measurements: Check actual window/door openings in construction work by

accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on
final shop drawings.
E. Co-ordination: Co-ordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid

delay. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements and
co-ordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fitting of aluminium
windows/doors.
1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminium window/door units that comply with performance

requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding
stock systems according to test methods indicated.
B. Design Requirements: Comply with structural performance, air infiltration and water
penetration requirements indicated in AAMA 101 for each grade and performance
class required.
Heights of window/door units above grade at the window centreline are indicated on
orcan be derived from Drawings. Consult with the Engineer for clarification needed
to confirm required loading and test pressures.
Design wind velocity at project Site is 13.5 m/sec.
C. Testing Requirements: Test each grade and size of window/door units by a

recognized testing agency, according to ASTM E 330 for structural performance,
ASTM E 283 for air infiltration and both ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 547 for water
penetration. Provide certified test results.
All tests required shall be performed at the Contractor's expense.
D. Performance Requirements: Each required aluminium window/door unit shall comply

with the following performance requirements:
E. Structural Performance: Provide window/door units with no failure or permanent

deflection in excess of 0.4 percent of any member's span after removal of the
imposed load, for a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 146.5
kg/m2.
F. Air Infiltration: Provide units with an air infiltration rate of not more than 35.1 litre
minute/m of operable sash joint for an inward test pressure of 30.50 kg/m2.
G. Water Penetration: Provide units with no water penetration as defined in the test
method at an inward test pressure of 15 percent of the design pressure.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for delivery, storage and handling of

aluminium windows/doors.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace aluminium windows/doors that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period, failures includes but are not limited to the followings:
1. Failure to meet performance requirements

2. Structural failure including excessive deflection
3. Water leakage, air infiltration and condensation
4. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware
5. Deterioration of metal, metal finishing and other materials beyond normal
weathering
6. Insulating glass failure
B. Warranty Period: Ten years from the date of substantial completion of buildings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS/DOORS, GENERAL
Aluminium window/door units shall be from one of the following systems:

• Gutmann system
• Alu-k System
• Schuco system.
Or equally approved system
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminium Members: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the window/door

units Manufacturer for the corrosion-resistance and for the strength and required
finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for extrusions and ASTM B 209 for sheet or plate.
Ultimate Tensile strength: 1547 kg/cm2
All parts and members shall be of aluminium commercial quality like (A1-Mg-Si) heat-
treated, free from defects impairing their strength and durability and containing not
more than 0.1% copper.
All exposed surfaces shall be polished to a mirror-like surface, free from defects, and
shall be light etched and polyester powder coated or Super Durable coated to colours
and/or finishes as shown on Drawings and/or as directed in writing by the Engineer.
Aluminium shall be treated to comply with BS 1615:1993 and BS 3987:1991 to

provide a polyester powder coated by electrostatic spraying and hard stoved to not
less than 60 micron thickness to comply with BS 6496:1984 (1991) or Super Durable
as specified hereinafter..
All aluminium sections shall present clear straight and sharply defined lines and shall
be free from defects and imperfections that may impair their strength.
Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, aluminium profiles shall be 1.50 m thick at

any location for the main frame and sash members.
Aluminium Finish : Unless otherwise indicated in the drawings,

aluminium finish shall be Super durable Powder
Coating as follows:
Chemical Finish : Cleaning with compatible inhibiting chemicals
Pre-treatment : Thermosetting of chrome layer
Plastic Powder : Epoxy polyester powder, with no additives, 60
microns minimum dry film thickness
Application : Electrostatic, 10 minutes drying time at 200ºC
Colour and Texture : As selected by the Engineer from
Manufacturer’s standard colours.
B. Louvers: Aluminium louvers shall be from a proprietary manufacturer and shall be to

the Engineer's approval. The surface coating shall be as detailed on the drawings
and as specified herein to colours approved by the Engineer. Louvers for substations
shall be as per the drawings and DEWA requirements.
C. Aluminium Balustrades: Aluminium balustrades and railing shall be from a

proprietary manufacturer and shall be as per drawings and to the Engineer's
approval. The surface coating shall be as detailed on the drawings and as specified
herein to colours approved by the Engineer. For glazed balustrades, glazing
materials that comply with requirements of Division-8, Section 08 08 00 "Glass and

Glazing.
D. Fasteners: Provide aluminium nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials

warranted by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminium
members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of window/door units.
E. Reinforcement: Where fasteners are screw-anchored into aluminium, reinforce the

interior with aluminium or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or
provide standard, non-corrosive, pressed-in splined grommet nuts.
F. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use
exposed fasteners to apply hardware, use Phillips flat-head screws that match the
finish of the member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.
E. Anchors, Clips and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips and accessories of

aluminium, nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel complying with
requirements of ASTM A 123.
F. Compression Weather-stripping: Provide the manufacturer's standard compressible

weather-stripping of neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4.
G. Sliding Weather-stripping: Provide woven-pile weather-stripping of wool,

polypropylene or nylon pile, with resin-impregnated backing fabric and an aluminium
backing strip. Comply with AMMA 701.2.
H. Glazing Materials: Provide glazing materials that comply with requirements of

Division-8, Section 08 08 00 "Glass and Glazing".
2.3 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY
A. General: Fabricate aluminium window/door units to comply with Drawings and

indicated standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and
anchorage of window/door units.
B. Sub frames: Not required.
C. Weep holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water
to the exterior.
D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown on Drawings, matching

window/door units complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of
window/door units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of
window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections in the manner
indicated.
E. Glazing Stops: Provide screw-applied or snap-on glazing stops, co-ordinate with

glass selection and glazing system indicated. Finish glazing stops to match window
units.
F. Pre-glazed Fabrication: Preglaze window/door units at the factory where possible

and practical for applications indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements
of Division-8, Section 08 08 00 "Glass and Glazing".
G. Window/Door Frames: All frames shall be provided with metal cramps for grouting in
substrates where no sub frames are employed and shall contain internal fishplates
for connecting adjacent units where a wide frame is manufactured in more than one
unit.
H. Assembly: Windows/Doors shall be securely assembled to assure neat, weather
tight construction. Corners of frames shall be welded from unexposed side leaving
exposed surface in corners free of any excess metal. A permanent watertight joint
shall be made at the junction of the sill and frame jambs, make provision in sill for
exterior drainage of water as specified herein below. Multiple units shall be jointed
together with the manufacturer's recommended mullions, except where otherwise
indicated. Windows/Doors shall be prepared for glazing as indicated in Division-8,
Section 08 08 00 using glazing compound, chloroprene glazing strips and glazing
beads compatible with aluminium. Hardware shall be securely attached. Exposed
parts shall be free from surface blemishes. Welded joints shall be ground and buffed
flush and finished to match adjacent parts. Perimeter stiles and rails shall be hollow
extruded sections arranged to hold and conceal weather-stripping; sash shall be
removable from the inside. Provide cover plates, mullion caps and corner caps of
special extrusions as necessary.
I. Weather Stripping: Provide sliding-type weather-stripping where sash rails slide

horizontally or vertically along the unit frame.
Provide compression-type weather-stripping at the perimeter of each sash where

sliding-type is not appropriate.
Provide weather-stripping located in extruded grooves in the sash.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide hardware necessary to properly operate, tightly close and securely
lock window/Door units. Do not use aluminium in frictional contact with other metals.
B. Metal: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from wrought

aluminium, solid white metal with special coating finish or other corrosion-resistant
material compatible with aluminium and of sufficient strength to perform the function
for which it is intended.
C. Colour: Colour of hardware as per the manufacturer’s standard and the Engineer’s
selection.
D. Casement Windows
1. Operating Device : Combination lever handle and cam-type latch

2. Hinges : Heavy-duty 3-kunckle butt hinges with nylon bushings
(minimum 2 per sash)
3. Lock : Lift-type cam action lock
E. Horizontal Sliding Windows
1. Sash Rollers: Steel lubricated ball-bearing rollers with nylon tires (minimum 2
per sash with maximum interval of 600 mm)
2. Sash Lock
At Meeting Rails: Cam action sweep sash lock and keeper at mounting rails
At Jambs : Spring-loaded snap-type lock (1 per sash)
F. Projected Windows
1. Hinges : Concealed four-bar friction hinges with adjustable slide shoe
(minimum 2 per ventilator)
5. Sash Lock : Cam action sweep lock handle with surface-mounted
Strike (2 locks with units over 1.0 m wide)
For high (1.80 m and over from finished floor) projected windows with ventilators,
sash lock shall be pole-operated spring catch lock.
6. Limit Device: Stay bar with an adjustable hold-open device (1 at each jamb)
G. Aluminium Doors
1. All aluminium doors shall be provided with a complete set of ironmongery

commensurate with the efficient performance of the doors they are designed for.
2. As far as possible all ironmongery shall be from the chosen system/manufacturer.

Floor spring shall be from Dorma or Briton or equal and approved.
3. All locks shall be provided with a set of 3 keys.
4. Where necessary panic devices shall be provided as required by the Civil Defense
Authorities as part of the Ironmongery.
5. Aluminium doors shall have the following minimum ironmongery provisions unless
otherwise described:
Single Glazed or infilled Doors single swing:
1 1/2 Pairs of hinges.

1 Rebated mortice deadlock.
1 Pair 38 mm dia. semi-circular pull handles.
1 Heavy duty surface mounted door closer
1 Door stop.
Double doors, infilled or glazed; single swing:
3 Pairs of hinges.
1 Rebated mortice deadlock
2 Pairs 38 mm dia. semi-circular pull handles.
1 Pair rebated flush bolts
1 Pair heavy duty surface mounted door closers.
2 Door stops.
Single Glazed or infilled doors; double swing.
1 Set of springs with cover plate

1 Rebated mortice deadlock
1 Pull handle
1 Push plate
Double Door; infilled or Glazed; Double Swing.
2 Pairs of floor springs with cover plates.

1 Rebated mortice deadlock.
2 Pairs of pull handles.
2 Push plates.
2.5 SEALANT
A. For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by
the manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permantly
elastic, nonshriking and nonmigrating complying "Joint Sealers" specifications.
2.6 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. A removable protective coating, compatible with aluminium alloy and finish shall be
applied on all exposed portions of window/doors and other aluminium parts.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for company and Metal Products”
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
1. Color: Super Durable Metallic color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect opening before beginning installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening
is correct and the sill is level.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminium windows/doors in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations and Drawings. Install windows/doors plumb, level, square, true to
line or curvature as required, in alignment with work of other trades, free from waves,
buckles, sags or other defects. Provide secure anchorage for all parts of work. Co-
ordinate with related trades to ensure proper mating and connecting of the work.
B. Isolate aluminium and other corrodible surfaces from contact with dissimilar metals
and materials, other than stainless steel, and from sources of corrosion and
electrolytic action by applying on contact surfaces a heavy coat of approved alkali-
resistant bituminous paint; or separate surfaces with a non-absorptive tape or gasket.
C. Install work in prepared openings. Conform to applicable requirements for assuring

use of proper materials and procedures to prevent electrolytic deterioration.
D. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of

work.
E. Set frames level, plumb and in true alignment in accordance with approved shop
drawings. Construct completely weather-tight and waterproof assemblies. Provide
proper support and anchor securely in place.
F. Provide caulking and sealing as indicated to make work water-tight and properly
finished including joints between frames and adjoining construction. If joint opening
is too deep, it shall be filled to within 12 mm with appropriate back-up material such
as untarred oakum, fiber glass, and polythane foam but no oily or asphalt type
materials shall be used, the fill shall be uniform to provide the sealant depth required.
Special compound, where indicated, shall be provided for metal to metal contacts, in
lieu of other caulking, applied by conventional caulking gun or pressure equipment.
G. Prior to using caulking compound, joints shall be cleaned of mortar and foreign
materials, joints wider than 6 mm and deeper than 20 mm shall be backed as
specified. Brush coat of primer shall be applied and caulking compound applied with
gun. Joints shall be completely filled and neatly finished flush with adjoining
surfaces.
H. Moving Parts: There shall be no aluminium to aluminium contact between hardware

parts or window/door members which move relative to each other and remain in
contact.
I. Hardware: Install hardware to hardware manufacturer's instructions and installation

templates.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and
weather-stripping for smooth operation and weather tight closure.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean aluminium surfaces promptly after installing windows/doors. Avoid damaging

protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealing compounds,
dirt and other substances. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
B. Clean glass of pre-glazed units promptly after installing window/door units. Wash
and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to the date scheduled for
final inspection.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance.
C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in
other ways during the construction period, including by natural causes, accidents and
vandalism.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Institute and maintain protective measures and other precautions required through
remainder of construction period to ensure that except for normal weathering,
aluminium window units shall be without damage or deterioration at the time of
substantial completion.
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
Table of Contents
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS........................................................................................ 2
1.2 SUMMARY .............................................................................................................. 2
1.4 DEFINITIONS.......................................................................................................... 3
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................... 3
1.6 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 4
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE.......................................................................................... 5
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .............................................................. 6
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS ........................................................................................ 7
1.11 WARRANTY ............................................................................................................ 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 8
2.1 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS ...................................................................................... 8
2.2 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS ........................................................................... 8
2.3 COATED FLOAT GLASS ........................................................................................ 8
2.4 WIRED GLASS ....................................................................................................... 8
2.5 LAMINATED GLASS ............................................................................................... 9
2.6 INSULATING GLASS .............................................................................................. 9
2.7 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS ................................................................ 10
2.8 GLAZING TAPES .................................................................................................. 10
2.9 GLAZING GASKETS............................................................................................. 10
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS .......................................................... 11
2.11 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS ....................... 11
PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 12
3.1 EXAMINATION...................................................................................................... 12
3.2 PREPARATION..................................................................................................... 12
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL ........................................................................................... 12
3.4 TAPE GLAZING .................................................................................................... 13
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) .................................................................................... 13
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) .................................................................................. 14
3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING ........................................................................ 14
3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING ........................................................................... 14
3.9 GLASS SCHEDULE .............................................................................................. 15
SECTION 08 80 00 – Glazing Page 1 of 15
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, and Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including
those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by
reference to this Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Glazed entrances.
4. Storefront framing.
Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the latest edition
of the British Standard Specifications and the specifications of the American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) or other approved International Standard and
Sound Practice.
BRITISH STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS BS NO.
BS 476 Part 8: Fire tests on building materials and structures.

Test methods and criteria for the fire resistance of elements of build-
ing construction.
BS 544 Linseed Oil Putty
BS 952 Glass for Glazing
BS 1210 Wood Screws
BS 1494 Part 2: Fixing Accessories
BS 3275 Glass for Signs
BS 4031 Lead Glasses (x)
BS 4255 Part 1: Non Cellular Gaskets
Part 2: Cellular Gaskets
BS 4315 Part 1: Gasket Glazing Systems AMD
BS 5051 Security Glazing
BS 6206 Impact Performance Requirements for Flat Safety Glass and
Safety Plastics for use in Buildings.
BS 6262 Part 4: Fire Hazards Associated with Glazing.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS ASTM NO.
C 864 Specifications for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting

Blocks, and Spacers.
D 412 Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion - Adhesion to Flexible Sub-

strates.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in

referenced glazing publications.
B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains

dehydrated air.
C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that is

attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass
breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other
indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
D. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that is

attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass
breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delaminating
materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed
by referenced laminated-glass standard.
E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use
that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass
breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision
by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal

movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including
loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture,
fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and
airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing
only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service
conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses
indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated)
required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with

ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements:
a. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable

to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per
second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum
Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.4.2,
"Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade
indicated on Drawings.
b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set
vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind
action.
1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
c. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 lite per 1000 for lites set
more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind and snow action.
1) Load Duration: 30 days.
d. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported

on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection
at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch (25
mm), whichever is less.
1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads.

2) For insulating glass.
3) For laminated-glass lites.
e. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm.
f. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same

thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures
acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering
calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance

properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data. All Glass shall
conform to the local regulations issued by Doha Municipality.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
E. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square
Samples for glass.
1. Each color of tinted float glass.

2. Wired glass.
3. Fire-resistive glazing products.
4. Insulating glass for each designation indicated.
5. For each color (except black) of exposed glazing sealant indicated.
F. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed

openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size
opening and location.
G. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products

certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
H. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following
products comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current
products:
1. Tinted float glass.

2. Coated float glass.
3. Insulating glass.
4. Glazing sealants.
5. Glazing gaskets.
I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar

in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass
manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Tinted Glass: Obtain tinted, heat-absorbing, and light-
reducing float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer for each tint color
indicated.
D. Source Limitations for Coated Glass: Obtain coated glass from one manufacturer
for each type of coating and each type and class of float glass indicated.
E. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one
manufacturer using the same type of glass and other components for each type of
unit indicated.
F. Source Limitations for Laminated Glass: Obtain laminated-glass units from one
manufacturer using the same type of glass lites and interlayers for each type of unit
indicated.
G. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one
source for each product and installation method indicated.
H. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed
and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
I. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are

listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 257.
J. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in

16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.
K. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are
indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this
Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design

Guide."
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," and
SIGMA TB-3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
L. Mockups: Before glazing, build mockups for each glass product indicated below to
verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
3. Obtain Engineer’s approval of mockups before starting fabrication.
4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
5. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as

needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation,
temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
1.9 LABELLING
A. Each piece of glass shall bear the manufacturer’s label showing the type (single or
insulated glass unit), thickness (total and individual), condition (coated or uncoated
type), class (substrate), kind (head-treated or laminated) of the glass.
B. When glass is not processed by the manufacturer, but processed from stock by the
local fabricator, a certificate stating the type, thickness, condition and kind of the
glass shall be submitted to the Engineer.
C. All materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability and
appearance including bubbles, pockets and chips as stated in ASTM C1036.
Minimum acceptable quality for all glass types is q3 (glazing select).
D. Except as otherwise indicated, the requirements for glazing and aluminum windows
and the terminology and standards of performance and fabrication workmanship,
are those specified and recommended in ANSI A 134.1 and the applicable general
recommendations published by AAMA, NAAM, AA, ASTM, British Standards, CEN,
Agreement Board and the SMC.
E. Windows glazed prior to shipment shall be corner of edge blocked for shipment
purposes in accordance to glass manufacturer’s recommendations. Windows shall
be random inspected by the Engineer on arrival at the job site to ensure proper
glazing system integrity.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and

substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material
manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain,
condensation, or other causes.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive
Employer of other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty,

made out to Employer and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish
replacements for those coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in
"Definitions" Article, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Written warranty, made out

to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish
replacements for laminated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions"
Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty
period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of handing over the Buildings.
D. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out

to Employer and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish
replacements for insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions"
Article,within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of handing over the Buildings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing
select); class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.
2.2 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS
A. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat);

Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at
the end of Part 3.
2.3 COATED FLOAT GLASS
A. General: Provide coated glass complying with requirements indicated in this Article
and in schedules at the end of Part 3.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) coated float glass in place of coated

annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by
differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design
requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide
Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated.
B. Pyrolytic-Coated Float Glass: Float glass with solar-reflective metallic-oxide coating

applied by pyrolytic deposition process during initial manufacture, complying with
requirements specified in schedules at the end of Part 3.
C. Sputter-Coated Float Glass: Float glass with metallic-oxide or metallic-nitride

coating deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat
treatment (if any), complying with requirements specified in schedules at the end of
Part 3.
D. Coated Spandrel Float Glass: Float glass complying with requirements specified in
monolithic glass schedules at the end of Part 3 and the following:
1. Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing the

fallout-resistance test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048.
2. Factory applied manufacturer's standard opacifier of the following material to
coated second surface of lites, with resulting products complying with
GTA 89-1-6.
a. Manufacturer's standard opacifier material.
2.4 WIRED GLASS
A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1
(clear), Quality q8 (glazing); 6.4 mm thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated
below:
1. Polished Wired Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows:
a. Mesh m2 (square).
2. Patterned Wired Glass: Form 2 (patterned and wired), Mesh m1 (diamond).
2.5 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Laminated Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated
and other requirements specified, including those in the Laminated-Glass Schedule
at the end of Part 3.
B. Interlayer: Interlayer material as indicated below, clear or in colors, and of

thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose
physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation.
1. Interlayer Material: Polyvinyl butyral sheets.
C. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign

substances and air or glass pockets as follows:
1. Laminate lites with polyvinyl butyral interlayer in autoclave with heat plus
pressure.
2.6 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass

separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for
Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in the Insulating-
Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass

where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of
individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified
in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered)
where safety glass is indicated.
B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the
Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall
thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites
at unit's edge.
C. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:
1. Manufacturer's standard sealants.

2. Polyisobutylene and silicone.
D. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
2.7 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following

requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another
and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of
insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions
for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for
conditions existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Engineer from
manufacturer's full range for this characteristic.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other
requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant in the
Glazing Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.
1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is

specified in the Glazing Sealant Schedule, provide products with the
capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic
movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in
the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with
other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
2.8 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with

a solids content of 100 percent; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with
nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape
and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release
paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products
indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to
continuous pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to
continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive;
and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a
full bead of liquid sealant.
2.9 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated

into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with
ASTM C 542, black.
B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated

below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated
below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864.
C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned

gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black;
and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1. Neoprene.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced
glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing
materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with
surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket

manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85,

plus or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer

hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for
installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral

movement (side walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of

size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum
glazing sealant performance.
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test

assembly to obtain fire-resistance rating.
2.11 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings
indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions,
and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced
glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that

produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size,

squareness, and offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately
before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,

gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are
indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on

glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with
reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove
damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged
glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could
weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as

determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced
glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks
in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass
lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches
(1270 mm) as follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces
of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face
clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have
demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with
system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness
equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than
final compressed thickness of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar
characteristics.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize
sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot
walk out when installation is subjected to movement.
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner

recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal
corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed
edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not
stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and
sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints
by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together,
not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape
manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is
installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by
inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against
faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward
centers of openings.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to

fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is
securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft
compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed
to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at
corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a
weather tight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,

between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to
prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until
sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to
control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant
performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete
wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching

crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass
surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from

construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection,
contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them
immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month,
for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by
glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction
period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four
days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial
Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.
3.9 GLASS SCHEDULE
As per Drawing
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 83 00 - MIRRORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL………………………………………………………………………… 2
1.1 SUMMARY ……………………………………………………..2
1.2 Edges …………………………………………………………….2
1.3 Backing and fixing ………………………………………………2
1.4 Mechanical fixing ……………………………………………….3
1.5 Mirror frames ……………………………………………………3
SECTION 08 83 00 – Mirrors Page 1 of 3
SECTION 08 83 00 - MIRRORS
1.0 GENERAL :
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Glass mirrors shall be approved types to match Control Samples, complete with
fixings, trim and accessories, in accordance with relevant Standards.
2. Submit details, including computations and shop drawings to verify glass type,
thickness, and fixing methods.
3. Mirror silvering shall be an electroplated silver-copper backing not less than 5
microns thick, with two coats of protective and edge sealing paint not less than 50
microns dry film thickness.
4. Where required, mirror glass shall be not less than Grade A safety glass.
5. Mirrors shall be impact resistant and theft resistant.
1.2 Edges:
1. Visible edges of mirrors shall be smooth, straight and square, without chips or nicks
with no sharp or dangerous edges.
2. Bevelled edges shall be ground and polished to the width and depth indicated.
Square edges shall be ground and polished, with 2 mm arris.
3. Reinstate edge protection paint where mirrors are cut on site or otherwise where
edge protection is damaged.
1.3 Backing and fixing:

1. Mirror shall be bonded or fixed to continuous suitable backing of moisture-resistant
wood-panel or plywood by approved concealed methods.
2. Coordinate with and refer to JOINERY Section for technical requirements.
3. Methods which may be approved include double sided adhesive tape or silicone
sealant adhesive.
4. Adhesives and sealants shall be compatible with mirror silvering and backing.
5. Visible edges of backing shall be properly finished and trimmed. Unless otherwise
indicated, visible edges shall be painted matt black before fixing mirror.
6. Seal between mirror and adjacent surfaces at sides and bottom edges in wet areas,
and where indicated. Leave top edge open to breathe unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 Mechanical fixing:

1. Glass in excess of 6 mm thickness or more than 10 kg per lite shall be fixed by an
approved mechanical fixing system, designed to accommodate all loads and
movements of glass. Submit computations, and submit shop drawings if directed.
Submit samples of visible fixings.
2. Mechanical fixings may include surround frames, flush countersunk fixings and
support brackets, used separately or in various combinations with concealed fixings.
Submit details.
3. Metal fixings shall be separated from glass with resilient spacers to prevent direct
contact between mirror and fixings. Do not over-tighten fixings.
4. Unless otherwise approved, do not drill holes in mirror glass less than 50 mm from
edge
1.5 Mirror frames:

1. Where indicated or required, mirror frames shall match Control Samples, and shall
accommodate all loads and movements of glass.
2. Mirror frames shall be attached to substrates with concealed fixings, and shall enable
replacement of broken glass.
3. Frame joints shall be mitred to tight hair-line joints.
4. Mirror edges shall be contained in continuous resilient gaskets.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08815 - INTERNAL GLAZING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................ 2

1.2 REFERENCES ...................................................................................... 2
1.3 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................ 4
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...................................................................... 4
1.5 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................ 5
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................................ 6
1.8 WARRANTY .......................................................................................... 7
2.0 PRODUCTS……………………………………………………………………... 10
2.1 GLAZING SYSTEM ............................................................................... 10

2.2 MIRRORS .............................................................................................. 11
2.3 GLAZED SHOWER SCREENS ............................................................ 12
2.4 GLAZED LININGS AND SPLASH-BACKS ........................................... 12
2.5 GLAZED WARDROBE DOORS ............................................................. 13
2.6 GLASS AND GLAZING ......................................................................... 14
2.7 ANNEALED GLASS ............................................................................... 14
2.8 TEMPERED GLASS .............................................................................. 15
2.9 LAMINATED GLASS ............................................................................. 15
2.11 ALUMINUM............................................................................................ 16
2.12 FIXING ................................................................................................... 16
2.13 SEALANTS ............................................................................................ 17
2.14 ANODIZED COATING ........................................................................... 17
2.15 POWDER COATING ............................................................................. 18
2.16 HARDWARE AND FURNITURE ........................................................... 18
3.0 EXECUTION ……………………………………………………………………. 18
3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .............................................. 18

3.2 GLAZING INSTALLATION ..................................................................... 18
3.4 COMPLETION DOCUMENTS................................................................ 20
SECTION 08815 Internal Glazing Page 1 of 19

SECTION 08815 - INTERNAL GLAZING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Section includes [clear] [tinted] [low emissivity] [spandrel] [patterned]
[wired] [mirror] [heat strengthened] [fully tempered] [laminated]
[monolithic] [insulating] glass and glazing accessories frames, fixings,
trims, hardware, sealants and finishes for:
a. Glazed screens and doors, lift lobbies, internal glazed walls, and the
like
b. glazed shower screens, and glazed splashbacks,
c. Manufactured fixed and operable wood, aluminum clad wood, steel,
and aluminum tubular plastic windows.
2. The work of this trade is performance-based of which construction details
to be developed and documented in accordance with the product
selections, design intent and performance requirements indicated in the
Drawings and Specifications
3. Related sections:
a. DRAWINGS for locations and extent of work
b. Section 01000 “General Specifications”
c. Section 08200, “Doors and Ironmongery.
d. Section 08970 “Exterior Glazed Assemblies Windows And
Entrances”.
e. Specifications of other trade that require coordination with this trade.
f. FINISHES SCHEDULE for system descriptions and finishes
1.2 REFERENCES
1. The standards referred herein, together with all appropriate references
listed within those Standards, shall be used within this Specification. The
edition to be used shall be that current at the date of this Specification,
except that the latest editions of standards may be used where no
reduction in quality will result. Any differences between their
requirements and this Specification shall be submitted to the Engineer for
his ruling.
2. Where a Standard has been specified and equivalent internationally
recognized Standard, may be used subject to the Engineer’s approval.
3. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI Z97.1 Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of
Test for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings
4. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
AAMA 800 - Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants.
5. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
6. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM C509 Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing

Material.
ASTM C 669 Glazing Compounds for Back Bedding and Face
Glazing of Metal Sash
ASTM C864 Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers.
ASTM C920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
ASTM C1036 Flat Glass.
ASTM C1048 Heat Treated Flat Glass, Kind HS, Kind FT, Coated
and Uncoated.
ASTM C1115 Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and
Accessories.
ASTM C1172 Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.
ASTM C1281 Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications.
ASTM C 1349 Architectural Flat Glass Clad Polycarbonate
ASTM E546 Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
ASTM D 395 Rubber Property - Compression Set
ASTM E 119 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
ASTM E576 Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in
Vertical Position.
ASTM E773 Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass
Units.
ASTM E774 Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating
Glass Units.
ASTM E1300 Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance
of Glass in Buildings.
ASTM E2010 Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of
Window Assemblies.
7. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):
CFR 16CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
8. Glass Association of North America (GANA):
GANA Glazing Manual.
9. Insulating Glass Certification Council (ICCC)
10. National Accreditation and Management Institute (NAMI)
11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows
NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies NFPA 257 (1996) Fire
Tests for Window and Glass Block Assemblies
12. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)
NFRC 100 Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-
Factors
NFRC 200 Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product
Solar Heat Gain Coefficients at Normal Incidence.

NFRC 300 Test Method for Determining Solar and Infrared

Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and Fading
Resistance of Systems.
13. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
UL 9- Fire Tests of Window Assemblies
14. U.S. General Services Administration (GSA)
CID A-A-378 (Basic)Putty Linseed Oil Type, (for Wood-Sash-Glazing)
15. U.S. National Archives And Records Administration (Nara)
16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. Visible Light Transmittance (T-vis): Percentage of sun's visible energy
transmitted through glass.
2. Ultra Violet Transmittance: Percentage of sun's ultra violet or infrared
energy transmitted through glass.
3. U-value: Overall indication of heat flow through glass where a lower
value indicates less heat flow and hence better thermal performance.
Winter nighttime values are calculated using outdoor air temperature
4. Shading Coefficient (SC): Ratio of total solar energy passing through
glass relative to amount passing through 3.2mm thick clear glass under
same conditions. A lower coefficient indicates better performance in
reducing heat gain.
5. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Solar heat gain through glass
relative to the amount of solar radiation. It is equal to 86 percent of the
shading coefficient.
6. Light-to-Solar Gain Ratio (LSG): Ratio of visible light transmittance (T-
vis) to solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC), LSG=(T-vis)/(SHGC). The
higher the ratio, the better the glass is at reducing unwanted solar heat
and maximizing light transmittance
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. Provide and install glass in accordance with related ASTM standards to
withstand thermal movement and wind and impact loads without
breakage, loss, failure of seals, product deterioration, and other defects.
a. Wind and snow design loads
b. Thermal movement design conditions:
• Ambient temperature range:48.8oC
• Material surfaces range: 82.2oC
2. Provide and install gaskets, sealants, and other glazing accessories to
resist water and air penetration.
3. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298
WINDOW 4.1 computer program or latest version, expressed as Watt/
m2 x K
4. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology
using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program or latest version.
5. Solar and Infrared Optical Properties: NFRC 300

1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Provide in accordance with Section 01000, “General Specification”:
a. List of proposed products and product data.
b. Glazing schedule: List glass type, size, and thickness for each
opening. Use same designations as Drawings.
c. Shop drawings detailing glass setting methods and materials.
d. Samples: 150 by 200 mm minimum size for each type of [tinted]
[patterned] [wired] [spandrel] glass.
e. Glass manufacturer, glass fabricator, and installer qualifications as
required by Paragraphs [1.5 a, b, and d]
f. Fabricator’s certificates: Certify that safety glass units and sealed
insulating glass units meet or exceed specified requirements.
g. Manufacturer's installation and protection instructions. If the actual
conditions are not indicated in the standard details, submit additional
shop drawings for the actual conditions, if directed.
h. Manufacturer's standard computation tables (loads and spans) and
test data indicating relevant selections. If the actual conditions are
not included in the standard tables, submit additional computations
for the actual conditions.
i. Include computations for:
• Glass types and thickness.
• Anchorages, framing and fixings to the base-structure.
j. Manufacturer's certificates that:
• Glazing materials meet or exceed specified requirements.
• Sealants have been tested for adhesion to and compatibility
with glass and glazing substrates.
k. Schedule which records all items which require certification and the
ongoing status of such certification.
l. Copy of warranties required by Paragraph [1.6] for review by the
ENGINEER.
m. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit MSDS information for
glass materials including sealant, tape and gasket.
2. Engage and pay for an experienced independent engineer to certify all
computations.
3. The certifying engineer shall not be the engineer that prepared the
computations being certified.
4. Submit certification of all glass thickness computations.

1. Glass manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of clear,
tinted, coated, and other glass products with 10 years minimum
successful experience.
2. Source quality control: To ensure uniformity, all tinted and coated glass
used for Project shall be obtained from single manufacturer.

3. Glass fabricator: Company specialized in fabricating insulating, heat

strengthened, tempered, laminated, glass units with 5 years minimum
successful experience.
4. Glass installer: Company installing glass on site shall specialize in this
type of work and have 5 years minimum successful experience.
5. Safety glazing: Comply with CFR 16CFR 1201, ANSI Z97.1, and other
applicable safety requirements. Each piece of safety glazing shall be
permanently labeled with appropriate marking.
6. Insulating glass units: Permanently labeled by a certified and approved
testing agency.
7. Submit representative samples of products, finishes and fabrications
including:
a. Glass types and edge treatments
b. Metal sections and extrusions, and finishes
c. Fixings, hardware, trim, sealants and accessories
d. Typical fabrication, indicating joints, fixings and workmanship.
8. Submit the first completed example of each type of installed work and
finish to establish the required standard before proceeding with the
remainder of work (one typical unit)
9. Submit and implement Inspection and Test Plans (ITPs) for quality
assurance in accordance with the relevant Standards (ISO 9002). Hold
points shall include:
a. Submission of Control samples for approval.
b. Submission of shop drawings for approval.
10. Give sufficient notice so the ENGINEER may inspect significant
stages of work, including:
a. Set-out and substrates, prepared and ready for installation, before
commencing
b. Work to be covered over and concealed spaces, before covering
over.

1. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage, and
handling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Store clear of ground, concrete or damp surfaces on suitable packers
spaced to prevent distortion
3. Prevent edging chipping and damage from condensation, temperature
changes, and exposure to sunlight.
4. Deliver finished products directly into installation areas in correct
sequence of installation
5. Properly identify products on packing and wrapping.
6. Insulating glass units: Comply with fabricator's instructions for venting
and sealing when units are exposed to substantial altitude changes.

1.8 WARRANTY
1. Provide under provisions of Section 01000, “General Specifications”:
a. Coated glass units: 10 years manufacturer's warranty to cover
replacement in event of peeling, cracking, and deterioration of
coating.
b. Insulating sealed glass units: 10 years fabricator's warranty to cover
replacement in event of seal failure and interpane dusting, misting,
and filming.
c. Laminated glass units: 5 years fabricator's warranty to cover
replacement in event of delamination, edge separation, and
blemishes exceeding referenced standard.
d. Mirror glass units: 5 years manufacturer's warranty to cover
replacement in event of peeling, cracking, and deterioration of
coating.
2. Warranties in point (1) shall include particular reference to failure of, or
due to, the following:
a. Spontaneous breakage
b. Breakdown or change of color of body tints, coatings and interlayers
c. Visual clarity without distortion or other harmful effects
d. Excessive warp, bow or roller wave
e. Delamination of laminated glass
3. Pinholes, scratches and other defects to glass coatings shall be not
visible when viewed from more than 1500 mm in daylight, perpendicular
to the surface
4. Warranty shall include also particular reference to failure of, or due to,
the following where applicable:
a. Failure of protective coating to prevent corrosion and staining due to
corrosion
b. Suitability of coating system for substrate types, exposure and use
c. Correct preparation of substrates
d. Primer, sealer and base-coats
e. Delamination, loss of bond to substrate, peeling, flaking, loose or
drummy work
f. Cracking, cupping, buckling, erosion, chipping, crazing, blistering,
perforations
g. Staining and discoloration.

1. Strength and stability of wall systems: Wall systems shall remain stable
without deflection, damage or rattling under normal conditions of use and
slamming of doors, in accordance with the relevant Standards.
2. Loads: The installed work, including fixings and framing, shall
accommodate all permanent and temporary loads, individually and in
combination, without failure, deflection, damage to adjacent or applied
work, or risk to human safety. Comply with the relevant Standards.
3. Movements: The installed work, including fixings and framing, shall
accommodate all short and long-term movements and deflections in the

base-structure, substrates to which the work is fixed, and within the work,
including thermal movements, without failure or the transfer of loads from
the base-structure to the work of this trade.
4. Base-structure deflections and construction tolerances: The installed
work shall accommodate base-structure and substrate deflections and
construction tolerances.
a. Verify base-structure and substrate deflections and construction
tolerances before commencing. Notify Engineer of any unusual
conditions which may affect the work.
b. Where walls are full-height to the underside of base-structure soffits
or roofs over, construct suitable deflection head details to
accommodate long-term soffit deflection without transfer of base-
structure loads or deflections to walls.
5. Deflections: Unless otherwise indicated, ensure minimum 5 mm
clearance between aluminum glazing frames and adjacent base-
structure and structural framing.
6. Wind-load deflections: Unless otherwise indicated, ensure minimum 5
mm clearance between aluminum glazing frames and adjacent base-
structure and structural framing.
7. Connections: The installed work shall be connected to the base-structure
or substrates in a neat, substantial manner by correctly selected and
located connections which transfer the loads from the work without
displacement, distortion, or damage to the fixings, substrates or the
adjacent work.
a. Connections shall accommodate movement requirements.
b. Make provision where required for connections for subsequent
applied or adjacent work
8. Visible fixings: Where visible fixings are indicated or required, indicate
head types, spacing, finish and alignment tolerances on shop drawings.
a. Visible fixings shall match Control samples, and shall be evenly and
neatly located and aligned
b. Install visible fixings after finishing adjacent surfaces to prevent
damage or smearing of surfaces
c. Use correctly sized tools to prevent damage to fixings. Include
required spacers and packers
d. Visible fixings shall be vandal resistant
9. Corrosion: Products and materials, including fixings and concealed
components, shall be corrosion-resistant or protective coated to prevent
corrosion.
a. The cut edges of factory coated products shall be coated or
otherwise treated to ensure continuity of corrosion protection.
10. Compatibility: Adjacent products and materials shall be chemically
and electrolytically compatible with each other, substrates, and adjacent
work, or shall be separated by suitable products and procedures.
a. Adjacent products and materials, including adhesives and sealants,
shall not stain or contaminate, and shall not cause visual or structural
defects in adjacent materials.
11. Moving parts and components: Moving parts and components shall
operate smoothly and silently without jamming, sticking, shuddering, or

wobbling, without undue resistance, abrasion or noise, and with minimal

human or mechanical effort to operate.
a. Moving parts shall be factory lubricated with durable low-friction
compounds.
b. Moving parts shall open and close, and function properly in all
operational modes.
12. Secondary framing and bracing: Provide sufficient additional framing
and bracing to ensure the work is rigid and safe under all loading
conditions, including later applied work by other trades, and at openings,
terminations and junctions.
a. Additional framing and bracing shall be integrated with the work and
concealed
b. Coordinate with related trades as required, and verify types and
loads of applied work
13. Visual indication of glass barriers: Glass walls and doors without mid-
rails, shall be provided with suitable approved contrasting visual
indicators at nominal 1100 mm above floor level to reduce the risk
accidental of impact.
a. Visual indicators may be continuous or semi-continuous and may
include stick-on decals, etched or oven-baked logos, lettering or
other graphic treatment of approved colour and design for the full
width of the glass or pedestrian traffic area.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, visual indication shall be a horizontal row
of white dots, nominal 35 mm diameter and 50 mm spacing
14. Fabrication tolerances: Fabrication tolerances of components and
assemblies generally shall not exceed:
• Length and width: ±1 mm
• Diagonals: ± 2 mm
• Flatness: ± 1 mm per metre length (maximum 2 mm)
• Edge straightness: ± 1 mm per meter length (maximum 2
mm)
• Maximum corner radius (cut edges): 1 mm
• Maximum corner radius (folded edges): 3 mm
• Misalignment of mating surfaces and hairline joints: 0 mm
• Joint widths (other than hairline joints): ± 10% of design width
15. Installation tolerances: Installation tolerances for finished work
generally shall not exceed:
• Position on plan, or vertical surface: ± 3 mm
• Deviation in level (horizontal): Not more than 1 in 1000
(maximum 3 mm)
• Deviation in plumb (vertical): Not more than 1 in 1000
(maximum 3 mm)
• Edge alignment overall: ± 1 mm per meter length (maximum 5
mm)
16. Finish quality: The installed work shall have a high standard of finish
quality. Use materials and procedures resistant to damage, scratches,
marks and blemishes in finished work during construction and in-service.

17. Uniform appearance of glass surfaces: The visual effect (color,

reflectivity and opacity) shall be uniform for each glazing system and
visual plane. Body tinted glass in each visual plane shall be of uniform
thickness, unless otherwise approved.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLAZING SYSTEMS

1. Glazing systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with
established design principles and the relevant Standards.
2. Glazing systems shall include anchorages, brackets, fixings, framing,
stiffening, cappings, flashings, sills, trim, sealants, back-up drains, weep
holes, and accessories, as appropriate and required.
3. Fixings shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated.
4. Where the copyright, license or intellectual property of a system or any
of its components, including aluminum extrusions, is owned by a third
party, obtain the necessary rights or licenses and comply with any
conditions. Submit evidence of approval and compliance.
5. Applied coatings shall be a suitable factory-applied proprietary system
unless otherwise approved. Extend coatings to edge and rear surfaces
where visible in the installed location.
6. Glazing systems, including non-standard components, shall be
prefabricated and pre-finished in the factory, to the greatest extent
practicable.
7. Provide face-sealed sealant joints at the following locations:
a. At external joints between glazing panels where indicated or
required.
b. At external and internal joints between glazing panels and adjacent
work and windows.
c. Elsewhere indicated
d. Carry out sealing to inside joints progressively at the time of glazing
installation using the same or compatible sealant materials
2.2 MIRRORS
1. Glass mirrors shall be approved types to match Control samples,
complete with fixings, trim and accessories, in accordance with relevant
Standards.
2. Submit details, including computations and shop drawings to verify glass
type, thickness, and fixing methods.
3. Mirror silvering shall be an electroplated silver-copper backing not less
than 5 microns thick, with two coats of protective and edge sealing paint
not less than 50 microns dry film thickness.
4. Where required, mirror glass shall be not less than Grade A safety glass.
5. Mirrors shall be impact resistant and theft resistant.
6. Edges.

a. Visible edges of mirrors shall be smooth, straight and square, without

chips or nicks with no sharp or dangerous edges.
b. Beveled edges shall be ground and polished to the width and depth
indicated. Square edges shall be ground and polished, with 2mm
arris.
c. Reinstate edge protection paint where mirrors are cut on site or
otherwise where edge protection is damaged.
7. Backing and fixing:
a. Mirror shall be bonded or fixed to continuous suitable
backing of moisture-resistant wood-panel or plywood by
approved concealed methods.
b. Coordinate with and refer to Joinery section for technical
requirements.
c. Methods which may be approved include double sided adhesive tape
or silicone sealant adhesive.
d. Adhesives and sealants shall be compatible with mirror silvering and
backing.
e. Visible edges of backing shall be properly finished and trimmed.
Unless otherwise indicated, visible edges shall be painted matt black
before fixing mirror.
f. Seal between mirror and adjacent surfaces at sides and bottom
edges in wet areas, and where indicated. Leave top edge open to
breathe unless otherwise indicated.
8. Mechanical fixing:
a. Glass in excess of 6mm thickness or more than 10 kg per lite shall be
fixed by an approved mechanical fixing system, designed to
accommodate all loads and movements of glass. Submit
computations, and submit shop drawings if directed. Submit samples
of visible fixings.
b. Mechanical fixings may include surround frames, flush countersunk
fixings and support brackets, used separately or in various
combinations with concealed fixings. Submit details.
c. Metal fixings shall be separated from glass with resilient spacers to
prevent direct contact between mirror and fixings. Do not over-tighten
fixings.
d. Unless otherwise approved, do not drill holes in mirror glass less
than 50 mm from edge.
9. Mirror frames:
a. Where indicated or required, mirror frames shall match control
samples, and shall accommodate all loads and movements of glass.
b. Mirror frames shall be attached to substrates with concealed fixings,
and shall enable replacement of broken glass.
c. Frame joints shall be mitred to tight hair-line joints.
d. Mirror edges shall be contained in continuous resilient gaskets.
2.3 GLAZED SHOWER SCREENS

1. Glazed shower screens shall be approved proprietary framed and
frameless systems glazed in safety glass, suitable for the location and

the intended function, in accordance with the product information and

relevant standards
2. Submit Product Information, including standard computations and shop
drawings
3. Screens shall shed water to the inside of the shower enclosure without
retention on frame surfaces
4. Glazed shower screens shall be Grade A safety glass
5. Finishes, gaskets and accessories shall be durable and resistant to
normal shower soaps, and normal cleaning compounds and procedures,
without fading, wear or scratching
6. Screens shall have no sharp edges or protrusions
7. Doors shall be hinged or sliding. Hinged doors shall open outward, and
shall be located and installed to prevent or minimize clashing of shower
doors with adjacent doors
8. Sliding doors shall be suspended from overhead rails with durable wheel
assemblies, with bottom guides
9. Door handles shall be suitable for the location and the intended function,
to prevent accidental jamming or scraping injury to fingers in normal
usage. Include handles on both sides of doors
2.4 GLAZED LININGS AND SPLASH-BACKS

1. Glazed linings and splash-backs shall selected glass bonded to
substrates, to match control samples, in accordance with the Product
Information and relevant Standards
2. Submit details including product information, control samples, bonding
methods, computations and shop drawings
3. Glazing shall be in longest practicable lengths with minimum joints
4. Verify glass types before commencing
5. Fixing methods may include:
a. Bonding of glass to immediate backing sheet, direct bonded to the
substrate wall
b. Bonding of glass to backing sheet, fixed to the substrate framing with
visible stainless steel fixings
c. Bonding of glass to demountable panels, fixed to substrate with split
battens or other approved concealed methods
6. Verify fixing method before commencing
7. Mechanical fixings shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated or
approved
8. Support framing and furring shall be not visible through the glazed
linings. Support framing and furring and substrates shall be painted or
otherwise of uniform color
9. Substrate thickness shall be adequate to support loads without bending
or visible distortion
10. Adhesives shall be continuous and durable to prevent delamination
under all project conditions

11. Frames shall be reinforced to accommodate concentrated loads at

connection points, to prevent sagging or racking, and to resist air
pressure loads
12. Glazing: Glass for glazed opaque linings shall be toughened Grade A
safety glass, unless otherwise required
a. Glass-to-glass joints shall be nominal 3 mm wide, unless otherwise
indicated. There shall be no direct contact between adjacent glass
lites
b. Seal glass-to-glass joints with neutral cure silicone sealant. Verify
color of sealant before commencing
13. Trims:
a. Include suitable trimming pieces and angles to ensure tight tidy fit to
adjacent work
b. Unless otherwise indicated, finish shall match opaque linings
14. Fire-resistant construction:
a. Where glazed splash-backs are located less than 200 mm from
exposed gas cooking appliances, substrate shall be an approved fire-
resistant and insulating board
b. Product which may be approved include ‘mill-board’
2.5 GLAZED WARDROBE DOORS

1. Glazed wardrobe doors shall be approved proprietary sliding mirror
systems, suitable for the location and the intended function, in
accordance with the product information and relevant standards
2. The doors shall have no sharp edges or protrusions
3. Door handles shall be suitable for the location and the intended function,
to prevent accidental jamming or scraping injury to fingers in normal
usage
4. Sliding doors shall be suspended from overhead rails with durable wheel
assemblies, with bottom guides
2.6 GLASS AND GLAZING

1. Glass and glazing accessories shall be approved types to match control
samples, suitable for the location and the intended function, in
accordance with the product information and relevant standards
2. Submit details including control samples, computations and shop
drawings
3. Verify required thicknesses before commencing
4. Thickness:
a. Determine glass thicknesses appropriate to the glass area,
performance requirements and conditions, including wind loads and
internal air pressures, deflections and safety, in accordance with
relevant standards
b. Glass types and thicknesses shall be not less than indicated on the
drawings

c. For each glass type, all glass of that type in each plane surface shall
have consistent visual characteristics and shall be the same
thickness, unless otherwise approved
5. Human impact and safety:
a. Provide Grade A safety glass for glass subject to human loads in
accordance with the relevant standards
b. Permanently mark safety glass in accordance with the relevant
Standards
c. Provide Grade A safety glass for glass balustrades, glass doors and
side-lights, and glass walls below balustrade level
d. Where indicated, glazing shall accommodate human crush and
panic loads
e. Edge treatment: Edge treatment for glass shall be not less than:
• Annealed glass: Clean, wheel cut edges
• Laminated glass: Clean, wheel cut edges
• Tempered glass: Belt arrised edges
• Visible edges shall be ground-arrised
• Glass with visible edges, or subject to thermal stress: Ground-
arrised
6. Ground-arrising, where required, shall use a 'wet' process with grit not
coarser than 120. Do not work across the edge from surface to surface
2.7 ANNEALED GLASS

1. Annealed glass shall comply with the relevant Standards. Submit details
to verify quality and performance
ASTM C1036 Standard specification for flat glass
2. Quality, dimensional tolerances and defects shall not exceed ASTM
C1036, type 'q3', proportionally adjusted to proposed glass thickness
3. Glass shall be free from cracks, scratches, bubbles, blisters, inclusions
of harmful matter and other defects which detract from appearance or
interfere with durability and performance.
4. Body tints: Body tints shall match Control Samples and thermal
performance data, in accordance with the relevant Standards. Submit
details and test results
2.8 TEMPERED GLASS

1. Tempered glass shall be manufactured using the 'roller hearth' or an
equivalent process, in accordance with the relevant Standards. Submit
details to verify quality and performance:
• ASTM C1048 Standard specification for heat-treated flat glass
- Kind HS, kind FT coated and uncoated glass.
2. Base material shall be an approved selected quality annealed glass
3. The expression 'tempered' glass shall include the meanings 'toughened'
glass and ‘heat-strengthened’ glass

4. Carry out required cutting, edge-working, drilling, hole-cutting and other

required procedures to glass before tempering. Do not cut, work, or
permanently mark after tempering
2.9 LAMINATED GLASS

1. Laminated glass shall comply with relevant Standards. Submit details to
verify quality and performance
• ASTM C1172 Standard Specification for laminated
architectural flat glass
2. Fabricate laminated glass from approved annealed glass, or tempered
glass where required
3. Interlayer shall be an approved polyvinylbutyral (PVB) interlayer
a. Use glazing materials which do not cause deterioration or
discoloration of the interlayer
b. Submit test results to verify adhesion, durability and compatibility of
laminated glass with adjacent glazing materials
4. Colored / translucent interlayer shall be approved types to match control
samples
5. Colored interlayer may be used in lieu of sand-blasted opaque and
translucent glass where approved

1. Fabricate metalwork to match Control Samples in accordance with
2. Cut edges, drilled holes, joints and surfaces shall be clean, neat, free
from burrs and indentations. Remove sharp edges without excessive or
uneven radiusing
3. Visible joints shall be accurately scribed and fitted to fine hairline contact
without edge projection or misalignment. Ensure continuity of surface
finish, color and texture without variation
4. Make holes and connections for site assembly and to accommodate the
work of other trades as required.
a. Holes shall be drilled, or punched and reamed perpendicular to the
surface
b. Do not make or enlarge holes by flame cutting. Such work may be
grounds for rejection
5. Identify and mark components to enable correct setting out, assembly,
and selection of fixings. Locate marking on concealed surfaces where
practicable. Marking shall be removable with water or solvents after
assembly. Do not mark by notching unless approved
6. Face sheeting shall be continuous with no joins or overlaps, and no
visible fixings
7. Glazing rebates shall be of adequate size to hold the weight and size of
the glass, with required clearances and tolerances, and to accommodate
the required wind loadings, thermal movement and base-structure
movements and deflections
8. Moving parts shall operate freely and smoothly, without binding or
sticking, at correct tensions or operating forces, lubricated where
appropriate

2.11 ALUMINUM
1. Aluminum shall be suitable alloys and grades for the structural
application, applied finishes and conditions, and finished to match
Control Samples, in accordance with the relevant Standards
2. Submit details of proposed alloys on shop drawings. Submit reasons for
selection, if directed.
3. Unless otherwise indicated or required, extruded aluminum alloy shall be
Grade 6063, Temper T5 or T6. Temper T4 may be used where bending
is required, subject to approval. Grade 6061, Temper T6 shall be used
for structural applications
4. Extrusion shapes and thicknesses shall accommodate required loads
and connections, and shall be rigid and straight, with sharply defined
profiles, and without draw marks
5. Extrusion walls and screw flutes shall be of sufficient thickness for
fixings including flush countersinking where required
6. Unless otherwise indicated or required, sheet aluminum shall be Grade
5005, Temper H34 or Grade 6061, Temper T1
7. Where sheet thickness is 3 mm or more, notch and fold corners with
external radius of 1.6 mm
8. Where sheet thickness is less than 1.6 mm, the bending radius shall not
exceed t x 1.0 where t is the thickness of sheet
2.12 FIXINGS
1. Fixings shall be of suitable type, load capacity, durability, size and
spacing to assemble and fix the work to the substrates or base-structure,
and accommodate all imposed loads, and shall be selected for the
purpose and location in accordance with the Product Information and
relevant Standards
2. Submit Product Information including manufacturer's standard load
tables for all proposed fixings including corrosion protection grade and
relevant Standards
3. Indicate type, location, depth, spacing and edge distances on shop
drawings
4. Deliver fixings to site in durable packages, labelled to indicate type and
intended use, and store in clean, dry locations. Do not use fixings which
are damaged or corroded. Fixings damaged during installation shall be
removed and replaced
5. Use shimming and packing to ensure correct position and alignment of
finished work
6. Tighten fixings at completion and before covering over
7. Where visible fixings are indicated or required, use selected finish
quality fixings, neatly and evenly aligned and spaced
8. Where required to be finished flush with adjacent surfaces, visible
fixings shall be countersunk
9. Fixings shall be corrosion resistant for the location and equivalent to or
exceeding the members to be fixed or assembled. Fixings shall not
cause staining or electrolytic corrosion to adjacent work

10. Provide corrosion resistant coatings in accordance with the relevant

Standards
2.13 SEALANTS
1. Sealants shall be suitable elastomeric sealants, suitable for the location
and the intended function, in accordance with the Product Information
and relevant Standards:
ASTM C920 Specification for elastomeric joint sealants
ASTM C962 Standard guide for use of elastomeric joint sealants
2. Submit details including generic type, durability, adhesion, compatibility,
movement capability and fire-resistance as appropriate
3. Sealants shall be compatible with and non-staining to substrates and
adjacent work, and shall be capable of cleaning
4. Movement capability of sealants shall accommodate the expected
maximum movement and deflection of the application
5. Visible sealants shall be resistant to ultra-violet light and effects of
exposure
6. Include joint preparation and priming, bond breaker tapes and backer
rods if required
7. Unless otherwise indicated, sealant color shall match adjacent work
2.14 ANODIZED COATING

1. Anodizing to aluminum shall be an approved process by experienced
applicators, to match Control Samples, applied in accordance with the
Product Information and relevant Standards
2. Select an appropriate system for the substrate, required finish and
prevailing conditions
3. Submit details before commencing, including substrate preparation,
application, on-site repair, and occupational health and safety. Coatings
shall be approved before commencing
4. Unless otherwise indicated or required, average thickness of anodizing
shall be:
Internal: 15 microns with local thickness not less than 12 microns
External: 25 microns with local thickness not less than 20 microns
2.15 POWDER COATING

1. Powder coating shall be approved polyester resin systems by
experienced applicators, to match Control Samples, applied in
accordance with the Product Information and relevant Standards
2. Select an appropriate system for the substrate, required finish and
prevailing conditions
3. Submit details, including substrate preparation, pre-treatment,
application and compatible on-site repair
4. Powder coating systems shall be approved before commencing
application

5. Powder coating shall be carried out in the factory where practicable

6. Unless otherwise indicated, dry film thickness (DFT) shall be 60 - 80
microns

1. Door hardware and furniture shall be of approved type and manufacture,
suitable for the location and the intended function of the doors, to match
approved samples, suitable for the location and the intended function, in
accordance with the Product Information and relevant Standards and
requirements (if any) of Relevant Authorities. Submit details
3.0 EXECUTION

1. Do not commence installation unless conditions and substrates are
suitable
3.2 GLAZING INSTALLATION

1. Install the glazing in accordance with the relevant Standards and
approved shop drawings to comply with the performance requirements
2. Install the glazing plumb, level and true to line within required
tolerances, properly anchored to the base-structure. Do not bend or
distort work during installation
3. Coordinate with trades for adjacent work for rectification of base-
structure and substrates, if required
4. Before commencing glazing, inspect and verify condition, location and
tolerances of glazing substrates, adjacent work and support framing
5. Glazing rebates shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil and other harmful
substances
6. Rectify substrates and coordinate as required with trades for adjacent
work
7. Inspect glass for edge damage. Do not install glass with edge damage
8. Verify correct outer and inner surface for asymmetrical assemblies
9. Install the glazing so that no base-structure loads are transferred to the
glass, including loads resulting from short or long-term structural
deflection or shortening of base-structure and which prevent the glass
making direct contact with metals or other non resilient materials
10. Carry out glazing to prefabricated units at the factory where
practicable
11. Glazing shall be carried out by experienced glaziers supervised by
an approved glazing supervisor in the factory or on-site, as appropriate.
Submit details
12. Install glass with correct edge distances at rebates
13. Glass-to-glass joints shall be nominal 3 mm wide, unless otherwise
indicated. There shall be no direct contact between adjacent glass
panels. Seal glass-to-glass joints with clear neutral cure silicone sealant

14. Replace damaged glass, including edge damage, and leave the
work clean, free from defects, and in good condition
15. Apply temporary marking if required for visibility during installation by
a method which does not harm the glass. Remove temporary marking
before Practical Completion
16. Installed glazing shall be able to withstand ambient temperature
changes, movements and wind loads without breakage or deterioration
of glass, glazing gaskets, sealants or accessories

1. The finished work shall be complete, clean and undamaged, with
smooth, even finishes
2. Keep installation areas clean and tidy during installation. The Engineer
may direct installation areas to be cleaned at any time
3. Remove spots, marks and stains progressively
4. Protect installed work to prevent damage during subsequent building
work and or weather conditions
5. Use suitable temporary protective wrapping to prevent damage to
applied finishes. Remove at Practical Completion or when directed.
Wrapping shall not damage substrates or leave residue
6. Protect adjacent work during installation. Use protective coverings
where required
7. Rectify any damage to adjacent work
8. Remove spots, marks and stains from adjacent surfaces
9. Do not cause damage to adjacent work by welding, grinding or similar
activities
10. Completion:
Rectify or replace any faulty or damaged work before Practical
Completion, including damage, staining or corrosion caused by
subsequent construction activities
If the work cannot be rectified properly, replace or re-apply the whole
area affected, as directed
Rectified work shall match Control Samples and adjacent installed work.

1. Submit a User’s Manual for the work of this trade with records and
details of materials used and sources of supply, cleaning and repair
procedures
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08970 - EXTERIOR GLAZED ASSEMBLIES WINDOWS AND

ENTRANCES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................ 2

1.2 REFERENCES ...................................................................................... 2
1.3 AUTHORITIES AND PERMITS ............................................................ 6
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA .......................................... 7
1.6 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................... 10
1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE .............................................. 13
1.8 WARRANTIES ........................................................................................ 14
1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS..................................................... 15
1.10 TESTING .............................................................................................. 21
1.11 PERFORMANCE-TEST PROTO TYPE ................................................ 22
1.12 STRUCTURAL GLAZING TESTING ..................................................... 22
2.0 PRODUCTS................................................................................................. 23
2.1 GLAZING SYSTEMS ............................................................................. 23

2.2 GLAZING WALLS /SCREENS/ WINDOWS .......................................... 24
2.3 GLAZED DOORS AND OPENING WINDOWS .................................... 25
2.4 GLAZED BALUSTRADES ..................................................................... 26
2.5 INSECT SCREEN DOORS ................................................................... 26
2.6 GLASS AND GLAZING ......................................................................... 26
2.7 ANNEALED GLASS .............................................................................. 29
2.8 TEMPERED GLASS .............................................................................. 29
2.9 LAMINATED GLASS ............................................................................. 29
2.10 INSULATING GLASS UNITS ................................................................ 30
2.11 PERFORMANCE TREATMENT TO GLASS ........................................ 31
2.12 DECORATIVE TREATMENT TO GLASS ............................................. 31
2.14 ALUMINUM............................................................................................ 32
2.15 FIXINGS ................................................................................................ 33
2.16 SECONDARY STEEL FRAMIN............................................................. 33
2.17 SEALANTS ............................................................................................ 34
2.18 DOOR SEALS ....................................................................................... 35
2.19 FIR-SAFING .......................................................................................... 36
2.20 GLAZING GASKETS ............................................................................. 36
2.21 FLASHING AND BARRIERS................................................................. 37
2.22 POWDER COATING ............................................................................. 37
2.23 HARDWARE AND FURNTURE ............................................................ 38
2.24 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR OPERATORS ...................................... 38
3.0 EXECUTION ................................................................................................ 41
3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................. 41

3.2 CLADDING/GLAZING INSTALLATION ................................................ 41
3.3 SEALANT INSTALLATION.................................................................... 42
3.5 COMMISSIONING ................................................................................. 43
4.0 PROJECT PARTICULARS ................................................................................ 44

4.1 DEFAULT REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ 44
SECTION 08970 Exterior Glazed Assemblies Windows And Entrances Page 1 of 45

SECTION 08970 - EXTERIOR GLAZED ASSEMBLIES WINDOWS AND

ENTRANCES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. This section provides specifications for complete system of external glazing, glazed
entries, and windows, including glass, glazing accessories, frames, flashings,
fixings, trims, hardware, locking, sealants and finishes.
2. The work specified in this section is performance-based of which construction
details to be developed and documented in accordance with the product selections,
design intent and performance requirements indicated in the Drawings and
Specifications
3. Make comprehensive submissions including Control Samples, Product Information,
shop drawings, computations, and prototypes as applicable to verify compliance.
4. Read this section of specifications in conjunction with:
a. Section 01000 “General Specifications”.
b. Section 08980 “Glazing Particular Specification”.
c. Section 08815 “Internal Glazing”.
d. FINISHES SCHEDULE for system descriptions and finishes.
e. BUILDING MOVEMENTS REPORT, if applicable.
f. Specifications of other trade that require coordination with this trade.
1.2 REFERENCES
those Standards, shall be used within this Specification. The edition to be used
shall be that current at the date of this Specification, except that the latest editions
of standards may be used where no reduction in quality will result. Any differences
between their requirements and this Specification shall be submitted to the
Engineer for his ruling.
AA ASD1 Aluminum Standards and Data
4. AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)
AAMA MCWM-1 Metal Curtain Wall Manual
AAMA CW-10 Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site
AAMA 101 Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC)and Wood Windows and Glass Doors
AAMA 501 Exterior Walls
AAMA 608.1 Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum
AAMA 609 Cleaning and Maintenance of Architectural Anodised Aluminum

AAMA 610.1 Cleaning and Maintenance of Painted Aluminum Extrusions

and Curtain Wall Panels
AAMA 800 Sealants
5. AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)
AHA A135.4 Basic Hardboard
ASTM A 36/A 36M Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A 123/A 123M Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products
ASTM A 153/A 153M Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A 167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip
ASTM A 242/A 242M High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
ASTM A 424 Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enamelling
ASTM A 570/A 570M Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality
ASTM A 572/A 572M High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium of Structural
Steel
ASTM A 588/A 588M High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345
Mpa) Minimum Yield Point to 4 in. (100 mm) Thick
ASTM A 606 Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled
and Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance
ASTM A 607 Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Columbium
or Vanadium, or Both, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled
ASTM A 611 Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled
ASTM A 653/A 653M Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B 26/B 26M Alloy-Alloy Sand Castings
ASTM B 85 Alloy-Alloy Die Castings
ASTM B 108 Alloy-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings
ASTM B 136 Measurement of Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on
Aluminum
ASTM B 137 Measurement of Coating Mass Per Unit Area on Anodically
Coated Aluminum
ASTM B 152M Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar (Metric)
ASTM B 152 Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar
ASTM B 209M Aluminum and Alloy-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric)
ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Alloy-Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM B 221M Aluminum and Alloy-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles,
and Tubes (Metric)
ASTM B 221 Aluminum and Alloy-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles,
and Tubes
ASTM B 244 Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum
and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis
Metals With Eddy-Current Instruments .

ASTM C 236 Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by

Means of a Guarded Hot Box
ASTM C 542 Lock-Strip Gaskets
ASTM C 612 Mineral Fibre Block and Board Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 665 Mineral-Fibre Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing
ASTM C 864 Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks,
and Spacers
ASTM C 920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C 1036 Flat Glass
ASTM C 1048 Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass
ASTM D 1037 Evaluating the Properties of Wood-Base Fibre and Particle
Panel Materials
ASTM D 3656 Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl-Coated
Glass Yarns
ASTM E 34 Chemical Analysis of Aluminum and Base-Base Alloys
ASTM A 606 Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled
and Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance
ASTM A 607 Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Columbium
or Vanadium, or Both, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled
ASTM A 611 Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled
ASTM A 653/A/M Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B 26/B/M Alloy-Alloy Sand Castings
ASTM B 85 Alloy-Alloy Die Castings
ASTM B 108 Alloy-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings
ASTM B 136 Measurement of Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on
Aluminum
ASTM B 137 Measurement of Coating Mass Per Unit Area on Anodically
Coated Aluminum
ASTM B 152M Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar (Metric)
ASTM B 152 Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar
ASTM B 209M Aluminum and Alloy-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric)
ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Alloy-Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM B 221M Aluminum and Alloy-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles,
and Tubes (Metric)
ASTM B 221 Aluminum and Alloy-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles,
and Tubes
ASTM B 244 Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum
and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis
Metals With Eddy-Current Instruments
ASTM C 236 Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by
Means of a Guarded Hot Box

ASTM C 542 Lock-Strip Gaskets

ASTM C 612 Mineral Fibre Block and Board Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 665 Mineral-Fibre Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing
ASTM C 864 Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks,
and Spacers
ASTM C 1036 Flat Glass
ASTM C 1048 Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass
ASTM D 1037 Evaluating the Properties of Wood-Base Fibre and Particle
Panel Materials
ASTM D 3656 Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl-Coated
Glass Yarns
ASTM E 34 Chemical Analysis of Aluminum and Base-Base Alloys
ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
ASTM E 90 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
ASTM E 136 Behaviour of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750
Degrees C
ASTM E 283 Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen
ASTM E 330 Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E 331 Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E 546 Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units
ASTM E 576 Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in the Vertical
Position
ASTM E 774 Sealed Insulating Glass Units
7. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.10/A5.10M Bare Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Welding Electrodes and
Rods
AWS D1.1/D1.1M Structural Welding Code - Steel
8. U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
16 CFR 1201 Architectural Glazing Materials
9. NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS
(NAAMM)
NAAMM MFM Metal Finishes Manual
10. PORCELAIN ENAMEL INSTITUTE (PEI)
PEI 1001Architectural Porcelain Enamel
11. STEEL WINDOW INSTITUTE (SWI)

SWI Specifier's Guide Specifier's Guide to Steel Windows

AA DAF-45 Aluminum Finishes
13. AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)
AAMA 101 Voluntary Specification for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC), and Wood
Windows and Glass Doors
• AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodised Architectural Aluminum
• AAMA 902 Sash Balances
• AAMA 1302 Forced-Entry Resistant Aluminum Prime Windows
• AAMA 2603 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and
Panels
• AAMA 2604 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum
Extrusions and Panels
• AAMA 2605Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Superior Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum
Extrusions and Panels
14. Overseas publications and organizations include:
a. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
• 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 104, Schaumburg, Illinois, 60173-4268,
Telephone +1 (847) 303-5664 Facsimile +1 (847) 303-5774 Web
http://www.aamanet.org
b. Publications: AAMA CW-DG-1 Aluminum curtain wall design manual.
• AAMA CW 10 Care and handling of architectural aluminum from shop to
site.
• AAMA CWG-1 Installation of aluminum curtain walls.

c. Glass Association of North America (GANA) Flat Glass Marketing
Association (FGMA)
• White Lakes Professional Building, 3310 SW Harrison Street,
Topeka, Kansas, 66611-2279 USA Telephone +1 (785) 266-
7013 Facsimile +1 (785) 266-0272
• Publications: Glazing manual. GANA , Sealants manual.
FGMA
d. Centre for Window and Cladding Technology
• University of Bath Bath BA2 7AY United Kingdom Telephone
+44 (01225) 826-541 Facsimile +44 (01225) 826-556
http://www.cwct.ac.uk
• Publications: Standard and guide to curtain walling.
• Guide to the selection and testing of stone panels.
• Use of advanced glazing
1.3 AUTHORITIES AND PERMITS:

1. Any proposed substitutions for external materials shall be subject to approval (or re-
approval) by the relevant authorities.

2. Pay for all costs associated with such approval, including the costs of the Principal
and the Superintendent, and their respective consultants.
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

1. General: The intent is to provide weathertight, structurally sound assemblies
meeting the provisions of this Section.
a. Drawings are schematic and do not identify or solve the issues of thermal or
structural movements, anchorage, flatness and stability of facing, or moisture
disposal.
b. Drawings do not solve issues in the glass line associated with glass movement,
pressure fracture, or thermal shock.
c. Drawings contain details that suggest possible solutions for solving some of the
major design requirements. Contractor may use the intent of these details and
develop them as Contractor deems best.
d. Specifications are of the performance type and include the minimum
requirements of the glazed assemblies without limiting the Contractor to
methods of achieving such performance.
e. Unless otherwise defined by Contract Documents, the appearance of exposed
elements, including width and depth shall be consistent throughout the project.
f. Unless otherwise defined by Contract Documents, the overall thickness of each
glass type, and the component thickness of each multiple layer glass type shall
be consistent throughout the Project.
2. Design criteria and performance requirements for glazed assemblies:
a. Design wind pressures, both inward and outward acting on all structural
components including members, glazing stops or gaskets, weldments,
connections, adhesives and sealants used as adhesives, shall be designed and
fabricated with a factor of safety not less than 2.5. Failure of any structural
component shall not occur at less than 2.5 times the maximum “Design Wind
Pressure”. Failure is defined as breakage, component disengagement, or
permanent distortion.
b. Design, fabricate and install component parts so that the completed glazed
curtain wall including glass, will withstand the inward and outward pressure of
100 kg/m2.
c. Dead load shall be the actual weight of materials supported by the glazed
assemblies.
d. At the design pressures and loads, limit framing member stresses and
deflections as specified below. Measurements shall be taken at the location of
maximum deflection.
• Normal to the plane of the wall, deflection of framing members, including
cantilevers, shall not exceed 1/175 of span length, but in no case more
than 19.05mm, whichever is less. Where a sealant joint occurs between a
framing member and a relatively stiff building element, deflection of the
framing member shall not exceed 1/2 of the joint width, or less if required
by sealant manufacturer.
• In the plane of the wall, deflection of framing members shall not reduce the
glass bite below 75 percent of the design dimension, and shall not reduce
the glass edge clearance below 25 percent of the design dimension.
Restrict deflection further if required for assembly and fit of components.
• Stresses shall not exceed the allowable values established by the
reference standards listed. In no case shall allowable values exceed the
yield stress.

• NOTE: Structural elements are not designed to resist torsional forces

induced by the glazed assemblies. The Contractor shall include in the
design of the glazed assemblies sufficient bracing, stiffeners and other
reinforcements, as required to ensure the stability of the primary structure
under all loads imposed by the glazed assemblies at its support points.
3. Thermal movement clearance:
a. Design glazed assemblies to provide clearance for thermal movement within a
ambient temperature range of 48oC (which may result in glazed curtain wall
material temperature range exceeding 81oC).
b. Provide additional clearance as required to accommodate erection tolerance.
c. Doors and windows shall operate normally and no distortion, damage and
failure, including glass breakage, shall occur over this temperature range.
4. Air infiltration: When tested in compliance with ASTM E 283
5. Water infiltration: Water infiltration, in this Section, is defined as any leakage which
is not controlled and drained to the exterior, or which could cause damage to or
impair the function and appearance of the assemblies, and adjacent finishes.
a. Make provisions in the design to drain to the exterior face of the assemblies
any leakage of water occurring at joints and condensation taking place within
the construction.
b. No water infiltration under static pressure shall occur when the assembly is
tested in compliance with ASTM E 331 at a differential static pressure of 20
percent of the design wind pressure, but not less than 6.24 psf for 15 minutes.
The exterior glazed assemblies shall perform quietly at all times and without:
c. Vibration harmonics.
d. Wind whistles.
e. Noises caused by thermal movement (including “popping” and “ticking”).
f. Thermal movement transmitted to other building elements
g. Loosening, weakening or fracturing of attachments or components or system.

6. Fabricator/installer's qualifications: Single firm which can show a minimum 5 years
experience in fabricating and erecting work similar to that required for this Project.
7. Mockups:
a. Provide a mockup of each type of glazed assemblies.
b. Provide a full height x full bay width mockup for curtain wall and storefront.
c. Provide a test assembly for all trades, whose work is represented by the
mockup, to verify their materials and installation methods, and make necessary
adjustments before proceeding with the work on the building.
d. Obtain necessary approvals of the visual quality of the mockup.
e. Provide a standard of materials, quality and workmanship to be matched for
work on the building.
8. Assemble the mockups using installation methods and materials duplicating, as
closely as possible, the glazed assemblies on the building. Construct mockups in
compliance with approved shop drawings; deviations from, or additions to details
shown on drawings are subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. Interior finishes
are required.
9. After approval of the visual quality of the mockup, install sufficient thermal and
safing insulation to demonstrate installation procedures.

10. Locate the mockups at the job site, or if impractical, at another location acceptable
to the ENGINEER.
11. These mockups are not intended to be tested. If testing of a mockup has to be
performed to determine compliance with the requirements of this Section, submit
shop drawings, testing agency's name and qualifications, test procedures and
sequence and other information requested by the ENGINEER. Notify the
ENGINEER before mockup is constructed.
12. Give sufficient notice so the Engineer may inspect significant stages of work, that
includes:
a. Before fabrication :
• Design prototypes (Visual assessment).
• Performance-test prototypes
b. Before installation:
• Fabricated assemblies at the factory before delivery
• Set out of work before installation
• Products delivered to site, before installation
• Embedded items in place before building in
• Substrates, including framing, prepared and ready for installation, before
commencing.
• Preparation for site glazing or re-glazing, before commencing.
• Work to be covered over and concealed spaces, before covering over.
• Installed work after commissioning to demonstrate functions.
13. Third party inspections: The Principal may engage a specialist third party inspector
to inspect significant stages of the work in the factory. Coordinate and cooperate
with the inspector and give sufficient notice of significant stages of the work,
including:
14. Coatings:
a. Preparation of substrates before application of first coat.
b. Preparation and condition of intermediate coats before applying next coat.
c. At any time during application of coatings
15. Inspection of finishes:
a. Inspection shall take place under lighting conditions equivalent to actual
appropriate.
b. Where installed finishes are subject to oblique viewing angles, inspection shall
include oblique viewing angles at appropriate distances.
16. Submit dates for the first completed example of each type of installed work and
finish to establish the required standard before proceeding with the remainder of
work (one typical bay or unit)
17. Submit and implement Inspection and Test Plans (ITPs) for quality assurance in
accordance with the relevant Standards (ISO 9002).
18. The quality assurance representative shall be a qualified engineer, experienced in
this type of work.
a. Approval of design prototypes (visual assessment)

b. Approval of performance-test prototype shop drawings

c. Commencement of performance testing
d. Approval of shop drawings
e. Panels at the factory for inspection
f. First completed example of installed work on-site
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop drawings:
a. Detailed, large scale, dimensioned shop drawings of the mockup identifying all
materials.
b. Detailed, large scale, dimensioned shop drawings of the glazed assemblies
showing joinery techniques, provision for horizontal and vertical expansion,
glass and metal thicknesses, and framing member profiles.
c. Identify all materials, including metal alloys, glass types, fasteners and glazing
materials.
d. Identify shop and field sealants by product name and located on drawings.
e. Show relative layout of adjacent walls, beams, columns and slabs, all correctly
dimensioned.
f. Dimension position of glass edge showing "glass bite" and size of structural
silicone sealant.
g. Die drawings for all extrusions, gaskets and weatherstrips.
h. Method of attachment of insulation. Unless accepted in writing by the glass
manufacturer, the thermal insulation shall not be attached directly.
2. Submit shop drawings of performance-test prototypes before construction.
3. Indicate suitable support and framing to simulate the structural characteristics of the
base structure.
4. After testing of performance-test prototypes, submit revised shop drawings of
approved performance-test prototype ‘as tested' indicating all modifications to the
performance-test prototype. Make no changes in the field without the ENGINEER's
prior written approval.
5. Coordinate shop drawings of the work with performance-test prototype ‘as tested',
and the design modifications directed by the ENGINEER, if any.
6. Inspect the shop drawings for base-structure and adjacent work, and coordinate
the work of this section as required to accommodate the required applied loads,
services, openings, and substrate tolerances.
7. Where such inspection indicates that adjustments may be required to base-
structure and adjacent work to ensure the correct installation of the work of this
trade, notify the ENGINEER and coordinate with relevant trades.
• Site fabricating and cutting of work due to lack of coordination will not be
approved.
8. Calculations: Submit manufacturer's standard computation tables (loads and
spans) and test data indicating relevant selections. If the actual conditions are not
included in the standard tables, submit additional calculations for the actual
conditions. Include calculation for:
• Anchorages, framing and fixings to the base-structure.

• Structural performance generally, including wind loads, movements, and

deflections
• Glass types and thickness.
• Human impact and safety requirements Include computations to verify that
the thermal performance of the system complies with Contract Documents.
Include details of U-value and shading coefficient.
• Include calculations to verify the thermal performance of the system
complies with required heat loads, R-values, U-values, shading coefficients
and related performance
9. Test reports:
a. The report for all tests shall include the following information:
• Date of test and date of report.
• Identification of the specimen (manufacturer, source of supply, dimensions,
model, type, materials, and other pertinent information).
• Identification of glass thickness and type, and method of glazing.
• Type or types of weatherstrip.
b. For air infiltration under uniform static air pressure: A statement or tabulation of
the pressure difference exerted across the specimen during the test and the
corresponding rate of air leakage for each specimen tested, calculated in
compliance with ASTM E 283.
c. For water penetration under uniform static air pressure:
• A statement or tabulation of pressure difference or differences exerted
across the specimen and water application rates during the test.
• A record of all points of water penetration on the indoor face of the test
specimen, and of water leakage as defined herein.
d. For structural performance under uniform static air pressure difference:
• A tabulation of pressure differences exerted across the specimen during
the test and the deflections and permanent deformations at locations
specified for each specimen tested.
• The duration of test loads.
• Record of visual observations of performance.
• When the tests are made to check conformity of the specimen to a
particular specification, an identification or description of that specification.
• Statement that the tests were conducted in compliance with this method, or
a full description of deviations from this method.
• Statement as to whether or not tape, film, or both, were used to seal
against air leakage, and whether in the judgment of the test agency the
tape or film influenced the results of the test.
• If several essentially identical specimens of a component are tested, results
for all specimens shall be reported, each specimen being properly
identified, particularly with respect to distinguishing features or differing
adjustments. A separate drawing for each specimen will not be required if
all differences between them are noted on the drawings provided.
10. Representative samples of products, finishes and fabrications. Including:
a. Glass types and edge treatments. Including body tint, surface texture and
coatings

b. Metal Products – Sections, extrusions, components and finishes.

c. Typical joint types, including sealants, rain screen panels, baffles, flashings,
backing rods, extruded gaskets, seals and tapes
d. Typical fabricated assemblies including welds and grinding, junctions and
fixings. accessory items
e. Fixings, hardware, furniture, trim, sealants and exposed accessory items
11. Hardware, furniture, and exposed accessory items.
12. Manufacturer's approval: shop drawings of the glazed assemblies to the glass and
glazing sealant manufacturers and obtain their approval for these shop drawings
before proceeding further. These approvals shall include, but not be limited to the
following.
a. Selection of the glass and glazing materials (glass, sealants, gaskets, setting
blocks, jamb shims and similar items).
b. Size, thickness, design and dimensional limitations of the glass pockets and
compatibility of materials.
c. Size and surface preparation relating to structural silicone adhesive. Sealant
manufacturer's approval shall be based upon adhesion and compatibility tests
performed with specific project substrate materials and shall include sealant
manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation.
d. Insulation attachment method.
13. Certification progressively:
a. Submit a schedule which records all items which require certification and the
ongoing status of such certification.
b. Submit certification of all glass thickness computations.
14. Engage and pay for an experienced independent engineer to certify all calculations.
15. The certifying engineer shall not be the engineer that prepared the calculations
being certified.
16. Performance-test prototypes construction detail for full scale performance testing.
Including:
a. Design prototype:
• Construct design prototypes for visual assessment and possible design
modifications for particular items before commencing.
• Provide design prototypes for each typical system.
• Commence design development and construction of the design prototype
as soon as practicable and sufficiently in advance of the construction
program to prevent delay.
• Coordinate and cooperate with the Engineer and carry out design
modifications as directed.
• Submit shop drawings of the design prototype progressively, including
design modifications.
• Submit a detailed construction program for design prototypes. Indicate
critical dates which may affect the construction program.
• Following the Engineer’s approval of the design prototype, with any
modifications directed, submit revised shop drawings incorporating the
design modifications, and carry out the work in accordance with the
approved revised shop drawings.
b. Design prototypes shall include all visible:

• Glass types and glazing configurations

• Framing and extrusion types.
• External and internal finishes.
• Trims and fixings.
c. Construct design prototypes in suitable locations on-site or elsewhere in Qatar.
d. Ensure safe and convenient access for the Engineer where the design
prototype is constructed off-site.
17. Suitable permanent numbering system to identify each cladding panel.
a. Numbering system shall be consecutive so gaps are obvious.
b. Identify each cladding panel with the correct number. Numbering shall be
neatly painted using suitable stencils in a consistent location using non-
migrating, non-fading paint or etched into the metal. Numbering shall be not
visible in the installed position.
c. Numbering system shall be cross-referenced to fabrication date, testing results,
and correct installation location.
d. Numbering system shall be indicated on shop drawings and as-built
documentation. Submit as-built documentation progressively where the location
of numbered units varies from the shop drawings for any reason.
18. Closeout: Furnish a comprehensive plan for replacement of broken glass. Include a
local source.

staining with suitable packing and wrapping. Store clear of ground, concrete or
damp surfaces on suitable packers spaced to prevent distortion. Properly identify
products on packing and wrapping.
2. For important visible materials with long lead times for supply, or where required for
uniformity, order and stock-pile sufficient materials including provision for wastage,
and store in a secure location. Indicate lead-times on program, including critical
dated for ordering, pre-delivery inspections and customs clearance. Submit copies
of orders immediately when placed.
3. Deliver glass directly into installation areas in correct sequence for immediate
installation. Remove damaged glass, including surface and edge damage,
immediately from site.
4. Storage and protect factory coated products to prevent abrasion and other damage.
5. Do not handle or deliver factory-coated products until coatings are properly dried
and cured to achieve maximum hardness.
6. Rectify damaged coatings on-site, or remove from site for off-site rectification or
replacement, at Superintendent’s option. Rectification procedures shall be
approved before commencing.
7. Use suitable temporary protective wrapping to prevent damage to finished surfaces.
Remove at Practical Completion or when directed. Protective wrapping shall not
bond permanently to substrates, or leave residue after removal.
8. At a minimum, provide temporary protection for all visible framing surfaces

1.8 WARRANTIES
9. Warrant work of this Section for satisfactory performance, and against defects in
materials and workmanship for 10 years from Substantial Completion
10. Submit written warranty agreeing to provide all labor and materials required to
repair or replace defective materials and workmanship during the warranty period,
including damage to the building and furnishings occasioned by defective materials
or workmanship or damage as part of repairs to the wall. Defective materials and
workmanship include, but are not limited to:
a. Penetration of water into the building.
b. Air infiltration exceeding specified limits.
c. Structural failure of components resulting from forces within specified limits.
d. Cracking, crazing, flaking of coatings and opacifiers on glass.
e. Glass breakage.
f. Secondary glass damage and/or damage due to falling glazed assemblies
components.
g. Adhesive or cohesive failure of sealant.
h. Surface crazing of non-structural sealant.
i. Non-structural sealant hardening beyond Shore A durometer 50 or softening
below 20.
j. Failure to fulfill other specified performance requirements.
k. Failure of operating parts to function normally.
11. Glass:
a. Warrant removing and replacing glass light that fails to meet the design and
performance requirements.
b. Warranty shall include labor and materials required to remove and replace the
faulty glass and installation for a period of not less than 5 years, except as
noted otherwise below.
c. Warranty period for peeling or deterioration of glass reflective coating shall be
10 years.
d. Include the following in the warranty:
• Glass breakage due to wind pressures up to the specified values or thermal
stress; defective glass or damaged glass (prior to or during construction).
Secondary glass damage and breakage of tempered glass is regarded in
this Specification as being the result of a material defect, and is therefore
included in the warranty.
• Deterioration of any form, and discoloration of glass reflective coating.
12. Sealants: The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the
following:
a. Cohesion and adhesion.
b. Staining or contaminating adjacent surfaces.
c. Change in hardness greater than ± 5 points on the Shore A durometer scale.
13. Applied Coats and Finishes: The warranty shall include particular reference to
failure of, or due to, the following:
a. Failure of protective coating to prevent corrosion or staining due to corrosion.
b. Suitability of coating system for substrate types, exposure and use.

c. Ultra-violet light, atmospheric pollution or weathering.

d. Correct preparation of substrates.
e. Primer, sealer and base-coats.
f. Delamination, loss of bond, peeling, flaking, loose or drummy work.
g. Cracking, cupping, buckling, erosion, chipping, crazing, blistering, perforations.
h. Staining and discoloration.
i. Chalking (greater than 8 points for non-metallic colors, or 6 points for non-
metallic whites, measured in accordance with ASTM D4214).
j. Fading or color change greater than 5 Hunter Color Difference Units measured
in accordance with ASTM D2244, or color variation in adjacent sections greater
than the variation of the approved control sample range.
• ASTM D2244 Method for calculation of color differences from
instrumentally measured color coordinates.
• ASTM D4214 Method for evaluating degree of chalking of exterior paint
films.
14. Corrections of defective work:
a. Should any work under this Contract be found defective in materials or
workmanship, it shall be corrected in accord with the following provisions.
b. If, within 5 years after Substantial Completion, any of the work is found to be
defective or not in compliance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice. The owner will give such
notice promptly after discovery of the condition.
c. If exploratory work is required to determine the cause of the defects, the cost of
this work shall be borne by the Contractor.
15. The warranty period for mechanical equipment, services and moving parts shall be
2-years. External glazing shall be a complete system in which all components act
together without failure of any part. Failure that may be attributed to the failure of
one or more particular components shall not limit responsibility for the complete
system.
16. The warranty does not include damage caused by vandalism, or natural conditions
exceeding the performance requirements.
17. This warranty and its enforcement shall not deprive the Owner of other action, right
or remedy available to him.

1. Loads:
failure, deflection, damage to adjacent or applied work, or risk to human safety.
Comply with the relevant Standards.
b. Loads shall include human impact, wind, earthquake, maintenance and service
loads as applicable.
c. Damage may include cracking, distortion, looseness, dislodgement, or visible
movement at any joint.
2. Components and members shall be of adequate size, strength and stiffness for the
purpose intended. The sizes, thicknesses and weights of members indicated are

indicative only, and do not represent the actual sizes, thicknesses and weights
which may be required.
3. Dead loads:
a. The installed work shall accommodate all dead loads due to self-weight and
applied work without causing over-stress or permanent deflection of any
component in accordance with the relevant Standards.
4. Wind loads:
a. The installed work shall accommodate the wind loads applicable to the site in
accordance with the relevant Standards. Submit details and computations of
any additional bracing and framing, if required.
5. Movements:
a. The installed work, including fixings and framing, shall accommodate all short
and long-term movements and deflections in the base-structure, substrates to
which the work is fixed, and within the work, including thermal movements,
without failure or the transfer of loads from the base-structure to the work of this
trade.
6. Base-structure deflections and construction tolerances:
a. The installed work shall accommodate base-structure and substrate deflections
and construction tolerances.
b. Verify base-structure and substrate deflections and construction tolerances
before commencing. Notify ENGINEER of any unusual conditions which may
affect the work.
c. Unless otherwise indicated, ensure minimum 5 mm clearance between
aluminum glazing frames and adjacent base-structure and structural framing.
7. Wind-load deflections: The aggregate effect of all loads shall not:
a. Reduce clearance between members at required junctions below 4 mm.
b. Reduce glass edge clearance below the greater of 75% of the required
clearance, or 6 mm.
c. The indicated deflection tolerances may be reduced if the anticipated deflection
may damage the glass, any component, or adjacent work, at the ENGINRRE’s
sole discretion.
8. Thermal movements: The installed work shall accommodate all thermal movements
due to ambient temperature variations by suitable joints and brackets with
movement capacity. Submit verification. The installed work shall enable thermal
movement to take place freely in the plane of the system without causing buckling,
failure of joint seals, undue stress on fixings or other harmful effects.
a. Submit a detailed analysis of thermal movements based on the ambient
temperature range for the site location and orientation. Include computations
for maximum and minimum surface temperatures.
b. Take into consideration effects of solar radiation, conduction and convection,
shading and reflection, effects of Adjacent Properties, daily and seasonal
extremes, and weather effects.
c. Thermal movement shall take place freely in the plane of the cladding system
without buckling, failure of joints, undue stress on fixings or glass or other
damage. Thermal movement shall not cause stressing or induced loading in the
installed work.
9. Connections: The installed work shall be connected to the base-structure or
substrates in a neat, substantial manner by correctly selected and located
connections which transfer the loads from the work without displacement, distortion,

or damage to the fixings, substrates or the adjacent work. Connections shall

accommodate movement requirements.
a. Make provision where required for connections for subsequent applied or
adjacent work Connections shall include anchorages, brackets and fixings, and
associated flanges, sleeves, holes, mating surfaces, welds and adhesives
where appropriate.
b. Connections shall accommodate the worst base-structure tolerances and
uneven load sharing conditions. Indicate and differentiate between dead load
and restraint connections on shop drawings, where applicable.
c. There shall be no direct fixing or close contact between any part of the cladding
system and the base-structure, except through suitable approved connections.
Connections shall have sufficient adjustment to ensure the correct location,
alignment and tolerances of the installed work, and enable rigid fixing after the
work is finally positioned.
10. Smoke isolation: The installed work shall ensure smoke isolation between adjacent
compartments and floors where indicated or required.
a. Indicate details of smoke isolation on shop drawings.
b. Provide durable seals, baffles and fire-safing as required.
c. Provide durable seals, rebates and door controllers as required.
11. Fire fail mode for mechanical / electrical operators to doors: Mechanic operators
and electric strikes to doors that form part of an egress system shall cause doors to
'FAIL SAFE' in the event of a fire or power failure, unless otherwise indicated.
12. Corrosion: Products and materials, including fixings and concealed components,
shall be corrosion-resistant or protective coated to prevent corrosion.
a. The cut edges of factory-coated products shall be coated or otherwise treated
to ensure continuity of corrosion protection.
b. Secondary framing steel in cavities and outside of air seals shall be hot dip
galvanized.
c. Where machining is carried out after galvanizing the machined areas shall
receive a coating of a suitable paint to ensure continuity of the galvanised
protection
13. Compatibility:
compatible with each other, substrates, and adjacent work, or shall be
separated by suitable products and procedures.
b. Adjacent products and materials, including adhesives and sealants, shall not
stain or contaminate, and shall not cause visual or structural defects in adjacent
materials.
14. Weather protection:
a. The installed work shall be watertight and weather-tight, and shall exclude
water or moisture from entering the inside of the building in all weather
conditions.
b. The installed work shall discharge all water and moisture, including leakage
and condensation, into the drainage system or outside the building. Water shall
be not trapped or retained within the work.
c. Joint sealants, gaskets and flashings, including concealed and inaccessible
items, shall not corrode or dislodge, and remain effective for the service life of
the work.
15. Condensation:

a. Control the accumulation of condensation on glass surfaces to prevent

uncontrolled tracking over adjacent surfaces and dripping.
b. Provide integral condensate gutters and weep-holes where required to deflect
and collect and dispose of condensation to suitable drainage points.
16. Maintenance and service life:
a. The installed work shall retain good long-term durability, performance and
appearance, taking into consideration normal wear and tear, ageing and
weathering, without failure or breakdown of individual materials and
components, and as a result of normal routine operating, cleaning and
maintenance procedures.
17. Cleaning:
a. To the greatest extent practicable, external surfaces shall not attract or absorb
air-borne dirt and pollution, and shall be self-cleaning.
18. Service conditions and frequency of use:
a. Products and materials shall be selected for the anticipated in-service
conditions, functionality and frequency of use. Unless otherwise indicated or
approved, proprietary products shall be not less than 'heavy duty' grade.
b. Submit details including assumptions and reasons for selection.
19. Moving parts and components:
a. Moving parts and components shall operate smoothly and silently without
jamming, sticking, shuddering, or wobbling, without undue resistance, abrasion
or noise, and with minimal human or mechanical effort to operate.
b. Moving parts shall be factory lubricated with durable low-friction compounds.
c. Moving parts shall open and close, and function properly in all operational
modes.
20. Acoustics:
a. Where the installed work is required to have an acoustic rating or treatment, or
is inserted into adjacent work required to be acoustic-rated or treated, provide
suitable acoustic construction.
b. Submit Product Information including test results for acoustic construction.
Include shop drawings for acoustic construction, if directed. At a minimum
comply with the requirements of the relevant Standards, and all permit
conditions. Refer to the ACOUSTIC REPORT, if applicable.
c. External cladding and glazing shall be installed to minimize sound transmission
into the building from outside, and shall not transmit or amplify structure-borne
sound.
d. Unless otherwise indicated, glass shall be laminated or IGU types. Verify glass
types before commencing.
21. Services reticulation:
a. Build-in, cover and conceal reticulated services passing through the work.
Coordinate with relevant services trades, and construct suitable openings and
passages for the unrestricted installation of services by the relevant services
trade.
b. Ensure suitable access for later maintenance or replacement.
c. Services and access-hatches in fire-rated or acoustic-rated elements shall be
constructed and sealed to maintain the integrity of the elements.
22. Secondary framing and bracing:

a. Provide sufficient additional framing and bracing to ensure the work is rigid and
safe under all loading conditions, including later applied work by other trades,
and at openings, terminations and junctions.
b. Additional framing and bracing shall be integrated with the work and concealed.
c. Coordinate with related trades as required, and verify types and loads of
applied work
23. Visual indication of glass barriers:
a. Glass walls and doors without mid-rails, shall be provided with suitable
approved contrasting visual indicators at nominal 1100 mm above floor level to
reduce the risk accidental of impact.
b. Visual indicators may be continuous or semi-continuous and may include stick-
on decals, etched or oven-baked logos, lettering or other graphic treatment of
approved color and design for the full width of the glass or pedestrian traffic
area.
c. Unless otherwise indicated, visual indication shall be a horizontal row of white
dots, nominal 35 mm diameter and 50 mm spacing.
24. Doors subject to uncontrolled closing:
a. Doors, which may move, close or slam in an uncontrolled or unexpected
manner due to wind or air pressure effects, shall be fitted with suitable heavy
duty operators or dampers, and restraints or doors stops, to ensure the safety
and prevention of injury to persons in or near the opening of such doors.
25. Organic coatings (cladding): Unless otherwise indicated, organic coating type and
quality shall be:
a. External cladding panels and framing extrusions above ground level: Super
durable polyester (AAMA 2604).
b. External cladding panels and framing extrusions at ground level: Super durable
polyester (AAMA 2604).
c. Internal cladding panels and framing extrusions subject to direct ultra-violet
light exposure: Super durable polyester (AAMA 2604).
d. Internal cladding panels and framing extrusions not subject to direct ultra-violet
light exposure: Super durable polyester (AAMA 2603).
26. Pre-treatment of aluminum: Provide pre-treatment of aluminum components as
follows:
a. Concealed surfaces: For concealed surfaces, including contact surfaces and
backs of panels:
• Surfaces generally: Pre-treated.
• Surfaces to receive sealants: Pre-treated.
• Cut and machined ends: To be coated/treated to same degree of protection
as pre-treated surfaces.
b. Anodised aluminum components :
• Visible cut and machined ends of visible components : Anodised
27. Surfaces to receive structural glazing sealants : Pre-treated
• Concealed cut and machined ends : No treatment required
b. Powder coated: For powder coated components:
• Visible cut and machined ends of visible components: Finish coated.
28. Surfaces to receive structural glazing sealants: Pre-treated.

• Concealed cut and machined ends: To be coated/treated to same degree

of protection as pre-treated surfaces.
b. Finish coatings to visible cut ends and visible internal components may be site
applied.
c. Unless otherwise indicated and approved, all visible surfaces shall be finish
coated, including visible internal components, edges, returns, reveals, and joint
details.
29. Fabrication tolerances: Fabrication tolerances of components and assemblies
generally shall not exceed:
• Length and width: ± 1 mm.
• Diagonals: ± 2 mm.
• Flatness: ± 1 mm per meter length (maximum 2 mm).
• Edge straightness: ± 1 mm per meter length (maximum 2 mm).
• Maximum corner radius (cut edges): 1 mm.
• Maximum corner radius (folded edges): 3 mm.
• Misalignment of mating surfaces and hairline joints: 0 mm.
30. Installation tolerances: (Cladding)
a. Installation tolerances shall not exceed:
• Position on plan, or vertical surface: ± 3 mm.
• Deviation in level (horizontal): Not more than 1 in 1000 (maximum 3 mm).
• Deviation in plumb (vertical): Not more than 1 in 1000 (maximum 3 mm).
• Misalignment of adjacent edges at open joints: ± 10% of design width.
• Misalignment of adjacent edges at tight joints: 0 mm.
• Misalignment of mating surfaces at tight junctions: 0 mm.
• Misalignment of adjacent surfaces at open joints: ± 1 mm.
b. Installation tolerances shall not be cumulative and shall not include base-
structure or fabrication tolerances.
c. Cladding panel edges shall align from one panel to another to ensure
continuous and even joints of uniform width along each joint alignment and
plane of finished work.
d. Tolerances of joints and at junction details shall take precedence over
tolerances of panels and major components. Joints widths and alignment at
open joints which exceed 5 mm difference may be grounds for rejection of the
adjacent panels.
31. Finish quality: The installed work shall have a high standard of finish quality. Use
materials and procedures resistant to damage, scratches, marks and blemishes in
finished work during construction and in-service. Procedures may include :
a. Hard coatings or protective clear top coatings where human contact damage is
possible
b. Pre-finish cover pieces fitted late in the installation process
c. Coating of work after assembly to avoid damage during fabrication
d. Packaging to minimize damage during transportation and handling

e. Site assembly of large or difficult work

32. Uniform appearance of glass surfaces:
a. The visual effect (color, reflectivity and opacity) shall be uniform for each
glazing system and visual plane
33. Body tinted glass in each visual plane shall be of uniform thickness, unless
otherwise approved
34. Defects in Coatings to Glass:
a. Defects in coatings to glass shall not be visible when viewed from more than
1500mm from the surface, perpendicular to the surface, using natural light
Surface shall be considered in two zones, namely :
35. Central area, equivalent to 80% of the daylight opening outer area
• the balance from the central area to the edges of the daylight opening
b. Defects in coatings to glass shall not exceed :
• Pinhole diameter shall not exceed 0.8mm in the central area, or 1.5mm in
the outer area.
• Not more than one pinhole in the range 0.8mm to 1.5mm in any 300mm
diameter area.
• Not more than four pinholes in any 300mm diameter area.
• Scratches, rub marks or other gaps shall not exceed 0.8mm width, and not
exceed 25mm long in the central area and 75mm in the outer area.
• The indicated defects tolerances may be reduced if the anticipated defects
will be harmful to the thermal performance of the glass or the overall
appearance, at the ENGINEER sole discretion.
36. Thermal properties: (External) The installed work shall provide continuous thermal
insulation to minimize heat gain or loss from outside in accordance with relevant
standards
37. Excessive reflectivity:
a. The reflectivity of the glass and related cladding surfaces shall not exceed the
limits and conditions stated in the permit.
b. Submit product information to verify reflectivity limits If directed, carry out
testing of cladding materials before commencing installation
38. Ultra Violet exposure: Products and applied coatings, including internal products
and coatings subject to direct and reflected sunlight shall be ultra-violet resistant
types
1.10 TESTING
1. A Adhesion testing (Coatings): After installation:
2. Arrange and pay for on-site adhesion testing of applied coatings by a registered
testing laboratory in accordance with the relevant Standards. The frequency or rate
of testing shall be not less than: Ten random locations per floor.
3. Dry film thickness testing (Coatings): After installation: Arrange and pay for on-site
dry film thickness (DFT) testing of applied coatings by a registered testing
laboratory in accordance with the relevant Standards. The frequency or rate of
testing shall be not less than: • Ten random locations per floor.

1.11 PERFORMANCE-TEST PROTOTYPE

1. Arrange and pay for testing by a registered testing laboratory of a full-scale
performance-test prototype to demonstrate compliance with the ‘acceptable
performance criteria' in accordance with the relevant Standards.
1.12 STRUCTURAL GLAZING TESTING

1. Submit manufacturer's test results prepared by a registered testing laboratory for
structural sealant glazing before commencing installation in accordance with the
relevant Standards. Include details of sampling and test procedures.
• ASTM C794 Test method for adhesion-in-peel of elastomeric joint
sealants.
• ASTM C1087 Standard test method for determining compatibility of liquid-
applied sealants with accessories used in structural glazing techniques.
• ASTM E283 Test method for rate of air leakage through exterior windows,
curtain walls and doors.
• Test procedures and minimum acceptance criteria shall comply with AAMA
related standards.
• Provide additional coated samples for structural glazing testing. Adhesion
failure of coating to substrate in structural glazing testing may be grounds
for rejection of the whole installation area or production batch.
2. Initial compatibility testing:
a. Carry out and submit results for initial adhesion and compatibility testing
including 'peel' tests to ASTM C794 and ASTM C510.
b. Verify unconditional acceptance of materials in contact with structural sealants,
and that no material in contact with the structural sealants will cause
deterioration of structural sealants, and the structural sealants will not cause
intrusion into laminated glass interlayer or IGU seals.
3. Direct tension tests:
a. Carry out and submit results for direct tension tests by a registered testing
laboratory on samples of vision glass and spandrel glass adhered to finished
aluminum.
b. Prepare and test ten samples of each joint type without weather seals and
using actual materials and joint configuration identical to that proposed and
complete testing before manufacture, as follows:
• Five samples shall be air cured 21 days then water immersed 7 days
before testing.
• Five samples shall be air cured 21 days then water immersed 14 days
before testing.
• Repeat procedure on completion of manufacture of 30% of the materials.
• Apply a 5 x safety factor to the mean of the ultimate strength results to
determine joint dimension. Complete initial tests before commencing
manufacture.
4. Site adhesion (de-glazing) tests:
a. Carry out and submit results for factory adhesion (de-glazing) tests to fully
cured glazed panels selected randomly.

b. Cut joint at mid-point to leave half the sealant attached to the glass and half to
the substrate.
c. Carry out visual examination of joint fill, voiding and structural bite.
d. After testing fully remove silicone tape and spacers, thoroughly clean and re-
apply sealant in accordance with approved procedures in the factory.
e. Testing shall be carried out at the rate as follows:
• One unit in the first 10 units delivered to Site.
• One unit in the next 40.
• One unit in the next 50.
• One unit in each 100 thereafter.
• After testing, replace the adhesive by approved factory procedures.
• Any unsatisfactory occurrence including lack of joint fill, lack of adhesion,
excessive voiding or other defect be apparent, may be grounds for units
represented by that testing to be rejected. Carry out additional testing of
units manufactured on the same day and one day either side (a further five
units). Such units may be accepted on the condition that a satisfactory
explanation of such occurrence is submitted and that no additional
unsatisfactory occurrences occur.
5. Peel tests during glazing:
a. Carry out periodic 'hand pull' peel tests in the factory on finished metal samples
out at a rate of one per day.
b. A silicone bead shall be applied to an area not visible in the final location, on a
random basis. After curing, a peel test shall be performed to demonstrate
adhesion. Record results in glazier's logbook.
c. Submit copies at weekly intervals.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLAZING SYSTEMS:

1. Glazing systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with established
design principles and the relevant Standards.
2. Glazing systems shall include anchorages, brackets, fixings, framing, stiffening,
capping, flashings, sills, trim, sealants, back-up drains, weep holes, and
accessories, as appropriate and required.
3. Fixings shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated.
4. Where the copyright, license or intellectual property of a system or any of its
components, including aluminum extrusions, is owned by a third party, obtain the
necessary rights or licenses and comply with any conditions. Submit evidence of
approval and compliance.
5. Applied coatings shall be a suitable factory-applied proprietary system unless
otherwise approved. Extend coatings to edge and rear surfaces where visible in the
installed location.
6. Glazing systems, including non-standard components, shall be prefabricated and
pre-finished in the factory, to the greatest extent practicable.
7. Face-sealed joints:

a. Provide face-sealed sealant joints at the following locations:

• At external joints between glazing panels where indicated or required.
8. At external and internal joints between glazing panels and adjacent work and
windows.
9. Elsewhere indicated.
a. Carry out sealing to inside joints progressively at the time of glazing installation
using the same or compatible sealant materials.
10. Open-faced pressure-equalized drained joints:
a. Open-faced pressure-equalized drained joints shall include an outer rain
screen barrier, pressure-equalization cavity and rear inner air seal.
b. Open-faced pressure-equalized drained joints shall include all required
ancillary sealants and gaskets, over-lapped baffles, drainage paths, gutters and
weep-holes.
c. Drainage paths shall ensure continuity of drainage to the outside of the
building.
d. The details of horizontal and vertical joints shall be consistent and shall be
integrated at intersections.
e. All concealed components shall be corrosion resistant and durable for the
service-life of the building.
2.2 GLAZED WALLS / SCREENS / WINDOWS

1. Generally :
a. Glazed walls, screens and opening windows shall be approved types to match
Control Samples, in accordance with the Product Information, approved shop
drawings and relevant Standards and Specification.
b. Submit details including Product Information, Control Samples, shop drawings
and computations.
c. Submit test results of standard proprietary types.
d. Verify frame and trim finishes, colors and glass types before commencing.
2. Framing: Frames shall be reinforced to accommodate concentrated loads at
connection points, to prevent sagging or racking, and to resist wind and air
pressure loads.
3. Glazing:
a. Glass for glazed walls, screens, doors and door side-lights subject to
pedestrian contact shall be Grade A safety glass in accordance with the
relevant Standards and Specification.
b. Glass for semi-framed and frameless walls / screens shall be toughened.
c. Edges of laminated glass shall be fully framed or trimmed to prevent exposure
of interlayer.
4. Glass-to-glass joints shall be nominal 3mm wide, unless otherwise indicated. There
shall be no direct contact between adjacent glass panels. Seal glass-to-glass joints
with clear neutral cure silicone sealant.
5. Glazed units shall be factory glazed where practicable.

2.3 GLAZED DOORS AND OPENING WINDOWS

1. Glazed doors and opening windows shall be approved types to match Control
Samples, in accordance with the Product Information, approved shop drawings and
relevant Standards.
2. Read this Clause in conjunction with the GLAZED WALLS / SCREENS /
WINDOWS Clause.
3. Verify hardware types and locking systems before commencing.
4. Refer to DOORS / HARDWARE Section for technical requirements, and coordinate
requirements for master-keying.
5. Mounting: All mounting types shall be rated heavy duty, and shall be selected for
the traffic flow conditions.
a. Pivots:
• Pivots shall include recessed into floor boxes, or where floor boxes cannot
be accommodated, recessed and braced ceiling mounted boxes.
• Coordinate the correct position and level with adjacent floor finishes, tiling
and stone flooring carpets, entry mats and the like.
• Coordinate required recesses and cores in base-structure and grout in
components.
b. Hinges: Hinges for framed glazed doors shall be stainless steel or high tensile
aluminum with fixed stainless steel pins in nylon bushes, and with nylon
washers to each knuckle joint not less than:
• Door Mass 30 (kg) / Hinge size 100 x 70 x 3 mm / Knuckles 3 / Screws 3
per leaf:
• Door Mass 50 (kg) / Hinge size 100 x 80 x 3.5 mm / Knuckles 5 / Screws 4
per leaf
c. Sliding tracks:
• Sliding tracks and wheel systems shall be heavy duty types which roll
smoothly without sticking or jamming, and without excessive wear.
• Sliding tracks and wheel systems shall be recessed into floor boxes, or
where floor boxes cannot be accommodated, recessed and braced ceiling
mounted boxes.
• Coordinate the correct position and level with adjacent floor finishes, tiling
and stone flooring carpets, entry mats and the like.
• Coordinate required recesses and cores in base-structure and grout in
components.
• The sizes and weights of the sliding leaves shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of the system designers.
• To avoid breakdown of a paint system, tracks within the sliding element
shall incorporate a replaceable stainless steel support for the rollers.
d. Seals:
• Glazed doors and opening windows shall include suitable seals to prevent
ingress of air, rain and dirt, unless otherwise indicated as not required.
• Where required for acoustic or smoke sealing, seals shall be suitable
acoustic or smoke seal types. Seals shall be properly located to prevent

damage due to normal opening and closing of doors. Seals shall not
contribute to whistling or other noises due to wind.
e. Furniture:
• Furniture types for glazed doors and opening windows may include, as
indicated, finger pulls, knobs, handles and levers, and may include
recessed and projecting types.
• All furniture shall be not less than heavy duty grade, able to withstand
constant long-term use, without breakage or failure of the furniture, finishes
or fixings.
• Locate hardware with sufficient clearance between adjacent frames to
prevent injury to hands and fixings.
• Where possible all fittings shall be from the system designer’s range of
supplied and approved/tested fittings.
f. Locking and security: Glazed doors and opening windows shall include
approved locking devices, and shall be resistant to forced entry.
g. Stops, controllers and restraints:
• Unless otherwise indicated as not required, glazed doors and opening
windows shall include suitable friction or dampened stays to prevent over-
run or impact damage when opening or in sudden wind gust conditions,
and to ensure gentle closing without slamming.
• Indicate methods of protecting opening doors and windows from damage
in sudden wind gust conditions.
2.4 GLAZED BALUSTRADES

1. Glazed balustrades shall be approved types to match Control Samples, installed in
accordance with the approved shop drawings and the relevant Standards.
2. Submit shop drawings and computations. Include computations for glass thickness
and fixing methods.
3. Glazed balustrades shall be complete with fixings, trim and accessories
4. Glazing:
a. Unless otherwise indicated, glazed balustrades shall be of fully toughened
Grade A safety glass.
b. Make provision for thermal movement and base-structure movements and
deflections.
c. Glass-to-glass joints shall be nominal 6 mm wide, unless otherwise indicated.
There shall be no direct contact between adjacent glass panels. Seal glass-to-
glass joints with clear neutral cure silicone sealant.
2.5 INSECT SCREEN DOORS

1. Insect screen doors shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the
intended function, in accordance with the Product Information.
2.6 GLASS AND GLAZING

1. Glass and glazing accessories shall be approved types to match Control Samples,
suitable for the location and the intended function, in accordance with the Product
Information and relevant Standards and Specification.
2. Submit details including Control Samples, computations and shop drawings.
3. Verify required thicknesses before commencing.

4. Glass shall be manufactured and processed by factories operating under an

approved quality assurance system.
5. Submit complete, certified, verifiable quality assurance documentation which
records the manufacturing and processing sequence, including name and location
of each factory for:
a. Annealing.
b. Tempering.
c. Coating.
d. Laminating.
e. Other fabrication.
6. Submit quality assurance documentation progressively. Glass which is not
accompanied by verifiable quality assurance documentation will be rejected.
7. Submit details of glass replacement procedures, including equipment required and
limitations of glass size and access. Indicate estimated maximum lead-time to
replace each type of glass unit. Include details of source, secondary processing
and delivery.
8. Unless otherwise approved, vision glass shall be capable of replacement from
inside the building.
9. Thickness:
a. Determine glass thicknesses appropriate to the glass area, performance
requirements and conditions, including wind loads and internal air pressures,
deflections and safety, in accordance with relevant Standards.
b. Glass types and thicknesses shall be not less than indicated on the Drawings.
c. For each glass type, all glass of that type in each plane surface shall have
consistent visual characteristics and shall be the same thickness, unless
otherwise approved.
10. Human impact and safety:
a. Provide Grade A safety glass for glass subject to human loads in accordance
with the relevant Standards.
b. Permanently mark safety glass in accordance with the relevant Standards.
c. Provide Grade A safety glass for glass balustrades, glass doors and side-lights,
and glass walls below balustrade level.
d. Wherever necessary, glazing shall accommodate human crush and panic
loads.
11. Edge treatment: Edge treatment for glass shall be not less than:
a. Annealed glass: Clean, wheel cut edges.
b. Laminated glass: Clean, wheel cut edges.
c. Tempered glass: Belt arrised edges. Visible edges shall be ground-arrised.
d. Glass with visible edges, or subject to thermal stress: Ground-arrised.
e. Ground-arrising, where required, shall use a 'wet' process with grit not coarser
than 120. Do not work across the edge from surface to surface.
12. Cut to size tolerances: Cut to size dimensions and squareness shall not exceed the
requirements of the relevant Standards.
13. Warp and bow distortion:
a. Localised warp: Maximum localised warp shall not exceed 0.10 mm in any 300
mm length of glass (1/300).

b. Overall warp: Overall warp across the shorter glass dimension ('width') shall not
exceed:
• Nominal 6 mm thick glass: 1/350 for width < 1500 mm.
• Nominal 6 mm thick glass: 1/250 for width > 1500 mm.
• Greater than 6 mm thick glass: 1/400 for width < 1500 mm.
• Greater than 6 mm thick glass: 1/300 for width > 1500 mm.
c. The indicated maximum warp may be reduced if the anticipated distortion will
be harmful to the glass, any system component, adjacent structural or building
elements, or the overall appearance, at the Engineer’s sole discretion.
14. Roller wave distortion:
a. Roller wave in the installed work shall be horizontal.
b. Vertical roller wave in the installed work may be grounds for rejection of all
such glass.
c. Roller wave distortion shall mean parallel waves or undulations in the glass
surface due to roller contact during manufacture or any other cause.
d. Maximum peak to valley amplitude of roller wave shall not exceed 0.10 mm in
any 300 mm direction, except that within 300 mm of the leading and trailing
edges it shall not exceed 0.20 mm in a 300 mm span.
e. The indicated roller wave tolerances may be reduced if the anticipated
distortion will be harmful to the glass, any system component, adjacent
structural or building elements, or the overall appearance, at the Engineer’s
sole discretion.
15. Edge defects:
a. Ensure that glass edges are undamaged before glazing.
b. Edge defects for glass shall be assessed and shall not exceed the
requirements indicated in the relevant Standard and the following additional
requirements:
• Shark teeth shall not penetrate more than half of glass thickness.
• Serration hackle shall not occur beyond 150 mm of corners.
• Flare shall not exceed 1 mm measured perpendicular to glass surface
across the edge.
• Flare shall not occur at setting blocks.
• Bevel shall not exceed 1.6 mm.
• Flake chips shall not occur within 200 mm of corners.
• Flake depth shall not exceed 0.8 mm and length or diameter shall not
exceed 6 mm.
• Flake length or diameter shall not exceed 6 mm.
• Glass with rough chips at edges shall be not used. Rough chips are those
which exceed any of the dimensional limits for flake chips.
• Glass with vents (minute cracks) at edges shall be not used.
16. Nickel Sulphide:
a. All tempered glass shall be heat-soaked or subjected to other suitable
procedures to minimize the risk of spontaneous breakage due to the presence
of nickel sulphide inclusions.

b. Heat-soaking shall be consistent with the Draft ISO Standard for Heat Soaked
Thermally Toughened Soda-Lime Silicate Glass which requires, in summary,
that all lites of tempered glass be heat-soaked in a furnace calibrated for the
purpose, with the lites held at a temperature of 295 degrees-C for two hours
after the last thermo-couple in the furnace has reached that temperature.
c. Submit calibration details of proposed furnace to verity that it has been
calibrated in a manner consistent with the Standard.
d. Submit details of proposed procedures and previous results.
e. Submit production records indicating calibration methods, time and temperature
records.
f. Submit manufacturer's certification that all glass has been heat-soaked or
subjected to other suitable procedures to minimize the risk of spontaneous
breakage due to the presence of nickel sulphide inclusions.
17. Risk of breakage: Submit computations and other data to verify the risk of
breakage due to thermal stress or other causes will not exceed 1/1000.
2.7 ANNEALED GLASS

1. Annealed glass shall comply with the relevant Standards. Submit details to verify
quality and performance.
• ASTM C1036 Standard specification for flat glass.
2. Quality, dimensional tolerances and defects shall not exceed ASTM C1036, type
'q3', proportionally adjusted to proposed glass thickness.
3. Glass shall be free from cracks, scratches, bubbles, blisters, inclusions of harmful
matter and other defects which detract from appearance or interfere with durability
and performance.
4. Body tints: Body tints shall match Control Samples and thermal performance data,
in accordance with the relevant Standards. Submit details and test results.
2.8 TEMPERED GLASS

1. Tempered glass shall be manufactured using the 'roller hearth' or an equivalent
process, in accordance with the relevant Standards. Submit details to verify quality
and performance.
• ASTM C1048 Standard specification for heat-treated flat glass - Kind HS,
kind FT coated and uncoated glass.
2. Base material shall be an approved selected quality annealed glass.
3. The expression 'tempered' glass shall include the meanings 'toughened' glass and
‘heat-strengthened’ glass.
4. Carry out required cutting, edge-working, drilling, hole-cutting and other required
procedures to glass before tempering. Do not cut, work, or permanently mark after
tempering.
2.9 LAMINATED GLASS

1. Laminated glass shall comply with relevant Standards. Submit details to verify
quality and performance.
• ASTM C1172 Standard Specification for laminated architectural flat glass.

2. Fabricate laminated glass from approved annealed glass, or tempered glass where
required.
3. Interlayer:
a. Interlayer shall be an approved polyvinylbutyral (PVB) interlayer.
b. Use glazing materials which do not cause deterioration or discoloration of the
interlayer.
c. Submit test results to verify adhesion, durability and compatibility of laminated
glass with adjacent glazing materials.
4. Colored / translucent interlayer: Colored interlayer shall be approved types to match
Control Samples. Colored interlayer may be used in lieu of sand-blasted opaque
and translucent glass where approved.
2.10 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU’S)

1. Insulating glass units (IGUs) shall comply with the relevant Standards.
• ASTM E546 Test for dew point of sealed insulating glass units
• ASTM E773 Standard test methods for seal durability of sealed insulating
glass units
• ASTM E774 Standard specification for sealed insulating glass units
2. Submit complete details, including construction details, primary (vapor) and
secondary (structural) seals, gas filling, corner treatment, nature of spacers,
evacuation and assembly.
3. Submit computations for distance between the outer edge of the glass and the
innermost edge of the aluminum spacer indicating minimum bite of secondary
(structural) seal and spacer bar depth.
4. Include sealant Product Information and load tables.
5. Unless otherwise indicated, body tinted lites for IGUs shall be on Surface 2 (inner
face) of the outer lite.
6. The expressions ‘insulated glazed units’ and ‘ double glazed units’ shall have the
meeting.
7. Seal Performance :
a. IGUs shall incorporate polyisobutylene primary (vapour) seals, and two-part
silicone secondary (structural) seals, continuously bonded to glass.
b. Primary seal shall not be less than 3mm deep.
c. Secondary seal shall completely cover spacer with no gaps or voids.
d. Spacer bar shall be an approved proprietary aluminum type, desiccant filled,
anodised in an approved dark color compatible with seals.
e. Conceal spacer bar within the depth of the glazing gasket line to ensure
smooth site line.
f. Ensure ‘edge deletion’ of surface coatings to glass which may impair seal
adhesion.
g. Submit a test report from a registered testing laboratory to verify that the unit
type has attained Class A (ASTM E774) when tested in accordance with ASTM
E773.
8. Edge treatment for IGUs : Edge treatment for IGU glass shall not be less than:
a. IGU external heat-strengthened glass : Clean, wheel cut edges.

b. IGU internal toughened glass : Belt arrised edges.
2.11 PERFORMANCE TREATMENT TO GLASS

1. Decorative treatments and colors to glass shall be approved types and processes
to match Control Samples, suitable for the location and the intended function, in
accordance with the Product Information and relevant Standards.
• AAMA 1503.1 Voluntary test method for thermal transmittance and
condensation resistance of windows, doors, and glazed wall sections.
• ASTM E 903 Test method for solar absorptance, reflectance, and
transmittance of materials using integrating spheres.
2. Submit details. Submit manufacturer’s certification that applied films and coatings
will not be harmful to the glass or reduce or modify the glass manufacturer’s
product warranty.
3. Include certification from a registered testing laboratory confirming the required
thermal performance.
2.12 DECORATIVE TREATMENT TO GLASS

1. General:
a. Decorative treatments and colors to glass shall be approved types and
processes to match Control Samples, suitable for the location and the intended
function, in accordance with the Product Information and relevant Standards.
Submit details.
b. Verify whether decorative treatment will be on rear or front surface in the
installed location.
c. Decorative treatments and colors to glass shall be not harmful to the required
strength or safety of the glass, and shall be stable and durable.
d. The decorative treatment shall extend to the edge of the glass to visible edges
in the installed location.
e. Where the edge of decorative treatment does not extend to the edge of the
glass, the edge of the decorative treatment shall be concealed in the installed
location.
f. Alternative treatments to achieve the required visual effect may be approved.
Submit details. Verify design, color and texture before commencing.
2. Ceramic frit: Ceramic frit decorative treatment to glass shall be a durable oven-
baked coating applied to the glass, to match Control Samples, suitable for the
location and the intended function, in accordance with the Product Information.
3. Decorative / colored interlayer : Decorative / colored interlayer decorative treatment
to glass shall be durable PVB interlayer, to match Control Samples, suitable for the

1. Fabricate metalwork to match Control Samples in accordance with approved shop
drawings and relevant Standards.

2. Cut edges, drilled holes, joints and surfaces shall be clean, neat, free from burrs
and indentations. Remove sharp edges without excessive or uneven radiusing.
3. Visible joints shall be accurately scribed and fitted to fine hairline contact without
edge projection or misalignment. Ensure continuity of surface finish, color and
texture without variation.
4. Holes:
a. Make holes and connections for site assembly and to accommodate the work
of other trades as required. Holes shall be drilled, or punched and reamed
perpendicular to the surface.
b. Do not make or enlarge holes by flame cutting. Such work may be grounds for
rejection.
5. Marking:
a. Identify and mark components to enable correct setting out, assembly, and
selection of fixings. Locate marking on concealed surfaces where practicable.
b. Marking shall be removable with water or solvents after assembly. Do not mark
by notching unless approved.
6. Sheeting: Face sheeting shall be continuous with no joins or overlaps, and no
visible fixings.
7. Glazing rebates: Glazing rebates shall be of adequate size to hold the weight and
size of the glass, with required clearances and tolerances, and to accommodate the
required wind loadings, thermal movement and base-structure movements and
deflections.
8. Moving parts: Moving parts shall operate freely and smoothly, without binding or
sticking, at correct tensions or operating forces, lubricated where appropriate.
2.14 ALUMINUM
1. Aluminum shall be suitable alloys and grades for the structural application, applied
finishes and conditions, and finished to match Control Samples, in accordance with
2. Submit details of proposed alloys on shop drawings. Submit reasons for selection,
if directed.
3. Extruded sections:
a. Unless otherwise indicated or required, extruded aluminum alloy shall be
Grade 6063, Temper T5 or T6.
b. Temper T4 may be used where bending is required, subject to approval. Grade
6061, Temper T6 shall be used for structural applications.
c. Extrusion shapes and thicknesses shall accommodate required loads and
connections, and shall be rigid and straight, with sharply defined profiles, and
without draw marks.
d. Extrusion walls and screw flutes shall be of sufficient thickness for fixings
including flush countersinking where required.
4. Sheet:
a. Unless otherwise indicated or required, sheet aluminum shall be Grade 5005,
Temper H34 or Grade 6061, Temper T1.
b. Where sheet thickness is 3 mm or more, notch and fold corners with external
radius of 1.6 mm.

c. Where sheet thickness is less than 1.6 mm, the bending radius shall not
exceed t x 1.0 where t is the thickness of sheet.
d. Unless otherwise indicated, sheet aluminum for external cladding shall not be
less than 4 mm.
5. Identification:
a. Submit manufacturer’s mill certificate or independent test report cross
referenced to each batch or structural member, and traceable quality
assurance documentation.
b. Identify and cross reference each batch or structural member with the
certificate or report. Otherwise ENGINEER may require testing by a registered
testing laboratory to verify alloy and grade.
2.15 FIXINGS
1. Fixings shall be of suitable type, load capacity, durability, size and spacing to
assemble and fix the work to the substrates or base-structure, and accommodate
all imposed loads, and shall be selected for the purpose and location in accordance
with the Product Information and relevant Standards.
2. Submit Product Information including manufacturer's standard load tables for all
proposed fixings including corrosion protection grade and relevant Standards.
3. Indicate type, location, depth, spacing and edge distances on shop drawings.
4. Deliver fixings to site in durable packages, labelled to indicate type and intended
use, and store in clean, dry locations. Do not use fixings which are damaged or
corroded. Fixings damaged during installation shall be removed and replaced.
5. Use shimming and packing to ensure correct position and alignment of finished
work.
6. Tighten fixings at completion and before covering over.
7. Where visible fixings are indicated or required, use selected finish quality fixings,
neatly and evenly aligned and spaced.
8. Where required to be finished flush with adjacent surfaces, visible fixings shall be
countersunk.
9. Corrosion protection:
a. Fixings shall be corrosion resistant for the location and equivalent to or
exceeding the members to be fixed or assembled. Fixings shall not cause
staining or electrolytic corrosion to adjacent work.
b. Provide corrosion resistant coatings in accordance with the relevant Standards.
10. External work:
a. Fixings for external work and concrete, or where exposed to moisture for
internal or concealed work, shall be hot-dip galvanized or Grade 316 stainless
steel.
b. Fixings with electro-plated coatings shall be not used for external work.
11. Structural work:
a. Provide lock nuts for structural bolts, moving parts, where subject to vibration,
for vertical bolts in tension, and where there is any risk of loosening. Suitable
nut locking compounds may be used.

2.16 SECONDARY STEEL FRAMING

1. Provide secondary steel framing fixed to base-structure with suitable anchorages
where required for support and stability of the work of this trade and to support
applied work by other trades.
2. Refer to STRUCTURAL STEEL Section for technical requirements.
3. Refer to STEEL FINISHES Section for protective coating requirements.
4. Framing shall be concealed. Coordinate with trades for adjacent work.
2.17 SEALANTS
1. General
a. Sealants shall be suitable elastomeric sealants, suitable for the location and the
intended function, in accordance with the Product Information and relevant
Standards.
• ASTM C962 Standard guide for use of elastomeric joint sealants.
b. Submit details including generic type, durability, adhesion, compatibility,
movement capability and fire-resistance as appropriate.
c. Sealants shall be compatible with and non-staining to substrates and adjacent
work, and shall be capable of cleaning.
d. Movement capability of sealants shall accommodate the expected maximum
movement and deflection of the application.
e. Visible sealants shall be resistant to ultra-violet light and effects of exposure.
f. Include joint preparation and priming, bond breaker tapes and backer rods if
required.
g. Unless otherwise indicated, sealant color shall match adjacent work.
2. Sealants for glazing:
a. Sealants to glazing shall be non-acidic and not harmful to adjacent metal types
and finishes.
b. Sealants for glazing shall be compatible with and not harmful to:
• Edge seal of adjacent IGUs.
• Interlayer of adjacent laminated glass, and not cause delamination.
• Long term structural performance, durability or appearance of glass.
• Applied coatings to adjacent metal surfaces.
c. Unless otherwise indicated, color of sealants shall (be):
• Glass to glass joints (clear glass): Clear.
• Glass to glass joints (colored glass): Match glass color.
• Glass to aluminum glazing rebates: Black.
d. Indicate sealant details on shop drawings.
e. Submit manufacturer's certification of suitability for location, function and
performance.
f. Sealants for each joint type shall be the same product and manufacturer.
Stockpile sufficient quantities to ensure continuity of supply.

g. Sealant shall be 'batch numbered' and labeled accordingly. Cross reference

supply records to installation records for traceability of installed sealant.
h. Submit manufacturer's standard test results and certification for the following
characteristics:
• Chemical composition.
• Adhesion, bond strength, cohesion or tensile strength, and elongation.
• Compatibility.
• Hardness and viscosity.
• Color stability.
• Compression set.
• Low-temperature flexibility.
• Modulus of elasticity.
• Water absorption.
• Effects of exposure to ozone and ultraviolet light.
• Stain resistance. Long-term aged performance or accelerated exposure
performance:
i. Comply with all the relevant Standards to include:
• ASTM C510 Standard test method for staining and color change of single
or multi-component joint sealants.
• ASTM C719 Test method for adhesion and cohesion of elastomeric joint
sealants under cyclic movement (Hockman Cycle).
• ASTM C794 Standard test method for adhesion-in-peel of elastomeric joint
sealants.
• ASTM D2203 Standard test method for staining of caulking compounds
and sealants.
• ASTM D412 Standard test method for vulcanised rubber and thermoplastic
elastomers - Tension.
• ASTM D897 Tensile testing of adhesive bonds.
3. Sealant accessories for cladding and glazing:
a. Carry out joint and substrate preparation and install correct sealant
accessories to ensure the proper performance of sealants.
b. Use primer to achieve suitable bonding of sealant into substrate. Primer shall
be compatible with and non-staining to adjacent surfaces. Prevent spillage or
migration onto adjacent surfaces.
c. Backing rod shall be compressible, flexible, durable, non-gassing, non-
absorptive material of appropriate size and shape, compressed between 25%
and 50% when installed. Backing rod shall be closed cell polyethylene foam,
unless otherwise required.
d. Bond breaker tape shall be self-adhesive polyethylene tape applied to
substrate surfaces where required to prevent sealant bonding for correct joint
construction.

2.18 DOOR SEALS

1. Door seals, including weather bars, smoke seals, acoustic seals and air seals, shall
be suitable for the location and the intended function, in accordance with the
Product Information.
2. Include fixings, rebates, grooves, and clearances for correct installation and
operation of seals.
3. Coordinate with the door-frame manufacturer for required rebates to door-frames.
2.19 FIRE-SAFING
1. Fire-safing and fire-rated sealants shall be suitable approved types, suitable for the
location and the intended function, in accordance with the Product Information and
relevant Standards.
2. Submit details including test results and manufacturer's certification verifying fire-
rating and compliance with statutory requirements.
3. Verify locations of fire-rated joints before commencing.
2.20 GLAZING GASKETS

1. General:
a. Glazing gaskets and accessories shall be suitable extruded elastomeric
profiles, suitable for the location and the intended function, in accordance with
the Product Information and relevant Standards.
• ASTM C509 Specification for cellular elastomeric preformed gasket and
sealing material.
• ASTM C864 Specification for dense elastomeric compression seal
gaskets, setting blocks and spacers.
• ASTM D2287 Specification for non-rigid vinyl chloride polymer and
copolymer melding and extrusion compounds.
b. Submit details, including compatibility with adjacent components and sealants,
and hardness. Indicate sizes, types and locations on shop drawings.
c. Glazing accessories may include seals, spacers, setting blocks and wedges.
d. Extruded profiles shall be smooth, of uniform dimensions, and compatible with
and non-staining to substrates or the glazing. Exposed products shall be ultra-
violet resistant.
e. Extruded profiles in contact with structural silicone shall be black heat cured
silicone rubber.
2. Setting blocks:
a. Setting blocks shall be of dense material as follows:
• Shore A durometer hardness: 85 +/- 5%.
• Compression set (168 hours): Not greater than 25%.
b. Unless otherwise approved, setting blocks shall be located at 1/5 points of lite
and secured against dislodgement.
3. Soft profiles:
a. Soft profiles (for bulb seals and sponge seals) shall be as follows:

• Shore A durometer hardness: 55 +/- 5%.

• Compression set (168 hours): 30% +/- 5%.
4. Hard profiles: Hard (dense) profiles for (flashings and wiper seals) shall be as
follows:
a. Shore A durometer hardness: 75 +/- 5 for solid profiles and 60 +/- 5 for hollow
profiles.
b. Compression set 100% (168 hours): Not greater than 40%.

1. Generally:
a. Flashings shall be made out of corrosion-resistant materials or protective
coated, and shall be compatible with and non-staining to adjacent work, and
fixed to ensure separation of dissimilar materials in accordance with the
relevant Standards.
b. Include required corrosion resistant fixings, gaskets, pressure seals and
sealants. Seal around visible fixing heads and penetrations.
c. Spacing of fixings shall not exceed 450 mm unless otherwise indicated.
d. Flashings shall be fabricated to required profiles in longest practicable lengths.
Lap and seal flashings at junctions and corners.
e. Flashings shall have adequate stiffness to retain shape and remain effective,
and resist wind uplift, substrate movements and differential movement between
adjacent materials.
f. Make neat junctions with adjacent work. Scribe or dress down to match
adjacent profiles.
g. Where required, construct grooves, rebates or reglets in substrates.
Coordinate with trades for adjacent work as required.
2. Materials:
a. Flashing materials shall comply with the relevant Standards.
b. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, flashing materials shall be:
• Stainless steel, not less than 0.8 mm, Grade 316: Where indicated or in
3. Cladding flashings:
a. Provide cladding flashings where indicated or required to prevent or divert the
entry of water, weather and vermin to the inside of the building.
b. Submit details of proposed cladding flashings before commencing
4. Smoke flashings and seals:
a. Provide smoke flashings and seals where indicated or required to prevent or
divert the passage of smoke through the work between adjacent floors or
between adjacent rooms on the same floor.
b. Submit details of proposed smoke flashings before commencing.

2.22 POWDER COATING

1. Powder coating shall be approved polyester resin systems by experienced
applicators, to match control samples, applied in accordance with the Product
Information and relevant standards.
2. Select an appropriate system for the substrate, required finish and prevailing
conditions.
3. Submit details, including substrate preparation, pre-treatment, application and
compatible on-site repair.
4. Powder coating systems shall be approved before commencing application.
5. Powder coating shall be carried out in the factory where practicable.
6. Unless otherwise indicated, dry film thickness (DFT) shall be 60 - 80 microns.
7. For powder coating to external cladding, the powder coating shall be a “super
durable” type to comply with AAMA 2604. Systems which do not comply with AAMA
2604 shall not be not used.
• AAMA 2604 Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test
procedures for high performance organic coatings on aluminum extrusions
and panels.
8. Include samples of accelerated ageing by ultra-violet exposure for 500, 1000, and
1,500 hours exposure. Include samples and details of on-site and return-to-factory
repair.

1. Refer to DOORS / HARDWARE for supply and installation of hardware and
furniture by this trade.
2.24 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR OPERATORS

1. Automatic sliding door operators shall be approved proprietary systems, suitable for
the location and the intended function, in accordance with the Product Information
and relevant Standards.
2. Submit Product Information, Control Samples, computations and shop drawings.
Include details of model selection and frequency-of-use assumptions. Include
details of maintenance access, electrical loads and security interface. Include
details of emergency and safety features.
3. Operators shall including bi-parting leaf or single leaf types as required.
4. Standard systems shall be modified as required to comply with performance
requirements and project conditions.
5. Operators shall be programmable for flexibility of operation.
6. Carry out commissioning, testing and adjustment before completion.
7. All automatic sliding door operators shall be from the same manufacturer.
8. Rating:
a. Automatic sliding door operators shall be rated for heavy duty, long-term, high
frequency operation unless otherwise approved.
b. Increase the strength, power and durability of system as required in relation to
the door sizes and traffic conditions to ensure substantial spare capacity for
performance and wear-and-tear for long-term operation with minimal
maintenance.
c. Submit Product Information, computations and shop drawings to verify heavy
duty product selection.

9. Operation:
a. Activation shall be controlled by a motion detector so that the doors are
operating smoothly at optimum speed before the pedestrian reaches the door.
b. For continuous, high flow and traffic surges, the operators shall hold the doors
in the open position until the traffic flow decreases.
10. Service calls and maintenance:
a. Include a certified undertaking that service calls during the Warranty Period will
be carried out not more than 24 hours later than the time at which the
telephone request was made. Service calls related to human safety or breach
of security shall be carried out not more than four hours later.
b. Submit details of maintenance personnel and service call procedures. Indicate
whether maintenance personnel are employed by the supplier or by a third
party.
11. Motors and drive system:
a. Motors and drive system and controls shall be of sufficient size, strength and
capacity for efficient and safe long-term operation.
b. The drive system shall be silent running without electromagnetic interference to
adjacent equipment. The drive system may include chain or resilient reinforced
belt types.
c. Unless otherwise approved, motors shall be torque drive or frequency inversion
type, for immediate acceleration and stopping at precise programmable
locations.
12. Safety:
a. Automatic operators shall ensure maximum safety to pedestrians.
b. Safety devices shall include:
• Sensors to detect obstructions to the closing doors.
• Electronic reversing on detection of obstructions.
• Reducing power and speed function when doors re-close, until obstruction
removed.
c. Sensors shall be programmable to enable disabling during fire or power failure.
d. Include safety switch in transom operable only when doors are in open position.
13. Locking and security:
a. All automatic sliding door operators shall be include a suitable electric locking
system, complete with interface for local and remote locking, and with building
security and monitoring systems.
b. Chain driven operators may provide electric motor locking. Belt driven
operators shall provide positive mechanical locking to the door leaves.
c. Submit details of locking system, and indicate resistance to various
contingencies
14. Fail condition during normal automatic operation:
a. Automatic sliding door operators shall be programmable for either 'Fail Safe'
(open) or 'Fail Secure' (closed) modes, and shall enable re-programming at any
time.
b. Sliding door operators required for smoke doors shall be programmed as ‘Fail
Close’.
15. Fail condition when doors secured:

a. Automatic sliding door shall not fall into an unsecured condition as a result of a
power failure and when in lock mode (night time).
b. Provide battery back-up to enable release of locks and opening of doors to
enable escape.
16. Push-button exit:
a. Provide push-button operation for exit during fire or power failure conditions
and when in lock mode (night time).
b. Push-button shall be colored green and located at 1000 mm nominal height
above floor level in a convenient visible location.
c. Verify location before commencing.
17. Battery back-up:
a. Where indicated, provide a continuously re-chargeable battery back-up to
enable the doors to operate during a fire or power failure. Battery back-up shall
provide for not less than 1-hour operation.
b. Submit details of estimated number of battery powered door operations.
18. Power interface and control panel:
a. Each operator shall include a suitable terminal / junction for connection to the
electrical supply system at approved locations located in an approved local
control panel.
b. Coordinate connection of control and power wiring with the ELECTRICAL
SERVICES and SECURITY SERVICES Sections.
c. The local control panel shall be located in approved concealed location. Submit
details.
d. Include suitable access-hatches and coordinate with trades for adjacent work
as required.
e. Submit comprehensive wiring diagrams and electrical load details.
19. Security interface:
a. Each operator shall include suitable interface for connection to building security
and automatic operation systems, before commissioning or subsequently at the
Principal's option.
b. Submit security control wiring diagrams.
c. Provide connection points and coordination in addition to electrical
requirements where applicable.
d. Security interface shall enable:
• Remote monitoring.
• Remote locking.
e. Coordinate with ELECTRICAL / SECURITY SERVICES Sections.
20. Panic break-out:
a. Where indicated or required by the relevant Standards for a required egress,
provide an approved panic break-out system to the operable door leafs and
adjacent panels.
b. Panic break-out systems shall be inspected and approved by the relevant
statutory authorities (fire) after installation. Submit verification of inspection and
approval.
21. Finishes:

a. Metalwork finishes shall be matched and integrated with the adjacent glazed
entry system.
b. Verify finish type and color of visible cover plates (pelmets) before
commencing.
22. Transoms, tracks and trolleys:
a. Transoms shall accommodate all motors, controls and operating gear, and
shall be designed to ensure convenient, safe maintenance access.
b. Where indicated on the Drawings, transom shall be a special low or slim profile
type. Verify profiles, dimensions and appearance before commencing.
c. Transoms shall be heavy duty extruded aluminum sections of sufficient size
and thickness to transfer all relevant loads to the base-structure, including
operator system dead loads, live loads, wind loads and maintenance loads,
with minimum deflection.
d. Unless otherwise approved, tracks shall be incorporated into transoms with
removable inserts for long-term replacement of wearing surfaces, with suitable
resilient acoustic buffering.
e. Trolleys shall be heavy duty assemblies with the required number of rollers to
distribute the loads, and minimize track and roller wear.
f. Trolleys shall be adjustable to accommodate alignment of openings and floor
surfaces.
g. Rollers shall be made of durable resilient materials with sealed roller bearings
for noise-less long-term operation.
h. Trolleys shall include durable up-jump rollers to restrain and prevent
unauthorized or accidental de-railing, dislodgement or removal of sliding doors
from the tracks. Submit verification.
23. Card readers:
a. Where indicated, one door in each entrance area shall be provided with
electronic card reader access system for after hours access.
b. Coordinate with ELECTRICAL / SECURITY SERVICES Sections.
24. Related construction:
a. Coordinate with trades for related work.
b. Verify finished floor levels, and set-downs required for entry-mats.
c. Coordinate installation of concealed control panels and services interfaces, and
access panels if required.
d. Coordinate with CONCRETE Section for required embedments and pockets.
3.0 EXECUTION

3.2 CLADDING / GLAZING INSTALLATION

1. Generally:
a. Install the cladding / glazing in accordance with the relevant Standards,
Specification and approved shop drawings to comply with the performance
requirements.

b. Install the cladding / glazing plumb, level and true to line within required
tolerances, properly anchored to the base-structure. Do not bend or distort
work during installation.
c. Coordinate with trades for adjacent work for rectification of base-structure and
substrates, if required.
2. Pre-installation checking:
a. Substrates for glazing:
b. Before commencing glazing, inspect and verify condition, location and
tolerances of glazing substrates, adjacent work and support framing.
c. Glazing rebates shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil and other harmful
substances.
d. Rectify substrates and coordinate as required with trades for adjacent work.
e. Glass:
• Inspect glass for edge damage. Do not install glass with edge damage.
• Verify correct outer and inner surface for asymmetrical assemblies
3. Installation: :
a. Install the glazing so that no base-structure loads are transferred to the
cladding / glazing, including loads resulting from short or long-term structural
deflection or shortening of base-structure and which prevent the glass making
direct contact with metals or other non resilient materials.
b. Carry out glazing to prefabricated units at the factory where practicable.
c. Glazing shall be carried out by experienced glaziers supervised by an approved
glazing supervisor in the factory or on-site, as appropriate. Submit details
d. Install glass with correct edge distances at rebates.
e. Glass-to-glass joints shall be nominal 6 mm wide, unless otherwise indicated.
There shall be no direct contact between adjacent glass panels. Seal glass-to-
glass joints with clear neutral cure silicone sealant.
f. Replace damaged glass, including edge damage, and leave the work clean,
free from defects, and in good condition.
g. Apply temporary marking if required for visibility during installation by a method
which does not harm the glass. Remove temporary marking before Practical
Completion.
h. Installed glazing shall be able to withstand ambient temperature changes,
movements and wind loads without breakage or deterioration of glass, glazing
gaskets, sealants or accessories.
3.3 SEALANT INSTALLATION

1. Prepare joints and install sealants in accordance with the Product Information,
2. Unless otherwise stated in the Product Information, the depth of elastomeric
sealant shall be not greater than the joint width, and not less than half the joint
width or 6 mm, whichever is the greater. Verify joint widths and depths before
commencing.
3. Use sealants within manufacturer's indicated shelf life.
4. Install sealants during temperature and humidity conditions at time of application
and during the curing period. Prepare and seal joints on the same working day.

5. Clean joints to ensure correct adhesion and complete filling of joint with sealant.
Protect adjacent surfaces where there is a possibility of contamination by cleaning
or sealant installation.
6. Install sealant to the correct depths in continuous ribbons without gaps or air
pockets, with complete 'wetting' of joint surfaces on both sides.
7. Remove excess sealant and leave adjacent surfaces neat, smooth and clean,
without smears.
8. Cure sealants in accordance with Product Information, and protect from damage
during curing period.
9. Provide weep holes where indicated or required.
10. Finished work shall be left in a neat clean condition.

1. Cleaning:
finishes.
b. Keep installation areas clean and tidy during installation. The Engineer may
direct installation areas to be cleaned at any time.
c. Remove spots, marks and stains progressively.
2. Protection:
a. Protect installed work to prevent damage during subsequent building work and
or weather conditions.
b. Use suitable temporary protective wrapping to prevent damage to applied
finishes. Remove at Practical Completion or when directed. Wrapping shall not
damage substrates or leave residue.
3. Adjacent work:
a. Protect adjacent work during installation. Use protective coverings where
required.
b. Rectify any damage to adjacent work.
c. Remove spots, marks and stains from adjacent surfaces.
d. Do not cause damage to adjacent work by welding, grinding or similar activities.
4. Completion:
activities.
b. If the work cannot be rectified properly, replace or re-apply the whole area
affected, as directed.
c. Rectified work shall match Control Samples and adjacent installed work.
5. Cladding:
a. Regularly inspect and keep clean the installed external cladding, including
adjacent cladding by other trades, including glass, coatings and drainage
channels, at all times during the installation period.
b. Rectify or replace any damage, including staining and corrosion resulting from
construction activities after installation of the cladding.

3.5 COMMISSIONING
1. Commission, test and adjust as required, all manual and mechanical operating
components in all functional modes before Date of Practical Completion.
Coordinate with relevant SERVICES trades.
2. Hand over completed system in full operational order, working correctly in all
functional modes.
3. Submit User’s Manuals including commissioning records, certificates and
approvals.
4. Notify manufacturers of dates for proposed commissioning and testing and verify
that product warranties will not commence until date of Practical Completion. Do
not void or limit product warranties.
5. Provide permanent labels, and operating, safety and maintenance instructions in
accordance with statutory requirements, if any.
6. Locate labels and instructions in suitable approved locations for convenient use and
visibility. Submit details, including the size, color and text of proposed labels, and a
set-out diagram indicating positions and mounting heights.
7. Before Practical Completion, arrange and carry out a demonstration and training
session with the Engineer and the Principal's permanent maintenance personnel to
instruct the maintenance personnel in the proper procedures for operation and
long-term maintenance.

details of materials used and Log-book:
a. Maintain a log-book and marked up installation drawings recording the dates
and locations of on-site installation progress, and cross reference to delivery
dockets. Adopt a consecutive numbering system for installation and testing so
gaps in the records are obvious.
b. The log-book and marked up installation drawings shall be kept on site and
updated daily, and shall be available for inspection at any time during
installation. Submit complete log-book and marked up installation drawings at
the completion of installation.
c. Record details and experience of each glazier. Each glazier shall demonstrate
capability for the required procedures. Periodically inspect examples of each
glazier's work and confirm ongoing capability in log-book.
9. For glazing record in the log-book:
• Date and glazier.
• Identification number of each panel and the installed location.
• Production number of the structural sealant for each unit.
• Site glazed or re-glazed units, if any.
4.0 PROJECT PARTICULARS
4.1 DEFAULT REQUIREMENTS

1. Dead loads: Dead load brackets for cladding panels shall accommodate 2x total
dead load.

2. Wind-load deflections:
a. Deflection between any two points of any member due to wind loads shall not
exceed:
• Framing generally: Span/180, but not more than 10 mm.
• Sheeting: Span/90, but not more than 10 mm.
b. Vertical deflection due to dead loads of horizontal framing members shall not
exceed the lesser of span/480 or 3 mm.
c. Deflection of glazing perpendicular to the glass due to wind loads shall not
exceed:
• Mullions supporting glass: Span/240.
• Transoms supporting glass: Span/240.
• Monolithic glass: Span/90, across the shorter dimension, but not more than
15 mm.
• Insulated glass units (IGUs): Span/60, but not more than 15 mm.
3. Thermal movements: The design ambient temperature range shall be -5 C-degrees
to +60 C-degrees.
4. Stainless steel grade: Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel grades shall be:
a. External locations: Grade 316.
b. Wet internal areas: Grade 316.
c. Structural fixings and under tension: Grade 904L.
d. Dry internal areas: Grade 304, if approved in writing before commencing.
e. Grades 302 shall be not used.
5. Stainless steel finish: Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel finish shall be:
a. Flat surfaces: Linished.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08980 – GLAZING PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
Table of contents
1.0 GENERAL……………………………………………………………………… 2
1.1 SUMMARY……………….……………………………………………………. 2
1.2 RELATED WORK ……………………………………………………….…… 2
1.3 DELIEVRY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ………………………………… 2
2.0 PRODUCTS…………………………………………………………………... 3
2.1 GLASS TYPE GLS - 1 ……………… …………………………………… 3

2.2 GLASS TYPE GLS - 2 ………….……………………………....……..... 3
2.3 GLASS TYPE GLS – 3……………………………………………………. 4
2.4 GLASS TYPE GLS- 4……………………….......................................... 4
2.5 GLASS TYPE GLS - 5 & 6……………………………………..…………. 4
2.6 GLASS TYPE GLS - 7 …………………………………………………... 4
2.7 GLASS TYPE GLS – 8 …………………………………………..………. 4
2.8 GLASS TYPE GLS - 9………………………………………………….…. 5
2.9 RAILING GLASS…………………………………………………….…….. 5
SECTION 08980 Glazing Particular Specification Page 1 of 4

SECTION 08980 – GLAZING PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. This specification covers particular specification for materials and quality
of the glazing to be used in the project.
2. Make comprehensive submissions including Control Samples, Product
Information, shop drawings, computations, and mock-up as required to
verify compliance.
3. All Performance data described herein are based on 24mm thickness
double glazed units (i.e. 6mm glass+12mm dehydration air space + 6mm
glass).
4. All glass shall be supplied bearing manufacturer’s identifying labels show
thickness, orientation and location of outer light. The label shall not be
removed until final cleaning.
5. Read this section of specifications in conjunction with:
b. Section 01000 “General Specifications”.
c. Section 05100 “Aluminum Metal Works”.
d. Section 07600 “Cladding”.
e. Section 08815 “Internal Glazing”.
f. Section 08970 “Exterior Glazed Assemblies Windows And
Entrances”.
g. Specifications of other trade that require coordination with this trade.
h. FINISHES SCHEDULE for system descriptions and finishes.
i. BUILDING MOVEMENTS REPORT or equivalent, if applicable.
1.2 RELATED WORK

1. The Contractor should carefully examine all of the Contract Documents
for requirements which affect the work of this section.
2. Materials that have not been individually specified shall be of first class
quality and the minimum standard acceptable shall be the relevant British
standard where applicable.

1. Protect products during delivery, handling and storage from weather,
damage or staining with suitable packing and wrapping. Store clear of
ground, concrete or damp surfaces on suitable packers spaced to
2. For important visible materials with long lead times for supply, or where
required for uniformity, order and stock-pile sufficient materials including
provision for wastage, and store in a secure location. Indicate lead-times
on program, including critical dated for ordering, pre-delivery inspections

and customs clearance. Submit copies of orders immediately when

placed.
3. Deliver glass directly into installation areas in correct sequence for
immediate installation. Remove damaged glass, including surface and
edge damage, immediately from site.
4. Storage and protect factory coated products to prevent abrasion and
other damage.
5. Use suitable temporary protective wrapping to prevent damage to glass
surfaces. Remove at Practical Completion or when directed. Protective
wrapping shall not bond permanently to substrates, or leave residue after
removal.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS TYPE GLS - 1

1. 24mm hermitically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit
comprising of:
a. Outer Face: 6 mm thick Tinted or Reflected Heat Strengthened High
Performance glass.
b. Cavity: 12 mm
c. Inner Face: 6 mm thick Clear Fully Tempered Glass with Low-E
Coating.
2. The U-Value shall not exceed 2.1 W/m2.K and Shading Coefficient shall
not exceed 0.35. All in accordance with the authorities regulations.
3. Color shall be to Engineer’s approval.
2.2 GLASS TYPE GLS - 2

1. 6 mm thick Heat Strengthened High Performance Reflected glass with 50
mm thick aluminum foilback black mineral insulation.
2. Color shall be to Engineer’s approval. Glass shall be selected to match
the color and shade of the vision panels.
2.3 GLASS TYPE GLS – 3

34.76 mm insulated Glass comprising of:
1. Outer Face: 8 mm thick Tinted tempered High Performance
glass.
2. Cavity: 16 mm
3. Inner Face: 10.76 mm thick laminated Glass (4 mm thick Clear
Fully Tempered Glass with Low-E Coating + 0.76m Clear PVB
layer + 6mm Clear Fully Tempered Glass).

1. 28mm hermitically sealed structural silicone glazed unit of the following
make up:
Outer Face: 8 mm Clear Heat Strengthened
Spacer: 12mm
Inner Face: 8mm Clear Glass Fully Tempered, with Low-E Coating.

2.5 GLASS TYPE GLS – 5 & 6

1. 12mm thick Clear Tempered glass.
2. GLS - 6 shall be sand blasted with decorative pattern to Architect
approval.

1. Clear laminated glass, fire rated glass comprising of intumiscent inter
layer in between (thickness of glass should be based on fire rated).

35.14 mm insulated Glass with decorative pattern comprising of:
glass.
2. Cavity: 16 mm
Fully Tempered Glass + 1.14mm Clear PVB layer + 6mm Clear
Fully Tempered Glass).

34.76 mm insulated Glass with decorative pattern comprising of:
glass.
5. Cavity: 16 mm
Fully Tempered Glass + 0.76m Clear PVB layer + 6mm Clear
Fully Tempered Glass).
2.9 RAILING
13.16 mm laminated Glass
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 20 00 - PLASTER WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................ 2

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS ...................................................... 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................ 3
1.5 GUARANTY WARRANTY ..................................................................... 4
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ............................................. 4
1.7 PROTECTION CONDITIONS ............................................................... 4
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS................................................................................................. 5
2.1 MIXING AND MIX LIFE ......................................................................... 5

2.2 CURING................................................................................................. 5
2.3 SPRAYED PLASTER ............................................................................ 5
2.4 STRUCTURAL INTERFACES............................................................... 5
2.5 PLASTER TRIMS AND BEADS ............................................................ 6
2.6 SEALANTS ............................................................................................ 6
3.0 EXECUTION ................................................................................................ 6
3.1 EXAMINATION ...................................................................................... 6

3.2 PREPARATION ..................................................................................... 7
3.3 KEY FORMATION ................................................................................. 7
3.4 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................... 7
3.5 GYPSUM PLASTER .............................................................................. 8
3.6 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT .................................................. 9
3.7 SPECIAL PROFILES AND GROOVES................................................. 9
3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING ........................................................... 9
3.9 ACCEPTANCE ...................................................................................... 9
3.10 PROJECT PARTICULARS.................................................................... 9
DIVISION 09 – Finishes
SECTION 09 20 00 – Plaster Works Page 1 of 9
SECTION 09 20 00 - PLASTER WORKS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Furnish and install plaster rendering as indicated on the drawings and specified.

1. Plan and conduct a pre-installation meeting at the project site prior to the
installation of any wall materials (including mock-ups). This meeting is to be
attended by the ENGINEER and the Contractor and the Technical Consultant in
case of ready mixed material or should a special plaster finish is required.
2. Mock-Up Installation: the Contractor is to provide a sample mock-up panel using
materials specified for final work. The panel must be constructed as per the
ENGINEER size and dimension requirements. Demonstrate the proposed range of
color, texture and workmanship to be expected in the completed work. Show a cut-
away in the panel exposing the weather barrier, metal lath and drainage weep of
the system on a perimeter edge of the panel. Obtain ENGINEER acceptance of
visual qualities of the sample panel. Maintain sample panel throughout the
construction process and dispose of when project is completed.
2. Inspections: Give sufficient notice so the Engineer may inspect significant stages
of work, including:
• Substrates prepared and ready for installation or application.
• Completed work before painting, tiling or other applied finishes.
3. Inspection shall take place under lighting conditions equivalent to actual installed
lighting, bright sunshine or low angle sunshine conditions, as appropriate.
4. Where installed finishes are subject to oblique viewing angles, inspection shall
include oblique viewing angles.

1. The standards referred herein, together with all appropriate references listed
within those Standards, shall be used within this Specification. The edition to be
used shall be that current at the date of this Specification, except that the latest
editions of standards may be used where no reduction in quality will result. Any
differences between their requirements and this Specification shall be submitted
to the Engineer for his ruling.
ASTM C 28 Gypsum Plasters
ASTM C 35 Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster
ASTM C 59 Gypsum Casting Plaster and Gypsum Molding Plaster
ASTM C 61 Gypsum Keene's Cement

ASTM C 91 Masonry Cement
ASTM C 150 Portland Cement
ASTM C 206 Finishing Hydrated Lime
ASTM C 472 Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum
Concrete
ASTM C 631 Bounding Compounds for Interior Plastering
ASTM C 842 Application of Interior Gypsum Plaster
ASTM C 897 Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement
ASTM C 926 Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster
ASTM C 932 Surface-Applied Bonding Agents for Exterior Plastering
ASTM C 1328 Specification for Plastic (Stucco) Cement
ASTM E 1042 Acoustically Absorptive Materials Applied by Trowel or Spray
4. Uniform Building Code - Latest Edition, including local amendments as applicable.
5. ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. - Evaluation Report Number ER-4617
6. Fire Resistance design Manual for Gypsum Systems 14th Edition, Gypsum
Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Product data for each component of the plaster system.
a. Provide the following submittals for acceptance. First submittals and re-
submittals shall be complete and in the required form. Re-submittals shall
include requested corrections and shall respond to previous comments. Each
sheet that is revised shall bear a revision date, number and revised detail
included. Failure of a submittal to be complete, in the proper form,
responsive to comments and identifying revisions shall, at the reviewer’s
discretion, be cause for disapproval and return of document without review,
with the Contractor bearing full responsibility for any resultant delay. Failure
to review comments or to note a noncompliance with plans and specifications
shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligation to comply. Allow sufficient
time for preparation and processing of submittals and re-submittals to avoid
conflicts with schedule.
b. Submit product data and specifications for any materials, or fabrication
techniques used in the plaster system work. Include instructions and or
recommendations for installation and maintenance. Include certified test
reports showing compliance with requirements where test methods are
indicated.
c. Samples of the following components to be submitted for approval
• Sand for facework render: One kilogram in clear durable plastic
container, properly labeled, including grading and test report.
• Colored render, properly labeled to indicated concentration of
pigmentation.
2. Samples for verification in form of 1-meter-square panels for each finish, color and
texture specified. Prepare samples using same tools and techniques intended for
actual work.
3. Submit details of proposed control joint locations and profiles.
4. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Section to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience in supplying plaster materials.
Include a list of completed projects with project names, addresses and any other
information specified.
5. Contractor proficiency to apply the plaster system using ready-mixed components
is to be certified by the manufacturer.
1.5 WARRANTY
1. The Contractor shall and does hereby warrant and guaranty that all work executed
under this Contract be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period
of five (5) years from the date of final acceptance of the project by the Client,
except certain specific items of work, materials and equipment requiring a warranty
for a greater period of time is specified.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

2. Delivery and Storage of Material: Except for sand and water, deliver materials to
the site in sealed containers or bags fully identified with the manufacturer’s name,
brand and type.
3. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated space, under cover and of the ground. Do
not allow liquids to freeze.

1. Contractor must examine surfaces to receive the plaster system. Do not proceed
with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable
manner not detrimental to the plaster system.
2. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during installation of the plaster system.
3. The plaster system must be applied at an ambient air temperature from 5 degrees
C to 43 degrees.
4. Maintain temperature for a minimum of 24 hours after application to allow proper
curing.
5. Do not apply to frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

1. Provide a system that conforms to the fire code .
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MIXING AND MIX LIFE:

1. Sand: to meet ASTM C 897-96.
2. Water: Potable and free from substances harmful to plaster.

3. Cement: as per approved by the ENGINEER
4. Mix materials in accordance with accepted industry practice and relevant
Standards.
5. Use clean tools and equipment for mixing. Use mechanical machine mixing where
practicable. Do not mix directly on floors or substrates. Thoroughly blend dry
materials before adding water and continue mixing to uniform consistency.
6. Use mixes within 30 minutes after adding water or ingredients containing water.
Complete the placing and finishing of each installation area in one complete
operation. Discard mixes not used within 30 minutes, or which begin to stiffen. Do
not re-work mixes which begin to stiffen.
7. Do not carry out work during periods of excessively hot or cold temperatures, or in
strong wind conditions.
2.2 CURING:
1. Cure installed work by suitable methods to prevent premature drying, cracking or
crazing due to drying shrinkage, and ensure the correct adhesion of subsequent
applied finishes.
2. Curing period shall be not less than 7 days with a further 14 days air drying before
subsequent applied work.
3. Suitable methods may include polythene sheet vapour barrier, lapped and sealed.
Areas which are not protected by vapour barrier shall be kept continuously damp.
2.3 SPRAYED PLASTER

1. Generally: Sprayed plaster system for precast ceiling applications shall be an
acrylic based ready-to-use compound of inert filler materials suitable for the
location and the intended function. The system shall be used all in accordance with
the Product Information and relevant Standards.
2. First base coat layer shall be applied to level the surface and to rectify
irregularities. Level using a steel float
3. Second base coat layer if required is also to be levelled using a steel float
4. If required a first finish coat layer will again levelled with a steel float and final finish
coat left as a fine spray texture finish to match the control sample.
5. Contractor is to submit all product details and samples for approval
2.4 STRUCTURAL INTERFACES:

1. White colored fiberglass mesh is to be bonded into the base coat layer or layers to
reinforce the joints between substrate materials all as per product information and
relevant standards.
2.5 PLASTER TRIMS AND BEADS

1. Generally: Plaster trims and beads, including corner beads, stopping beads and
shadow-line reveals, shall be corrosion resistant products, suitable for the location
and the intended function, in accordance with the Product Information and relevant
Standards.
2. Beads and trims shall be in continuous lengths without intermediate joins. Where
the length of the application exceeds the longest standard length construct
accurately aligned butt joints.
3. Casing beads shall be not visible in finished work.
4. Plastic items shall not be used, unless required for locations subject to abnormal
corrosion.
5. Corrosive areas: Beads and trims for areas subject to abnormal corrosion shall be
durable PVC types. Submit Product Information and Control Samples, if directed.
6. Reinforcing Lath: Expanded self-furring metal lath to be approved by the
ENGINEER.
7. Plaster Accessories: Coordinate depth of accessories with the thickness and
number of coats required. All trims must be either from aluminum and/or
galvanized metal and/or stainless steel as required by the ENGINEER.
2.6 SEALANTS
1. Provide system manufacturer’s recommended low modulus elastomeric sealant
that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials. And
to be approved by the ENGINEER.
2. Sealant color shall be custom Color to match the plaster System finish coating on
the adjacent surfaces, and to be approved by the ENGINEER.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1. All work shall be performed by skilled workmen, especially trained and
experienced in this type of work. If the Contractor chooses to sub-contract the
installation of work, the proposed sub-contractors qualifications shall be approved
in advance by the ENGINEER and Contractor
2. Bench marks for elevation and building line-offset marks for alignment shall be
established on each floor level by the Contractor, who shall be responsible for their
accuracy.
3. After lines and grades have been established, and before beginning installation in
any area, the Contractor shall examine all parts of the structure on which the wall
is to be placed in that area. Should any conditions be found which, in his opinion
will prevent the proper execution of his work, he shall report such condition in
writing to the ENGINEER.
4. Installation work shall not proceed in that area until such conditions are corrected
or adjusted to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from
application of systems. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to
prevent spattering of exterior finish coatings on other work.
2. Protect system, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement
weather during installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behind system and
deterioration of substrates.
3.3 KEY FORMATION

1. Make a suitable mechanical 'key' by appropriate procedures to ensure adhesion of
render.
2. Procedures may include a combination of bonding compounds, scabbling, the
fixing suitable non-corrosive expanded metal lath, fibreglass mesh, approved
bonding compounds, or a 'dash' coat.
3. Forcibly apply one or more dash coats. Dash coat shall not exceed 3 - 5 mm
thickness.
4. Indicative mix proportions shall be:
a. Dash coat: 1 part cement / 2 parts coarse sand.
5. Rake out mortar joints in masonry substrates.
6. Remove applied coatings and paint to previously painted surfaces.
7. Cover chases with continuous expanded metal lath extending 75 mm each side of
chase and securely fixed with galvanized or stainless steel nails at 150 mm
centers. Completely fill chases before fixing lath.
8. Ensure that service pipes and conduits are sleeved to enable thermal movement.
9. Junctions in substrates: Cover junctions between different substrates with
continuous expanded metal lath or fibreglass mesh reinforcement before applying
first coat. Extend lath 150 mm each side of joint and securely fix. Metal lath to be
fixed with galvanized or stainless steel nails at 300 mm centres. Fibreglass mesh
to be continuously fixed on plaster/render dabs
10. Mesh reinforcement: Where required, include suitable mesh reinforcement fixed to
substrate at min.150mm centres
11. Ensure that substrates are not excessively wet
12. High strength concrete: Where render is applied to high strength concrete
substrates take additional precautions to verify precedures to ensure adhesion to
concrete substrates and prevent damage to the concrete.
a. High strength concrete shall be concrete with a design strength in excess of
40 Mpa.
b. Obtain concrete records and verify locations of high strength concrete, and
verify procedures before commencing.
3.4 INSTALLATION
1. Render shall be made with cement, sand and water, and suitable admixtures in
2. Nominal thickness of each coat render shall be 12mm, 10-15 mm adjusted to site
conditions. Where required, include additional coats to required overall thickness.
3. Indicative mix proportions for render generally shall be:
a. For concrete: 1 cement / 3-4 sand.
b. For clay brick: 4 cement / 1 lime / 16 sand.
c. For concrete block: 1 cement / 6 sand.
4. Sand for plaster shall be low clay content to ensure paint adhesion.
5. Mixes containing cement and sand only may include additional lime up to 25% of
the cement content (but not as a substitute for the cement) to improve workability.
6. Each successive render coat shall be weaker in cement content than the substrate
or previous coat.
7. For waterproof render, include suitable admixtures. Submit details.
8. Finished render shall be flat, even, hard and straight within required tolerances,
free from cracks, stains and other defects. Complete render to each installation
area in one operation. For large areas, unavoidable breaks shall be invisible in the
finished work. Apply each successive coat while the previous coat is still fresh.
Protect installed work to prevent rapid drying or damage from following
construction activities.
a. Include render to:
• Walls generally from floor level or from top of skirting, to ceiling.
• Recesses, jambs, returns and insides of cupboards.
• Concrete stair soffits.
9. Trimming of edges and corners:
a. Finish render straight around openings for doors and openings using suitable
stopping beads.
b. Finish outside corners pencil round, with proprietary corner beads. Install
metal corner guards to external vertical corners of walls and columns where
subject to damage.
10. Where one coat application is intended, but the required thickness exceeds
limit for one coat, or there is excessive variation in the substrate condition:
a. Carry out the work in two coats with a base coat and setting coat.
b. Apply the setting coat while the first base coat is dry but still green. Before
applying the setting coat, scratch the base coat to provide a suitable key,
sweep down and dampen to ensure correct suction
11. Plaster trims: must be installed prior to the application of the metal lath.
3.5 GYPSUM PLASTER:

1. Gypsum plaster shall be made with gypsum, lime and water in accordance with the
relevant Standards.
2. Indicative mix proportions (hard plaster) shall be:
a. Gypsum plaster:
• Undercoat: 2 part gypsum plaster / 5 parts sand.
• Setting coat (4 mm maximum): 3 parts gypsum plaster / 1 part lime.
• White-set plaster: 3 parts gypsum plaster / 1 part lime putty.
b. Set plaster:
• Undercoat: 1 part cement / 1 part lime putty / 6 parts sand.
• Setting coat (two / three coats): 1 part lime putty / 1 part gypsum
plaster.
3. Protect installed work to prevent rapid drying or damage from following
construction activities.
4. Make lime putty and sand mix 24 hours before use. Prevent from drying out.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT

1. Prepare joints and apply sealant, of type and at locations indicated, to provide
weather tight joints.
2. Construct additional control joints around door frames, and at junctions between
different substrates, and other locations where local differential movement may
cause cracking or damage to the plaster
3.7 SPECIAL PROFILES AND GROOVES

1. Construct decorative profiles and (non-movement) joints where indicated.
2. Adjust thickness of render to ensure that substrate is fully covered.
3. Construct grooves and profiles with approved strips or templates machined to
required profile.
4. Ensure expressed profiles are straight and true.
3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

1. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove
protective coatings from window and door frames and any other surfaces outside
areas indicated to receive protective coating
2. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a acceptable manner that
ensures system’s being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion
3.9 ACCEPTANCE.
1. Installed materials which are damaged, or which in the opinion of the ENGINEER
do not conform to the specification requirements, shall be removed and replaced
with acceptable material at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Submit a User’s Manual for the work of this trade with records and details of
materials used and sources of supply, cleaning and repair procedures.
3.10 PROJECT PARTICULARS:
1. Cement render: Unless otherwise indicated, all cement render work shall be
finished with Fine sand texture.
2. Tooled joints: Unless otherwise indicated, tooled joints to plaster shall be profiled
to 'V', nominal 5 mm wide x 5 mm deep.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, spacing of tooled joints shall match control joints in
masonry and structural grid but not to exceed nominal 6 meters.
4. Thickness: Unless otherwise indicated:
• internal plaster shall be nominal 15mm thick
• External render shall be nominal 18mm thick
• Spray plaster finish coat shall be max 3mm thick
5. The naming of proprietary products does not reduce or modify the Contractor’s
responsibility to comply with the Contract Documents and warrant the work
6. Plaster for walls shall be cement render and sprayed plaster may be used for
ceilings.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 2

2.0 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE ....................................................................................... 2
2.1 Cement........................................................................................................................... 2
2.2 Color Pigments .............................................................................................................. 2
2.3 Sand (Fine Aggregate)................................................................................................... 2
2.4 Water.............................................................................................................................. 2
2.5 Grout .............................................................................................................................. 2
2.6 Adhesive ........................................................................................................................ 3
2.7 Ceramic Floor Tiles ........................................................................................................ 3
2.8 Glazed Wall Tiles ........................................................................................................... 3
2.9 Marble or Granite Slabs ................................................................................................. 3
2.10 Stone Work .................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 WORKMANSHIP ..................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 Ceramic Floor Tiles ........................................................................................................ 4
3.2 Glazed Wall Tiles - Fixing with Adhesive ....................................................................... 5
3.3 Glazed Wall Tiles - Fixing with Cement:Sand Mortar .................................................... 6
3.4 Marble or Granite Slabs ................................................................................................. 6
3.5 Stone Work .................................................................................................................... 7
4.0 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................... 8
5.0 PROTECTION .......................................................................................................................... 8
SECTION 09 30 00 –Tiling Page 1 of 8
SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING
1.0 GENERAL
The Contractor shall perform all attendance upon other trades and protect all works
specified under this Section from damage during subsequent operations, make good any
defects, clean throughout and leave all works in a perfect condition to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
All materials and manufactured items that are liable to damage shall be delivered in the
original package, containers, etc. bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand,
and shall be carefully loaded, transported, unloaded, stored in an approved manner,
protected from damage and exposure to weather or dampness during transit and after
delivery to the Site.
Damaged materials and manufactured items shall not be used in the works specified
under this Section. Any materials and manufactured items damaged during and after
bedding or setting in position shall be removed and replaced by and at the Contractor's
expense.
Although recommended sizes and thicknesses of tiles, slips and slabs will be indicated on
the Drawings, the final choice of size colour and thickness shall be decided by the
Engineer's Representative at Site.
2.0 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE
2.1 Cement
Cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement to BS 12. White (non stain)

cement shall conform to the same specification standards.
2.2 Color Pigments
Color pigments shall conform to B.S. 1014.
2.3 Sand (Fine Aggregate)
Sand (Fine Aggregate) for use in Tile and Slab finishes shall be as
specified under Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2.4 Water
Water shall be as specified under "Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place

Concrete".
2.5 Grout
Grout for tiling work shall be obtained from a manufacturer approved by

the Engineer.
2.6 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be a suitable cement based adhesive complying with BS

5980:1980, from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
2.7 Ceramic Floor Tiles
Ceramic floor tiles shall be matt finish, vitrified plain clay tiles
manufactured in accordance with BS 6431. Skirting shall be coved edge
type 100 mm high. Acid resistant tiles shall be used where specified. Tile
pattern and color shall be to the Engineer's approval.
2.8 Glazed Wall Tiles
Glazed wall tiles shall conform to the requirements of BS 6431 and the
size shall be as shown on the schedule of finishes or the Drawings and of
an approved pattern and color. Single edge and double edge rounded
tiles, coves and corner pieces shall be of the same quality, color, and
finish.
2.9 Marble or Granite Slabs
Marble or granite slabs for flooring, skirting, treads, risers, door

thresholds, column and wall cladding shall be first quality, uniform in color
and texture, free from voids, earth veins and lamination or structural
weakness and of an approved texture and color. The pattern, dimensions
and thicknesses of marble or granite slabs shall be as shown on the
Drawings, or as stated in the Bills of Quantities. Samples of marble or
granite slabs shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
order.
Metal anchorage consisting of cramps, bolts, dowels, etc. shall be of

approved proprietary make from stainless steel or phosphor bronze.
2.10 Stone Work
These specifications cover stone work facing intended to be used for;

external walls, required for the Works in accordance with the Drawings,
Bills of Quantities and as directed in writing by the Engineer.
Stone facing to walls shall be durable, local stone, sawed finish color &
source to be approved by the Engineer and a quality suitable to ensure
permanence in the structure. It shall be even grained, free from cracks,
seams, holes, shakes, objectionable irregularities of color, impurities,
structural weaknesses and other defects that would tend to increase
unduly the deteriorations from natural causes.
All stones for facing shall be selected well in advance of the time
required. Samples of stone materials and dressing shall be submitted for
the Engineer's approval 30 days before delivery of any such material to

Site.
Mortar for all masonry shall consist of slaked lime putty or dry hydrated
lime and cement and sand mixed in the following proportions. The sand
and lime being mixed first and cement then added:
1. part cement
2. parts lime or lime putty
3. parts of fine crushed stone sand
Beds and joints shall be sufficiently bush-hammer dressed for an

approximate depth of 10 mm from the face of the stone at the edge to
provide regular course of different heights and to ensure stones fit
reasonably close together when built.
The width of horizontal beds shall be as shown on Drawings whereas the

vertical joints shall be as inconspicuous as possible and shall not exceed
3 mm in width.
3.0 WORKMANSHIP
3.1 Ceramic Floor Tiles
Ceramic floor tiling shall be carried out in compliance with BS 5385:Part

3:1989 and/or BS 8000:Section 11.1 :1989 as applicable and as directed
by the Engineer.
The overall thickness of tiles, mortar and screed shall be maximum of 80

mm.
Bedding shall consist of cement:sand mortar 1:3 of a stiff plastic

consistency, spread, compacted and leveled to a thickness of 9-10 mm.
Water content of mortar must be limited to prevent formation of surface
water when mortar is compacted and surface water which does occur
must be allowed to dry. Sufficient mortar for 2-3 hours work maximum
shall be laid at any one time.
Tiles shall be dipped in water and surface water allowed to drain off. The
back of the tiles shall be buttered with neat cement/water mix (or cement
based adhesive), and the tiles laid on bedding and tapped down to form a
level surface. All joints shall be as close as possible and shall in no case
exceed half (0.5) mm in width on face for areas less than ten (10) square
meters and one (1) mm for areas over ten (10) square meters.
Tiles shall be left for at least twelve (12) hours before joints are grouted.
White or tinted cement and water to 1:1 mix of paste consistency shall be
worked into the joints until flush with face of tiles.
Acid resistant tiles shall be grouted in a suitable acid-resistant grout to

the Engineer's approval.
The surplus grout from the floor surface shall be gently wiped with fine
sand. Sawdust shall not be used.
Walking on tiles shall not be allowed for five (5) days after laying.
Perimeter movement joints shall be provided to the full depth of finish,

bedding and screed in all tiled floors.
3.2 Glazed Wall Tiles - Fixing with Adhesive
Wall tiling shall be carried out in compliance with BS 5385:Part 1: 1976

for Internal work and BS 5385: Part 2: 1976 for External work and/or BS
8000: Section 11.1 : 1989, as applicable and as directed by the Engineer.
The background for tiling shall be suitably prepared free from oil, grease,
loose or friable materials and shall provide an adequate key for bedding.
The maximum deviation of background shall not exceed 3 mm when

measured under a two meter straight edge.
Tiling work shall be carefully set out prior to starting to minimize the
amount of tile cutting and to ensure alignment of vertical and horizontal
joints.
Tiles shall be dry when fixed, using adhesive, mixed and used strictly in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and within the stated
working time of the adhesive. The manufacturer's recommendations for
safe handling and ventilation of working area shall be carefully followed.
Adhesive shall be applied as a floated coat to a thickness of 5 to 6 mm.

Tiles shall be firmly pressed into position within the stated working time of
the adhesive.
Tiles and fittings shall be set in adhesive to true vertical face with
continuous horizontal and vertical joints. Joints shall be straight, level,
perpendicular and of even width not exceeding 1.5 mm. The vertical
joints shall be maintained plumb for the entire true level and plane by
uniformly applied pressure under a straight edge of a rubber faced block.
Misfits as well as damaged or defective tiles shall be removed and
replaced at the Contractor's own expense.
Special tile fittings shall be located as shown on detail drawings and as

directed by the Engineer.
Bedding shall be allowed to set before grouting to avoid disturbance to

tiles. Grout shall be applied in matching color according to manufacturer's
written instructions and worked in until joints are thoroughly filled flush
with the finished face of joint. Surplus grout shall be removed with a
damp cloth and joints tooled to a smooth finish. Acid resistant tiles shall
be grouted with a suitable acid resistant grout to the Engineer's approval.
Immediately after the grouting has set, tiled surface shall be given a
protective coat of non-corrosive soap or other approved method of
protection and joints shall be cured for 72 hours.
Wall tiling operations shall not be started until the floor tiling in the same
area has been completed.
3.3 Glazed Wall Tiles - Fixing with Cement:Sand Mortar
Wall tiling shall be carried out in compliance with BS 5385:Part 1:1976 for
Internal work and BS 5385:Part 2:1976 for External work and/or BS
8000:Section 11.1 :1989, as applicable and as directed by the Engineer.
Cement and sand mortar (1:4) ten (10) mm. thick shall be laid as base for
wall tiling. The surface of the mortar so laid shall be scratched in an
approved manner when nearly set, to form key and shall be cured for five
(5) days before tiling starts. The surface shall be well wetted before the
actual tiling operation is commenced.
Tiles and fittings shall be set in cement and sand mortar (1:4) mix, 6 mm.
thick to a true vertical face with continuous horizontal and vertical joints.
Joints shall be straight, level, perpendicular and of even width not
exceeding 1.5 mm. The vertical joints shall be maintained plumb for the
entire true level and plane by uniformly applied pressure under a straight
edge of a rubber-faced block. Misfits as well as damaged or defective
tiles shall be removed and replaced by and at the Contractor's expense.
The external and internal angles and side edges of glazed wall tiling shall
be formed with angle beads whereas top edges of tiles, shall be formed
with rounded edge tiles. Joints shall match the general tiling and special
fittings shall be used.
Joints in glazed wall tiles and fittings, after the edges of tiles have been
thoroughly wet, shall be grouted with a plastic mix of neat white or
coloured cement immediately after a suitable area of tile has been laid.
The joints shall be tooled slightly concave and the excess mortar shall be
cut off and wiped off with a damp cloth from the face of tile, before it sets
hard.
Interstices or depressions found in the mortar joints after the grout has
been cleaned from the surface shall be roughened at once and filled to
the spring line of the cushion edge before the mortar begins to harden.
Immediately after the grout has had its initial set glazed wall tile surfaces
shall be given a protective coat of a non corrosive soap or other
approved method of protection and joints cured for 72 hours.
Wall tiles operations in spaces requiring floor tiles shall not be started
until the floor tiles installation had been completed.
3.4 Marble or Granite Slabs
Marble or granite floor slabs shall be laid on a bed of cement:sand mortar

1:3 mix. The back of the slab shall be properly sealed to ensure good
bonding between the slab and mortar.
All slabs shall be tight butt jointed. Joints shall be thoroughly grouted with
matching colored cement and wiped clean before setting hard.
All exposed faces and edges of marble or granite shall be polished

smooth free from scratches or other defects.
Marble or Granite wall cladding shall be fixed in accordance with BS

8298:1989 and/or BS 8000:Section 11-2:1990 as applicable and as
directed by the Engineer. Cladding shall be fixed to solid background by
mechanical means such as cramps, dowels and similar fixings in
accordance with the working drawings. The cladding shall be supported
at its lower edge and securely tied back at the top. The thickness of the
material behind the cramp should be 20 mm. The fixing cramps shall be
adequately inset in to the supporting background, preferably with
undercut holes and secured in place with 1:3 cement/sand or
epoxy/polyester resin mortar dabs. The back surface of the cladding shall
be coated with an approved quality sealant.
Cladding shall be butt jointed with maximum 3 mm gaps.
The length and height dimensions of individual slabs shall be worked to

within plus or minus 1 mm from those specified. Thickness shall be within
3 mm from that specified. For wall cladding, all block work, concrete or
other backing must be formed so as to allow a minimum of 20 mm
clearance between the backing and the back of the cladding.
Cramp holes and mortises shall be carefully drilled or cut to avoid

stunning or fracture of the material adjacent to the hole or mortise.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and fixing protection

against weather or damage and staining by other trades. Particular care
must be taken against staining from timber, oil, wet straw, washings from
steel work or scaffolding or from any other injurious substances. On
completion of adjacent building operations the completed marble work
shall be cleaned down and any defects in the pointing and polishing shall
be rectified.
The Contractor shall prepare fully dimensioned shop drawings from

details shown on working drawings supplied by the Engineer and from
site survey. Key numbers of each slab shall be shown, together with
details of metal anchorages. No marble or granite shall be worked until
these drawings are approved by the Engineer.
3.5 Stone Work
Walls shall be carried up in a uniform manner no one portion being

allowed to rise more than four courses above another at one time and
any such rising shall be regularly stepped for bonding. The total thickness
of stone facing and mortar backing shall be as shown on Drawings.
All stone shall be hand placed. Courses shall be bedded solidly with full
mortar beds and joints fully squeezed out. All stones shall be cleaned
and thoroughly wetted before setting.
To ensure even and regular width of beds and joints when setting stones
the Contractor shall use hardwood wedges to ensure close regular fitting
between beds and joints.
All stones shall be solidly bedded and jointed in mortar.
The mortar backing shall be worked into cervices at the back and around
every stone in such a manner to eliminate all voids and bond perfectly
with the facing stone of form a homogeneous solid mass.
Proper non corrosive anchoring to the backing wall in to be ensured

through the use of wire mesh are forced to the backing wall or any other
approved anchoring.
Particular care shall be taken during tamping to ensure that facing stones
are not displaced from their correct positions.
At completion of masonry walls the horizontal joints of all stone faced

walls shall be racked out to a depth of 10 mm cleaned wetted and
pointed with mortar composed of 1 part white cement and 2 parts very
fine crushed stone sand tinted to the color selected by the Supervising
Engineer.
The Contractor when executing pointing shall ensure that the mortar is
pressed tight into the joints by means of approved tools for pointing.
Care shall be exercised to avoid spreading mortar in the faces of the

stones.
The Contractor shall set up samples for the Engineer's approval before
executing any pointing.
4.0 CLEANING
1. General: In addition to the provisions of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS, do the following:
1. Remove mortar and grout prior to hardening during progress of work.
2. Clean surfaces thoroughly after grouting and pointing have set sufficiently;
remove all cement, dust and other foreign matter with plain water or mild alkaline cleaner.
Sandblasting of exposed surfaces is prohibited.
3. Cleaning with a solution not stronger than 10 percent muriatic acid to 90
percent water permitted only on unglazed tile; thoroughly wash afterwards with clean water.
Completely protect hardware and fittings metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous items from acid
and fumes.
4. Cleaning shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
5.0 PROTECTION
1. General: Completed tiling works especially the flooring must be properly
protected until the project handing over. Method of protection shall be subject to
the Engineer’s approval.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 50 00 - CEILINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................... 2
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK .................................................................... 2

1.2 REFERENCE......................................................................................... 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................ 3
1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE .......................................................................... 4
1.7 WARRANTY .......................................................................................... 4
2.0 PRODUCTS................................................................................................. 5
2.1 MATERIALS .......................................................................................... 5

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM ....................................................................... 5
2.3 PLASTER BOARDS .............................................................................. 5
2.4 PLASTER TRIMS AND BEADS ............................................................ 6
2.5 LAY-IN CEILING TILE ........................................................................... 6
2.6 VISIBLE GRIDS ..................................................................................... 6
2.7 CEILING/ WALL JUNCTIONS ............................................................... 6
2.8 BULKHEADS AND SPECIAL SHAPES ................................................ 7
2.9 SOFFIT LINING ..................................................................................... 7
2.10 INSULATION TO CEILINGS ................................................................ 7
2.11 INSULATION TO UNDERSIDE CONCRETE ROOF SLABS ............... 8
3.0 EXECUTION ................................................................................................ 9
3.1 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................... 9

3.2 COORDINATED INSTALLATION ......................................................... 9
3.3 SHEET INSTALLATION ........................................................................ 9
3.4 CEILING-TILE INSTALLATION ............................................................. 10
3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING .......................................................... 11
3.7 PROJECT PARTICULARS.................................................................... 11
SECTION 09 50 00 – Ceilings Page 1 of 11
SECTION 09 50 00 - CEILINGS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1. Provide sheet ceiling and lay-in ceiling-tile systems, including suspension from
base-structure, furring, fixings, insulation, trims, bulkheads, pelmets and coffers,
coordination with services, finishing and trims.
1.2 REFERENCES
between their requirements and this Specification shall be submitted to the
Engineer for his ruling.
ASTM A 167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plates,
Sheet and Strip
ASTM A 366/A/M Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality
ASTM A 580/A/M Stainless Steel Wire
ASTM A 641/A/M Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
ASTM A 653/A/M Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B 633 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel
ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the
Reverberation Room Method
ASTM C 635 Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings
ASTM C 636 Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Tile and Lay-In Panels
ASTM C 834 Latex Sealants
ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
ASTM E 580 Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-In Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic
Restraint
ASTM E 795 Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests
ASTM E 1264 Acoustical Ceiling Products
ASTM E 1414 Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a
Common Ceiling Plenum
ASTM E 1477 Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of

Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers
4. U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
TI 809-04 Seismic Design for Buildings
5. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL Fire Resist Dir (1999) Fire Resistance Directory (2 Vol.)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit shop drawings including:
a. Complete layout
b. Indicate types and locations of access-hatches
c. Indicate acoustic construction and indicate types and locations of acoustic
mounts
d. Submit additional shop drawings for any required details if not indicated in
standard details
2. Submit manufacturer's standard construction details indicating relevant selections.
3. Submit product data including: Methods of fixing, height adjustment, retaining and
removing ceiling-tiles
4. Submit at least one sample of each specified size, type, and color.
5. Submit computations for non-standard anchorage spacing conditions, and the
effects of air pressure, uplift or any other abnormal ambient conditions that may
affect the functionality of the system.
6. Maintenance Materials to be submitted at the completion of the project. At least one
(1) percent of the total amount of each kind and each size installed.

1. Installation of suspended ceiling system shall be by applicators approved by ceiling
manufacturer.
2. Do not install acoustical materials until proper temperature and humidity conditions
as recommended by manufacturer can be maintained.
3. Inspections: Give sufficient notice so the ENGINEER may inspect significant stages
of work, including:
a. Set-out of work before commencing installation.
b. First completed example before proceeding with balance of work.
c. Work to be covered over or concealed before covering.
d. Inspection shall take place under lighting conditions equivalent to actual
appropriate.
e. Where installed finishes are subject to oblique viewing angles, inspection shall
include oblique viewing angles.
4. Include samples for:
a. Control Samples of ceiling finishes sufficient to show range of variations.
b. Suspension elements, connections and adjustments.

c. Visible accessories and grid profiles.
d. Example of site cut edges and margins.
5. Submit the first completed example of each type of installed work and finish to
establish the required standard before proceeding with the remainder of work (not
less than 10 m2).
6. If directed, include access-hatches and one of each services fitting including light
fittings, diffusers and detectors.
7. Inspection plan shall include the following hold points:
a. Set-out of ceiling grid coordinated with services outlets and lighting
b. First completed example of installed work on-site.
1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE

1. Storage and Protection of Materials, Equipment and Fixtures: Do not store or install
materials in the building until all glazing has been completed, all exterior openings
have been closed in, all activities that contribute excessive moisture have been
stabilized, and until relative humidity is within the limits recommended by the
acoustical material manufacturer.
2. Retain temperature at a uniform minimum of 60 degrees F (16 degrees C) before,
during and after installation.

1. Ceiling systems shall remain stable without deflection, distortion, looseness or
rattling under normal conditions of use and slamming of doors, in accordance with
2. Ceiling systems shall accommodate:
a. A load equivalent to 0.8x the dead load of the ceiling plus 2x the upward wind
load without the failure or displacement of any component.
b. In-service live and dead loads (including fixtures such as light fittings and
diffusers) without failure and without deforming beyond the required tolerances.
c. Movements caused by temperature and humidity change.
3. Wind loads: The installed work shall accommodate wind funnelling effects and
internal air pressures and circulation due to opening of windows and balcony doors
or/and the circulation of air currents form within the building in ordinary use or for
maintenance purposes.
4. Proprietary ceiling products shall have humidity resistance not less the RH = 90
5. Non-metallic back surfaces of suspended ceiling tiles shall be sealed with foil
6. Acoustic construction may include acoustic insulation blanket in ceiling space.
7. Testing of the system shall be according to the listed references
1.7 WARRANTY
1. Provide an approved warranty from Practical Completion for a warranty period of 5-
years.
2. The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the following:
a. Structural integrity.
b. Correct selection of fire-resistant, acoustic-rated and moisture-resistant
systems.
c. Long term deflection of ceiling-tiles or suspension due to humidity or other
causes.
d. Dislodgement or displacement due to air pressure up-lift within the design load
range.
e. Staining or discoloration.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Ceilings shall be complete proprietary systems, selected for the conditions and
performance requirements and installed in accordance with the Product Information
2. Submit Product Information and Control Samples.
3. Ceilings may include fire-resistant, moisture-resistant and acoustic-rated
construction where required.
4. Proprietary ceiling products shall have humidity resistance not less the RH = 90.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

1. Ceiling suspension system from base-structure shall be suitable products for the
ceiling type, suitable for the location and the intended function, in accordance with
2. Submit Product Information including method of height adjustment and locking off.
Include details of anchorages, hangers, channels, fixings and finishes.
3. Anchorages and hangers shall have holding power at least 3x the design load.
4. Failure of any one hanger shall not cause progressive failure.
5. Hanger spacing shall not exceed 1200 mm, unless otherwise indicated or approved.
6. Provide additional support to grids and ceilings that carry services outlets and
equipment.
7. Provide suitable bracing to prevent horizontal displacement.
8. Provide suitable down-strutting and threaded hanger rods to prevent uplift, where
required.
9. Provide manufacturers hold-down clips to fit system furnished.
10. For purpose of height adjustment:
a. Unless otherwise indicated, hangers shall be friction clip hangers.
b. Where indicated and where required to resist uplift, hangers shall be threaded
for connection and height adjustment.
2.3 PLASTER BOARDS

1. Fixings for plasterboard shall be self-drilling screws and nails selected for the sheet
thickness and framing, and not less than Corrosion Class 2, Type 1 or Type 2 in
2. Plaster Boards at the wet area shall be water resistant plaster board.
2.4 PLASTER TRIMS AND BEADS

1. Plaster trims and beads, including corner beads, stopping beads and shadow-line
reveals, shall be corrosion resistant products, suitable for the location and the
intended function, in accordance with the Product Information and relevant
Standards.
2. Beads and trims shall be in continuous lengths without intermediate joins. Where
the length of the application exceeds the longest standard length construct
accurately aligned butt joints.
3. Casing beads shall be not visible in finished work.
4. Plastic items shall not be used except where required for locations subject to
abnormal corrosion.
5. Construct control joints to plaster sheeting with stopping beads both sides, and fill
with a suitable elastomeric sealant.
6. Beads and trims for areas subject to abnormal corrosion shall be durable PVC
types.
7. Submit Product Information and Control Samples, if directed.
2.5 LAY-IN CEILING TILE

1. Lay-in ceiling-tiles shall be approved proprietary products, pre-finished to match
Control Samples, suitable for the location and the intended function, in accordance
with the Product Information and relevant Standards.
2. Submit Product Information and Control Samples.
2.6 VISIBLE GRIDS

1. Visible grids shall support ceiling-tiles continuously on all edges and give additional
support to ceiling-tiles that carry services loads including light fittings, air diffusers
and fire detectors.
2. Visible grids shall enable replacement or re-location of ceiling-tiles and service
outlets, and shall be de-mountable.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, color of visible grids shall match adjacent ceiling-tiles.
2.7 CEILING / WALL JUNCTIONS (INCLUDING CORNICES)

1. Ceiling / wall junctions shall be flush, smooth and straight. Verify types and
locations before commencing
2. Shadow-line construction shall be nominal 10 mm, with proprietary shadow-line
accessories (Rondo P50, or equivalent)
3. Square-set construction shall be finished square and perpendicular

4. Cornice sections shall be suitable proprietary plaster profiles to match Control
Samples, suitable for the location and the intended function, in accordance with
5. Use long lengths and avoid joins unless cornice length exceeds manufacturer’s
standard lengths. Corners shall be scribed or mitred to a tight hair-line fit with sharp
arrises.
6. Fix cornice with a suitable cornice cement.
7. Fix cornices with quick-setting plaster-based cornice adhesive and additional
concealed screw fixing as required.
2.8 BULKHEADS AND SPECIAL SHAPES

1. Construct bulkheads, pelmets, coffers and special shapes where required or
indicated.
2. Submit shop drawings and Control Samples if directed.
3. Special shapes may include sloping surfaces, curved surfaces and edges, irregular
openings and skylight shaft linings.
4. Special shapes shall be constructed out of plasterboard or plasterglass where
appropriate. Include additional integral framing, bracing, reinforcement and
suspension points to ensure stability and durability, and prevent sway or deflection
in any plane. I
5. Include stiffening to arrises to ensure even, straight lines and prevent long-term
damage or deformation.
6. Fabrication tolerances shall not exceed ± 2mm. Arrises shall be sharp, straight and
un-damaged.
7. Where practicable, special shapes shall be factory fabricated to largest practicable
lengths.
8. Make provision to control long-term surface cracking due to movement or deflection.
9. Ensure flush and continuous jointing to adjacent plasterboard surfaces without
visible jointing where required.
2.9 SOFFIT LINING

1. Construct external soffit linings to canopies, overhangs and elsewhere required.
Submit shop drawings for construction details, and computations if directed.
2. Soffit linings shall withstand wind-pressures and uplift forces.
3. Include suitable down-strutting to prevent sway and uplift.
4. Provide all required secondary framing and bracing. Hanger rods shall be threaded
rod type.
5. Soffit linings shall be of moisture-resistant materials and construction.
6. Metal suspension, framing and fixings shall be corrosion-resistant.
7. Unless otherwise indicated, soffit linings shall be compressed cement sheet (CFC)
not less than 6 mm thick.
2.10 INSULATION TO CEILINGS

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide insulation to the entire area of ceilings over
internal areas and walls.
2. Coordinate with the DRY-WALL / PLASTERBOARD and CLADDING Sections for
where required continuity.
2.11 INSULATION TO UNDERSIDE CONCRETE ROOF SLABS

1. Insulation to concrete soffits shall be approved products installed to the underside of
the concrete slab.
2. Verify types and location, R-value, density, thickness, and location of vapour
barriers before commencing.
3. Soffit insulation may include:
a. Sprayed insulation direct to concrete soffits.
b. Polystyrene sheet insulation with suitable bonding or fixings to concrete soffit.
c. Foil-backed fibrous insulation blanket though-fixed to concrete soffits with non-
corroding plugs.
4. Coordinate with adjacent SERVICES Sections.
5. Install insulation tight against adjacent work and perimeters.
6. Use fixing and bonding methods which prevent long term collapse or dislodgement.
7. Fixings shall be suitable non-corrosive fixings drilled and lugged to concrete soffits.
8. Fixings, bonding and adhesives shall be durable and resistant to substrate moisture
without failure or loss of adhesion.
9. Provide insulation to the entire area of the concrete soffits.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
1. Do not commence installation unless conditions and substrates are suitable
2. Install and finish work in accordance with Product Information, approved set-out and
relevant Standards.
3. Install ceilings level and to correct alignments, without looseness or rattling under
normal conditions.
4. Where services obstruct ceiling hangers, provide bridging and suspension on each
side of the services. Do not suspend ceiling from services (including ductwork)
unless indicated that service has been designed to support the ceiling load, and
approved.
5. Ceilings shall be completed before commencing floor finishes. Coordinate with
relevant trades.
6. Install plaster trims to complete the work, securely fixed, with even flush joints all
round.
7. Install insulation where required for acoustic treatment
8. Extend insulation over margins and edges with adjacent work, where required
9. Unless otherwise indicated, lay-in ceiling-tiles and visible metal ceiling grid
components shall be factory finished, and flush sheet ceilings shall be site painted
10. Ceiling components, including suspension systems, visible through joints and
services penetrations but not on the main ceiling plane shall be pre-finished or site
painted matt black
3.2 COORDINATED INSTALLATION

1. Coordinate with relevant services adjacent work.
2. Provide openings for, scribe and cut accurately around penetrations and services
outlets.
3. Finishes for services outlets and trims, shall be consistent in each installation area,
and match adjacent ceilings, unless otherwise approved.
4. Coordinate with the painting section.
5. Verify finishes to visible services outlets before commencing.
6. Where indicated, construct curtain recesses as part of the ceiling system, including
the provision of additional concealed framing for curtain track brackets. Coordinate
with curtains / blinds Section.
3.3 SHEET INSTALLATION

1. Install sheeting in accordance with the Product Information and relevant Standards.
2. Verify that substrates and framing are suitable and have the correct spacing and
tolerances before commencing.
3. Fire-resistant and acoustic-rated construction shall be identical to approved test
prototypes.
4. Include required fixings, adhesives, jointing, trims and accessories.
5. Coordinate with trades for later applied work for additional framing and
penetrations.
6. Coordinate services penetrations with relevant services Sections. Where
practicable, locate penetrations for light fittings and similar services away from
sheet edges and joints.
7. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp sheets. Do not force sheets into place.
8. Provide continuous framing to unsupported ends, edges, junctions and around
openings.
9. Make required control joints. Isolate sheeting from direct contact with base-structure
and structural framing.
10. Provide access-hatches where indicated or required for access to services.
11. Set out the sheeting with correct clearances and tolerances to minimize the number
of cut sheets and joints.
12. Stagger sheets generally and stagger sheets on opposite sides of framing.
13. Do not align sheet joints with edges of doors and other large openings.
14. Build-in progressively required flashings and baffles to control moisture.
15. Flushing:
a. Finish flush jointed work smooth and without visible shadows when viewed
under low incident light.
b. Finish exposed jointed work with straight, even joints and corner junctions.
c. Feathered flush jointing shall be not less than 250 mm wide.
d. Flushing tape shall be purpose made perforated, reinforced type embedded in
bedding cement and finished with topping cement. Gauze and self adhesive
tapes shall be not used.
16. Fix sheet to masonry, concrete and secondary steel framing, with suitable furring
and top-hat sections. Do not use adhesives unless approved before commencing.
17. Provide additional furring to support ends of sheets between main furring members
and leave ventilation gaps between cross members and main members.
3.4 CEILING-TILE INSTALLATION

1. Install ceiling-tiles in accordance with Product Information and relevant Standards.
2. Arrange patterned or textured ceiling-tiles to ensure consistent direction, pattern
and texture.
3. Align ceiling-tiles in adjacent visible areas to match.
4. Obtain approval of set-out of visible ceiling grid before commencing installation.
5. Unless otherwise indicated, commence set-out of visible ceiling grid from
centrelines of rectilinear areas to ensure equal margins on opposite sides.
6. For non-rectilinear rooms, prepare set-out shop drawings, if directed.
7. Where practicable, coordinate set-out of visible grid to ensure services outlets are
located in the middle of ceiling-tiles.
8. Support lay-in ceiling-tiles continuously and evenly on all edges, without gaps or air
leakage.
9. Handle ceiling-tiles carefully to prevent staining, marking and damage.

10. Where required to prevent uplift, provide wind clips.
11. Do not clip ceiling-tiles required for access.
12. Where non-standard shapes are required, cut ceiling-tiles or fabricate approved
matching ceiling-tiles.
13. Cut ceiling-tiles on line of pattern where practicable.
14. Ensure that cut edges are concealed or make-good to match factory manufactured
edges.
3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

1. Cleaning: Following erection, clean dirty or discolored surfaces.
2. Remove units which are damaged or incorrectly applied, and replace as approved
at Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 69 00 - RAISED (ACCESS) FLOORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL…………………………………………………………………………….... 2
1.1 Description …………………………………………………….…………….…. 2
1.2 Shop drawings and submittals …………………………………………….... 2
1.3 Fire safety …………………………………………………………………...….2
2.0 PRODUCTS…………………………………………………………………………….. 2
2.1 Panels…………………………………………………………………………….2
2.2 Pedestals …………………………………………………………………..…...3
2.3 Floor Covering …………………………………………………………………..4
2.4 Services Boxes ……………………………………………………………..….5
SECTION 09 69 00 – Access (Raised) Flooring Page 1 of 5
SECTION 09 69 00 - RAISED (ACCESS) FLOORING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Description
1. The raised floor system shall consist of a series of interchangeable floor panels fitted
together. The raised floor system shall provide ready access to an under floor space
for electrical conduit, pre-assembled cables, receptacle outlets, communication and
service lines and mechanical, shall form, when required, a pressurized air plenum.
1.2 Shop drawings and submittals
1. The subcontractor shall submit shop drawings, samples, literature and certification of
performance for approval.
1.3 Fire safety
1. The system (less floor panel covering) shall be rated F 30 when tested in accordance
with DIN 4102. In case of fire at a temperature of 827 degrees centigrade under the
raised floor, the temperature of the upper surface of the panel shall not increase
more than 100 degrees centigrade after 30 minutes, so that a person could walk on
the floor surface for at least 30 minutes.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Panels
1. Panels shall be 600 mm square and shall provide 100% interchangeability and be
easily removable by one person with an appropriate lifting tool. Panels, when in place
and functioning as part of a complete floor system shall be designed to support a
concentrated load of 3,000 N per square meter with a maximum deflection of 2 mm.
Panels shall be designed to support a uniform live load of 20,000 N/m² with a
maximum deflection of 2 mm.
a. Fire safety
• When tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, the panels shall have a class I-
A fire rating and comply with the following requirements:
SMOKE DENSITY : 0
FLAME SPREAD : 0
• Top surface of floor panels shall not exceed 100 degrees C with 30 minutes
when exposed to an open fire not exceeding 827 degrees centigrade
beneath the panel.
b. Panel surface shall be compatible with floor covering materials specified.
c. The floor surface shall give a monolithic raised floor appearance when installed.
d. Panel construction shall be as follows:
• The panel consists of a sendzimire zine-coating die-formed steel pan filled

with non-combustible anhydrite AB 20. Panel is a rigid structural assembly.
• The panel shall be conductive attaining a resistance of: 107 - 108 ohms.
• The panels will be of completely non-combustible material (A1 according to

DIN 4102).
• Panel material will also be completely water-repellent.
2.2 Pedestals
1. General
a. The pedestals assemblies shall be supplied to provide support of floor panels to

specified finished floor level.
b. Pedestal assemblies shall be constructed so as to prevent loss of floor height

adjustment due to vibration or accidental lifting of pedestal head when panels
and any attached stringers are removed.
c. Minimum adjustment of pedestal assemblies shall be 104mm up and 94mm

down for all assemblies with a mean height of 100mm and above.
d. Pedestal height adjustment shall be made easily during installation at a location

near the top of the pedestal with no tools required.
2. Construction
a. Pedestal assemblies shall be all steel construction and electroplated for

corrosion resistance.
b. Pedestal for floor heights less than 150mm shall be constructed of a threaded
rod welded to the base plate with the head threaded in the center to allow vertical
adjustment. A lock-nut shall be provided to retain desired adjustment. All parts
and welding seams shall be electroplated.
• Pedestal threaded rod shall not be less than 16mm diameter x 1100mm long
(except for pedestal assemblies of less than 165mm mean floor height).
Pedestal threaded rod shall be of solid carbon steel welded to pedestal head
in assembly.
• Pedestal adjustment nut shall be plated solid steel threaded hex nut.
Adjustment nut shall be assembled onto thread rod allowing for the use of
locking glue to prevent loss of present floor height adjustment due to
vibration or accidental lifting of pedestal heads when floor panels and any
attached stringers are removed.
• Pedestal base tube shall be cut to proper length for specified finished floor
level and continuously welded to pedestal base plate.
• Welded beam will be electroplated steel with a yellow chromating for

corrosion resistance.
• Pedestal base plate shall be not less than 90 mm diameter with a yellow
chromating electroplated steel plate.
• Each pedestal shall be able to support a 2.270 kg load, with a safety factor of
2, without deformation of any part.
• Pedestal heads will be designed to allow insertion of stringers even after

installation of the raised floor without affecting the height of the floor.
2.3 Floor Covering
1. Floor covering, where specified by others shall be done later. The panel surface shall
be designed to take the necessary floor covering installed later with edge trims.
2. Where floor covering is specified, the floor covering material shall be guaranteed not
to peel off when lifting devices are used to lift panels from the floor. Any floor
covering materials, whose stated characteristics are below loads exerted by weight of
machines, shall be protected by hardboard over-layment during moving of machines
or other equipment. Hardboard will be supplied by owner. Floor covering shall be one
of the following as specified in the finish schedule or elsewhere on the drawings, and
shall be factory-applied to fit the module size, including trim edge.
2.4 Services Boxes
1. The contractor shall provide preinstalled, purpose made floor service boxes in panels
as specified and quantified in the relevant services drawings. The boxes shall be
mounted in the panels to suit either a prefinished (of finish to receive by others) type
of tile as indicated in the relevant drawings.
2. A 5% excess quantity of normal (unfinished) / prefinished / service box outlet panels

and pedestals shall be allowed in the supply quantity by the contractor.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 90 00 - Painting
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................ 2

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ...................................... 2
1.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOT TO BE PAINTED ...................... 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................ 3
1.5 CERTIFICATION ................................................................................... 3
1.6 CODES AND SAMPLES ....................................................................... 3
1.8 SUBMISSIONS ...................................................................................... 4
1.9 REFERENCES ...................................................................................... 4
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS ...................................................................... 8
1.11 WARRANTY .......................................................................................... 8
1.12 MANUFACTURE AND GRADE OF COATINGS................................... 8
1.13 TESTING ............................................................................................... 9
2.0 PRODUCTS................................................................................................. 10
2.1 MATERIALS .......................................................................................... 10
2.2 COLOR AND GLOSS ............................................................................ 10
2.3 ALKYD/OIL PAINT SYSTEM................................................................. 10
2.4 WASHABLE EMULSION PAINT SYSTEM ........................................... 10
2.5 NON FUNGUS ACRYLIC EMULSION PAINT SYSTEM ...................... 11
2.6 EXTERIOR ACRYLIC PAINT SYSTEM ................................................ 11
2.7 TEXTURED COATINGS ....................................................................... 12
2.8 POLYURETHANE COATINGS ............................................................. 12
2.9 EPOXY POLYURETHANE SYSTEM .................................................... 12
2.10 FULL EPOXY PAINT SYSTEM ............................................................. 12
3.0 EXECUTION…………………………………………………………………….. 12
3.1 ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACE .............................................................. 12

3.2 COATS AND INSPECTION................................................................... 13
3.3 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 13
3.4 PROTECTION ....................................................................................... 13
3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION................................................................... 14
3.6 SANDING .............................................................................................. 15
3.7 SECULAR REFLECTANCE .................................................................. 15
3.8 PAINTING OF PIPES, DUCTS AND CONDUITS ................................. 15
3.9 DUCT THROATS .................................................................................. 15
3.10 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS .......................................... 16
3.11 FINISH HARDWARE ............................................................................. 16
3.12 WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................... 16
3.13 TOUCH-UP WORK ............................................................................... 16
3.14 CLEANING ............................................................................................ 16
3.15 PAINTING FINISHES ............................................................................ 17
SECTION 09 90 00 – Painting Page 1 of 18
SECTION 09 90 00 - Painting
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Furnish and install painting as indicated on the drawings and specified, including:
a. Performance and completion of painting and decorating, interior and exterior,
less items of painting hereinafter specified as being excluded.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

2. Shop prime coats: The following products shall be primer painted at the place of
fabrication :
b. Structural steel and miscellaneous metalwork.
c. Ferrous (ungalvanized) and galvanized sheet metals.
d. Shop coat on machinery and equipment: Refer to the sections under which
various items of manufactured equipment with factory-applied shop prime coat
are finished. All items of equipment furnished with prime coat finish shall be
finish painted under this Section, unless specified otherwise.
3. Color coding of mechanical piping: Color coding is in addition to painting of piping
which may be required under this Section.
1.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOT TO BE PAINTED

1. Unless scheduled, specified, or required by the drawings to be painted, the following
items do not require painting. These surfaces shall be left completely clean and free
from droppings and accidentally applied material.
a. Non-ferrous metals, chrome plated metal, and stainless steel.
b. Finish Hardware.
c. Ceramic tile.
d. Floor finish materials.
e. Acoustic tile.
f. Equipment furnished with complete factory-applied finish, (except A.C. units)
unless specifically noted on the drawings or specified herein to be painted.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Prior to start of painting, submit three copies of a complete list of all materials,
identified by manufacturer's name and product label or stock number, to the
ENGINEER for approval. This list shall be in the form of a repetition of the paint
finishes specified, with the addition of the specific product intended for each coat.
2. Two copies bearing ENGINEER's approval and corrections will be returned to the
Contractor, one copy of which shall be on file in the Contractor's construction office
on the job prior to start of painting work.
1.5 CERTIFICATION
1. Each shipment of painting materials delivered to the site shall be accompanied by
duplicate copies of an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that each
classification or type of material furnished complies with specification requirements.
2. Deliver one copy of affidavit to the Contractor and one copy to the ENGINEER
1.6 CODES AND SAMPLES

1. Colors shall be as selected by ENGINEER.
2. Prepare and submit to the ENGINEER, four 8-1/2" x 11" samples shall be on the
same materials that are used for this project. Upon approval, two samples will be
returned to the Contractor. Where transparent or stained finishes are used, these
samples shall be prepared on species and quality of wood that will be installed on
the project, and indicating system used.
3. The Contractor shall prepare a finish painted sample wall area for the ENGINEER's
approval. Do not proceed with the work until an approval has been received from the
ENGINEER.

1. Inspections: Give sufficient notice so the ENGINEER may inspect significant stages
of work, including:
a. Substrates prepared and ready for installation, before sealer or primer
b. First completed example of installed work on-site
2. Inspection shall take place under lighting conditions equivalent to actual installed
lighting, sunshine or low angle sunshine conditions, as appropriate.
3. Where installed finishes are subject to oblique viewing angles, inspection shall
include viewing angles.
4. Manufacturer Role:
a. The manufacturer shall verify that correct products are being used, substrate
b. The manufacturer shall carry out random on-site inspections of products used
ENGINEER.
c. The manufacturer’s site visit records shall indicate the date, weather
d. The manufacturer shall coordinate with the Engineer and the Contractor and
shall arrange for joint inspections with the Engineer and the Contractor, if
directed.
e. The manufacturer shall complete and execute the relevant parts of the
f. The manufacturer shall conduct not less than:
• One random site inspection per week during the installation period.
5. Submit Control Samples for colors, textures and gloss levels applied to A4-sized
boards.
6. Submit the first completed example of each type of installed work and finish to
establish the required standard before proceeding with the remainder of work (not
less than 10 m2).
7. Coordinate with other trades as appropriate.
a. Any unusual conditions.
b. Verification of colors.
c. Acceptance of substrates.
d. First completed example of substrate preparation for each type of substrate.
e. First completed example of installed work on-site for each type
9. Submit written certification for:
a. Contractor’s Certification of completed work with Contract Documents.
b. Manufacturer’s Certification of correct product selection and installation
procedures.
1.8 SUBMISSIONS:
1. Submit Product Information for proprietary products, including selection guidelines,
preparation and installation instructions, and test results.
1.9 REFERENCES:
between their requirements and this Specification shall be submitted to the Engineer
for his ruling.
ASTM D 235 Standard Specification for Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Spirits)
(Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent)
ASTM D 523 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss
ASTM C 669 Glazing Compounds for Back Bedding and Face Glazing of
Metal Sash
ASTM D 2092 Preparation of Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Surfaces for
Painting
ASTM D 2824 Aluminum-Pigmented Asphalt Roof Coatings, Non-Fibered,

Asbestos Fibered, and Fibered Without Asbestos
ASTM D 4214 Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films
ASTM D 4263 Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
ASTM D 4444 Standard Test Methods for Use and Calibration of Hand-Held
Moisture Meters
ASTM F 1869 Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete
Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride
b. AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL
HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)
ACGIH Limit Values (1991-1992) Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) for Chemical
Substances and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure
Indices (BEIs)
ACGIH TLV-DOC Documentation of Threshold Limit Values and Biological
Exposure Indices
c. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A13.1 Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems
d. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
29 CFR 1910.1000 Air Contaminants
29 CFR 1910.1001 Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite
29 CFR 1910.1025 Lead
29 CFR 1926.62 Lead Exposure in Construction
e. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
FAA AC 70/7460-1 (Rev J) Obstruction Marking and Lighting
f. FEDERAL STANDARDS (FED-STD)
FED-STD-313 (Rev. C) Material Safety Data, Transportation Data and Disposal
Data for Hazardous Materials Furnished to Government
Activities
FED-STD-595 (1989 Rev B) Color
g. MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)
MPI 1 (2001) Aluminum Paint
MPI 2 (2001) Aluminum Heat Resistant Enamel (up to 427 C and 800 F)
MPI 4 (2001) Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler
MPI 5 (2001) Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer
MPI 6 (2001) Exterior Latex Wood Primer
MPI 7 (2001) Exterior Oil Wood Primer
MPI 8 (2001) Exterior Alkyd, Flat
MPI 9 (2001) Exterior Alkyd Enamel
MPI 10 (2001) Exterior Latex, Flat
MPI 11 (2001) Exterior Latex, Semi-Gloss
MPI 13 (2001) Exterior Semi-Transparent Stain (Solvent Based)
MPI 16 (2001) Exterior Solid Color Latex Stain
MPI 19 (2001) Inorganic Zinc Primer

MPI 21 (2001) Heat Resistant Enamel, Gloss, (Up to 205 C or 400 F)
MPI 22 (2001) High Heat Resistant Coating
MPI 23 (2001) Surface Tolerant Metal Primer
MPI 26 (2001) Cementitious Galvanized Metal Primer
MPI 27 (2001) Exterior / Interior Alkyd Floor Enamel, Gloss
MPI 31 (2001) Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear Gloss
MPI 39 (2001) Interior Latex-based Wood Primer
MPI 42 (2001) Latex Stucco and Masonry Textured Coating
MPI 44 Interior Latex, Gloss Level 2
MPI 45 (2001) Interior Primer Sealer
MPI 46 (2001) Interior Enamel Undercoat
MPI 47 (2001) Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss
MPI 48 (2001) Interior Alkyd, Gloss
MPI 49 (2001) Interior Alkyd, Flat
MPI 50 (2001) Interior Latex Primer Sealer
MPI 51 (2001) Interior Alkyd, Eggshell
MPI 52 (2001) Interior Latex, Gloss Level 3
MPI 54 (2001) Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss
MPI 56 (2001) Interior Alkyd Dry Fog/Fall
MPI 57 (2001) Interior Oil Modified Clear Urethane, Satin
MPI 59 (2001) Interior/Exterior Alkyd Porch & Floor Enamel, Low Gloss
MPI 60 (2001) Interior/Exterior Latex Porch & Floor Paint, Low Gloss
MPI 68 (2001) Interior/Exterior Latex Porch & Floor Paint, Gloss
MPI 71 (2001) Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear, Flat
MPI 72 (2001) Polyurethane, Two Component, Pigmented, Gloss
MPI 77 (2001) Epoxy Cold Cured, Gloss
MPI 79 (2001) Marine Alkyd Metal Primer
MPI 90 (2001) Interior Wood Stain, Semi-Transparent
MPI 94 (2001) Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss
MPI 95 (2001) Fast Drying Metal Primer
MPI 101 (2001) Cold Curing Epoxy Primer
MPI 107 (2001) Rust Inhibitive Primer (Water-Based)
MPI 108 (2001) High Build Epoxy Marine Coating
MPI 110 (2001) Interior/Exterior High Performance Acrylic
MPI 113 (2001) Elastomeric Coating
MPI 116 (2001) Epoxy Block Filler
MPI 119 (2001) Exterior Latex, High Gloss (acrylic)
MPI 134 (2001) Waterborne Galvanized Primer
MPI 138 (2001) High Performance Latex, White and Tints - MPI Gloss Level 2
MPI 139 (2001) High Performance Latex, White and Tints - MPI Gloss Level 3
MPI 140 (2001) High Performance Architectural Latex - Gloss Level 4
MPI 141 (2001) High Performance Semigloss Latex, White and Tints - Gloss
Level 5
MPI 144 (2001) Institutional Low Odor / VOC Interior Latex, Gloss Level 2
MPI 146 Institutional Low Odor/VOC Interior Latex - Gloss Level 4 (a
'satin-like' finish)
4. COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTION (CID)
CID A-A-2904 Thinner, Paint, Mineral Spirits, Regular and Odorless
5. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL-STD-101 (Rev. B) Color Code for Pipelines and for Compressed Gas
Cylinders
6. SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)
SCS SP01-01 (2001) Environmentally Preferable Product Specification for
Architectural and Anti-Corrosive Paints
7. STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL (SSPC)
SSPC Guide 6 (1997) Containing Debris Generated During Paint Removal
Operations
SSPC Guide 7 (1995) Disposal of Lead-Contaminated Surface Preparation Debris
SSPC QP 1 (1989) Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors (Field
Application to Complex Structures)
SSPC PA 1 (2000) Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting
SSPC Guide 3 (1995)Safety in Paint Application
SSPC VIS 1 (1989) Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel (Standard
Reference Photographs)
SSPC VIS 3 (1993) Visual Standard for Power- and Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel
(Standard Reference Photographs)
SSPC VIS 4 (2001) Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces
Prepared by Waterjetting
SSPC SP 1 (1982) Solvent Cleaning
SSPC SP 2 (1995) Hand Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 3 (1995) Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 6 (1994) Commercial Blast Cleaning
SSPC SP 7 (1994) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
SSPC SP 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning
SSPC SP 12 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard
Materials by High-and Ultra high-Pressure Water Jetting Prior
to Recoating
SSPC Paint 18 Chlorinated Rubber Intermediate Coat Paint

1. Incidental work:
a. Painting shall be a complete installation including all incidental and minor work,
and all edges, returns, connected surfaces, visible ducts and shaft spaces, and
including all related or similar rooms and surfaces.
b. Paint both sides and all four edges of doors, and the interior of service
cupboards and walk-in cupboards.
c. Where the extent of painting may be reasonably and properly inferred from the
Contract Documents, such painting shall be included, whether described or
indicated in the Contract Documents, or not.
1.11 WARRANTY
1. Provide an approved warranty from project completion for a warranty period of 5-
years.
1.12 MANUFACTURE AND GRADE OF COATINGS

1. Paint and coating products for each coating system shall be from one manufacturer.
Do not combine products from different manufacturers.
2. Products used in each installation area and finish type shall be from the same
production batch.
3. Where the manufacturer makes more than one grade of any coating product, use the
highest grade ('premium grade'), whether the product is indicated by name or not.
4. Do not use 'trade grade' products unless approved before commencing. The
unapproved use of 'trade grade' products in any part of the installation area or item
may be grounds for rejection and may require re-painting of the whole installation
area or item, at the ENGINEER’s sole discretion.
5. color of the paint should not change due to various weathering conditions including
exposure to ultra-violet rays
6. Substrate colours and surface variations shall be not visible through finished opaque
coatings. Provide additional coats if required, to:
a. Seal porous substrates.
b. Ensure required film thickness.
c. Ensure consistent surface texture.
d. Ensure satisfactory opacity.
7. Each coat of an opaque decorative coating system shall be tinted to differ slightly
from the preceding coat.
8. Primer and undercoats shall be slightly lighter than finish coat.
9. Surface coatings for wet areas shall be formulated to resist the growth of mould,
fungus and mildew, and shall be non-toxic to humans
10. Verify color selections, textures and gloss levels, and obtain approval before final
ordering and commencement.
1.13 TESTING:
1. Adhesion testing (Coatings): After installation,
a. Arrange and pay for on-site adhesion testing of applied coatings by a

registered testing laboratory in accordance with the relevant Standards and
individual system requirements as per this specification. Rectify non-complying
work and re-test.
b. The frequency or rate of testing shall be not less than Three random locations
per office, shop, hall, space
2. Dry film thickness testing (Coatings): After installation,
a. Arrange and pay for on-site dry film thickness (DFT) testing of applied coatings
by a registered testing laboratory in accordance with the relevant Standards
and individual system requirements as per this specification.
b. The frequency or rate of testing shall be not less than Three random locations
per office, shop, hall or space
3. Substrate pH testing: Before installation,
a. Do not apply paint and coatings to cementitious substrates where the pH > 10.
b. Arrange and pay for on-site pH testing of concrete and cementitious
substrates before commencing application of paint and coatings, by a
registered testing laboratory.
c. Carry out suitable procedures to lower the surface pH where required.
d. Do not apply acids or other compounds which may be harmful to concrete and
cementitious substrates.
e. The frequency or rate of testing shall be not less than Three random locations
per office, shop, hall, space
2.0 PRODUCTS:
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Thinners, vehicles, pigments, and other incidental materials intended to be combined
with or used with factory-mixed products shall be of the types and kinds
recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended purpose. Include listing of
such materials in the material list required hereinafter.
2. Deliver materials to the job in unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name
and product designation corresponding to designation on material list.
3. Insofar as practicable, each kind of coating for the various types of paint finish shall
be factory-mixed to match approved samples and colors, and of consistencies ready
for immediate application.
4. Provide primer coats as required and minimum two top-coats generally.
5. Provide additional coats if required by Product Information or for appearance.
6. Do not thin or dilute paints.
2.2 COLOR AND GLOSS:

1. here shall be no color variation within each application area.
2. Tinting for each application area shall be prepared in one production batch,
thoroughly mixed to ensure even color.
3. Color tinting shall be carried out off-site with accurate equipment.
4. Do not mix tints on-site, unless otherwise approved before commencing.
5. Each coat of an opaque decorative coating system shall be tinted to differ slightly
from the preceding coat. Primer and undercoats shall be slightly lighter than finish
coat.
6. The Engineer may direct a change of gloss level before delivery of paint to site.
2.3 ALKYD/OIL PAINT SYSTEM (5COAT SYSTEM) (TYPE 4)

1. First coat shall be PVA co-polymer based primer for internal use with volume solids
16% as per ISO 3233/1998(E)
2. Second and third coats shall be PVA co-polymer based stucco filler with volume
solids 52% as per ISO 3233/1998(E)
3. Fourth and fifth coats shall be top quality, lead free, non-yellowing, alkyd paint
providing semi gloss luxury finish with volume solids 43% as per ISO 3233/1998(E)
2.4 WASHABLE EMULSION PAINT SYSTEM (5 COAT SYSTEM) (TYPE 3)

1. First coat shall be PVA co-polymer based primer for internal use with volume solids
16% as per ISO 3233/1998(E)
2. Second and third coats shall be PVA co-polymer based stucco filler with volume
solids 52% as per ISO 3233/1998(E)
3. Fourth and fifth coats shall be of high quality acrylic co-polymer based emulsion
paint with outstanding washability and colour retention properties to provide smooth
and durable matt/silk finish with volume solids 44% as per ISO 3223/1998(E)
2.5 NON FUNGUS ACRYLIC EMULSION PAINT SYSTEM (5COAT SYSTEM) (TYPE 5)
1. First coat shall be a high performance water borne primer based on high quality
alkali resistant binder with volume solids 25% as per ISO 3233/1998(E)
2. Second and third coats shall be PVA co-polymer based, scraper applied, putty filler
to give a level surface with volume solids 52% as per ISO 3233/1998(E)
3. Fourth and fifth coats shall be superior quality special acrylic based emulsion paint
with an advanced HCT (High Crack Tolerant) formula, and with volume solids 38%
as per ISO 3233/1998(E) The top coat is to have the following properties/test
certificates:
a. Crack tolerance of up to 1.00mm (total DFT of top coat to be min.100 microns)
b. Classified for surface spread of flame to BS 476:Part 7:1997 as Class 1Y
c. Special anti fungal and anti bacterial independent test certificate
d. Excellent flow and levelling, good opacity, and highly washable finish
2.6 EXTERIOR ACRYLIC PAINT SYSTEM (3COAT SYSTEM) (TYPE 2)

1. Exterior painting shall be an Exterior Grade Acrylic Flexible Anti Carbonated system
in three coats
2. First coat shall be solvent based acrylic copolymer primer with excellent penetrating
properties having volume solids 34% as per ISO 3233/1998(E)
3. Second and third coats shall be semi gloss medium texture flexible coating based on
high quality 100% pure acrylic water based binder with volume solids 42% as per
ISO 3233/1998(E)
4. The System shall have the following properties/independent test certificates:
• 1.4mm Crack Bridging
• 8.98x10.8 Carbon Dioxide Diffusion Coefficient
• 500 days no effect of Chloride Ion Diffusion
• 2.14x10.5 Moisture Vapour Transmission
• 99.9% Reduction in water absorbtion
• No disbanding due to Impact
• 2.0N/squ mm minimum Pull of Test
• 500hrs no blistering under Salt Spray
• 15mg/100 cycles Abrasion Resistance (based on 300cycles)
2.7 TEXTURED COATINGS:

1. Number of coats and film thickness shall be sufficient to eliminate visible texture in
the substrate.
2. Do not use textured coating to fill voids and honeycombing. Fill and otherwise rectify
surface defects before application of textured coating.
2.8 POLYURETHANE COATINGS (SITE-APPLIED)

1. Thickness and coats are as per general specifications
2. Comply with occupational health and safety requirements for on-site application.
3. Carry out application in dust free conditions.
4. Seal off where practicable and vacuum clean work area before each application and
minimize airborne dust during application and drying.
2.9 EPOXY POLYURETHANE SYSTEM (3 COAT SYSTEM) (TYPE 6)

1. Degrease and wash with fresh water and allow to dry.
2. First coat shall be two-pack zinc phosphate pigmented epoxy coating based on
epoxy resin with high molecular weight having volume solids 50% as per ISO
3233/1998(E), applied at a DTF of 80 microns
3. Second and third coats shall be of a two-pack polyurethane topcoat having excellent
weather resistance, ultra violet light resistance, gloss retention, and colour retention
properties with volume solids 48% as per ISO 3233/1998(E), applied at a DTF of 40
microns per coat.
4. Total DTF of system shall be not less than 160 microns
2.10 FULL EPOXY PAINT SYSTEM (EPOXY – POLYURETHANE, 4 COAT SYSTEM) (

TYPE 1)
5. First coat shall be two-pack epoxy resin based primer with mixing ratio 4:1 and with
high molecular weight and volume solids 54% as per ISO 3233/1998(E)
6. Second coat shall be two-pack specially formulated epoxy based texture product
with mixing ratio 4:1 with volume solids 62% as per ISO 3233/1998(E). Application
shall be by hopper gun
7. Third and fourth coats shall be two pack polyurethane top coat with mixing ratio 9:1
having excellent weather resistance, ultra violet light resistance, gloss retention, and
color retention properties with volume solids 48% as per ISO 3233/1998(E).
2.11 ANTI CARBONATION PAINTING FOR CAR PARK

1. Technical Data
• Number of coats: 3 (minimum)
• CO2 diffusion resistance (R > 50m of air*): R = 599m of air
• Live crack accommodation: 0.3mm
• Elongation to break: 0.9mm @ 117 microns*
• Touch dry: 2 hours @18ºC, 65% RH
• Overcoat: 4 hours @18ºC, 65% RH
• Wet film thickness at 10m² per litre per coat: 100 microns
• Dry film thickness at 10m² per litre per coat: 42 microns
2. Surface Preparation: Prepare substrate by suitable means (e.g. blasting, high
pressure water/grit, scraping, chemical removal) to provide a sound and stable and
clean surface; surfaces may be damp but not wet with running water or
condensation.
3. Installation: On untreated surfaces, new render or any porous substrate, dilute the
first coat of the Anti-carbonation Coating with approximately 30% clean potable
water, and then Apply two or more coats of the Anti-carbonation Coating to achieve
the specified film thickness and / or live crack accommodation performance
requirement.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACE

1. Inspect surfaces to be treated to effectively safeguard work of others and to
preserve painted work free from damage of every nature.
2. All surfaces which are found to be unsuitable for application of paint finish shall be
properly prepared before painting is started. Application of the first coat of paint shall
be construed as acceptance of the surface as satisfactory for application of painter's
finish.
3. Report unsatisfactory conditions disclosed by inspections in writing for correction. Do
not proceed with the work until such unsatisfactory conditions have been properly
corrected.
4. Before commencing painting, coordinate and ensure that work of other trades is
completed as far as practicable within the area to be painted, except for finishes and
fittings which may be damaged by paint splashes, such as floor sanding and floor
installation.
5. Complete clear finishes before commencing opaque finishes in the same area.
3.2 COATS AND INSPECTION

1. The number of coats specified is minimum that shall be applied. It is intended that
paint finishes of even, uniform color, free from cloudy or mottled surfaces, be
provided. The work shall be "spot-coated" or undercoated as necessary.
2. Each coat shall be of a proper ground color to receive a succeeding coat, and
wherever practicable, shall differ in color tint. Each coat shall be approved by the
ENGINEER before the next coat is applied; otherwise an extra coat will be required
over the entire surface involved at the Contractor cost and time, except where
otherwise directed.
3.3 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS

1. Store and mix paint materials in places as directed. Portions of the building used for
paint storage and mixing shall be suitably safeguarded against stains, damage and
defects.
2. Take adequate precautions against fire hazard. Mixing and thinning of prepared
paints: In accordance with recommendations of manufacturer whose material is
being altered, where necessary to produce satisfactory results.
3. Painting materials required for use on the project shall conform in all respects, with
applicable air pollution control regulations.
4. Provide and use suitable fans to thoroughly ventilate installation areas during
application, and until coatings are thoroughly dry.
5. Prevent cross contamination of drying vapours between water-based, solvent-based
and polyurethane paint types.
3.4 PROTECTION
1. Provide drop cloths, barricades, or other forms of protection necessary to safeguard
work of others, and as required to preserve painted work free from damages of every
nature.
a. Completely protect fixtures, and cabinets that will be installed before painting
operations are complete.
b. Cover well with drop cloths and do not use fixtures or finished building
construction of any type for scaffolding or support of scaffolding.
2. In the event finish materials which require no painting should be accidentally
splashed with paint or otherwise disfigured by unauthorized application of paint, and
if the paint cannot be removed without damage to the material involved, then these
materials shall be removed and replaced with new materials, and all costs incidental
there to shall be paid by the Contractor. Cleaning and removal of unauthorized paint
or other such materials shall be accomplished with materials and procedures which
are non-injurious to the surface, all as approved by the ENGINEER.
3. After completion and acceptance of the painter's work in any area, the Contractor
shall be responsible for provision and maintenance of such forms of protection that
may be required to protect finished work from damage from any cause prior to
acceptance of the job by the Owner. Schedule the work, and exclude traffic and
unauthorized personnel from finished areas, to the extent necessary to prevent
damage.
3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION

1. Properly prepare all surfaces to receive the finishes herein specified or designated in
the Schedule of Finishes. In general, all such work of preparation shall be as follows:
2. Finish woodwork: Additional sanding required for first class finishes shall be done
under this Section. Open joints, cracks, nail holes, etc., shall be filled flush and
smooth using plastic wood or putty as best adapted to the condition. Knots and
permissible pitch pockets shall be shellacked or otherwise suitably sealed prior to
further application of material thereon. Woodwork scheduled for transparent finish
shall be free of all surface defects.
• Stain: Woodwork indicated to receive a stain and varnish finish shall be
stained to an even color with water borne stain. On open-grained
hardwood, mix stain with paste filler and completely fill pores in wood.
3. Galvanized metalwork: When installed without shop prime coat and required to be
painted, thoroughly clean with commercial phosphoric acid solution, or other
prepared product recommended by the paint manufacturer for pre-treatment for
application of galvanized metal primer. Galvanized metal primer shall be recoated
with the next coat within the period specified by the manufacturer of the primer.
4. Shop-coated metal work: Thoroughly clean off oil, grease, dirt and foreign matter.
Field conditions, welds, soldered joints, and burned and abraded portions shall be
spot-coated with the same material used in the shop coats and permitted to
thoroughly set and harden. Sand surfaces for coat to follow.
5. Uncoated ferrous metal work: Clean metal surfaces not provided with a shop prime
coat by others, of rust, mill scale, oil, grease encrustations, and foreign matter, using
rotary brushes, solvents, or sandblasting, as necessary, and leave ready for coat to
follow. Pits shall be cleaned down to bright metal.
6. Gypsum board drywall surfaces: Taped and cemented joints shall have been
finished smooth and flush and left ready for application of painted finish. Any
unsatisfactory conditions, such as raised or depressed surfaces, or scuffed paper
finish, shall be corrected.
7. Concrete (interior) surfaces:
a. Clean surfaces of dirt, laitance, excess mortar, encrustations and foreign

matter. Cracks, holes, pits and other imperfection shall be neatly patched flush
and smooth, and the entire surface chemically treated as required to
counteract lime and alkali burns, and hot spots
b. Switch and outlet boxes: See that the wall is properly finished around boxes
before start of painting so that joint will be properly covered by standard size
switch plates.
3.6 SANDING
1. In addition to preparatory sanding, each coat, except the last, shall be sanded unless
otherwise specified, using sandpaper appropriate to the finish required.
2. Avoid scratches and swirls.
3.7 SPECULAR REFLECTANCE

1. Reflectance of paint: Determine the degree of gloss or flatness in painting materials
by specular reflectance or gloss meter reading on a scale of 100 using "Method of
Test of Specular Gloss," ASTM D523, within the following ranges:
Gloss 75-90
Semi-Gloss 45-75
Eggshell 15-45
Low Luster 6-15
Flat 1-6
3.8 PAINTING OF PIPES, DUCTS AND CONDUITS

1. Exposed pipes, ducts and conduits, with their hangers, supports, and fittings shall be
provided with a paint finish, except where otherwise specified. In rooms in which the
walls and ceilings are scheduled to be painted, all exposed piping, ductwork and
miscellaneous metal work shall be painted to match. Exposed machinery,
equipment, pipes, conduits and ducts shall receive industrial enamel finish, including
work in equipment rooms. Bare pipe lines, ducts carrying temperatures in excess of
79oC, shall receive "Bitumastic," high heat finish. Covered pipe prime coat shall be a
coat of "size" substituted for the prime coat described for exposed pipe finish.
a. Exposed metal surfaces of electric fixtures, panel boards, switch cabinets,
registers and access panels shall have finish same as for exposed conduits,
except where installed flush in painted surfaces, or against painted surfaces,
finish to match.
2. Paint frames of all recessed lighting fixtures, cabinets, and panels to match adjacent
surfaces. Where such frames are installed on unpainted surfaces, and supplied with
prime coat finish, they shall be painted as specified or directed.
3. Exposed piping, conduits, pipe racks, supports and hangers occurring in rooms in
which the walls and ceilings are not painted, shall be painted as for other exposed
piping.
3.9 DUCT THROATS

1. Behind registers, grilles and louvers, duct throat shall be cleaned of all foreign
materials and given one coat of metal primer and one coat of flat black oil or alkyd
paint.
2. Extend paint finish back into the duct far enough so that no bare metal will be
exposed from any normal viewing position.
3.10 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

1. Registers, grilles and diffusers shall be painted to match the surface in which they
occur.
2. If furnished with complete factory finish, the finish shall be properly prepared to
receive additional coats and repainted to obtain proper color, unless directed
otherwise by the ENGINEER. If furnished in anodized aluminum they need not be
painted.
3.11 FINISH HARDWARE

1. Finish hardware, except prime coat butts, shall be properly fitted to the doors and
frames, and then removed for finish painting, after the completion of which it shall be
reinstalled.
2. Prime coated butts shall be painted to match adjacent surfaces. All plated and
nonferrous hardware shall be clean and completely free of paint upon completion.
3.12 WORKMANSHIP
1. All work shall be executed by skilled workers, experienced in their trade, under
constant supervision by well qualified foremen. All work to be of the highest
standards and methods.
2. Mix paint thoroughly and break up with paddles to smooth, uniform and good
brushing consistency, and use strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions.
3. Keep all brush washes outside paint storeroom and remove all brush washes from
the job site daily. After sealers are applied, make sure that all suction, hot or burned
spots, are resealed to assure correct finish coats.
4. All work shall be done under favorable weather conditions, or conditions suitable for
the production of first-class work.
5. No exterior or interior painting shall be done until the surface is thoroughly dry and
cured. Exterior painting shall not be done in rainy or windy weather.
6. Enamels, varnishes and sanding sealers shall be sanded lightly and dusted clean
between coats to produce an even, smooth finish.
3.13 TOUCH-UP WORK

1. Detailed inspection of paint work shall be made, and abraded, stained or otherwise
disfigured portions shall be satisfactorily touched-up or refinished to produce a first-
class workmanlike and acceptable job.
3.14 CLEANING
1. After painting work has been completed, make a detailed inspection of paint finish
and carefully remove spattering of paint material from adjoining work particularly
from glass, plumbing fixtures, tile and trim.
2. Repair damages that may be caused by such cleaning operations. All implements of
service shall be removed from the premises and the entire project left in a condition
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
3.15 PAINT FINISHES

1. The required finishes shall be applied to the surfaces specified and/or as scheduled
on the finish and paint schedules on the drawings. All materials shall be applied in
compliance with manufacturer's instructions on properly prepared surfaces and
foundation coats. all products are subject to approval by the ENGINEER.
2. Interior:
a. Gypsum Board: 3 coats.
First: Drywall sealer.
Second and Third: Interior enamel, semi-gloss or as indicated.
b. Concrete: 3 coats.
First: Concrete sealer.
Second and Third: Interior enamel, semi-gloss or as indicated.
c. Metal: Shall be cleaned, pre-treated and painted with 3 coats. Items to be
painted include but are not limited to: exposed structural and miscellaneous
steel, stairs, ladders, railings and handrailings.
First: Metal primer.
Second and Third: Interior gloss enamel, or as otherwise directed by the
ENGINEER.
d. Woodwork, Stained and Varnished: 4 coats.
First: As specified under Priming.
Second, third and fourth: Varnish, semi-gloss.
e. Wood doors: 4 coats.
Second, Third, and Fourth: Varnish, gloss.
f. Other Wood: 3 coats.
• Varnished or painted as indicated.
• If varnished, same finish system as painted woodwork, with semi-gloss

or gloss finish to match adjacent wall.
3. Exterior:
a. Concrete: 3 coats.
First: Concrete sealer.
Second and Third: Exterior 100% acrylic.
b. Metal: Shall be cleaned, pre-treated and painted with 3 coats. Items to be
painted include, but are not limited to, steel columns and miscellaneous steel
items, gravel stops, metal doors and frames, hoods and flashings.
Second and Third: Exterior house and trim enamel.
4. Mechanical and Electrical Work:
a. Except where interior mechanical and electrical work to be painted is specified
to received another paint finish, work occurring in finished rooms and spaces
shall be cleaned, pre- treated and painted with 3 coats. Items to be painted
include, but are not limited to: steel and copper piping, pipes, vents, fittings,
ducts, plenums, miscellaneous supports and hangers, electrical conduit,
fittings, pull boxes, outlet boxes, unfinished surfaces of plumbing fixtures,
miscellaneous metal cabinets, panels and access doors and panels.
First: Priming.
Second and Third: Interior enamel, semi-gloss or gloss to match adjacent
wall or ceiling finish.
b. Insulation and Taping on Pipes and Ducts: 3 coats.
• Finished Rooms:
First: Interior water borne primer.
Second and Third: Interior semi-gloss or gloss enamel to match adjoining
wall or ceiling finish.
• On Building Exterior:
First Exterior water borne primer.
Second and Third: Exterior gloss enamel.
c. Inside surfaces of ducts, vents, dampers and louvers as far back as visible
from room in which they open shall be painted with 2 coats of flat black paint.
d. Lettering: Where lettering and signs are indicated to be painted, lettering shall
be done by an experienced sign painter. Unless otherwise indicated,
characters shall be 4" high, 3/4" wide stroke, black.
5. Battery Room Painting: Apply a 3-coat acid resistant epoxy based system the as
manufactured by Ameron, Tnemec, PPG, or equal. The primer, intermediate coat,
and top coat shall have a dry film thickness of not less than 6 mils (plus or min us 1
mil). Submit technical data for approval.
6. Do not paint over junctions between opening or sliding parts and fixed parts of
windows and doors. Ensure that all opening and sliding parts are operating properly
without sticking or jamming after completion of painting.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL .................................................................................. ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.

2.0 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 2
3.0 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................ 2
SECTION 09250 Gypsum Board Page 1 of 2
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior & Interior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.
B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project
site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured,
within 500 miles of Project site.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat laminated to
both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges.
2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C
840:
1. Level 1: Fire tape panels with tongue and groove wood ceiling cover.
E. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from
floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged
during drywall application.
F. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09250 Gypsum Board Page 2 of 2
SECTION 10 14 53 - ROAD MARKINGS & SIGNAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 ROAD MARKINGS …………………………………………………………………. 2

1.1 General ……………………………………………………………2
1.2 Technical Information …………………………………..……….2
1.3 Application ………………………………………………………..3
1.4 Condition during Application ……………………………………3
1.5 Surface Preparation ………………………………………….….3
2.0 SIGNS ………………………………………………………………… 4

2.1 General ……………………………………………………………4
DIVISION 10 – Specialties
SECTION 10 14 53 - Road Markings & Signage Page 1 of 4
SECTION 10 14 53 - ROAD MARKINGS & SIGNAGE
1.0 ROAD MARKINGS
1.1 General
1. Road Marking Paint is an acrylic based quick drying paint for use on asphalt and
concrete road or parking, either for marking road, curbstone and traffic areas.
2. Road marking shall be carried out in accordance with the regulation of the local
Authorities.
1.2 Technical Information
1. Road Marking Paint is available in white, yellow and black colour only. Colour shall be
used according to the Engineer’s instructions.
2. Cavity of (1.20 - 1.32).
3. Flash Point of (21.5° ).
4. Film thickness per coat in microns:
a. Try condition 40 - 60 typical (60).

b. Wt conditions 100 - 200 typical (150).
c. Theoretical spreading 10.00 - 5.00 Typical (6.66)
d. Typical recommended 1x60 microns dry film thickness.
e. Storage must be with national regulations. The product should be kept in a cool
and well ventilated place protected from heat and direct sunlight. Containers must
be kept tightly closed.
1.3 Application
1. Stir well before use.
2. Road Marking Paint is airless and can be applied by brush or roller or conventional
spray by machine may also be used as recommended by manufacturer.
3. The paint may be diluted as recommended by the manufacturer. Thinner to match the
pressure and equipment available.
4. Spray angle 60° - 80°.
5. Width of the paint shall be according to the approved drawing or Engineer’s instruction.
6. Drying time typically as recommended. Film thickness and as favoured by good

ventilation.
a. In 23°C dry to touch 10 min. fully cured 30 min recoating 30min.

b. In 35°C dry to touch 8 min. fully cured 20 min recoating 20min.
c. In 45°C dry to touch 7 min. fully cured 15 min recoating 15min.
1.4 Condition during Application

1. The temperature of the substrate should be minimum 30C above the dew point of the
air, temperature and relative humidity measured in the vicinity of the substrate.
1.5 Surface Preparation

1. Before the painting operation by 24 hours cleanliness is essential and protection by
rags or polythene sheet is required.
2. After washing off and stripping old paint from walls ceilings all rubbish shall be cleared
away and repair floor surface from the damages if any
2.0 SIGNS
2.1 General
1. Architectural signage, by definition, has always been a blending of the message with its
environment. Well designed functional / signage or standard complements the design
of buildings, parking, traffic and landscaping or special design requested by the
Engineers, the Employer or governed by local Authorities
2. Contractors must submit names of suppliers with their catalogue showing products for
project completed during the last three years.
3. Contractors / Suppliers must submit manufacturer‘s technical data and installation for
each type of sign required for the project.
4. Contractors / Suppliers must submit shop drawings showing precise location of sign,
list, sign size, letter form and height of letter.
5. Contractors / Suppliers must submit one full size sample sign of type style and colour
specified including method of attachment.
6. Contractors / Suppliers must submit under his responsibilities a method of mounting for
indoor and outdoor with suitable materials to suit the location.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 26 13 - CORNER GUARDS TO COLUMNS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL……………………………………………………………………………... 2
1.1 SUMMARY ………………………………… …………………..2
1.2 DETAILS AND SPECIFICATION ……………………………..2
SECTION 10 26 13 – Corner Guards Page 1 of 3
SECTION 10 26 13 - CORNER GUARDS TO COLUMNS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY :
1. Heavy duty corner and columns guards provide maximum impact protection in areas
such as loading docks, storage spaces and parking garages. Made of abrasion
resistant natural or EPDM rubber and vinyl, rugged and long wearing corner and
column guards are designed to withstand the daily abuse and jolts from bulky
equipment and vehicle, some may be installed horizontally.
2. Corner Guards to Columns shall be supplied as per the following from Pawling
Corporation, Standard Products Division, and P.O. Box 200 - Borden Lane Wassaic,
New York 12595. Tel: (914) 373 9300 Fax: (914) 373 8712 Toll Free Tel: 1-800-431-
3456 in USA & Canada. Toll Free Fax 1-800-451-2200 in USA & Canada. E Mail
Sales & Pawling Com. OR EQUAL FOR APPROVAL.
1.2 DETAILS AND SPECIFICATION
1. Style CG - 1
a. Material - Natural rubber. Non marking guards with 4" wings for square corners
installed with ADH-4323 adhesive or mechanical fasteners as required by site
condition i.e. lag screws into wood surface, lock bolts into concrete etc. Flathead
fasteners may be used and pulled flush with guard surface.
b. Colour - (5) gray.
c. Length - 4’, 6’, 8’, 10’ & 12’.
d. Weight - 2.6 Lbs P.L/F
2. Style CG - 2
a. Material - SBR rubber with 4” wings. Guards are notched at the angle to
accommodate irregular corner. Install as on square or radius corners.
Recommended for indoor use. Install with ADH-4323 adhesive.
b. Colour - (1) black.
c. Length - 4’, 6’, 8’ & 10’
3. Style CG - 5
a. Material - Natural rubber. Non marking guards with 4" wings. CG-5 for chamfered
corners. Install with ADH-4323 adhesive or mechanical fasteners as required by
job conditions (e.g.) lag screws into wood surface, lock bolts into concrete, etc.
Flathead fasteners may be used and “pulled” flush with guard surface.
b. Colour - (5) gray.
c. Length - 4’ & 8’.
4. Style CG - 15
a. Material - Vinyl guard with 4” wings to be mounted on square corners. Install with
ADH-2262 adhesive.
b. Colours - (1) black, (3) Tan, (4) Brown, (5) Gray, (70) Safety Yellow.
c. Length - 4‘, 6‘, 8‘& 12’.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 28 00 – TOILET AND BATHROOMS ACCESSORIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2

1.2 SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ...................................................................... 2
1.4 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING ........................................................................... 2
1.5 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 2
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ........................................................................................................ 2
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10 28 00 – Toilet and Bathrooms Accessories Page 1 of 2
SECTION 10 28 00 – TOILET AND BATHROOMS ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This section includes specifications for supply of toilet and bathroom accessories
intended for use in the Works in accordance with drawings including all the
necessary fixing and installation fittings whether specifically mentioned here in
this section or not.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including

dimensions, finish information, details of function, and mounting details.
B. Selection Samples: Manufacturer's standard color chips for selection of colors

and finishes.
C. Verification Samples: Submit samples of each product specified, illustrating color

and finish.
A. Provide factory-applied strippable vinyl coating to finished surfaces; leave in

place until ready for final inspection.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1.4 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate supply with the main contractor and the installer.
B. Supply installation templates, required reinforcing, and recessed anchorage

devices in timely fashion to installers of related work that will receive products of
this section.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide replacement warranty against defects in materials and workmanship as

required under the Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Material shall be supplied from an approved manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 28 00 – Toilet and Bathrooms Accessories Page 2 of 2
SECTION 10341 PREFABRICATED EXTERIOR SPECIALTIES - SPEED HUMP
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.0 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................ 4
Section 10341 Prefabricated Exterior Specialties - Speed Hump Page 1 of 4
SECTION 10951 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES- FLOOR MAT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A. This section includes the Speed Hump.
1.2 Quality Assurance and Applicable Certification
A. Flammability & Slip resistance shall confirm the international recognized standards.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain Speed Hump from a single source manufacturer.
1.3 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Delivery materials to the customer ready for use and fabricated in as large sections
and assemblies as practical, in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to
identify manufacturer.
1.4 Project Conditions
A. Field measurements: Check actual dimensions and Coordinate fabrication schedule

with construction progress to avoid delay of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
A. Material: Compression molded 100% recycled rubber and polyurethane composite.

B. Physical properties:
• tensile strength: minimum 500 psii
• shore hardness: minimum 70A
• specific gravity 1.1-1.5
C. Marking: Rubber modules to be available in black with yellow or white in-molded
reflective tape.
D. Dimensions of the modules:
• width 35.5" (+/- 1/16")
• length as per the darwings
• thickness 2.1" (+/- 1/8")
2.2 Preparation
A. the surface beneath the Speed Hump shall be finished with a leveling screed to ensure
optimum performance of the system to the manufacturer recomendation.
2.3 Warranty
Warranty: 3 year warranty is to provided on all Safety Rider components
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to

be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
3.2 Installation
A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.4 Protection
A. Defer installation of Speed hump until time of Substantial Completion of Project.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10342 PREFABRICATED EXTERIOR SPECIALTIES - BOLLARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.0 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................ 4
Section 10342 Prefabricated Exterior Specialties – Bollards Page 1 of 4
SECTION 10342 PREFABRICATED EXTERIOR SPECIALTIES – BOLLARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A. SECTION INCLUDES:
Stainless Steel Brush Finishes Removable Bollards
Steel Paint Finishes Removable Bollards
A. For Steel Paint Finishes Removable Bollards please refer to Section 05 10 00

Structural Steel Work, Section 05 500 Metal Fabrications and Section 05521 Pipe And
Tube Railings.
B. For Stainless Steel Brush Finishes Removable Bollards:
• ASTM A 240/A240M - Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and

Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strips.
C. Manufacturer: Minimum five years documented experience producing products

specified in this section
D. Installer: Minimum five years documented experience installing products specified in

this section
B. Remove wraps upon delivery at the building site.
C. Store units on planks or dunnage in a dry location.
D. Store units covered to protect them from damage, but permitting air circulation.
A. Field measurements: Check actual dimensions and Coordinate fabrication schedule

with construction progress to avoid delay of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
A. Material including Stainless Steel bars and flats: Stainless Steel: Level, cold rolled
sheet steel conforming to ASTM A 240, commercial quality; Type: 316L stainless steel
Finish: Brush Finishes.
B. High resistance to corrosion due to the increased levels of nickel in its alloy structure.
C. Reinforced: A galvanised steel tube to be added for increased internal strength.
D. Anti Ram: to be Reinforced with two internal steel tubes to further increase the strength
of the bollard.
E. Fixing: an integral base fixing plate to be attached to the ground using bolts.
2.2 Warranty
Warranty: 2 year warranty is to provided
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Examination

3.2 Installation
recommendations.
3.4 Protection
A. Defer installation of Bollards until time of Substantial Completion of Project.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL……………………………………………………………………………... 2
2.0 PRODUCT……………………………………………………………………………... 3
3.0 EXECUTION…………………………………………………………………………... 4
SECTION 10431 Signage Page 1 of 4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Panel signs.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.
1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and
accessories.
2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout
for each sign.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors available for the following:
1. Acrylic sheet.
D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and
sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:
1. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches (305 mm) square
E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

A. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).
2.2 PANEL SIGNS

1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet.
2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
B. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings,
including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence
to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for five years for application intended.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Two-Face Tape for mounting panel signs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and
complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other
defects in appearance.
2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not
indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow
approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within
swing of door.
B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent
requirements apply.
1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered
or rough surfaces.

A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect
signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.0 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................ 5
SECTION 10951 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES- FLOOR MAT Page 1 of 5
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A. This section includes the Entrance Flooring systems C/S Pediluxe™ Entrance mat –
recessed - with base frame assembly from Construction Specialties Middle East L.L.C
(UAE-Dubai) or equally approved by the client.
A. Flammability in accordance with ASTM E648, Class 1, Critical Radiant Flux, minimum
0.45 watts/cm.
B. Slip resistance in accordance with ASTM D-2047-96, Coefficient of Friction, minimum

0.60 for accessible routes.
C. Standard rolling load performance is 450 kgs/wheel with larger loading requirements as
specified. (Load applied on a single wheel). [Please note: For entranceways such as
retail malls, rolling load performance is a critical factor not only for goods trolleys but
also for interior cleaning equipment].
D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain floor mat system and frames from a single source
manufacturer.
A. Field measurements: Check actual openings for mats by accurate field measurements
prior to fabrication. Record actual measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.
B. For recess application, coordinate frame installation with concrete construction to

ensure recess and frame anchorage is accurate and that the base is level and flat.
Defer frame installation until building enclosure is complete and related interior finish
work in progress.
C. It is recommended that splices in wider units (above 3600 mm) not be positioned in the
middle of a door opening, wherever possible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
A. Aluminum – ASTB 221, alloy 6063-T6, for extrusions.
B. Plasticized PVC with a relative density of between 1.28 and 1.51 together with shore
hardness values between 86 to 88.
C. Vinyl/Acrylic – High impact PVC extrusions
D. Tread inserts – refer to section 2.06
2.2 Preparation
A. For recessed applications, the surface beneath the mat shall be finished with a leveling
screed to ensure optimum performance of the system.
2.3 General Description
The Entrance Mat tread rails shall be extruded from 6063-T6 aluminum alloy pitched at a
maximum of 50mm centers and connected by a continuous mono durometer PVC
combination hinge and cushion extrusion (connector spline). The connector splines shall
be slotted to provide a 25 mm (slot) 20 mm (solid) perforation pattern, between each tread
rail, for drainage, unless otherwise specified. Solid or unperforated systems that do not
allow for dirt and water retention within the mat area shall not be acceptable. The entrance
mat is designed to fit within a preformed mat well not exceeding 25 mm in height based on
a nominal mat height of 17 mm. Tread Rails, Frames, Connector Splines, Inserts and
Edge Fillers to be to selected finish and color. To facilitate easy removal for cleaning,
single mat widths shall not exceed 3600 mm. Larger sizes shall be supplied as multiple
units.
2.4 Carpet Tread Inserts
Carpet Tread inserts shall be replaceable and shall be as follows:
Shall be solution dyed construction of polypropylene fibers with 50/50 blend of 600/12-
denier multifilament and 595/D1 monofilament. The textured fibers shall have ultra-violet
blockers and color as an integral part of the filament.
carpet fiber and monofilament shall be fusion bonded to a rigid two-ply backing to prevent
fraying and supplied in continuous splice-free lengths. Waterproof fibers do not get soggy,
rot, fade or stain. Carpet weight shall be 758 gram/m2..
All Carpet Tread internal inserts to have a minimum static coefficient of friction (slip
resistance) of 0.60 when tested to ASTM D-2047-96.
2.5 Frame Assemblies
Frames shall be of the Aluminum Block-Out Frame type for recessed mounted application
and shall 19 mm deep recessed frame in 6063-T6 aluminum alloy. Colored Edge filler
shall be furnished as required when standard 50 mm tread spacing cannot be maintained.
2.6 Warranty
The manufacturer shall offer a detailed warranty policy for a minimum period of two years.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Examination

3.2 Preparation
A. Manufacturer shall offer assistance and guidance to provide a template of irregular

shaped mat assemblies to ensure a proper installation.
3.3 Installation
recommendations.
B. Set mat type at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning
action.
C. Coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swings across to provide
ample clearance between door and mat.
3.4 Protection
A. After completing required frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler
of plywood or fiberboard in recesses, and cover frames with plywood protective
flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near
time of Substantial Completion.
B. Defer installation of floor mats until time of Substantial Completion of Project.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 11 12 00 – PARKING GATE BARRIERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 2

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ..................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................... 3
PART 2 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................... 4
2.1 INSTALLATION................................................................................................................ 4
2.2 ADJUSTING ..................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 OPERATING MANUAL .................................................................................................... 4
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11 12 00 – Parking Control Equipment Page 1 of 4
SECTION 11 12 00 – PARKING GATE BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This section includes specifications for supply, install, test and commission the
parking gate barriers system (magnetic access cards Operated barrier system).
1. Fast motor driven drop arm barrier complete with control unit, bar with
stripes and blinking amber light rest fork, for:
Entry barrier (Dimensions and number is as per drawings)
Exit barrier (Dimensions and number is as per drawings)
2. Electronic control unit
3. Receiver board
4. Aerial
5. Magnetic Cards (equally to the total number of Carparks plus 10% additional
numbers)
6. Photo-electric cell
7. Magnetic loop detectors/Presence detectors
8. Cables & accessories
9. The barrier at the entrance shall be controlled through Card Reader
housing with fixing base, the card reader housing shall also house a
camera with intercom station connected to the monitor at the security.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. This system shall be complete and fully operational. All the necessary
accessories, fittings, parts and connections necessary for such operation
shall be considered whether mentioned in this document or not.
2. Fast motor driven drop arm barrier complete with control unit, bar with
stripes and blinking amber light rest fork, for:
Entry barrier (Dimensions and number is as per drawings)
Exit barrier (Dimensions and number is as per drawings)
3. Electronic control unit
4. Duty cycle: Heavy duty
5. Receiver board
6. Aerial
7. magnetic access cards.
8. Photo-electric cell
9. Magnetic loop detectors/Presence detectors
10. Cables & accessories
11. Magnetic card operated barrier system including the supply of Cards. The
cards shall be programmable and able to be coordinated with the building
lobby door entry system and the barrier system shall have the provisions
to be integrated with the Building Management system for the following

operations:
- Monitor: Barrier Status.
- Control: Parking Control System: Automatic operation at entrance and
automatic operation at exit plus the ability to switch between (Open/
Close).
12. The drop arm barrier at the B3 level shall be with telescopic arms.
13. The Owner shall have the flexibility to produce additional cards in future in
case of loss or damage to
14.Particular Specifications:
Operating time : Maxim 9 sec.
Power Supply : 230/400V three-phase
Frequency : 50/60 Hz
Motor : Asynchronous three-phase type.
0.25kW-960 rpm
Gear Box : Life lubricated type
Speed reduction ratio 64:1
Motor pulley : 40mm dia
Reduction pulley : Diameter varies following length of
arm and power Frequency (50 or
60 Hz) V-belt :
Consumption : In standby :120W (max)
In operation :370 W (*max)
Operating temperature : -250 to + 700 C
Mechanical resistance : 1.106 cycles (MCBF)
15. Gate Arm: Fabricate gate arm of nominal 25 mm thick, length as indicated,
of Aluminum articulating arm with internal counterbalance with safety
rubber bottom edge and automatic instant reversing arm mechanism that
stops downward motion of gates if arm strikes an object, and returning
arm immediately to upward position. Equip mechanism with a 0 to 60
second variable time reset device, Finish with manufacturer’s standard
coating system with black diagonal stripes on traffic side face.
16. System Shall be interfaced with the fire alarm system so it will be opened
during fire conditions.
17. System Shall use a magnetic lock fail-safe controlled remotely to release
barrier arm from its locked position to allow it to travel up or down
automatically to its released position during power failure.
18. Control Panel unit equipped with DC Power Supply (24V).
19. The barrier at the exit side shall be automatically controlled though loop
detector opens the car before the car reaches the arm, the loop detector
shall be coordinated with the road construction works and installed as per
manufacturer recommendation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show complete layout and configuration of complete gate

barrier system including all components and accessories.
1. Include complete technical details of the proposed system.
2. Include installation details.
3. Coordinate with ELECTRICAL works for connections and control.
4. Include civil and electromechanical requirements.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit complete data.
PART 2 EXECUTION
2.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction if any.
B. Install equipment in accordance with approved shop drawings and

manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Coordinate installation with work of other installers.
D. Install all work true, level, tightly fitted and flush with adjacent surfaces as
required.
2.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and leave equipment in proper working order.
B. Complete Initial Inspection - Certification for Use form included in Equipment

Manual and Inspection Log Book.
2.3 OPERATING MANUAL
A. Provide in triplicate (laminated sheets), completely written operating and

maintenance manual (English) for the system supplied for the project.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 11 80 00 - GARBAGE DISPOSAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL………………………………………………………………….. 2
1.1 SUMMARY……………………………………………………..…….. 2
1.2 Service and Parts ……………………………………………………..2
1.3 Manufacturer ……………………………………………………..……2
2.0 PRODUCTS………………………………………………………………… 2
2.1 Supply …………………………………………………………….…….2
2.2 Material – Trunking ……………………………………………………2
2.3 Hoppers ………………………………………………………………...2
2.4 Floor Support Frames …………………………………………..…….3
2.5 Discharge ………………………………………………………………3
2.6 Chute Cleaning ………………………………………………………..3
2.7 Disinfectant and Sanitizing Unit ………………………………..…...3
2.8 Ventilation …………………………………………….……………..…3
2.9 Sound Damping ………………………………………………………3
2.10 Chute Construction ………………………………………...……….4
2.11 Compactor …………………………………………………….……...4
2.12 Hot Dipped Galvanized Garbage Trolleys ………………….…….5
3.0 EXECUTION ………………………………………………………………. 5

3.1 Equipment ……………………………………………………………5
3.2 Construction Waste …………………………………………..……..5
3.3 Inspection prior to Installation ………………………………..…….5
3.4 Installation …………………………………………………………….5
3.5 Testing and Commissioning ………………………….……………..5
DIVISION 11 – Equipment
SECTION 11 80 00 – Garbage Disposal Page 1 of 5
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
1. In this section, supply and installation of refuse chute system, with accessories and
ancillary equipment.
1.2 Service and Parts
1. The manufacturer shall maintain ability to supply spare parts and components, for a
period of five years from the date of manufacture.
1.3 Manufacturer
1. Products for use in this section shall be provided by Hardall, Wilkinson, U.S. Chute or
similar approved Kohlman Eng. Corp. [USA] or similar approved if shown on
drawings).
2. The manufacturer shall provide fully dimensioned shop drawings for approval prior to
manufacture.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Supply
1. As detailed on drawings Refuse Chute System with compactor and garbage

collection trolleys as per Authority requirement and approval.
2.2 Material - Trunking
1. All vertical chute trunking, chute entry sections and ventilation pipes shall
manufactured from stainless steel. The chute shall be made from 2.0mm thick
stainless steel.
2. Stainless steel used in this section shall be type 304 S.D. to BS1449.
2.3 Hoppers
1. Shall be provided to all storeys of the refuse chute and manufactured as follows.
2. The hopper door face will have a trout size of 510mm x 610mm and designed to
ensure that refuse inserted into the hopper cannot cause a blockage in the chute.
The hopper shall be self closing and sealing, have a 1½ hour fire rating and be hand
operable.
2.4 Floor Support Frames
1. The manufacturer shall provide 35 x 35 x 5mm R.S.A. frames with welded clamp
bands, the clamp band have a 5mm rubber insert, as a sound insulator. All fixing nuts
and bolts to be provided. The frame shall be cold galvanized after manufacture.
2.5 Discharge
1. The manufacturer will provide a (4.0mm) stainless steel angled discharge to be

connected to the underside of a fire shutter door. The fire shutter door shall be
automatic in operation and be capable of cutting off the chute and its shaft, from the
refuse room. The fire shutter door will have a 165°F fusible link and a (1) one hour
fire rating.
2.6 Chute Cleaning
1. The manufacturer shall provide a factory fitted electrically powered automatic chute
cleaning system. The chute cleaning system to be fitted above the top most entry
section, shall have its own separate housing and side hung, stainless steel faced
lockable access door. The cleaning system shall consist of a cylindrical housing, with
two bands of stiff nylon brushes, firmly attached, a geared electric motor, cable,
stabilizing weight, flushing head spray and the manufacturers standard electric logic
control installed to ensure efficient cleaning of the internal surfaces of the chute.
2.7 Disinfectant and Sanitizing Unit
1. A factory fitted disinfectant and sanitizing unit shall be provided. The unit shall be
automatic in operation, and capable of injecting odour counteractant into the water
supply of the automatic brush cleaning system.
Note : Two Water Supply points will be provided by the MEP Contractor on the roof,
all other works shall be by the Garbage Chute Contractor
2.8 Ventilation
1. The chute shall extend full diameter (300-450mm) through the roof, terminating 1.2m
above roof level, with a weathering cowl. The manufacturer shall provide a factory
fitted foul air exhaust fan, the fan to be fitted internally in the refuse chute, above roof
level. An access door will be provided for servicing the fan. The fan shall be 1/6HP,
class F, continuously rated, capable of a 200m³/hour air displacement. Electric supply
220/240V, 50Hz, 0.8A.
Note : Garbage Chute Contractor to make connection of ventilator fan to control

panel.
2.9 Sound Damping
1. A total vertical length of all exterior surfaces of the refuse chutes shall have a factory
applied coating of Revac DC 1010 sound damping compound. The coating shall be
applied at the rate of 1.7 kgs/m³, or to give a coating of not less than 2mm, in
thickness.
2.10 Chute Construction
1. The chute shall be fully factory assembled, and all joint except those required to
separate for shipment and installation shall be lock seamed or welded, where
required. The hopper doors shall be bolted in place on the entry sections and
checked to ensure proper alignment with the inner baffle plate. All chute sections
shall fit inside the section below and there shall no bolts, rivets or other projections
inside the chute to impede the free flow of falling refuse. A minimum of one slip or
telescopic joint per storey shall be allowed to give working tolerance. The
manufacturer shall provide sealant to ensure all joints are watertight and the
manufacturer shall provide all other equipment necessary to install his product.
2.11 Compactor
1. One No. Kohlman Eng. Corp. (USA) “Kompac-4” compactor or similar approved.
2. Equipment: The compactor shall be hydraulically operated, top loading, stationary

waste compactor. Hopper and mainframe section shall be of one piece A36 steel
plate, ¼". Floor plate shall be ¼" abrasive resistant plate (min, 212BHN). All internal
sections shall have fully welded seams. Overall length of compactor shall not exceed
48". Rate of displacement shall not be less than 70 cubic yards/hr.
3. Operation: The compactor shall start and stop automatically with the aid of a reliable
photo-eye sensor. The sensor shall be fitted with a time delay device to prevent
movement of the ram until garbage has filled the compaction chamber. The home
position of the ram shall be in the retract position.
4. The compactor shall be fitted with an automatic shut down device to prevent
unnecessary running of the compactor should the sensor become blocked or dirty.
Extend and retract operation of the ram shall be controlled by a microprocessor
without the use of limit switches or relays.
5. Features: Almost full indicator; full indicator with compactor shut down; Electrical
interlock on hopper door; Key start manual forward and reverse controls; Emergency
stop button, U.L. listed enclosure.
6. Installation: Compactor shall be firmly fixed to the foundation with ¾" anchor bolts.
Power pack shall be located in a protected area away from compactor and elevated a
minimum of 18 inches from the ground.
2.12 Hot Dipped Galvanized Garbage Trolleys
1. Hot dipped galvanized trolleys with heavy duty castor wheels and brakes, of capacity
and quantity as shown on the drawings, compatible to Municipality trash vehicles to
be provided. The containers shall be modified to suit the compactor and are to be
clamped to the compactor with an eye bolt for easy removal and fixation.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Equipment
1. Shall be protected at all times from physical damage. Immediately upon delivery on
site the equipment shall be stored in a safe and weatherproof location.
3.2 Construction Waste

1. Under no circumstances shall the chute be used for construction waste.
3.3 Inspection prior to Installation

1. The manufacturer shall inspect the area of installation; verify any dimensions, correct
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
3.4 Installation
1. The manufacturer shall provide properly experienced technicians from his own staff,
to install the chutes and compactor. The chutes shall be installed in compliance with
the manufacturer’s standard instructions and shop drawings.
3.5 Testing and Commissioning

1. The manufacturer’s technician shall test and commission the refuse chute system,
after repairing or replacing any damaged parts.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 11010 - MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT- WINDOW CLEANING EQUIPMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 PART 1: GENERAL ................................................................................... 2
2.0 PART 2; PRODUCTS ................................................................................. 5
3.0 PART 3; EXECUTION ................................................................................ 7
SECTION 11010 – Maintenance Equipment- Window Cleaning Equipments Page 1 of 9
SECTION 11010 - MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT- WINDOW CLEANING EQUIPMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
This section includes supply, installation, testing, commissioning, training of operators and one year
warranty period for the maintenance of the Façade Cleaning Equipment.
The primary purpose of the facade cleaning equipment is to regularly clean the facades of the building.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 10 00 Structural Steel Work: Structural Steel: Structural support and reinforcing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A1201.1 – Safety requirements for powered platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance.
B. AISC 303 – Code of standard practice for steel buildings and bridges, including the “commentary” thereto.
C. AISC 360 – Specifications for structural steel building, load and resistance factor design, including”
commentary” thereto.
D. ASME A120.1-2001 – Safety requirements for powered platforms and travelling ladders and gantries for
building maintenance.
E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI/IWCA I-14.1 – Window Cleaning Safety 2002.
F. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code, Aluminum.
G. AWS D1.2 – Structural Welding Code.
H. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code.
I. Underwriters Laboratories – UL Listings.
J. California/OSHA Title 8 Articles 5 and 6.
1.4 SYSTEM Description
Facade cleaning system shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
1. Aluminum Monorails with Face Mounted Monorails Brackets

2. Davit System
3. Roof Trolley System
4. Powered cradle with a safe working load of 240kg– (Number of cradles shall be as stipulated in the
drawings).
1.5 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIRMENTS
A. General:
1. Design installation to provide continuous contact between the platform and the structure as the
platform descends and ascends.
2. Design equipment under the direction of a professional engineer registered in the state where the
project is located.
3. Design structural members with a minimum 10:1 safety factor based on ultimate strength and
normal operating conditions. All stresses and deflections are limited in accordance with governing
codes and regulations.
4. Wire Ropes shall be completely capable of supporting the intended loads and have a factor of safety
of at least 10.
5. All welding shall comply with BS requirements and shall be performed by welders qualified in
accordance with BS procedures.
6. Bolting: Comply with the relevant codes and standards requirements.
7. Materials: All work including bolts and fasteners shall be fabricated from structural steel, structural
aluminium or structural stainless steel.
B. Wind:
1. Design installations to withstand 25 miles per hour wind velocities while being used under normal
operations and to be fully operational at wind velocities up to 50 miles per hour.
2. Design installations to withstand 100 miles per hour wind velocity when in their secured stored
positions.
3. Exposed areas subjected to wind pressure shall be the total areas of all portions of the exposed
parts with no shielding effect of one element by another elsewhere the distance between elements
is four times or more than the smaller projected area of the windward element.
C. Performance:
Comply with the most stringent requirements of applicable codes and other statutory requirements, including
the current requirements of the following:
1. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): OSHA Part 1910, paragraph 1920.66, “Power
Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance”.
2. ANSI/IWCA I-14.1 – Window Cleaning Safety.
3. National Electric Code including UL listed electrical components.
4. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): AISC “Load and Resistance Factor Design
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings”, including the “Commentary” thereto and AISC “Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Building and Bridges” including the “Commentary” thereto.
5. American Welding Society (AWS): AWSD 1.1 “Structural Welding Code, Steel”, AWSD 1.2
“Structural Welding Code”, Aluminum.
6. California/OSHA Title 8 Articles 5 & 6.
7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME A120.1-2001, Safety Requirements for powered
platforms for Building Maintenance.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufactures data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Description of major items of equipment and catalogue cut sheets.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
B. Shop drawings: Dimensioned shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including
anchorage, accessories and finish, and with general arrangement of the equipment and their working
positions. Include location and characteristics of required electrical connections.
C. Structural Calculations: Calculations prepared and certified by a Licensed Professional Engineer

registered in the state where the project is located. Include design assumptions and method of design
including loads imposed on the building structure and curtain wall.
D. Selection Samples: For each finished product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing
manufacturer’s full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and
physical properties.
F. Manufacturer’s Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manuals that are bound and neatly labeled describing operation and
maintenance of all equipment installed including cleaning materials and methods and a detailed rescue plan.
1. Provide listing of replacement parts, including identifying numbers and ordering instructions.
2. Provide a sample inspection log for Building Owner’s use in recording inspections; include recommended
list of daily, weekly, periodic, and bi-annually inspections.
H. Project Record Documents: Submit project as-built drawings showing actual installed locations and
configuration, and record specifications documenting all changes to original design criteria, wiring diagrams
and other specification requirements.
A. Manufacturer/Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum ten (10) years experience in manufacturing and
installing of façade maintenance equipment, with documented experience with installations of type specified.
B. Perform all tests required by local regulatory authorities. Required tests shall be made in the presence of
the authorized representative of such local authorities and the Façade Maintenance Equipment
manufacturer and installer shall issue a certificate of adequacy for the equipment, installation and testing.
A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Protect material from exposure to moisture.
C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weather tight location.
D. Sore and dispose of solvent-based material, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in
accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by
manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside
manufacturer’s absolute limits.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with other operations and installation of exterior façade, roof deck, structural supports,
embedded anchors and roofing materials to avoid damage to installed material and components.
B. Coordinate with other operations and installation of electrical service and locations of panels.
1.11 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
Furnish full warranty period maintenance and call back service on equipment for a period of one (1) year
from the date of handing over of the equipment. Service shall include regular examinations by a competent
and trained mechanic to clean, oil and adjust the apparatus, making repairs, as may be required and
replacing worn parts when necessary, except such parts necessitated by misuse, accidents or negligence
not caused by those doing the work of this section in which case cost of such parts shall be paid for by the
Owner.
Carry out maintenance services including emergency call back during regular working hours and days. Firm
performing work of this section shall be able to show successful experience in the complete maintenance of
such equipment and that it employs competent personnel to handle this service. Perform all maintenance
by personnel under the supervision and in the direct employ of the firm doing work of this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION – GENERAL

Quality of work shall be best trade modern shop and field practice known to recognised manufacturers
specialising in this type of work. Accurately fit joints and intersecting members in true planes with adequate
fastening.
Fit and assemble work in shop where possible. Execute according to details and reviewed shop drawings.
Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in shop.
Fabricate finished work free from distortion, weld spatter and defects detrimental to appearance and
performance.
Weld all connections unless otherwise permitted.
Where welding is not possible use approved bolted connections. Fastenings shall be at adequate spacing.
Exposed fastenings shall be of the same materials, colour and finish of the base metal on which they occur.
2.2 SYSTEMS:
2.2.1 MONORAIL SYSTEM:

The monorail shall be provided with horizontal access system, fixed around the perimeter of the building
structure. The traversing trolleys, from which the cradle is suspended, shall travel along the monorail to
reach the various parts of the building. The effort required to traverse the trolleys should be as minimum as
possible so that it is possible to move by hand. The trolleys are equipped with separate connection shackles
for primary and secondary hoist ropes. The rail is Aluminium profile. The brackets shall be galvanised steel
and fixed to the building structure by 3 mounting bolts.
Specifications:
Track section Type : Face mounted type extruded track
Track material : Aluminium
Support bracket : Hot dip galvanised steel
Mounting of Track : Horizontal support from the parapet wall
Design load for the track support : To be confirmed during shop drawings.
Support spacing of track : 2000 mm typically and 250mm at corners and bends
Monorail trolley type : Manually traverse
Suspended height : To suit the building height
Monorail surface finish : Powder coated (standard RAL colour)
Support bracket surface finish : Hot dip galvanised and epoxy Painted (standard RAL colour)
2.2.2 POWERED MODULAR STAGE PLATFORM
A. The self-powered modular stage platform fabricated of aluminum to give a lightweight and rigid structure.
The stage is permanently enclosed to a height of 42 inches (1067mm) with aluminum-perforated sheet.
The deck shall consist of aluminum-extruded sections with a non-slip surface.
Provide wheels or casters on all platform sections.
B. Provide 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) minimum diameter non-marking façade rollers at the inboard side of the
platform. The roller assemblies shall be designed to maintain contact with the building facades.
C. Operating speed of the platform, during ascent or decent, shall be approximately 35 feet per minute (11
mm/sec).
D. Provide two emergency stop switches, one at each operator’s stations that shall stop any further platform
travel, up or down, after either is activated.
E. Provide with individual controls for each hoist for raising, lowering and leveling and leveling of the
platform.
F. Provide a platform overload and slack wire device at each hoist.
G. Provide an upper travel limit switch at the top fairlead of each hoist with an interlock system to prevent
further upward movement in the event the platform contacts the support.
H. Provide a painted metal sign, attached to the platform, stating the maximum load capacity.
I. Provide a fire extinguisher mounted on the platform.
J. Provide lower obstruction detectors that will stop any further downward travel after contacting an
obstruction from below.
K. Provide a level sensing system that will prevent the platform from being out-of-level.
L. All connectors, bolts, self-locking nuts, washers, etc. shall be stainless steel.
M. Provide a factory installed 5/16-inch (8 mm) diameter horizontal galvanized wire rope safety (static) line
at the rear midrail level of the stage platform for the attachment of the lanyards from the worker’s fall
protection equipment. The static line shall be secured to a structural member of the platform’s deck at both
ends. The connections shall be capable of sustaining a minimum of 5000 pounds (2268 kg) before failure.
N. Device shall be provided to lower the platform manually, at a controlled rate, in case of an emergency.
2.3 BMU CRADLE

The Cradle to be constructed from fully welded mild steel sections, Galvanised. Aluminium alloy cladding is
to be fitted to the outside of the Cradle to give a good appearance & protection for the operator. The cradle
to have power operated steel wire climbing winch. The winch to be push button operated & to have
comprehensive safety devices.
In the event of a break down or power failure provision should be there for manual operation. One
secondary safety wire is to be provided in addition to the winch wire of the cradle with Safety device.
BMU CRADLE SPECIFICATIONS
Carrying capacity (SWL): 240 Kg

Carrying capacity-Number of persons 2 Persons
External Dimension: 2250 mm x 950 mm x 1680 (minimum)
Total Power Consumption : 3 Kw
Hoisting Speed 10 m/min
HOISTING SYSTEM
Number of Winches 2
Motor Type TEFC Brake Motor
Rated Power 0.75 KW
Phase 3
Rated Voltage 380-415 V
Motor 1400 rpm
Insulation Class F
Method of starting Direct On line
Enclosure IP 55
Wire Rope Diameter 8.4 mm
WIRE ROPE REELER MOTOR

Type Power Operated
Number of reeler Motors 2
Rated Power 0.18 Kw
Phase 3
Rated Voltage 380-415 V
Motor 1360 rpm
Insulation Class F
Method of Starting Direct on line
Enclosure IP 55
Reduction Gear Ratio 1:80
REELER DRUM & WIRE ROPE

Number of drums 2
Diameter 400 mm
Width 120 mm
Number of Ropes 4 (2 Suspension 2 Safety)
Wire rope diameter 8.40 mm
Wire rope construction 5X26 RH cross lay, Light Performed
Material of Wire rope Galvanized Steel
Weight of Rope 0.255 Kg/mt
Breaking Load 47 KN
Rope Factor of safety 10:1
POWER SUPPLY
Supply 380-415V, 3ph, 5 Pin, 50 Hz, 16 Amp 4Core 2.5 to 4
Sq.mm Insulated Trailing Cable
CONTROL SYSTEM
Control Control voltage 24 V/48V controlled Via power cable
POWERED OPERATED CRADLE FEATURES:

The Cradle to be equipped with:
- Twin traction hoist
- two power operated wire rope reeler drum
- four galvanised steel wire ropes stored on powered reelers
- four castor wheels are to be provided at the bottom.
- aluminium cladding all over
- rubber beading at front and sides
- two fenders to allow cradle to rest lightly against the facade
- anti collision bar to detect obstructions while lowering the Cradle
- control box complete with emergency stop
- emergency descent facility
SAFETY FEATURES:
The following safety features shall be installed on the cradle.
Emergency Stop
Lower limit safety device
Upper limit safety device
Emergency manual descent
Overload safety device
Safety harness points
Anti-collision bar.
2.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
1. Electromechanical Service Break.

2. Mechanical overspread break.
3. Four Slack Wire Rope Detector.
4. Two Overload devices.
5. Primary & Secondary limit switch for each maneuver.
6. Two Emergency Stop Button (one for Cradle and one at roof).
7. Primary & Secondary upper limit switch.
8. Lower Limit Trip Bar.
9. End of Wire Rope limit switch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Design Engineer of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best results for
the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Examine work of other sections where such work influences the work of this section and report unsuitable
conditions to the Engineer
D. Supply anchors, inserts and templates required to be build-in by other sections in adequate time
E. Proceed with the installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacture’s instructions.

B. Furnish and install all Façade Maintenance Equipment and components in strict accordance with the
approved shop drawings and at such time when construction and finish of adjoining work will permit to avoid
delays to the construction process. All equipment shall be secured in place as shown on the approved shop
drawings and/or as herein specified by rigid approved methods.
A. Conduct full live load and operational tests, after completion of the installation. Perform tests under
maximum design live loading conditions over the full range of all the building surfaces, in accordance with
applicable standards.
B. At a time mutually agreeable to all parties, allow one full day to conduct operational demonstrations for
the Building Owner and/or the Building Owner’s representative, after completion of the operational tests.
C. Repair or replace any components and correct all deficiencies observed as a result of these tests and
demonstrations, and retest to assure compliance with this specification and regulatory requirements.
D. Approvals: Submit documentation required to obtain the necessary approval for the equipment installation
from the governing authority for operation of the façade maintenance system. Conduct field operational tests
for personnel from the governing authority (separate from the Building Owner’s demonstrations.)
E. Provide written certification that all components have been successfully operated, and will perform in
accordance with intent of this design.
3.4 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Instruct the Building Owner’s Representatives and selected User Personnel in the proper usage of the
equipment. Representative of the manufacturer shall, at time as selected by the Building Owner, spend on
man-day as needed at the building furnishing this instruction.
3.5 ADJUSTMENT, TESTING, training AND DEMONSTRATION
1 . When requested, run tests on machinery and safety devices to show their proper operation for
design specified and/or shown. Upon completion of the work, leave all apparatus in proper
adjustment and operation.
2. Provide competent instructors to train employees of the Owner, or others as directed, who will
be responsible for the care, adjustment and operation of the equipment. Forward a statement to
Engineer designating the personnel given the instructions and certifying that the instructions were
furnished.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 14 20 00 – ELEVATORS
Table of contents
1.0 GENERAL…………………………… 2
1.1 SUMMARY……………….……………………………………………………. 2
1.2 REFERENCES………………….……………………………………………. 2
1.3 RELATED WORK ……………………………………………………….…… 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE……………………………………………………… 3
1.5 BUILDER'S WORK AND ATTENDANCE................................................. 3
1.6 AS-FITTED DRAWING AND SERVICE MAUALS ................................... 3
1.7 CAPACITY ................................................................................................ 3
1.8 SPEED ...................................................................................................... 3
1.9 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................... 3
2.0 PRODUCTS…………………………………………………………………... 3
2.1 ELECTRICAL ELEVATOR ....................................................................... 3

2.2 OPERATION............................................................................................. 5
3.0 EXECUTION …………………………………………………………………. 9
3.1 PRE-EXCUTION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 9

3.2 SCHEDULE OF ELEVATORS ............................................................... 10
DIVISION 14 – Conveying Equipment

SECTION 14 20 00 – Elevators Page 1 of 18
SECTION 14 20 00 - ELEVATORS
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. The contractor shall design, supply, install, test and commission and hand over
the complete elevator installation intended to be used in this project as
manufactured by and approved manufacturer and in accordance with drawings,
specifications and to the approval of the Engineer.
2. The general requirements of the elevators and particular specifications are given
in the Schedules at the end of the specification.
3. The Contractor shall commence the electrical installation from the circuit breakers
provided in the machine room for this purpose. All the works shall be coordinated
with the other Contractors prior to installation, so that there will be no areas of
incompatibility.
4. The elevator system shall be equipped with traction machinery and associated
traction equipment, elevator cars, solid state control systems and all other
equipment and accessories required to provide a complete, modern, durable and
efficient vertical transport system.
5. All the electrical equipment shall be compatible with the available electrical system
of the building, as specified under Electrical Section.
6. All the components shall be selected to provide satisfactory operation under
prevailing environmental conditions at site.
7. The contractor shall be responsible for the complete maintenance of the elevator
for a period of 12 months from the date of acceptance by the Engineer of the
complete elevator installation and shall include for cleaning, oiling and inspection
of the elevator and all the associated equipment at periods of one month and to
include for all emergency calls throughout the 24 hours of the day through the
failure of the elevator to operate normally.
8. A monthly inspection sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer immediately after
each monthly inspection and cleaning and greasing.
9. The Contractor shall also give notice that any fault notified will receive immediate
attention on the day of the notification.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. Latest editions of all relevant British Standards (BS) / American Society For
Testing and Materials (ASTM) / Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) shall be used
including those inter.
2. Any differences between their requirements and this specification shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
3. Conform to General Requirements of Electrical Services.
1.3 RELATED WORK

1. The Sub-Contractor should carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for
requirements which affect the work of this section.
2. Where materials used in this section (e.g. concrete and reinforcement) have been
specified elsewhere in this document, the relevant clauses shall apply to this
section.

3. Materials that have not been individually specified shall be of first class quality and
the minimum standard acceptable shall be the relevant British standard / JIS
where applicable.

1. The Elevator shall be supplied and installed BY AN APPROVED
MANUFACTURER TO THE ENGINEER’S APPROVAL.
2. The work will be carried out concurrently with the work of the Building Contract
and the Main Contractor will be required to carry out certain work in connection
with the Specialist Sub-contract.
3. Manufacturing, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and material
furnished under requirement of this specification shall conform to the latest
publications or standard rules of the related local authorities and in accordance
with relevant BS / ASTM / JIS standards.
1.5 BUILDER'S WORK AND ATTENDANCE

1. The main contractor is to allow for all builders work as per requirements of the
Elevator Sub-contractor listed elsewhere in connection with the elevator
installation.
2. The Main Contractor shall also provide normal attendance including all usual
facilities for the execution of the Specialist Sub-contract.
1.6 AS-FITTED DRAWINGS AND SERVICE MANUALS

1. On completion of the elevator installation and at least one week prior to the date of
inspection, the contractor shall hand over to the Engineer as-fitted elevator
installation drawings. Two sets of instruction manuals for general running and
maintenance and repair are to be provided.
1.7 CAPACITY
1. Each Elevator shall have a safe carrying load inclusive of weight of complete car
cable and ropes and in accordance with the attached schedule.
1.8 SPEED
2. The rated speed of the elevators shall be as specified in the Schedule.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be carried out in accordance with Section 01 00 00 General
Requirements.
Submittals shall include but not limited to:
Manufacturer technical data, test reports, installation instruction, shop drawings,
Engineering data, all technical schedules dully filled and signed, material submittals.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRIC ELEVATOR

1. TRACTION MACHINE:
a. The elevator shall be equipped with variable voltage and variable frequency
controlled geared motors, having stepless, smooth speed time characteristics.

b. The traction machines shall be designed to meet the severe service condition
encountered in the elevator operation.
c. Traction sheave, hoisting motor, electromagnetic holding brakes etc. shall be
mounted on a heavy steel bed plate. The steel bed frame shall be mounted
on a suitable vibration damper to isolate the machines from the structure of
the building.
d. All rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ensure
smooth running. All the rotating electrical machinery shall be fitted with
microtherms, to provide overload protection.
e. The winding insulation levels of the motors shall be of Insulation Class `b'.
2. MOTOR DRIVE:
a. The variable voltage, variable frequency motor drive [VVVF] unit will control
the motor speed using a microprocessor.
b. The VVVF system will be provided with a converter which performs AC-to-DC
conversion and an inverter which is designed to invert DC to three-phase
variable voltage variable frequency AC. The inverter will give an output of
sinusoidal current with zero [0] through fifty [50] hertz by application of pulse
width modulation technology.
c. The inverter will control voltage and frequency continuously and accurately in
accordance with speed command signal which is performed by a
microprocessor in the elevator controller.
d. The VVVF drive unit will be capable of keeping the elevator service under the
following condition:
• Supply line voltage fluctuation: - 10% to +5% from the rated voltage.
• Frequency variation: ± 2% from the rated frequency
e. The VVVF drive unit will be provided with contactors for removing the power
from the motor of the traction machine. The contactors will open each time
the car stops. The brake of the traction machine will be applied while the
contacts drop out.
f. A pulse rotary encoder will detect the actual speed of the car. The difference
between the speed command signal and the actual speed measured by the
pulse rotary encoder will control the motor speed while the car is accelerating,
decelerating and landing.
g. Protective devices will ensure to open the main circuit between the VVVF unit
and the motor of the traction machine to stop the elevator when one of the
following conditions occurs:
h. Phase reversal, phase failure, failure of supply voltage, overcurrent,
overheating of thyristor and transistor, operation of any safety device.
3. CONTROL SYSTEM:
a. The control system will consist of the VVVF motor drive unit and a
computerized controller. A computer controlled regulator will control the car
speed by comparing the actual car speed detected by a pulse-rotary encoder
with an ideal speed pattern generated by a microprocessor.
b. While the car is accelerating, the ideal accelerating pattern will be generated
by the microprocessor to obtain the smooth and optimum acceleration.
c. While the car is decelerating, the microprocessor will calculate and provide the
ideal speed pattern to obtain the comfortable and stable riding performance.

d. At landing, a smooth landing pattern will be generated by a microprocessor,

and as soon as the car has stopped, the mechanical brake will be applied to
hold the car.
2.2 OPERATION
1. IF SINGLE CAR:
a. The operation will be of UP/DOWN selective collective type.
b. The operating equipment will consist of a series of micro touch buttons in THE
car numbered to correspond to the various landings, a single riser of "Up" and
"Down" buttons at the intermediate landings and single button at the terminal
landings, all connected electrically with the microprocessor governing floor
selection and direction of travel to supply the operation described below.
c. THE car will be normally parked with doors closed at the main floor.
d. THE car will answer its car calls of all floors respectively.
e. Response to hall calls will be on the basis of same direction priority response,
long waiting time prevention etc.,
2. IF TWO CAR GROUP AND ABOVE:

a. The operation will be of GROUP selective collective type WITH Artificial
Intelligence and Fuzzy Logic.
b. The operating equipment will consist of a series of micro touch buttons in each
car numbered to correspond to the various landings, a single riser of "Up" and
"Down" buttons at the intermediate landings and single button at the terminal
landings, all connected electrically with the microprocessor governing floor
selection and direction of travel to supply the operation described below.
c. One car will be normally parked with doors closed at the main floor and the
other will be a "Free" car which parks with doors closed at its last call floor.
d. Each car will answer its car calls of all floors respectively.
e. The microprocessor calculates penalty values for such things as by-passing,
reversal and response by distantly positioned elevators and assigns the call to
the elevator that will minimize the total penalty value.
f. Response to hall calls will be on the basis of same direction priority response,
nearest cage response, long waiting time prevention, car bunching prevention
etc.
3. HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
a. GUIDE RAILS:
• For smooth running of the counterweight and the elevator car, guide rails
with steel tee sections shall be installed, covering the entire height of the
elevator shaft. The rails shall rest on the hoistway pit to prevent exerting
any physical forces on hoistway ceiling or walls of the building.
• Proper expansion joints shall be provided to withstand forces created on
temperature variations.
b. HOISTING ROPES: Bright steel wire ropes with fibre cores of adequate cross-
section manufactured or steel wire ropes with adequate cross-section,
manufactured.

c. GOVERNOR ROPES: These shall be manufactured similar to hoisting ropes.

The two ends shall be securely linked to the car and attached to the safety
gear operating level. The governor ropes shall be tensioned by a weight-
loaded device located in the pit.
d. COUNTERWEIGHT: Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel framework shall be
provided to balance the weight of the car and the specified capacity.
e. BUFFERS:
• OIL type buffers shall be fitted in the hoistway pit beneath both car and the
counterweight. These shall be securely mounted on continuous RS
channels and correctly disposed relative to the car and the counterweight.
• The plunger shall be of mild steel, accurately machined and designed to
provide very high safety factor. A toughened rubber bumper shall be fitted
to the top of the plunger to withstand the impact of the steel buffer plates
mounted on the underside of the car and the counterweight. An oil gauge
shall be provided to check the oil level.
4. TRAVELLING CABLES: The travelling cables shall be 450V/750V grade multi-
core with stranded high conductivity copper conductors, especially designed for
elevator duty. These cables shall be properly supported by retaining straps and
individual cable clamps.
5. SAFETY EQUIPMENT
a. The gradual type safety system, comprising of a close loop roping system,
over-speed centrifugal governor, safety gear equipment etc. shall be provided.
b. The operation of the system shall be such that if the car overspeeds in the
downward direction, the governor jaws shall trip, operating the safety gear. It
shall, in sequence, cut off the motor power supply, apply normal brakes and
engage the safety gear gibs when the safety gear gibs engage with the car
guides. It shall apply a constant retarding force to bring the car to a gradual
and smooth stop within defined limits.
c. Re-setting of the safety devices shall be possible by moving the car in upward
direction.
d. Over Travel: Over travel limit switches shall be provided at the top and bottom
of the terminal landings to disconnect the power supply and apply brakes to
bring the car to safe stop position in the event of an over travel in either
direction.
e. Evacuation Devices: Provision shall be made to move the car manually from
the machine room to a nearest landing in either direction to facilitate
evacuation of passengers during a power failure.
f. Fireman Emergency Operation:
• Fire Emergency Operation Button enclosed in a breaking glass shall be
installed near the entrance on the main landing and shall operate any one
of the elevator under conditions of emergency, in the event of fire.
• When the Fireman Emergency Call Button is pressed, it shall immediately
disconnect the elevator under normal automatic operation and the car
shall return to the main landing. It shall not register any hall calls, so that
the passengers will not wait for the elevator. The car shall then only
operate on the attendant operation and it shall start registering the hall
calls.
6. ELEVATOR CAR
a. The size of the car, interior design and decorations, ceiling and lighting and
other facilities shall be as called for in the schedule.

b. The car shall be of rigid steel framework with sound isolation designed and
manufactured all in accordance with relevant Sections.
c. The operating buttons and keys shall be as given in the relevant Section of the
Specification. The following facilities shall be provided for each car, in
addition to the items already specified.
d. Ventilation: Electric Ventilator mounted on car roof with proper vents to be
provided.
e. Emergency Lighting: Self contained, non-maintained emergency light, with a
trickle charger.
f. Emergency Exit: An Emergency Exit shall be provided on car roof. This door
shall be able to open either inside or outside. A safety electrical switch shall
be provided to prevent the car travelling when this emergency exit is open.
g. Intercommunication System: Intercommunication system between the car,
main landing and the machine room.
h. Working Platform: A working platform shall be provided on the roof of the car.
i. Car and Landing Doors: The car and landing doors shall be fully automatic,
two panel, automatic sliding doors. The TYPE AND finish of the doors shall
be as specified in the Schedule.
j. Door Operator: The door operator shall be high speed heavy duty, with a
VVVF controlled AC Motor. The inverter shall include high speed switching
device which inturn shall provide a smooth sine curve of output current to
assure smooth, quite and precise door control. The opening and closing
speeds of the doors shall be adjustable. The landing and car doors shall
operate in full synchronism. Advance door opening during car's approach to a
landing could be used to speed up passenger transfer.
k. Safety Features:
• Emergency unlocking key from landing side for evacuation and
maintenance work.
• Manual opening of the doors from inside the car, within landing zones
during power failure.
• Full door height safety-edge device in the leading edge of the car doors to
reverse the doors when there is any obstruction for closing.
• Electrical interlock to operate in conjunction with the car doors, so that
elevator cannot operate unless doors are closed.
• Overload indicator with buzzer. If the car is overloaded it shall prevent
from starting. The blinking overload indicator and the sounding buzzer
shall signal the overload condition to the passengers.
• Emergency light with trickle charger.
7. TESTING & COMMISSIONING
a. On completion, a thorough test of the elevators under the working conditions
shall be carried out in the presence of and to the approval of the Engineer.
b. All materials used must be of the highest quality and the best of their
respective kinds and must comply with the relevant . All weights necessary to
carry out the full load and overload tests must be provided by the Contractor
and removed after use.
c. The tests will include the following:
• No load current and voltage readings both on Ùp` and `Down` Circuits.
• Full load current and voltage readings both on Ùp` and `Down` Circuits.

• One and quarter load current and voltage readings both on Ùp` and
`Down` Circuits.
• Stalling current and voltage and time taken to operate overload.
• Overload protection.
• Gate sequence relays, if provided and installed.
• All interlocks.
• Collective control and priority sequences, if installed.
• Safety gear mechanism.
• Speeds on Up and Down travel with loadings and empty.
• Door contacts.
• Final terminal stopping device.
• Normal terminal stopping device.
• Insulation and earth continuity.
8. OPERATING PANELS AND INDICATORS:
a. Car Operating Panel
• The car operating panel of each elevator shall contain the following:
• Operating buttons numbered to correspond to the landing served with
acknowledge light for each button.
• Emergency call button.
• Door Open and Door Close Buttons.
• Intercom Station.
• Overload indicating lamp with buzzer.
• Car operating panels of all the passenger elevators to have a provision for
a card reader
• Unit and the requisite features to be incorporated in the elevator
controllers to accommodate the card reader functions
b. Landing Position Indicator: Car position indicator shall be provided for each
car, in the car and over the main landing entrance of each elevator. As the
elevator travels through the hoistway, its position shall be indicated by the
illumination of the numeral/letter corresponding to the landing at which the
elevator is stopped or passing. Indicators shall be properly designed for
better recognition with colour filters to provide good contrast. Travel direction
indicators shall also be included in this indicator.
c. Push Buttons and Indicator for Landing:
• Up and Down call buttons with indicator lights to show that the call has
been registered.
• Hall Indicators/Call Buttons to be provided as specified in the schedule.
• Fire Alarm call button in a break-glass fixture at the main landing.
9. CAR AND LANDING SILLS:
a. Sills manufactured as specified in the schedules shall be fitted at every
landing entrance and on the car platform for the entire width of the door
opening.

b. These sills shall be with integral grooves to act as guide for the bottom of the
door panels. The car sill shall be securely fitted to the car platform and the
landing sills securely fitted to the entrance threshold. These sills shall be
flushed with the finished floor level.
c. The sills shall be designed to provide adequate strength to support the loads
excerting on them, in addition to the safety and decorative entrance plate
appearance.
10. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF ELEVATORS:
a. General wiring throughout the installation shall be carried out as specified in
the Electrical Specifications. GI trunking shall be used wherever possible
instead of multiple conduits. GI conduits and flexible conduits shall be used
between trunking and apparatus.
b. Earthing of all the equipments shall be carried out as specified in Electrical
specification and as per IEE Regulations.
c. Distribution Equipment shall contain all protection equipment for motors and
circuits. These shall include overload protection, short-circuit protection, single
phasing protection, etc. as appropriate.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PRE-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

FOLLOWING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE MAIN CONTRACTOR AS PER
REQUIREMENT OF ELEVATOR CONTRACTORS:
1. Air-conditioner of suitable capacity, permanent 3 Phase 415V 50 HZ and 1 PH
240V 50HZ TPN + SPN circuit breakers of required capacity etc., in the lift
machine room.
2. Concrete sill projections/angle support at all landings.
3. Emergency standby generator of required capacity to run the elevator(s) in the
event of power failure.
4. Normally, closed type voltage free sensing contact(s) [rating of contact 125V DC
5A] with wiring from ATS/Generator panel to elevator control panel.
5. Provision of conduits with draw wire between elevator shaft and security/reception
for elevator interphone/supervisory panel.
6. Sufficient weather proof lockable storage accommodation to store the elevator
materials at ground floor near elevator shaft.
7. Normally open free sensing contact(s) with wiring from fire alarm panel to elevator
shaft, if automatic recalling of elevators during fire is required.
8. Supply and installation of tubular free standing scaffolding inside the elevator
shafts with working platform and removal thereof.
9. Temporary power supply for installation and testing purposes upto shaft and
machine room with breakers.
10. Corian/Marble flooring in the lift cabin.

SCHEDULE OF ELEVATORS
NUMBER OF ELEVATOR E01, E02, E03, E04, E05, E06
CARRYING CAPACITY 1200 KG (16 PERSONS)
SPEED 105 METRES/MINUTE [1.75 METRES/SECOND]
CONTROL SYSTEM VARIABLE VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY [VVVF]

VARIABLE INVERTER CONTROL WITH DATA NETWORK
SYSTEM
OPERATION 6 GROUP CONTROL WITH ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE,

FUZZY LOGIC – REFER TO THE DRAWINGS
NUMBER OF STOPS REFER TO DRAWINGS

AND OPENINGS
HOISTWAY SIZE AS PER DRAWINGS
CAR INTERNAL 1900 MM WIDTH x 1550 MM DEPTH X 2200 MM HEIGHT

DIMENSIONS
ELEVATOR CAR DESIGN

CEILING DESIGN & MATERIAL SELECTED FROM THE SUPPLIER
STANDARD RANGE; LIGHTING THROUGH
DOWNLIGHTS; VENTILATION BY MEANS OF ELECTRIC
BLOWER WITH SIDE VENTS.
CAR WALLS & ETCHED FINISH STAINLESS STEEL IN PATTERN.

CAR DOORS SELECTED TO CONSULTANT’S CHOICE FROM
MANUFACTURER’S STANDARD RANGE OF AT LEAST 25
PATTERNS.
METAL WORKS ENTRANCE COLUMN, CABIN TRANSOM PANEL AND

KICK PLATE IN HAIRLINE FINISHED STAINLESS STEEL.
CAR FLOORING 20MM RECESS WILL HAVE TO BE PROVIDED IN THE

CABIN PLATFORM TO TAKE FLOORING [FLOORING TO
BE GRANITE with PC RATE OF 500/- QAR/ sq.m AS
SUPPLY RATE, FIXING TO BE QOUTED BY THE MAIN
CONTRACTOR]
CAR SILL EXTRUDED HARD ALUMINIUM.
INDICATORS
AT ALL FLOORS
VERTICAL COMBINED UNIT COMPRISING OF DIGITAL
HALL POSITION INDICATOR, DIRECTIONAL ARROWS
AND MICRO STROKE CLICK AND TACTILE BUTTON
WHICH SELF ILLUMINATE ON REGISTRATION OF

CALLS. FACE PLATE WILL BE IN HAIRLINE FINISHED

STAINLESS STEEL.
ARCHITRAVE AT GROUND FLOOR

LINTEL AND SPLAYED DOOR FRAME TO COVER FULL
WALL THICKNESS IN MIRROR POLISHED STAINLESS
STEEL.
LANDING DOORS AT GROUND FLOOR

ETCHED PATTERN IN MIRROR POLISHED STAINLESS
STEEL AND PATTERN SELECTED TO CONSULTANT’S
CHOICE FROM MANUFACTURER’S STANDARD RANGE
OF ATLEAST 25 PATTERNS.
AT TYPICAL FLOORS
FINISHED IN HAIRLINE FINISHED STAINLESS STEEL.
ENTRANCE LANDING
SILLS EXTRUDED HARD ALUMINIUM.
DOOR OPERATION VVVF INVERTOR CONTROL DOOR DRIVE SYSTEM.
TYPE OF HOISTWAY POWER OPERATED 2 PANEL CENTRE OPENING

DOORS AT ALL FLOORS SLIDING DOORS
DOOR OPENING SIZE 1100MM WIDTH x 2100MM HEIGHT
CABIN INDICATORS BUILT-IN DIGITAL LED DOT-DISPLAY CAR POSITION

INDICATOR WITH DIRECTION ARROWS WILL HAVE TO
BE INCORPORATED ON TOP OF THE CAR OPERATING
PANEL TO FACILITATE BETTER VIEW OF THE POSITION
OF CAR COMFORTABLY EVEN DURING CROWDED
CONDITION.
CAR OPERATING PANEL CAR OPERATING PANEL WILL HAVE TO BE MOUNTED

ON THE FRONT RETURN PANEL OF THE CABIN FOR
BETTER OPERATIONAL CONVENIENCE WITH CALL
BUTTONS OF MICRO STROKE CLICK AND TACTILE
TYPE WHICH WILL ILLUMINATE ON REGISTRATION OF
A CALL. FACE PLATE WILL BE IN HAIRLINE FINISHED
STAINLESS STEEL.

SCHEDULE OF ELEVATORS
NUMBER OF ELEVATOR E07
CARRYING CAPACITY 1350 KG (18 PERSONS)
SPEED 105 METRES/MINUTE [1.75 METRES/SECOND]
CONTROL SYSTEM VARIABLE VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY [VVVF]

VARIABLE INVERTER CONTROL WITH DATA NETWORK
SYSTEM
OPERATION SIMPLEX SELECTIVE COLLECTIVE
NUMBER OF STOPS REFER TO DRAWINGS

AND OPENINGS
HOISTWAY SIZE AS PER DRAWINGS
CAR INTERNAL 1900 MM WIDTH x 1550 MM DEPTH X 2200 MM HEIGHT

DIMENSIONS
ELEVATOR CAR DESIGN

CEILING DESIGN & MATERIAL SELECTED FROM THE SUPPLIER
STANDARD RANGE; LIGHTING THROUGH
DOWNLIGHTS; VENTILATION BY MEANS OF ELECTRIC
BLOWER WITH SIDE VENTS.
CAR WALLS & HAIRLINE FINISHED STAINLESS STEEL IN PATTERN.

CAR DOORS SELECTED TO CONSULTANT’S CHOICE FROM
MANUFACTURER’S STANDARD RANGE OF AT LEAST 25
PATTERNS.
METAL WORKS ENTRANCE COLUMN, CABIN TRANSOM PANEL AND

KICK PLATE IN HAIRLINE FINISHED STAINLESS STEEL.
CAR FLOORING 20MM RECESS WILL HAVE TO BE PROVIDED IN THE

CABIN PLATFORM TO TAKE FLOORING [FLOORING TO
BE SELECTED FROM SUPPLIER STANDARD RANGE]
CAR SILL EXTRUDED HARD ALUMINIUM.
INDICATORS
AT ALL FLOORS
VERTICAL COMBINED UNIT COMPRISING OF DIGITAL
HALL POSITION INDICATOR, DIRECTIONAL ARROWS
AND MICRO STROKE CLICK AND TACTILE BUTTON
WHICH SELF ILLUMINATE ON REGISTRATION OF
CALLS. FACE PLATE WILL BE IN HAIRLINE FINISHED
STAINLESS STEEL.

ARCHITRAVE AT GROUND FLOOR

LINTEL AND SPLAYED DOOR FRAME TO COVER FULL
WALL THICKNESS IN MIRROR POLISHED STAINLESS
STEEL.
LANDING DOORS AT GROUND FLOOR

ETCHED PATTERN IN MIRROR POLISHED STAINLESS
STEEL AND PATTERN SELECTED TO CONSULTANT’S
CHOICE FROM MANUFACTURER’S STANDARD RANGE
OF ATLEAST 25 PATTERNS.
AT TYPICAL FLOORS
FINISHED IN HAIRLINE FINISHED STAINLESS STEEL.
ENTRANCE LANDING
SILLS EXTRUDED HARD ALUMINIUM.
DOOR OPERATION VVVF INVERTOR CONTROL DOOR DRIVE SYSTEM.
TYPE OF HOISTWAY POWER OPERATED 2 PANEL CENTRE OPENING

DOORS AT ALL FLOORS SLIDING DOORS
DOOR OPENING SIZE 1100MM WIDTH x 2100MM HEIGHT
CABIN INDICATORS BUILT-IN DIGITAL LED DOT-DISPLAY CAR POSITION

INDICATOR WITH DIRECTION ARROWS WILL HAVE TO
BE INCORPORATED ON TOP OF THE CAR OPERATING
PANEL TO FACILITATE BETTER VIEW OF THE POSITION
OF CAR COMFORTABLY EVEN DURING CROWDED
CONDITION.
CAR OPERATING PANEL CAR OPERATING PANEL WILL HAVE TO BE MOUNTED

ON THE FRONT RETURN PANEL OF THE CABIN FOR
BETTER OPERATIONAL CONVENIENCE WITH CALL
BUTTONS OF MICRO STROKE CLICK AND TACTILE
TYPE WHICH WILL ILLUMINATE ON REGISTRATION OF
A CALL. FACE PLATE WILL BE IN HAIRLINE FINISHED
STAINLESS STEEL.

SPECIAL FEATURES:
FIREMAN EMERGENCY OPERATION
CAR ARRIVAL CHIME.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING IN THE CAR WITH TRICKLE

CHARGER UNIT.
INTERPHONE FOR THREE WAY COMMUNICATION

BETWEEN THE ELEVATOR CABIN, MACHINE ROOM AND
SECURITY PERSONNEL AT GROUND FLOOR LOBBY
NEAR THE LIFT ENTRANCE.
OVERLOAD HOLDING STOP:

WHEN A CAR LOAD EXCEEDS PRE-DETERMINED
CAPACITY, THE ELEVATOR WILL STOP ITS OPERATION
WITH THE DOORS OPEN AT THE FLOOR AND A BUZZER
WILL FOUND. THE BUZZER WILL STOP WHEN ENOUGH
PASSENGERS HAVE EXITED THE CAR TO REDUCE THE
LOAD TO BELOW THE EXCESS CAPACITY.
SAFETY DOOR EDGE (ON BOTH SIDES):

EACH LEADING EDGE OF THE CAR DOOR PANELS CAN
BE EQUIPPED WITH A SAFETY DOOR EDGE. WHEN A
PASSENGER OR AN OBJECT TOUCHES ONE OF THE
EDGES, THE CLOSING DOORS WILL BE OPENED
IMMEDIATELY.
NEXT LANDING FACILITY WITH MAIN POWER SUPPLY

UNINTERRUPTED:
IF AN ELEVATOR DOOR BECOMES JAMMED FOR SOME
REASON, [EX. A PEBBLE] AND PASSENGERS ARE
UNABLE TO GET OFF AT THE DESIRED FLOOR, THE
ELEVATOR AUTOMATICALLY PROCEED TO THE NEXT
FLOOR WITH FUNCTIONING DOORS.
SAFE LANDING WITH MAIN POWER SUPPLY

UNINTERRUPTED:
THIS FEATURE IS DESIGNED TO PREVENT
PASSENGERS FROM BEING STRANDED IN THE CAR
WHEN AN ELEVATOR MALFUNCTIONS AND STOPS
BETWEEN THE FLOORS. THE SOURCE OF THIS
MALFUNCTION WILL BE AUTOMATICALLY SEARCHED
OUT AND WHEN ELEVATOR OPERATION IS
DETERMINED TO BE SAFE, THE CAR SHALL PROCEED
TO THE NEAREST SAFE LANDING AT REDUCED SPEED
AND THE DOORS THEN OPEN.
DOOR LOAD DETECTOR:

WHEN AN OBJECT IS CAUGHT IN OPENING/CLOSING
DOORS, THE DOORS WILL REVERSE ITS DIRECTION
WHEN AN EXCESS LOAD IS DETECTED. FOR
EXAMPLE, WHEN A PEBBLE BECOMES LODGED IN THE
DOOR TRACK, RATHER THAN FORCE ITSELF
OPEN/CLOSED, THE REVERSE CYCLE IS TO BE
REPEATED UNTIL THE PROBLEM IS ELIMINATED.
AUTOMATIC CAR LIGHT OFF AND CAR FAN OFF:

TO SAVE ENERGY, CAR LIGHTING AND VENTILATION

FAN ARE TURNED OFF AUTOMATICALLY IF THERE IS
NO CALL REGISTERED WITHIN A PREDETERMINED
PERIOD OF TIME.
DOOR NUDGING FEATURE:

IN THE EVENT OF ANY DOOR SAFETY DEVICE
MALFUNCTION, A TEMPORARY OVERRIDE FUNCTION
IS TO BE AUTOMATICALLY ENGAGED TO CLOSE THE
DOORS, THEREBY PREVENTING A FAULT IN ELEVATOR
OPERATION. ONCE THE DOORS CLOSE COMPLETELY,
THE OVERRIDE HAS TO BE CLEARED AND NORMAL
OPERATION RESUMES.
AUTOMATIC DOOR-OPEN TIME ADJUSTMENT:

THE SYSTEM JUDGES THE SITUATION WHETHER EACH
CAR STOPS RESPONDING TO A CAR CALL OR A HALL
CALL AND CONTROLS THE TIME THE DOORS STAY
OPEN ACCORDINGLY. THE TIME SPENT WAITING FOR
THE ELEVATOR IS THEREBY SHORTENED AND
OPERATING EFFICIENCY IS INCREASED.
INFRA-RED PROXIMITY DETECTOR FOR DOOR SAFETY:

THE PROXIMITY DETECTOR IS MOUNTED ONTO THE
TOP CORNER OF THE LEADING EDGE OF THE CAR
DOOR SENSES AND DETECTS A PERSON’S HAND OR
FOOT
WITHIN THE CURTAIN FIELD OF THE ELEVATOR
ENTRANCE, AND MAKES THE CLOSING DOORS OPEN.
ATTENTIVE ANNOUNCEMENT
A SYNTHESIZED VOICE INSTRUCTS PASSENGERS IN
CASE NORMAL OPERATION IS SUSPENDED (ENGLISH
ONLY).
CAR CALL ERASE:

IF THE WRONG FLOOR BUTTON IS PRESSED, IT CAN
BE CANCELED BY RAPIDLY PRESSING THE SAME
BUTTON TWICE.
FALSE CALL CANCELING - AUTOMATIC:
IF THE NUMBER OF CAR CALLS REGISTERED DOES
NOT CORRESPOND TO THE CAR LOAD, ALL CALLS ARE
CANCELED TO AVOID UNNECESSARY STOPS.
EXPEDITING OF DOOR CLOSE.
REPEATING OF DOOR CLOSE.
DOOR OPEN & DOOR CLOSE BUTTONS.
HALF BACK WALL BRONZE TINTED MIRROR
HAIRLINE FINISHED STAINLESS STEEL HANDRAIL ON

REAR SIDE OF THE CABIN
DC ALARM BELL.
HAND-WINDING OPERATION FOR EMERGENCY

PURPOSES.

SAFETY GRADUAL TYPE
BUFFERS OIL TYPE
GUIDE RAILS STEEL TEE SECTIONS.
COUNTERWEIGHTS CAST IRON BLOCKS ENCLOSED IN A STEEL FRAME.
POWER SUPPLY 380 VOLTS 3PHASE 50HERTZ FOR ELEVATOR

EQUIPMENT
LIGHTING SUPPLY 220 VOLTS 1 PHASE 50HERTZ FOR CABIN LIGHTING

AND VENTILATION.

PROJECT PARTICULARS:
A. Maintenance & Warrantee:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the lifts at his own
expense for duration of one year starting from the date of issue of the completion
certificate. Maintenance shall include replacement of parts or whole equipment that
shows any manufacturing or installation defects during operation.
The Contractor shall warrantee every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or
installation defects for a period of one year, starting from the date of issue of the
Completion Certificate. The Contractor shall supply two copies of a maintenance
manual for the lifts system in English.
B. Stainless Steel Grade:
The grade of stainless steel used shall be as per the supplier’s standards but not less
than Grade 304 / Grade 430.
C. Central Lift Management System:
The lift shall be equipped with Central Lift Management System, a panel to be
provided at the BMS room to provide the indications for the lifts direction, power
status (stopped power, failure, Normal power etc) in addition to the technical
indication about the normal status of the lift and emergency massages.
D. Technical and Operational Requirements
Provide communications/alarm link to the main control room, for use in an

emergency, and provide manufacturers concise instructions on passenger
extraction following breakdown.
All lifts are to be connected to the fire alarm system.
All lifts are to be provided with door safety sensor control (PIR) and mechanical
retractable door edges, for safe and convenient door operation.
“third party” independent testing of the lift installation to be priced.
Air conditioning units to be provided for each lift machine room to maintain the
maximum temperature.
Selected lifts shall be fitted with coloured Closed Circuit Television (CCTV), by
the Lift Sub-Contractor, which shall be connected to the main security control
room(s) and be compatible with the mall CCTV system. Type, mounting position
and finish to Engineers and Client approval.
Lift control software to be of a similar protocol, such that interface/integration to

other sub systems can be achieved. The Lift Control System shall be compatible
with the building management system for the project.
Minimum lighting level within the lift shaft and pits 50 lux (one metre above the
car roof and the pit floor).
Provide lift pits with water level sensors, to indicate presence and accumulation of
fluid within the pit.
The lift well lighting should incorporate emergency lighting (10 lux), to provide
illumination in the event of power failure.

Emergency lighting should be provided to the lift machine/motor/pulley rooms

(150 lux), to provide illumination in the event of power failure.
A weatherproof socket outlet (IP 65) shall be fitted for maintenance purpose
within each lift pit and on the top of the car.
Emergency stop switches to be located within the base of the lift pit, to allow
operation safely from the pit.
Specific Standards
The vertical transportation engineering will generally be based on, but not limited
to, British and European Standards, best practice guides and codes as follows:
− CIBSE Guide D
− Approved Document Part M 2003
− BS EN 81-1
− BS EN 81-28
− BS EN 81-70
− BS EN 81-72
− BS EN 115
− BS 5266-1
− BS 5655-2
− BS 5655-5
− BS 5655-6
− BS 5655-7
− BS 5655-8
− BS 5655-9
− BS 5655-10
− BS 5656-2
− BS 6262-4
− BS 8300
− BS 5588-5 (Fire fighting lifts only)
− BS 5588-8
− BS 7671
− BS 7801
− BS 7255
− BS ISO 4190-2
− BS ISO 18738
− Lifts Regulations 1997
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 40 00 – SANITARY WARE AND FIXTURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ...................................................................... 2
1.4 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING ........................................................................... 2
1.5 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 2
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ........................................................................................................ 2
DIVISION 22 – Plumbing
SECTION 22 40 00 – Sanitary Ware & Fixtures Page 1 of 2
SECTION 22 40 00 – SANITARY WARE AND FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This section includes specifications for supply of sanitary ware and fixtures for
bathrooms and toilets intended for use in the Works in accordance with drawings
including all the necessary accessories, fixing and installation fittings whether
specifically mentioned here in this section or not.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including

dimensions, finish information, details of function, and mounting details.
B. Selection Samples: Manufacturer's standard color chips for selection of colors

and finishes.
C. Verification Samples: Submit samples of each product specified, illustrating color

and finish.
A. Provide factory-applied strippable vinyl coating to finished surfaces; leave in

place until ready for final inspection.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1.4 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate supply with the main contractor and the installer.
B. Supply installation templates, required reinforcing, and recessed anchorage

devices in timely fashion to installers of related work that will receive products of
this section.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide replacement warranty against defects in materials as required under the

Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Material shall be supplied from an approved manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 22 – Plumbing
SECTION 22 40 00 – Sanitary Ware & Fixtures Page 2 of 2
SECTION 7200 ISULATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.0 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................ 4
Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection

SECTION 7200 Insulation Page 1 of 4
SECTION 7200 INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A. This section includes the thermal insulation works as indicated on the drawings.
1.2 Quality Assurance
A. Thermal Conductivity:
1. The Thickness shown on the drawings are for the Thermal Conductivity (k
Value at 75 degree F) of 0.20 specified for each material.
B. Fire & insurance rating:

1. Comply with the fire resistance, flammability and insurance rating as per the
code and authorities requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
A. Don’t proceed with the installation of insulation until subsequent work which conceals
the insulation is ready to be performed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
A. Rigid Foam insulation (RFI).

1. Extruded Polystyrene Plastic Board insulation:
a. Wall: Rigid Closed Cells Extruded Polystyrene Board complying with FS
HH-1-524C, Type 1 V, 25 psi Compressive strength; 7 perm-inch
maximum vapor transmission; 0.10% maximum water absorption, with
manufacturer standard size.
b. Integral Skin: except as otherwise indicated provide manufacturer
standard type extruded with integral with high density skin, with thermal
conductivity (k Value at 75 degree F) of 0.20.
B. Adhesive for bonding insulation: should be fire resistance to comply with the
manufacturer recommendation.
C. Mechanical Anchors: Stainless steel Grad 304 to comply with the manufacturer
recommendation.
D. Mastic Sealer: for bonding edge joints between units and filling voids in work to comply
with the manufacturer recommendation.
2.2 Warranty
The manufacturer shall offer a detailed warranty policy for a minimum period of one years.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Examination

3.2 Preparation
A. Manufacturer shall offer assistance and guidance to provide a template of irregular

shaped mat assemblies to ensure a proper installation.
B. Prepare surface to comply with the manufacturer recommendation.
3.3 Installation
recommendations.
B. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated, cut & fit
tightly around obstruction and fill voids with insulation.
C. Apply a single layer of insulation of the required thickness unless otherwise shown.
END OF SECTION

PART II – ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD WORK

SECTION 07 10 00 WATERPROOFING
SECTION 07 16 00 GRP LINING
SECTION 07 20 00 ROOFING SYSTEMS
SECTION 08 11 00 DOORS AND IRONMONGERY
SECTION 08 12 00 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS
SECTION 08 44 00 CURTAIN WALLS AND GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
SECTION 08 62 5 SKYLIGHTS
SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING
SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS
SECTION 09 20 00 PLASTER WORKS
SECTION 09 30 00 TILING
SECTION 09 50 00 CEILINGS
SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS (RAISED) FLOORING
SECTION 09 77 00 GRC
SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING
SECTION 10 14 53 ROAD MARKINGS & SIGNAGE
SECTION 10 26 13 CORNER GUARDS TO COLUMNS
SECTION 10 28 00 BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
SECTION 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS
SECTION 11 12 00 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11 80 00 GARBAGE DISPOSAL
SECTION 14 20 00 ELEVATORS
SECTION 22 40 00 SANITARY WARE & FIXTURES
SECTION 05100 ALUMINUM METAL WORKS
SECTION 06 201 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 202 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
SECTION 7200 INSULATION

SECTION 07600 CLADDING
SECTION 08815 INTERNAL GLAZING
SECTION 08970 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES WINDOW & ENTRANCES
SECTION 08980 GLAZING PARTICULAR
SECTION 10341 PREFABRICATED EXTERIOR SPECIALTIES - SPEED HUMP
SECTION 10342 PREFABRICATED EXTERIOR SPECIALTIES - BOLLARDS
SECTION 11010 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT – WINDOW CLEANING EQUIPMENT
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping Specification
PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS........................................................................................................................... 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................ 11

Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping Specification Page 1 of 12
PART 1 – GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide firestop systems consisting of a material, or combination of materials installed to
retain the integrity of fire resistance rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier
against the spread of flame, smoke and/or hot gases through penetrations, fire resistive
joints, and perimeter openings in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code
for this project.
B. Firestop systems shall be used in locations including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Penetrations through fire resistance rated floor and roof assemblies including both
empty openings and openings containing penetrants.
2. Penetrations through fire resistance rated wall assemblies including both empty
openings and openings containing penetrants.
3. Membrane penetrations in fire resistance rated wall assemblies where items
penetrate one side of the barrier.
4. Joints between fire resistance rated assemblies.
5. Perimeter gaps between rated floors/roofs and an exterior wall assembly.
C. Related Sections include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Thermal and Moisture Protection
2. Finishes
3. Plumbing
4. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
5. Electrical
6. Glazing & Curtain Walling
1.3 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code)
B. American Society For Testing and Materials Standards (ASTM):
1. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
2. ASTM E814: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
3. ASTM E1966: Test Method for Resistance of Building Joint Systems.

4. ASTM E1399: Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Measuring Minimum and
Maximum Joint Width.
5. ASTM E119: Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
6. ASTM E2174: Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops
7. ASTM E2307: Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Endurance of
Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multi Story Test
Apparatus (ISMA)
8. ASTM E2393-04 Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive
Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
1. UL Qualified Firestop Contractor Program.
2. UL 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
3. UL 723: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
4. UL 1479: Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
5. UL 2079: Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
D. UL Fire Resistance Directory -Volume 2:
1. Through-Penetration Firestop Devices (XHJI)
2. Fire Resistive Ratings (BXUV)
3. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)
4. Fill, Void, or Cavity Material (XHHW)
E. Factory Mutual Research (FM):
1. FM 4991: FM Approval Standard of Firestop Contractors – Class 4991
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping: The use of a material or combination of materials in a fire-rated structure
(wall or floor) where it has been breached, so as to restore the integrity of the fire rating
on that wall or floor.
B. System: The use of a specific firestop material or combination of materials in
conjunction with a specific wall or floor construction type and a specific penetrant(s).
C. Barrier: Any bearing or non-bearing wall or floor that has an hourly fire and smoke
rating.
D. Through-penetration: Any penetration of a fire-rated wall or floor that completely
breaches the barrier.
E. Membrane-penetration: Any penetration in a fire-rated wall or floor/roof-ceiling assembly
that breaches only one side of the barrier.
F. Fire Resistive/Construction Joint: Any gap, joint, or opening, whether static or dynamic,
between two fire rated barriers including where the top of a wall meets a floor; wall edge
to wall edge applications; floor edge to floor edge configurations; floor edge to wall.

G. Perimeter Barrier: Any gap, joint, or opening, whether static or dynamic, between a fire
rated floor assembly and an exterior wall assembly.
H. Approved Testing Agencies: Not limited to: Underwriters Laboratory (UL), Factory
Mutual (FM), Warnock Hersey, and Omega Point Laboratory (OPL).

A. Penetrations: Provide through-penetration and membrane-penetration firestop systems
that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, passage of smoke and other
hot gases according to requirements indicated, to restore the original fire-resistance
rating of assembly penetrated.
1. Provide and install complete penetration firestopping systems that have been tested
and approved by nationally accepted testing agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479
fire tests in a configuration that is representative of field conditions.
2. F-Rated Systems: Provide firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as determined
per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, but not less than one (1) hour or the fire resistance
rating of the assembly being penetrated.
3. T-Rated Systems: Provide firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-
ratings, as determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, where required by the Building
Code.
4. L- Rated Systems: Provide firestop systems with L- ratings less than 5cfm/sf.
5. W-Rated systems: Provide firestop systems that are resistant to water. For piping
penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant
through-penetration firestop systems.
6. For penetrations involving non-metallic, CPVC, PVC, or plastic piping, tubing or
conduit, provide firestop systems that are chemically compatible in accordance with
Manufacturer requirements.
7. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide firestop systems not requiring
removal of insulation.
8. For penetrations involving fire or fire/smoke dampers, only firestop products
approved by the damper manufacturer shall be installed in accordance with the
damper installation instructions.
B. Fire Resistive Joints: Provide joint systems with fire resistance assembly ratings
indicated, as determined by UL 2079 (ASTM E1399 and E1966), but not less than the
fire resistance assembly rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. Firestopping
assemblies must be capable of withstanding anticipated movements for the installed
field conditions.
1. For firestopping assemblies exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage,
provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
2. For floor penetrations exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop
systems capable of supporting floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or
by other means, as specified by the Architect.
3. L- Rated Systems: Provide firestop systems with L- ratings less than 5cfm/sf.

C. Firestopping products shall have flame spread ratings less than 25 and smoke-
developed ratings less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. Note: Firestop
products installed in plenum spaces shall have a smoke developed rating less that 50.
D. Engineering Judgment (EJ): Where there is no specific third party tested and classified
firestop system available for an installed condition, the Contractor shall obtain from the
firestopping material manufacturer an Engineering Judgment (EJ) to be submitted to the
Approving Authority, Design Professional and Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval
prior to installation. The EJ shall follow International Firestop Council (IFC) guidelines.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of firestopping product selected. Manufacturers
certification must verify that firestopping materials are free of asbestos, lead and contain
volatile organic compounds (VOCs) within limits of the local jurisdiction.
B. Design Listings: Submit system design listings, including illustrations, from a qualified
testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each firestop configuration.
C. Installation Instructions: Submit the manufacturer’s installation instruction for each
firestop assembly.
D. Where there is no specific third party tested and classified firestop system available for a
particular configuration, the Contractor shall obtain from the firestopping material
manufacturer an Engineering Judgment (EJ) for submittal.
E. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS): Submit for each type of firestopping product
selected.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Submit documents as per 1.7.
G. A quality control manual approved by FM or UL (if applicable).
H. Firestop Schedule: Submit schedule itemizing the following:
1. Manufacturer’s product reference numbers and/or drawing numbers.
2. Listing agency’s design number.
3. Penetrating Item Description/Limits: Material, size, insulated or uninsulated, and
combustibility.
4. Maximum allowable annular space or maximum size opening.
5. Wall type construction.
6. Floor type construction.
7. Hourly Fire resistance rating of wall or floor.
8. F rating.
9. T, L, and W rating, if applicable.
I. Firestop Application Log: A separate binder shall be prepared and kept on site for use by
the Inspection Agency and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. The binder shall contain
the following:
1. The binder shall be a three (3) ring binder.

2. Firestop Schedule (see appendix A)

3. All approved firestopping assemblies including engineering judgments shall be
provided and organized by trade.
4. Copy of manufacturer’s installation instruction for each firestop assembly.
5. A matrix or table of contents listing each assembly shall be provided.
6. The binder shall be updated as new firestop assemblies or EJ’s are added.
7. The binder shall be kept on-site at a location approved by the Owner.

A. Provide firestopping system design listings from UL, FM, Warnock Hersey or OPL in
accordance with the appropriate ASTM Standard(s) per article 1.5.
B. Contractor Qualifications: An acceptable Firestop Contractor shall be:
1. Licensed by State or Local Authority where applicable, or
2. FM Research approved in accordance with FM Standard 4991, or
3. UL Qualified Firestop Contractor, or
4. Meet the following requirements
i. Installation personnel shall be trained by the approved firestop manufacturer.
ii. The installation firm shall be experienced in installing firestop systems and fire
resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful
performance.
iii. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to
install manufacturer's products per specified tested and listed system
requirements.
iv. Minimum of three (3) years experience and shown to have successfully
completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects and provide references.
C. Single Source Limitations: Obtain firestop systems for all conditions from a single
manufacturer.
D. Materials from different firestop manufacturers shall not be installed in the same firestop
system or opening.
E. Firestopping material shall be asbestos and lead free and shall not incorporate nor
require the use of hazardous solvents.
F. Firestopping sealants must be flexible, allowing for normal movement.
G. Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling
back from contact surfaces such that a void is created.
H. Firestopping materials shall be moisture resistant, and may not dissolve in water after
curing.
I. Materials used shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation
instructions.

J. Identify installed firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of edge of the firestop
systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or
firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use
self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on
which labels are placed and provide a label material that will result in partial destruction
of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Firestop system designation of applicable testing and listing agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Firestop system manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
K. Inspection of penetrations through fire rated floor and wall assemblies shall be in
accordance with
ASTM E2174, Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops and
ASTM E2393-04 Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive
Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers. The Owner may engage a qualified,
independent inspection agency, or material testing agency to perform these inspections.
L. Field Mock-up Installations: Prior to installing firestopping, erect mock-up installations
for each type firestop system indicated in the Firestop Schedule to verify selections
made and to establish standard of quality and performance by which the firestopping
work will be judged by the Owner or Owner’s Representative. Obtain acceptance of
mock-up installations by the Owner or Owner’s Representative before start of
firestopping installation. Provide at least 72 hours notice to Owner or Owner’s
Representative prior to inspection.

A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages
with intact and legible manufacturer’s labels identifying product and manufacturer, date
of manufacture/expiration, lot number, listing agency’s classification marking, and mixing
instructions for multi-component materials.
B. Store and handle materials per manufacturer’s instructions to prevent deterioration or
damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
C. All firestop materials shall be installed prior to expiration date.

A. Environmental Limitations: Install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures
are within limits permitted by the manufacturer’s written instructions. Do not install
firestopping when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate per the manufacturers written instructions on the product’s Material Safety Data
Sheet.
C. Verify the condition of the substrates before starting work.
D. Care should be taken to ensure that firestopping materials are installed so as not to
contaminate adjacent surfaces.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate areas prior to firestopping installation with the Owner, Construction Manager
and/or all other Contractors.
B. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that firestopping
assemblies are installed according to specified requirements. Opening shall not exceed
maximum restrictions allowable for annular spacing per listing or acceptable Engineering
Judgments.
C. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to
accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.
D. Do not conceal firestopping installations until the Owner’s inspection agency or
Authorities Having Jurisdiction have examined each installation.
E. Schedule firestopping after installation of penetrants and joints but prior to concealing or
obstructing access to areas requiring firestopping.
F. Preinstallation Conference: This conference should be a joint meeting attended by the
Owner’s Representative and all prime contractors, respective firestopping sub-
contractors and firestopping company field advisor to review project requirements. The
agenda for the conference should include the following topics:
1. Review scope of work.
2. Review shop drawings and firestop application log.
3. Review mock-up requirements.
4. Discuss identification labels and locations.
5. Review schedule, coordination and sequencing with all trades.
6. Review any engineering judgments or other special requirements.
7. Function and frequency of inspections and testing labs.
G. Destructive testing shall be performed at mock up and at pre determined intervals
according to ASTM E 2174 and ASTM E 2393-04 by the inspector and with the installing
Contractor present. Inspector to test for in place installation conformance to tested and
listed system or engineering judgment details. Non conformances will result in additional
destructive testing, at the cost of the installer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Firestopping products specified in system design listings by approved testing agencies
may be used providing they conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular
space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate assembly.
B. Manufacturer of firestopping products shall have been successfully producing and
supplying these products for a period of not less than three years and be able to show
evidence of at least ten projects where similar products have been installed and
accepted.
C. Accessories: Provide components for each firestop system that is needed to install fill
materials and to comply with “Performance Requirements” Article. Use only
components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and by the approved testing
agencies for the firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to
the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
i. Slag wool fiber insulation.
ii. Foams or sealants used to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
iii. Fire-rated form board.
iv. Polyethylene/polyurethane backer rod.
v. Rigid polystyrene board.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Steel sleeves
D. All firestopping products and systems shall be designed and installed so that the basic
sealing system will allow the full restoration of the thermal and fire resistance properties
of the barrier being penetrated with minimal repair if penetrants are subsequently
removed.
2.2 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with firestopping
manufacturer’s written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if
required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform
quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
2.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by one of the following or
equivalent manufacturers:
1. Grace Construction Products.
2. Nelson Firestop Products.

3. Hilti Firestop Products.

4. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
5. RectorSeal Corporation (The).
6. Specified Technologies Inc.
7. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
8. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for opening
configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance.
C. Verify that all pipes, conduits, cables, and/or other items which penetrate fire-rated
construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of firestops.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing firestop systems to
comply with written recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following
requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of firestop systems.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with firestop systems. Remove loose particles
remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
3.3 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

A. General: Install firestop systems to comply with “Performance Requirements” article in
Part 1 and firestopping manufacturer’s written installation instructions and published
drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Installation of firestopping shall be performed by an applicator/installer qualified as
described in article 1.7.
C. Apply firestopping in accordance with approved testing agencies listed system designs
or manufacturer’s EJ per the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
D. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestop
products.
E. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire resistance ratings required.
F. Install joint forming/damming materials and other accessories required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths of installed firestopping material relative to joint widths that allow
optimum movement capability and achieve fire resistance ratings required.
G. Install metal framing, curtain wall insulation, mechanical attachments, safing materials
and firestop materials as applicable within the system design.
H. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following
results:

1. Fill voids, joints and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories,
and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they fully contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings
and penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
4. Tool non-sag firestop materials after their application and prior to the time skinning
begins. Use tooling agents approved by the firestopping manufacturer.
I. On vertical pipe penetrations, lift riser clamps to permit the installation of firestopping
around the entire pipe penetration. For penetrations involving fire or fire/smoke
dampers, only firestop products approved by the damper manufacturer shall be installed
in accordance with the damper installation instructions.

A. Inspecting Agency: Authorities Having Jurisdiction, the Owner, or Owner’s
Representative shall be allowed to perform random destructive testing during inspection
of firestop systems to verify compliance per listings or manufacturer’s installation
instructions. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable
Authorities Having Jurisdiction and inspection agencies. The contractor shall be
responsible to repair all tested assemblies with no cost to the owner.
B. Proceed with enclosing firestop systems with other construction only after inspections
are complete.
C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestop systems so they comply with
requirements.

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings, as Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by firestopping manufacturer(s)
and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. Leave finished work in neat,
clean condition with no evidence of spillovers or damage to adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated firestop systems immediately and install new materials to
produce firestop systems complying with specified requirements.

FIRESTOP SCHEDULE
Project No: Contractor Name and Address: Date Submitted:
Project Title: Supplier/Installer Name and Address: Company Field Advisor

Name and Address:
Manufacturer Name and Address:
Manufacturer's U.L., FM, Penetrating Item: Maximum Wall type Floor Fire F T L W
Product Warnock Material, Size, Allowable Construction Type Resistanc Ratin Ratin Rating Rating
Reference Hersey or Insulated, Annular Constru e Rating g g (if (if
Numbers and/or Omega Point Combustible, Joint, Space or ction of Wall or (floor availab availab
Drawing Lab Penetration Perimeter, etc. Maximum Floor s le) le)
Numbers Design Nos. Description: Size (Hourly) Only)
Opening
DE CONS
S. T.
Example No. 1 UL #130 Maximum 4" Steel P4 6" N.A. 1 Hour 1 N.A .
DCFSS-130 Pipe Non-Insulated CMU Hour
Example No. 2 UL #591 Maximum 4" PVC N.A N.A. UL # 3 Hour 1 2
5300-ICF88.01 Pipe . D916 Hour Hour
Exmple No. 3 CW-S-2006 Curtain 6” to 12” NA NA 4 ½” 2 Hour 2 NA 1
Wall/Perimeter Reinforc Hour CFM/
ed LW Lin
concrete Ft.
Revised 1/13/09 078400-Appendix A

Manufacturer's U.L., FM, Penetrating Item: Maximum Wall type Floor Fire F T L W
Product Warnock Material, Size, Allowable Construction Type Resistanc Ratin Ratin Rating Rating
Reference Hersey or Insulated, Annular Constru e Rating g g (if (if
Numbers and/or Omega Point Combustible, Joint, Space or ction of Wall or (floor availab availab
Drawing Lab Penetration Perimeter, etc. Maximum Floor s le) le)
Numbers Design Nos. Description: Size (Hourly) Only)
Opening
DE CONS
S. T.
Revised 1/13/09 078400-Appendix A

SECTION 08 11 00 - DOORS AND IROMANGARY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL………………………………………………………………………………… 2
1.1 SUMMARY………………………………………………………………………………....... 2
1.2 REFERENCES……………………………………………………………………………..... 2
1.3 QUALITY ……………………………………………………………………………………...5
1.4 SUBMISSIONS…………………………………………………………………………….... 6
1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE ……………………………………………...…6
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS…………………………………………………………………... 7
1.7 WARRANTIES………………………………………………………………………………. 7
1.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS……………………………………………….…...…8
1.9 TESTING …………………………………………………………………….……...………..8
2.0 PRODUCTS………………………………………………………………………………. 9
2.1 FLUSH PANEL DOORS………………………………………………………………….... 9

2.1 FIRE DOOR SETS………………………………………………………………………… 10
2.2 STEEL DOOR-FRAMES………………………………………………………………….. 10
2.2 TIMBER DOOR-FRAMES……………………………………………………….……….. 10
2.3 HARDWARE AND FURNITURE ……………………………………………………….…11
2.3 CLOSERS AND CONTROLLERS……………………………………………………….. 11
2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES ……………………………………………………………..….…12
2.3 KEYING AND CYLINDERS …………………………………………………………...…..13
2.3 CONSTRUCTION KEYING……………………………………………………….…..….. 13
2.4 HINGES………………………………………………………………………………...…... 14
2.4 SLIDING DOOR TRACKS ………………………………………………………….…..…15
2.5 ACCESSORIES ………………………………………………………………….……..….15
2.5 DOOR SEALS…………………………………………………………………………...….15
2.5 DOOR STOPS…………………………………………………………………….…..…... 15
2.3 FLASHINGS AND BARRIERS ………………………………………………….…..……16
2.5 AIR-TIGHT CONSTRUCTION………………………………………………….…..…… 16
2.6 APPLIED FACING TO DOORS …………………………………………………...……..16
3.0 EXECUTION ………………………………………………………………………………. 16
3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ……………………………………………..…16

3.2 DOOR-FRAME INSTALLATION……………………………………………………….... 16
3.3 DOOR INSTALLATION …………………………………………………………………...17
3.4 HARDWARE INSTALLATION ……………………………………………………………18
3.4 HAND-OVER OF KEYS …………………………………………………………………..18
3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND RECTIFICATION………………………………….. 18
3.6 COMPLETION DOCUMENTS…………………………………………………………... 18
SECTION 08 11 00 DOORS AND IRONMONGERY Page 1 of 18

SECTION 08200 - DOORS AND IROMANGARY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Generally:
a. Provide fire-rated and non-fire-rated door-sets, including hardware, finishes and
accessories.
b. Where doors are inserted into walls which are required to be fire-rated, acoustic-
rated, smoke or air sealed, the doors shall match the rating of the adjacent work.
2. Related documentation:
a. Read this Trade Section in conjunction with the EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS
Section.
b. Refer to:
• DRAWINGS for locations and extent.
• MATERIALS / PRODUCTS SCHEDULE for finishes selections.
• DOOR SCHEDULE.
• IRONMONGERY/HARDWARE SCHEDULE.
• FIRE ENGINEERING REPORT, if applicable.
• ACOUSTIC REPORT, if applicable. Where there is a discrepancy between
related documents, if any, the ACOUSTIC REPORT shall prevail.
3. Related trades:
a. Coordinate the work of this trade with the base-structure, services and adjacent work.
b. Coordinate with:
• Section 09900 - PAINTING for on-site painting of doors and door-frames.
• Section 10400 - SIGNAGE for door signage.
• Section 16100 - ELECTRICAL SERVICES for power and control wiring for
electric, electro-magnetic and electronic strikes, locks, detectors, controllers and
similar devices.
• Section 16500 - SECURITY SERVICES for supply of security equipment to be
installed by this trade, and fixings and templates for required cut-outs.
c. Other trades shall supply and install door hardware, locks, cylinders and keys, if
required, and coordinate master-keying in accordance with the technical
requirements of this Trade Section.
4. Principal's master-key system:
a. Coordinate directly with the Principal with regard to master-key requirements.
b. Design and develop a complete approved master-key system in accordance with
Principal's policy requirements, with regard to future expansion.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. Generally:
a. Comply with the current edition of all relevant Standards to include:
• STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI A250.3 (1999) Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory
Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel
Doors and Frames
ANSI A250.4 (1994) Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for
Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware
Reinforcings
ANSI A250.6 (1997) Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement
- Application)
ANSI A250.8 (1998) SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard
Steel Doors and Frames
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 591 (1998) Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light
Coating Mass Applications
ASTM A 653/A 653M (2000) Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process
ASTM A 924/A 924M (1999) General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM C 578 (1995) Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 591 (1994) Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 612 (1993) Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
ASTM D 2863 (1997) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to
Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics
(Oxygen Index)
ASTM E 283 (1991) Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen
DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI)
DHI A115 (1991) Steel Door Preparation Standards (Consisting of

A115.1 through A115.6 and A115.12 through
A115.18)
HOLLOW METAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (HMMA)
NAAMM HMMA HMM (1992) Hollow Metal Manual
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 80 (1999) Fire Doors and Fire Windows
NFPA 105 (1999) The Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies
NFPA 252 (1999) Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDOI)
SDI 105 (1998) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel
Frames
SDI 111-B Recommended Standard Details for Dutch Doors

SDI 111-C Recommended Louver Details for Standard Steel
Doors

SDI 111-F Recommended Existing Wall Anchors for Standard

Steel Doors and Frames
SDI 113 (1979) Apparent Thermal Performance of STEEL DOOR
and FRAME ASSEMBLIES
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 10B (1997) Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
HARDWARE
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM E 283 (1991) Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen
ASTM F 883 (1990) Padlocks
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)
BHMA A156.1 (1997) Butts and Hinges (BHMA 101)
BHMA A156.2 (1996) Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches
(BHMA 601)
BHMA A156.3 (1994) Exit Devices (BHMA 701)
BHMA A156.4 (1992) Door Controls - Closers (BHMA 301)
BHMA A156.5 (1992) Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products (BHMA 501)
BHMA A156.6 (1994) Architectural Door Trim (BHMA 1001)
BHMA A156.7 (1988) Template Hinge Dimensions
BHMA A156.8 (1994) Door Controls - Overhead Holders (BHMA 311)
BHMA A156.12 (1992) Interconnected Locks & Latches (BHMA 611)
BHMA A156.13 (1994) Mortise Locks & Latches (BHMA 621)
BHMA A156.15 (1995) Closer Holder Release Devices
BHMA A156.16 (1997) Auxiliary Hardware
BHMA A156.17 (1993) Self Closing Hinges & Pivots
BHMA A156.18 (1993) Materials and Finishes (BHMA 1301)
BHMA A156.21 (1996) Thresholds
BHMA A156.22 (1996) Door Gasketing Systems
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 80 (1999) Fire Doors and Fire Windows
NFPA 101 (1997) Life Safety Code
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDOI)
SDI 100 (1991) Standard Steel Doors and Frames
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL Bld Mat Dir (1999) Building Materials Directory
UL 14C (1999) Swinging Hardware for Standard Tin-Clad Fire
Doors Mounted Singly and in Pairs
2. Authorities and legislation:
a. Fire-resistant construction shall be tested and certified by a registered testing

laboratory. Submit certification and test reports, if directed.

1.3 QUALITY
1. Inspections : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
a. Give sufficient notice so the Engineer may inspect significant stages of work,
including:
• Door-frames in place before building-in, to verify location and swing of door.
• Door-frames installed before fixing trim.
2. Samples : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
a. Include samples for:
• Door hardware and accessories.
• Door construction including core, edge trim, surface preparation and finish.
• Door-frame construction including profiles, joints, welds, hinges, reinforcement
and finish.
3. First completed example:
a. Submit the first completed example of each type of installed work and finish to
establish the required standard before proceeding with the remainder of work.
4. Inspection and Test Plan : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
a. Hold points shall include:
• Submission of manufacturer’s door / hardware schedule indicating all
hardware selections.
• First completed example of installed work on-site.
5. Technical Support:
a. The hardware supplier shall offer full technical support and shall have suitably
qualified staff able to prepare/amend proper ironmongery schedules and
advise on technical matters including Master Key systems and problems of
Specification, Installation, and Operation
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
1. Product Information : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
a. Include Product Information for:
• Door hardware, furniture and accessories.
• Doors and door-frames, materials, construction details and finishes.
• Door-frame accessories.
• Lockset test reports in accordance with the relevant Standards.
• Air-tight construction.
• Acoustic test results and certificates.
• Fire test results and certificates.
2. Shop drawings : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
a. Submit manufacturer's door / hardware schedule indicating all product
selections for:
• Doors.
• Door-frames.
• Door hardware.
b. Include shop drawings for:
• Air-tight construction.
• Metal faced doors.
• Anchorages and fixings.

• Rebates, cut-outs and boxes for hinges, hardware and security devices.

• Door construction indicating core, edge trim, surface preparation and finish.
• Door-frame construction indicating profiles, corners, welding and
reinforcement.

1. Generally : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
2. Identification of doors:
a. Doors and door-frames shall be identified and labelled to match the Door
Schedule.
b. Fire door-sets shall be fitted with identification plates in accordance with the
relevant Standards, verifying compliance of manufacture and installation, and
stating fire-resistance rating.
c. Plates shall be installed on the hinge edge of doors, in a position concealed
when the door is closed and clearly visible when the door is open.
3. Packaged products:
a. Deliver and store proprietary packaged products in the manufacturer's original
and unopened packages and containers with labels intact and legible, including
installation instructions, templates and detailed delivery dockets.
b. Packaging of hardware shall be (in):
• Complete individual sets for each door.
• Separate dust and moisture proof packages.
• Clearly labelled to show intended locations.
• Complete with required fixings.

1. Spare parts:
a. Supply spare parts and materials (spares) for ongoing maintenance and
replacement, and submit a detailed list of spare parts and replacement
instructions before Practical Completion.
b. Spare parts shall include:
• Typical door furniture, locks and cylinders: 2% of each type.
1.7 WARRANTIES
1. Generally:
a. Unless otherwise indicated provide an approved warranty from Practical
Completion for a warranty period of 5-years.
2. Warranty conditions for timber products and assemblies
3. Warranty conditions for door hardware:
following:
• Correct selection for required location performance.
• Correct functioning of moving parts.
• Structural adequacy.
• Chipping, fading, excessive wear or delamination or other deterioration of
finishes.
• Fixings and connections including stripped threads and damaged heads.

• Integrity of seals.

•Sagging, slackness or looseness of knobs and handles due to wear,

relaxation of springs, stripped threads, or any other cause.
4. Long term supply of spare parts:
a. Lead times:
The warranty shall include an undertaking from the manufacturer or supplier that
spare parts and replacement items will be available for sale off-the-shelf, or with a
lead time not exceeding four weeks from date of order, for a period not less than
the warranty period.
b. Price control:
Submit with the warranty a current retail price list properly identified and dated.
c. The warranty shall include an undertaking with respect to price control for the
following items:
• Replacement keys.
• Replacement cylinders.

1. Loads : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
2. Wind loads : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
3. Internal air pressure loads : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
4. Movements : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
5. Connections : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
6. Fire-resistant construction : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
7. Smoke isolation
a. Provide durable seals, rebates and door controllers as required.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, smoke seals to doors shall be rated at 200 C-
degrees for 30 minutes.
8. Fire fail mode for mechanical / electrical operators to doors : as per GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS
9. Corrosion : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
10. Dimensional stability:
a. The installed work shall have adequate dimensional stability for the ambient
installed conditions, and shall not expand, shrink, warp or change shape in a
manner which will detract from appearance, performance and durability of the
work, or damage adjacent or applied work.
b. Doors and panels shall not warp more than +/- 2 mm over any plane.
11. Weather protection : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
12. Air leakage / infiltration:
a. Doors and door-frames to plantrooms, air-tight spaces or spaces requiring
positive or negative air-pressure differential shall be air-tight.
b. Provide continuous air-tight seals to door-frame rebates, and bottom edge of

door.
c. Provide air-tight backing boxes to door-frame cut-outs and penetrations.
d. Submit details of seals and air-tight construction.
13. Service conditions and frequency of use : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
14. Moving parts and components : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
15. Acoustics : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
16. Services reticulation : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

17. Doors subject to uncontrolled closing : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
18. Back-balancing of surface finishes : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
19. Fabrication tolerances : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

20. Installation tolerances : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.9 TESTING
1. Door testing:
a. The Engineer may direct destructive testing of samples of each door type to
verify internal construction.
b. Doors for testing may be selected by Engineer at random from doors delivered to
site. Following selection, cut door into quarters for immediate examination.
c. If more than two doors fail, or more than one-third the doors tested fail, then all
doors of that type may be rejected, at the Engineer’s sole discretion.
d. The frequency or rate of testing shall be not less than:
• Door construction (One per 200 doors supplied, but not less than one).
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUSH PANEL DOORS

2. Edges:
a. Include hardwood edge-strips to all edges of external and wet area doors, and
to vertical edges (stiles) of internal doors. Include hardwood edge-strips to all
sides of openings in doors.
b. Thickness of edge-strips shall be not less than 9 mm generally and not less
than 18 mm for rebated edge-strips.
c. For sliding doors, include top edge-strips with additional depth for sliding track
rebates.
d. Include grooves and rebates for seals and accessories.
e. Where indicated or required, under-cut bottom edge of doors to enable
required air flow, or make openings for louvres, and receive and install louvres
from MECHANICAL SERVICES.
f. For double doors, chamfer edges to prevent binding. Match profile of rebates to
required rebated hardware.
3. Door finish:
a. Factory sealing and priming shall be compatible with proposed site painting
systems. Coordinate with PAINTING Section for site applied painting.
b. Site painted:
• Doors to be site painted shall be sheeted in paint-grade primed hardboard.
• Doors to be site painted, shall be factory sealed and primed after
fabrication to all surfaces including top and bottom edges.
c. Clear finished:
• Doors to be clear finished on site shall be sheeted in select grade veneer

plywood and fine belt sanded to all surfaces including top and bottom
edges.
• For doors to be clear finished, shall be factory sealed after fabrication to all
surfaces including top and bottom edges.
d. Polyurethane finished:
• Doors to be polyurethane finished on site shall be paint-grade hardboard.

• For doors to be polyurethane finished, provide two coats of polyurethane at

the factory after fabrication, and touch-up on-site after installation.
2.2 FIRE DOOR SETS :
as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS and DOOR SCHEDULES
2.3 STEEL DOOR-FRAMES

2. Provision for hardware:
a. Make provision during factory fabrication for later fixing of required hardware
and accessories, as appropriate. Comply with hardware Product Information
and set-out templates.
b. Comply with fire test results for fire door-sets.
c. There shall be no on-site modification of steel door-frames unless approved
before commencing.
d. Include all required cut-outs, fixing connections, mortar guards and reinforcement
for the required hardware.
e. Reinforcement and stiffeners for hinges and hardware shall be not less than 4
mm steel sheet welded to door-frames.
f. Hinges shall be recessed into door-frames and screw fixed.
g. Hinge reinforcement shall be drilled and tapped to receive hinge screws with
mortar guards for screw holes.
3. Steel door-frame finish:
a. Steel for door-frames shall be Zincanneal coated steel sheet, coating class not
less than Class AZ150, and shall be protective coated at the factory after
fabrication in accordance with Product Information and relevant Standards.
b. Unless otherwise approved, protective coatings shall be:
• External applications: Inorganic zinc silicate. Dry film thickness not less than
75 microns.
• Internal applications: Two pack epoxy zinc phosphate. Dry film thickness not
less than 50 microns.
• Increase coating thickness by 50% to welded areas.
2.4 TIMBER DOOR-FRAMES

2. Provision for hardware:
a. Make provision during factory fabrication for later fixing of required hardware and
accessories, as appropriate. Comply with hardware Product Information and set-
out templates.
b. Include all required cut-outs, fixing connections, for the required hardware.
c. Hinges shall be recessed into door-frames and screw fixed.
3. Timber door-frame finish:

a. All timber for timber door-frames shall be ‘select-grade’ to match Control
Samples.

b. Factory sealing and priming shall be compatible with proposed site painting
systems. Coordinate with PAINTING Section for site applied painting.
c. Site painted:
• For door-frames to be site painted, apply first coat of suitable primer at the
factory after fabrication.
d. Clear finished:
• For door-frames to be clear finished, apply first coat of suitable sealer at the
factory after fabrication.

1. Generally:
a. Door hardware and furniture shall be approved types, suitable for the location
and the intended function of the doors, in accordance with the Product
b. Submit Product Information, and Control Samples if directed.
c. Verify correct handing of items before commencing.
d. Include fixings, striker plates, shims and escutcheons for a complete installation,
whether indicated or not.
e. Unless otherwise indicated, door hardware shall enable escape from the inside
of the room or area contained by the door hardware.
2. Door furniture:
a. Door furniture shall be suitable for use with the lock or latch to which it is
installed.
b. Lever handles shall be as per the EUROLEVER lever handle ref. SS35236 or
similar approved complete with H.T. spindle.
c. Include key-ways, key-hole plates, snib, turn-buttons, cut-outs, roses, plates
and escutcheons required by the lock or latch type, for a complete installation,
whether indicated or not.
d. Roses shall be 50mm dia. 10mm thick with polished edges and should be
capable of being rigidly conceal-fixed to the door using screws
e. Unless the door furniture is indicated separately for each side of the door,
supply furniture as a paired set for both sides of the door.
f. Furniture fixings on the outside face of doors shall be concealed by fixing
through the door from inside or by other appropriate methods. Plastic
concealed fixings are not acceptable.
3. Materials
a. Unless otherwise indicated, door hardware shall be manufactured from cast,
forged or machined brass with electroplated finish or stainless steel, including
corrosion-resistant components, in accordance with the relevant Standards.
4. Finishes:
a. Unless otherwise indicated, electro-plated coating thickness shall be in
2.6 CLOSERS AND CONTROLLERS

1. Generally:
a. Door closers and controllers shall be approved types, suitable for the location
and the intended function of the doors, including size and weight of the door,
door swings and wind pressure, in accordance with the Product Information
b. Unless otherwise indicated closers and controllers shall have plain rectilinear
bodies in satin stainless finish identical to the other door ironmongery items.

Grey coloured door closer covers are not acceptable. Arms shall be suitably
rustproofed and have a similar satin stainless steel finish.
c. All closers are to meet EN1154a and be fire rated
d. Unless otherwise specified and approved closers shall be EUROLEVER
XX501
e. Submit Product Information, and Control Samples if directed.
f. Unless otherwise approved door closers shall be concealed and fully
adjustable hydraulic check types incorporating:
• Fully adjustable closing speed between 2 and 30 seconds. Where delayed
closing is specified the door, when opened to an angle of 90 degrees or
more, shall stand motionless for a period adjustable up to 60 seconds
before closing
• Opening and closing from any angle up to 180 degrees with the check
adjustable to operate from any angle between 135 degrees and closed
• A ten year guarantee for use in local ambient conditions including positions
of extreme exposure
• Closing speed, latching speed, and back-check shall be controlled by
separate concealed key operated valves.
g. Include fixings, templates, adjusting tools and accessories required for a

complete installation.
h. Include manual hold-open device to closers where indicated.
i. Include electromagnetic hold open devices to smoke doors and fire doors where
indicated or required.
j. Include floor or head spring pivot operators where indicated.
k. Inadequate spring strength or failure of closer to return door to the closed
position may be grounds for rejection.
2. Surface mounting:
a. Unless otherwise indicated, closers for fire doors shall be surface mounted.
b. Surface mounted closers shall have regular or parallel type arms as indicated.
c.
Where practicable, surface mounted closers shall be concealed from view by
mounting inside rooms, stair wells, cupboards and the like. Do not fix closers to
the visible side of public corridors, foyers or the like.
3. Floor mounting:
a. Floor mounted closers shall be of one type suitable for both single and double
action and for both wood and metal doors with the use of compatible fittings
b. Main boxes shall be reinforced and galvanised and allow mechanical adjustment
vertically, longitudinally, and transversely after installation.
c. Cover plates shall have concealed fixings and shall be finished to match all other
door ironmongery
2.7 LOCKS AND LATCHES

1. Locks and latches shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the intended
function in accordance with the relevant Standards.
3. All latch-sets and locksets shall be EUROLEVER SS1.6, SS2.6 and SS4.6, unless
otherwise indicated and approved.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, locksets and latch-sets shall be mortise type.
5. All locks to be supplied to DIN sizes and have a 60mm backset

6. Mortise locks and latches shall be certified as conforming to DIN class 3. DIN class 1
and DIN class 2 locks are not acceptable
7. Locks and latches shall be contained in rigid, durable enclosures. External
components, enclosures and strikes shall be solid brass or stainless steel.
8. Deadbolts shall incorporate anti-sawing 16mmthick hardened steel rollers
9. For use with lever handles latches will incorporate special springing to overcome
lever droop. Sprung levers will not be accepted due to potential for damage and
corrosion
10. Locks and latches shall be capable of full reversal of hand without opening the case.
11. Suitable forends, strike plates and components are required for rebated meeting
stiles and shall be of non-corrosive materials to match the handles. Forends are to be
24mm in width
12. Working parts shall be accurately fitted to close tolerances, free from rattle or
excessive slack, factory lubricated, and free from manufacturing flaws and defects.
13. Locks shall be ‘balanced-hub’ construction.
14. Use only proprietary strike plates nominated for the required locks or latches.
15. Springs and other moving parts not fabricated from brass shall be corrosion-resistant
steel alloy or stainless steel.
16. Provide ‘back-boxes’ to all lock strikes.
17. Flush bolts shall be provided at top and bottom of non-active leaves of double doors
and shall be 225mm long with a dovetailed return and a minimum throw of 25mm
a. Bolts generally shall have minimum throw of:
• Latch-bolts: 14 mm.
• Dead-bolts: 19 mm.
18. Boat type bolt sockets or keeps shall be provided generally but at external or dirty
locations the keep shall be the spring loaded dirt excluding type
2.8 KEYING AND CYLINDERS

1. Cylinders and keys:
a. Unless otherwise specified and approved cylinders shall be EUROLEVER SC11M

& SC10M
b. Cylinders shall be 6 pin, 71mm in length with practically infinite differs.
c. Cylinders shall be finished to match handles and trim and shall be easily removable
without removing the trim with the door open. With the door closed the cylinders
shall not be removable.
d. The cylinder shall have Para centric keyways and TG pins to prevent picking and
hardened steel drives, pins and body insert to overcome drilling.
e.
f. 3 Keys per cylinder are required and unless otherwise stated locks shall be master
keyed to the engineers requirement
2. Key numbering and tagging:
a. Cylinders and keys shall be code stamped with an identification number in an
approved location.
b. Verify identification numbers with the Principal before stamping.
c. Each key shall be attached to an approved plastic key tag by a metal split ring,
properly labelled with the final room name or number.
3. Key cabinet:
a. Provide an approved proprietary lockable key cabinet with adequate
compartments, pockets or hooks to accommodate all required keys.
b. Verify installed location of key cabinet before commencing.

2.9 CONSTRUCTION KEYING

1. Provide a temporary construction keying system with large suites of keyed alike
cylinders to secure particular areas before the installation of permanent master-keyed
cylinders.
2. Construction keying shall be removed before Date of Practical Completion, or when
directed.
3. When required, replace all construction cylinders with new cylinders which comply with
the Principal's master-key system, and which exclude the construction keys.
2.10 HINGES
1. Generally:
a. Hinges and screws shall be suitable approved types and sizes.
b. Unless otherwise specified and approved hinges shall be EUROLEVER SS5 to
match other door ironmongery items
c. Submit Product Information, and Control Samples if directed.
d. Coordinate with door-frame manufacturer for correct location of hinge recesses and
screw holes.
e. Unless otherwise indicated, hinges shall be:
• Five-knuckle type, fixed pins unless otherwise indicated or required as loose
pins.
• Full mortise hinges with a hole in the bottom tip for pin removal.
• Ball-bearing type for doors with closers with flush bearings and button tips.
• Lift-off type where required by the relevant Standards for emergency access.
f. Tips shall be button type with positive non-rising pins.
2. Hinge provision:
a. Provide two hinges per door unless otherwise required by a fire test report, or as
follows:
• Doors over 2040 mm high: 3 hinges per leaf.
• Doors over 920 mm wide: 3 hinges per leaf.
• External doors: 3 hinges per leaf.
• Acoustic rated doors: Refer ACOUSTIC REPORT.
• Fire-rated doors: 3 hinges per leaf.
3. Hinge sizes for timber doors:
a. Unless otherwise indicated or required, hinges for timber doors shall be not less
than:
Door width: Door thickness Door weight: Hinge size:

820 mm 30 mm 16 kg 70 x 40 x 1.6 mm
900 mm 35 mm 20 kg 85 x 60 x 1.6 mm
900 mm 40 mm 30 kg 100 x 75 x 1.6 mm
1000 mm 45 mm 50 kg 100 x 75 x 1.6 mm
1200 mm 45 mm 70 kg 100 x 75 x 3.2 mm
1300 mm 45 mm 80 kg 125 x 100 x 3.2 mm

b. Where brass hinges are used for door leafs exceeding 30 kg or door leafs
controlled by door closers, include bronze or stainless steel washers to each
knuckle joint.
4. Screws:
a. Unless otherwise required, screws for hanging timber doors shall be countersunk
head screws of gauge and size as required, and finished to match hinges.
b. Provide metal threaded screws into metal frames.
5. Painting of hinges:
a. Steel hinges shall be site painted in the system applicable to the door.
Coordinate with PAINTING Section.
b. Stainless steel, brass and aluminium hinges shall be not painted.
6. Security:
a. Unless otherwise indicated, all hinges shall be fixed pin types.
2.11 SLIDING DOOR TRACKS

1. Generally:
a. Sliding door tracks shall be approved proprietary assemblies, suitable for the
b. Overhead tracks and wheel carriages shall be selected to match the size and
weight of the doors.
c. Wheel carriages shall be fully adjustable precision ball race types to ensure quiet
operation.
d. Include overhead track supports, head and jamb linings and removable pelmets
for maintenance access to the wheel carriages.
2. Accessories:
a. Include buffer type stops to limit the travel of the sliding doors.
b. Include adjustable nylon floor guides to suit grooved or ungrooved doors, as

applicable.
2.12 ACCESSORIES
1. Provide appropriate accessories including buffers, strike plates, mortar guards,
switch boxes, fixing ties or brackets, and cavity flashings for a complete assembly.
2. Mortar guards shall accommodate the full extension of the lock bolt and the correct
operation of the locking mechanism.
3. Make grooves and rebates for seals and accessories.
4. Include rubber stops to door-frames on the closing side of single door-frames and
heads of double door-frames to reduce slamming impact.
5. Include mortar-proof universal block-out boxes with knock-out caps top and bottom
for switches and mortise strikes welded to door-frames.
6. Include temporary spreaders or spacer-bars to door-frames to prevent distortion
during building-in, screw fixed to each jamb for easy removal. After removal, rectify
frames and finishes to remove any visible damage.

2.13 DOOR SEALS

1. Door seals, including weather bars, smoke seals, acoustic seals and air seals, shall
be suitable for the location and the intended function in accordance with the Product
Information.
2. Include fixings, rebates, grooves, and clearances for correct installation and
operation of seals.
3. Coordinate with the door-frame manufacturer for required rebates to door-frames.
2.14 DOOR STOPS

1. Unless otherwise specified or approved all doorstops shall be round in shape and
37mm dia. all as per the EUROLEVER SS27R
2. Provide door stops to limit door swing where indicated or required to prevent damage
to adjacent work by uncontrolled door opening.
3. Verify floor or wall mounting locations before installation where not indicated. Do not
mount door stops to un-reinforced lightweight walls.
4. For non-fire-rated doors, stops are not required for doors with closers. Where stops
for non-fire-rated doors are not practicable, provide overhead stays to control door
swing.

1. Provide flashings to external doors where indicated or required to prevent or divert
the entry of water, weather and vermin to the inside of the building.
2. Submit details of proposed door flashings before commencing.
3. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, flashing materials shall be:
a. Zincalume steel, powder coated: Not less than 0.8 mm. Where required to match
colour of adjacent work.
b. Stainless steel, Grade 316, not less than 0.8 mm. Where indicated or in
4. Flashings shall be fabricated to required profiles in longest practicable lengths. Lap
and seal flashings at junctions and corners.
2.16 AIR-TIGHT CONSTRUCTION

1. Provide air-tight construction where indicated or required. Include seals to door and
other openings, around services penetrations, and at junctions with adjacent work.
2. Air-tight construction may include baffles, sealants, compressible air seals and tapes.
3. Verify air-tight construction details on shop drawings.
2.17 APPLIED FACING TO DOORS

2. Kick-plates:
a. Provide applied kick-plates to doors where indicated, and as follows:
•Internal doors in corridors and work areas: One or both sides as indicated, 600
mm high, 1.2 mm thickness stainless steel sheeting, Grade 316, without edge
protection.
3. Full height facings:
a. Provide applied full height facings to doors where indicated, and as follows:

•
External doors where break-in resistance and severe weather protection is
required: Fully faced both sides with 1.0 mm thickness Zincanneal sheeting
suitable for painting, without edge protection.
4. Edge details:
a. Provide edge details as follows:
Friction-fitted, removable edge caps:
• Fabricate removable edge caps in same material as front surfaces.
• Provide edge caps to all four edges.
• Cap edge shall be nominal 25 mm width.
• Leave 5 mm clear gap around perimeter of front surface facing to enable site
adjustment.
3.0 EXECUTION

3.2 DOOR-FRAME INSTALLATION

1. Generally:
a. Install door-frames in correct locations, alignments and tolerances with approved
anchorage types and locations.
b. Use corrosion-resistant anchorages, and include bracing to maintain door-frames
in position until building-in or grouting is complete.
c. Re-check set-out dimensions immediately before final fixing.
d. Use methods so that base-structure loads and movements are not transferred to
the door-frame.
e. Set-out door-frames to existing openings in concrete and masonry walls with
nominal 10 mm clearance between door-frame and adjacent opening reveals.
2. Condition of walls:
a. Install door-frames progressively when walls are stable and adequate to support
door-frame loads.
b. Coordinate with CONCRETE, MASONRY and DRY-WALL / PLASTERBOARD as
appropriate.
c. Coordinate with TILING / RESILIENT MATERIALS and CARPET Sections as
appropriate.
d. Do not remove spreaders until door-frames are securely anchored to walls and
masonry mortar has cured not less than seven days.
e. Do not install door-frames until wall framing has been adequately supported and
braced laterally and in the plane of the wall.
f. Drill holes for door-frame anchorages not less than two days after grout has set. Do
not damage door-frames.
3. Grouting:
a. Grout door-frames to concrete and masonry openings as follows:
• Fill cavities with grout progressively as work rises where practicable.
• Face of grout shall be 10 mm back from face of door-frame, unless otherwise
indicated.
• Grout shall be as dry as practicable to enable complete filling of voids behind

door-frames.
• Tool exposed grout surfaces square and smooth.

b. After stripping of grout stops, fill and repair voids, honeycombing and rough
areas. Clean any grout leakage, and repair damage to priming as required.
c. Fit grout stops full height to both sides of each jamb, fitted tight to door-frame and
scribed to adjacent wall face to prevent grout leakage. Hold stops securely in
place during grouting and curing.
3.3 DOOR INSTALLATION

1. Generally:
a. Install doors in accordance with Product Information and relevant Standards, and
fire doors in accordance with fire test results.
b. Examine door-frames and verify correct position and installation before hanging
corresponding doors.
c. Discard doors not in compliance with relevant Standards and doors with
deflection or twisting exceeding +/- 2 mm over the door surface.
d. Condition doors to average humidity in installation areas before hanging.
2. Fitting and clearances:
a. Fit doors to door-frames with uniform clearance at each edge and machine as
required for hardware. Seal cut surfaces, including door tops and bottoms, after
machining and fitting. Edges of doors shall be lightly chamfered to prevent
contact with jambs.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, clearance after painting shall be 2 mm at jambs and
heads, 2 mm at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 5 mm from bottom of door
to top of floor finish or threshold.
c. Install flashings, weathering and sealing to external doors as required.
3.4 HARDWARE INSTALLATION

1. Install door hardware in accordance with Product Information and relevant Standards,
and the intended function of door.
2. Delay installation of hardware until completion of site painting where practicable,
otherwise remove exposed hardware, store and re-fix after completion of site
painting.
3. Install hardware with the correct fixings, selected for length, finish and type of
substrate.
4. Ensure finish of exposed fixings matches finish of hardware.
5. Unless otherwise indicated, install hardware and fixings, including butt hinges,
recessed and flush where practicable.
6. Locate exposed fixings to furniture on the inside faces of external doors or doors of
lockable rooms.
3.5 HAND-OVER OF KEYS

1. Generally:
a. Unless otherwise directed, arrange for direct handover of all keys, in person, by
an authorised representative of the key manufacturer to an authorised
representative of the Principal, by formal arrangement. Submit details of
respective personnel, date and place of handover.

b. Arrange for the lock manufacturer to submit direct to the Principal, a record of the
master-keying system indicating each lock type, type of key supplied, and key
number for re-ordering.
c. Arrange for hand over keys progressively on a floor-by-floor or area-by-area basis.

2. Use of master-keys:
a. Do not use any key under the master-key system and immediately return any such
keys which come into the possession of the Contractor direct to the Principal.

1. Cleaning : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
2. Protection : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
3. Adjacent work : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
4. Completion : as per GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

5. Doors:
a. After installation of door-frames, protect from damage during remainder of
construction period. Remove protection immediately before doors are installed, and
make-good if required.
b. Ease doors to ensure free and unrestricted operation. Re-hang or replace doors
which do not swing or operate freely.
c. Adjust and clean hinges, locks, bolts and hardware and verify proper operation.
d. Protect installed hardware against damage until Practical Completion.
e. Lubricate only if required by Product Information.
f. Repair finishes or replace doors damaged during installation with identical new
doors.

1. User’s Manual:
a. Submit a User’s Manual for the work of this trade with records and details of
materials used and sources of supply, cleaning and repair procedures.
2. Logbook:
a. Maintain a log book of the installation of fire door-sets in accordance with relevant
Standards.
b. Log book shall be available for inspection at all times during installation. Submit
logbook at the completion of installation.

Architectural Specs PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Architectural Specs PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

2B+G+1+30 Residential Building on Plot No.

61070244 Dafnah District, Doha, Qatar

SECTION 05100 - ALUMINUM METAL WORKS

1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................... 2

1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................. 2

2.0 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................ 8

2.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................... 8

3.0 EXECUTION ............................................................................................... 10

3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................... 10

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 1 of 14

SECTION 05100 - ALUMINUM METAL WORKS

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTATION:

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 2 of 14

BS4229 Metric sizes of non-ferrous and ferrous bars, Part 2: ferrous

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 3 of 14

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 4 of 14

3. First completed example: First completed examples shall include typical

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 5 of 14

a. Submit computations to demonstrate structural sufficiency, safety and

1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 6 of 14

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 7 of 14

• Equivalent tests as per B.S., DIN, or other international standards shall

1.8 PRICES INTEGRITY:

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 8 of 14

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 9 of 14

2.2 SURFACE TREATMENT

3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 10 of 14

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 11 of 14

3.3 METAL WORK INSTALLATION

3.4 POWDER COATING

1. Be responsible for the fabrication/coating of the powder coated objects

2. THE POWDER COATING

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 12 of 14

3. Laboratory test data

a. Sample off-cuts of the coated object (aluminum extrusion or

Description Norm Requirements

Colour assessment Visual Match to colour standard panel.

Gloss EN ISO 2813 (60°) As per specification in the

Film thickness EN ISO 2360 Minimum 60 micron.

Adhesion EN ISO 2409 (2 mm) Passes cross-cut rating Gt0

Film hardness EN ISO 2815 Passes indentation resistance

MEK cure test N/A Minor attack on the coating after

Salt spray resistance ASTM B 117 No blistering. Maximum 1 mm

Resistance to humid DIN 50017 No blistering. Maximum 1 mm

b. Sample panels 0.8 mm (AA 5005 H24 or H14) coated at the

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 13 of 14

Description Norm Requirements

Colour assessment Visual Match to colour standard panel

Gloss EN ISO 2813 (60°) As per specifications in the

Film thickness EN ISO 2360 60 to 80 micron.

Impact resistance ASTM D 2794 (5/8” Passes 2.5 Nm without

Cupping test (relevant EN ISO 1520 Passes 5 mm cylindrical

Film hardness EN ISO 2815 Passes indentation resistance

5. Actual weathering Test

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

3.6 USER’S MANUAL

SECTION 05100 Aluminum Metal Works Page 14 of 14

SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.